JP7715134B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts the variable display of symbols. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition, and when the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and further comprises predetermined decorative means visible when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and first rotation means configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the gaming board, The stage is configured to be rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis whose axial direction is a direction intersecting the face of the game board, and is provided with a rotating plate portion that can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and the rotating plate portion is provided with a visual recognition portion that is on the back side of the rotating plate portion and that allows at least a part of a predetermined area of a predetermined decorative means that is arranged corresponding to the game board to be visible when viewed from the front of the game board, and when predetermined conditions are satisfied based on a predetermined game by a player, this gaming machine is configured to be able to switch from the predetermined stopped state to the predetermined rotating state, and when the game board is viewed from the front, In this case, the second rotating means, which is movable along the surface of the game board and rotatable in a predetermined manner, is configured to be movable between a first position where it is visible at least without passing through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion, and a second position where it is visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion, and in a predetermined game execution state, the first state is where at least a part of the predetermined decorative means is visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion which is in a predetermined rotation state, and by the second rotating means moving to the second position, a predetermined area of the second rotating means becomes visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion, and at least a part of the predetermined decorative means is visible. and a second state in which the area blocked by the second rotating means becomes invisible, the first rotating means has an abutment portion that can abut against the second rotating means, and the first rotating means in a predetermined stopped state is configured to be able to be pushed by the abutment portion of the first rotating means abutting against the second rotating means, and the second state is configured to be able to generate a specific state that the player can recognize as advantageous and a predetermined state that the player can recognize as disadvantageous compared to the specific state, based on the rotation status of the first rotating means and the movement status of the second rotating means.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; Front view of the game board FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen of a pattern display device. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning/losing table that stores the random number values that result in a jackpot. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for types of jackpots. Flowchart of timer interrupt processing A flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. A flowchart showing normal processing A flowchart showing the main processing A flowchart showing the game number control process FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening a large prize opening; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the open/close execution mode is ended. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. A diagram showing the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold determination process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. A diagram showing a notice reserved pattern, a normal reserved pattern, and a special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; A diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port according to the reference form M of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area before the occurrence of the pre-reading effect after advance reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when notice-reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserve area after a pre-reading effect occurs. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when no pre-reading performance is occurring. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs according to a reference embodiment N of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when notice-reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserve area after a pre-reading effect occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance pattern according to a reference embodiment O of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area after advance notice reserved information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserved area and after a pre-reading effect occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port according to the reference embodiment P of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area during the occurrence of a pre-reading effect after advance reserved information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserved area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area and a reach display occurs before the advance notice reservation information is executed. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process according to the reference form Q of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance for ending a game. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area during the occurrence of a pre-reading effect after advance reserved information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserved area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area and a reach display occurs before the advance notice reservation information is executed. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a reservation generation process according to the reference embodiment R of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur at the start of a game; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining the consumption of a pre-read effect at the start of a game; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance for ending a game. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs at the end of a game. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process; FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the audio/light emission control device according to the reference form S of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; Figure showing the operation notice part of the notice display A diagram showing the preview result notification part of the preview display A diagram showing the timing for displaying a warning FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device after the occurrence of the reach display and a timing chart of the advance notice display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation advance notice part of the advance notice display according to the reference embodiment T of the present invention. A diagram showing the preview result notification part of the preview display A diagram showing the timing for displaying a warning FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device after the occurrence of the reach display and a timing chart of the advance notice display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process according to the reference embodiment U of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device after the occurrence of the reach display and a timing chart of the advance notice display. FIG. 10 is a front view of a game board according to the reference form V of the present invention. Front view and cross section of the upper rotating device Exploded perspective view of the upper rotating device A front view and a cross-sectional view of the upper rotating device showing the inner and outer rings extended to the front side. Front and side views of the right-bottom rotating device Front and side views of the bottom left rotating device A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. A diagram showing the state in which the upper role performance is being performed A diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the lower role performance A front view showing the state in which the lower role performance is being performed Right side view showing the state in which the lower role performance is being performed A figure showing the state in which the word "BIG" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A figure showing the state in which the word "small" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A diagram showing the state in which the rainbow-colored letters "BIG" are notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A diagram showing the state in which the rainbow-colored character "small" is notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment W of the present invention; Front view and cross section of the upper rotating device Front and side views of the right-bottom rotating device Front and side views of the bottom left rotating device A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. A diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the upper role performance A diagram showing the state in which the upper role performance is being performed A diagram showing the state in which the upper role performance is being performed with special lighting A diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the lower role performance A front view showing the state in which the lower role performance is being performed A diagram showing the state when the rotation of the upper rotating device has stopped A figure showing the state in which the word "BIG" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A figure showing the state in which the word "small" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A diagram showing the state in which the rainbow-colored letters "BIG" are notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A diagram showing the state in which the rainbow-colored character "small" is notified to the player as a result of the lower role effect. A diagram showing the state in which the lower role performance is being performed on a special route A diagram showing the state in which the lower role performance is further executed on a special route 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference form X of the present invention; Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flowchart of timer interrupt processing A flowchart showing the winning process for the special power outlet. A flowchart showing normal processing A flowchart showing a game number control process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening a large prize opening; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the ceiling time reduction transition process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the open/close execution mode is ended. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for the special telephone award device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the special telephone winning device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the special power opening/closing execution mode ends. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for supporting electric power A flowchart showing the electric device data setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the power fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of ending the power fluctuation FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an external signal output process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the special power operating port, and the special power winning device before the occurrence of the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the special power operation port, and the special power winning device after the occurrence of the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the special power operation port, and the special power winning device after the end of the "ceiling time reduction" game state. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the special electric operation port, and the special electric winning device when a game ball enters the special electric operation port. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the special electric operation port, and the special electric winning device after the game ball has entered the special electric operation port. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the special electric operation port, and the special electric winning device when a game ball enters the V winning port. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device, the special power operating port, and the special power winning device after the special power opening/closing execution mode has ended. Front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention Front view and cross section of the movable prop A diagram showing the movable accessory lowered to the drive position A diagram showing the timing chart of the role patterns for each expectation level Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A flowchart showing normal processing FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening a large prize opening; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the open/close execution mode is ended. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for supporting electric power A flowchart showing the electric device data setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the power fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of ending the power fluctuation A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device. A diagram showing the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold determination process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance command analysis process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the role patterns of each expectation level according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance command analysis process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process;

[Main reference form]
Hereinafter, the main embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a main embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 1 is a type of gaming machine. As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 1, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front (front side) of the outer frame 11.

The gaming machine main body 12 comprises an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable around one of the left and right sides as the support side; a front door frame 121 arranged in front of the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward around one of the left and right sides as the support side; and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable backward around one of the left and right sides as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is equipped with a locking device (not shown) located at its rotating tip. This locking device has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 121 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame. These locked states are released by using an unlocking key to unlock the cylinder lock 13, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

The front door frame 121 has a substantially elliptical window portion 122 that is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 123 that is fitted into the window portion 122. In this embodiment, the window panel 123 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but it may also be made of synthetic resin or the like and be colorless and transparent.
The front door frame 121 also has an indicator lamp section 124 provided above the window section 122, speaker sections 125 provided on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp section 124 and which output sound effects according to the game status, and an upper bulge section 14 and a lower bulge section 15 provided below the window section 122.

The upper bulging portion 14 and the lower bulging portion 15 are arranged side by side one above the other and are both provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulge 14 has an upper tray 141 provided inside with an opening at the top, and a push button 142 that accepts information input when operated by a player. The upper tray 141 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed by a dispensing device 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit and guiding them in a line toward a game ball launching mechanism 49 (see FIG. 4). The push button 142 functions as an operating means that can execute predetermined operation effects, such as an anticipation effect that makes the player hope that the game state will transition to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, based on the player's operation.
The lower bulge 15 also has a lower tray 151 provided on the inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 151 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 141.

Furthermore, the front door frame 121 is equipped with a launch handle 16 serving as a launching means, located to the right of the lower tray 151. This launch handle 16 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 1 to launch game balls from the game ball launching mechanism 49 located below the inner frame toward the play area located above the inner frame. By changing the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, the launch strength of the game balls launched toward the play area, i.e., the momentum of the launch, can be changed.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
2, the game board 2 has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned play area is formed on the game board 2 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. Almost the entire play area can be seen from the front through the window portion 122.
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 23 guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 when the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the top of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit is located on one side of the play area and faces the center of the top of the play area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the play area shifts from the side where the exit of the guide rail 23 is located to the opposite side as the player rotates the launch handle 16 more. In this reference form, the exit of the guide rail 23 is located on the left side of the play area.

The game board 2 has multiple large and small openings in the game area that are formed by router processing to penetrate the game balls in the front-to-back direction. Each opening on the game board 2 has a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry means) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry means) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an outlet 28. The game board 2 also has through gates 31 on the left and right sides of the center, a main display device 32 on the upper right, and a variable display unit 33 in the center. The game board 2 also has various components (gimmicks) in the game area, such as numerous nails (NL) and windmills (WM), planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the direction in which the game balls fall.

Each of the various winning openings, namely the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the variable winning device 27, is equipped with detection sensors 301-304 (see Figure 4) that detect the entry of game balls. These detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the gaming board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is equipped with detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is equipped with detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is equipped with detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 is equipped with detection sensor 304. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. Note that the detection sensors 301-304 may be any type capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls; for example, electromagnetic induction proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls if a ball lands in the general winning opening 24. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls if a ball lands in the upper operating opening 25 and if a ball lands in the lower operating opening 26. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls if a ball lands in the variable winning device 27. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each operating opening 25, 26 may be different.

The outlet 28 is located at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2. Game balls that do not enter any of the various winning holes are discharged from the game area through this outlet 28. The outlet 28 also has a detection sensor 305 (see Figure 4) that detects game balls entering, and this detection sensor 305 is located on the back side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes.

Each through gate 31 is equipped with a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters a through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from a game ball entering the outlet 28, a game ball entering the various winning openings will also be referred to as "winning." Furthermore, a ball entering the through gate 31 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. A ball entering this through gate 31 will also be referred to as "winning," just like a ball entering the various winning openings.

The upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26 are installed on the game board 2 as a unit acting as an actuation port device. Each actuation port 25, 26 opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the play area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. The lower actuation port 26 has an electric device 261 serving as a guide piece (support piece) made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric role device 261 is connected to an electric role device drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This electric role device 261 is driven by the electric role device drive unit 262 to be set in either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state, the upper ends of the electric role device 261 are brought close to each other in the left-right direction, thereby closing the lower operating port 26. In the open state, the upper ends of the electric role device 261 are moved apart in the left-right direction, thereby opening the lower operating port 26.

Here, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is narrower than the width of one game ball. Also, when the electric device 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is wider than the width of one game ball. Therefore, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the lower operating port 26.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the electric device 261 may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state), and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26. Furthermore, the lower actuation port 26 may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the lower actuation port 26 rather than by setting the electric device 261. In this configuration, the lower actuation port 26 need not be equipped with the electric device 261.

The variable winning device 27 is equipped with a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotation amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27.

Here, the game board 2 is provided with a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. This cover 29 is provided with a transparent panel 291 formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel 292 provided around this transparent panel 291 and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.

The big prize opening 271 is located in an opening formed in the gaming area by router processing, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of gaming balls. Based on the detection results, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the special prize opening 271. The opening/closing door 272 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby closing the opening of the special prize opening 271, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby opening the opening of the special prize opening 271.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272 to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the open/close door 272 is set to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 271. In the open/close execution mode, the period from when the open/close door 272 is set to an open state until when it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and a normal pattern display section 35, and is configured by arranging multiple display devices such as a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2 so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. In other words, the main display device 32 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. The distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the width of one game ball. This prevents the pachinko machine 1 from dropping game balls between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from dropping in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 includes a first result display unit 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the upper operating port 25, and a second result display unit 342 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the lower operating port 26 (see Figure 4). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for indicating the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode when the open/close execution mode is activated (or when the open/close execution mode is activated).

The first result display unit 341 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the upper operating port 25, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the upper operating port 25 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the lower operating port 26, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 26 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

The normal symbol display unit 35 displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at each through gate 31, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning at each through gate 31 as the result of stopping the changing display. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the electric role open state, the normal symbol display unit 35 displays the predetermined stop result. The pachinko machine 1 then transitions to the electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric role device 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 are configured with segment displays, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix. Furthermore, the images displayed on the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple colors that can be switched between.

The variable display unit 33 is equipped with a pattern display device 36 that variably displays (variably displays or switches between) patterns, which are a type of picture. The variable display unit 33 also has a center frame 37 that is arranged to surround the pattern display device 36. The upper part of this center frame 37 is arranged to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as a decrease in visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

The symbol display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 36 starts displaying a variable symbol based on a winning combination in the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. That is, when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display accordingly.
The pattern display device 36 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or other display device.

The center frame 37 includes a first hold lamp unit 371 provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36, a second hold lamp unit 372 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, and a third hold lamp unit 373 provided in the upper area of the pattern display device 36.

The first reserve lamp unit 371 is a unit that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This first reserve lamp unit 371 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the first result display unit 341 and the pattern display device 36.
The second reserve lamp unit 372 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This second reserve lamp unit 372 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the second result display unit 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third reserve lamp unit 373 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This third reserve lamp unit 373 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol display unit 35.
Each of the hold lamp sections 371 to 373 may have other configurations, such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 36 described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in Fig. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is divided into three display areas, and each display area displays, from left to right, a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol column Z3. Each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging eight types of symbols consisting of the numbers "1" to "8" in ascending order from bottom to top, with "1" following "8". In Fig. 3, the center line of each display area is indicated by a dashed line.

The symbol display device 36 executes a game-round effect on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. This game-round effect switches from a variable display to a static display in the order of left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols statically displayed on the pay line L.
That is, a game round refers to the period from when the main display unit 34 and the symbol display unit 36 start to display a variable display based on winnings at the operating ports 25, 26 until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

The manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 36 is not limited to this and can be any manner. For example, the number of pattern rows, the scrolling direction of each pattern row, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, instead of the pattern consisting of numbers only, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of pictures and numbers, or may be pictures only.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in Figure 4, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, an audio/light emitting control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 also has a payout control device 46 and a power/launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/launch control device 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launching mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 is equipped with a main control board 41 that handles the main control of the game (main control), and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 also has a board box that houses the main control board 41 and other components. This board box may be equipped with a trace means that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace means may be configured such that the board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies, and that joining sections (crimped sections) that require destruction of specific locations when the case bodies are separated, or a seal sticker that spans the boundaries between multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesive object when peeled off, may be attached. Furthermore, the trace structure may be configured such that an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is a chip-integrated device that includes, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that serves as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/lose table storage area 431, an allocation table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to multiple detection sensors 301-306. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the sound and light control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric device drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric device 261 in the lower operating port 26, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, the main display unit 34, and the normal symbol display unit 35.

The main control board 41 also has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the operation of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the variable prize drive unit 273 to open and close the large prize opening 271. In each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each operating opening 25, 26. Furthermore, the MPU 42 controls the display of the normal symbol display unit 35 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each through gate 31.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply and launch control device 47, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports of the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the lower operating port 26, and the variable winning device 27, as well as the outlet port 28 and each through gate 31. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, the MPU 42 performs winning determinations (ball entry determinations) for the various winning ports, the outlet port 28, and each through gate 31. The MPU 42 also performs an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to have the payout device 48 pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players during play) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) at, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is also equipped with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4, even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply and launch control device 47 also executes launch control, causing the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feed device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid, causing the game balls to be launched.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in the MPU of the main control device>
FIG. 5 shows the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 42 performs internal lotteries and the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine whether a jackpot occurs, the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the type of jackpot that occurs when a jackpot occurs, and the reach random number counter C3 to determine whether a reach display is to be generated. The MPU 42 also uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter CS to determine the display duration on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36. The MPU 42 also uses the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26 is to be in an electric role release state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter area 441 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44.

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 44. Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored in a reserved ball storage area 442 (see Figure 4) provided as acquired information storage means in RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Furthermore, of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric role release counter C4 is stored in an electric role reserve area 443 (see Figure 4) of RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters each through gate 31.

The reserved ball storage area 442 includes a reserved area Ra for the first result display section, a reserved area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE.

The first result display reserve area Ra, provided as the first acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas, the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 has a storage capacity large enough to store a set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 stores the set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserve information in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order as game balls enter the upper actuation port 25. Specifically, when multiple consecutive wins occur in the upper actuation port 25, the MPU 42 stores the reserve information in chronological order in the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4.

In this way, the first result display holding area Ra has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be held in the upper operating port 25. The first result display holding area Ra also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved balls stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of reserved items related to the upper operating port 25 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be single.

The second result display reserve area Rb, provided as the second acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas: the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 has a storage capacity large enough to store a set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 stores the set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserve information in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order as game balls enter the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, when multiple consecutive wins occur in the lower actuation port 26, the MPU 42 stores the reserve information in chronological order in the first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4.

In this way, the second result display holding area Rb has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be held in the lower operating port 26. The second result display holding area Rb also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved balls stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of reserved items related to the lower operating port 26 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be single.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the pending information stored in the memory area of the first result display unit pending area Ra or the second result display unit pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each result display unit 341, 342.

The electric winnings holding area 443 has four memory areas, similar to the first result display holding area Ra and the second result display holding area Rb. Therefore, up to four winning game balls can be held in each through gate 31.
The number of reserved items for each through gate 31 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be single.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
Each counter will be described in detail below.
First, we will explain the electric role release counter C4. The electric role release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a maximum value of 250, it returns to 0.
The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in an electric role holding area 443 of a RAM 44 via a lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 31.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (electric role release lottery) to determine whether or not to put the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26 into an electric role release state based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443.

The pachinko machine 1 has multiple support modes that differ in the frequency with which the electric device 261 is set to the open state, thereby allowing game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role release state in the electric role release lottery is the same (for example, 4/5 in both). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role release state is won, the electric role 261 is set to the open state more often, and the opening time for each electric role 261 is set to the open state is longer. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric role 261 to the closed state between each opening in a single electric role release state is shorter than the opening time for each single opening. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum waiting time (the duration of one variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35) between the end of the electric role release lottery and the next electric role release lottery is shorter.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to land in the lower actuation port 26 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player rotates the launch handle 16 to a medium amount and hits the ball to the left, thereby shifting the position of the gaming ball at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center, thereby increasing the probability of the gaming ball landing in the upper actuation port 25 rather than the lower actuation port 26. In the high frequency support mode, the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the maximum amount and hits the ball to the right, thereby shifting the position of the gaming ball at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the gaming ball landing in the lower actuation port 26 rather than the upper actuation port 25.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game without losing too many game balls.

In this way, in this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a left-hand hitting route (first path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25 but makes it harder for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26, and a right-hand hitting route (second path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 but makes it harder for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25.

The configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role release state in the electric role release lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, for example, by providing multiple types of retention times, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short retention time compared to the low-frequency support mode, or to shorten the average selected retention time. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric role 261 is set to the release state, the release time, and the retention time, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to relatively increase the frequency with which the electric role 261 is set to the open state compared to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain the jackpot random number counter C1. For example, each time the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching a maximum value of 599, it returns to 0, making it a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599. Furthermore, each time the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one loop, it reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as its initial value. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, just like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a win/lose table that stores the random number values that will result in a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that will result in a jackpot is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, which is provided as a win/loss information group storage means, as shown in Figure 6.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has two winning/losing lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot. The winning/losing table includes a winning/losing table for the low probability mode (low probability winning/losing information group) shown in Figure 6(a) and a winning/losing table for the high probability mode (high probability winning/losing information group) shown in Figure 6(b).
The MPU 42 compares these winning/losing tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur.

These winning/losing tables have the results (winning/losing results) of the lottery for multiple jackpots, including "jackpot win,""special losing result," and "normal losing result."
Specifically, in a gaming state in which the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the jackpot, there are two random number values that result in a "jackpot win," as shown in Figure 6(a).
In contrast, in a gaming state in which the high-probability mode hit/miss table is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, as shown in Figure 6(b), the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" are 21. Here, the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the low-probability mode hit/miss table are included in the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the high-probability mode hit/miss table.

The values and numbers of random numbers stored in each hit/miss table are arbitrary, as long as the high probability mode has a higher probability of "winning the jackpot" compared to the low probability mode. Furthermore, the value of the random number that results in a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode does not have to include the value of the random number that results in a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, and may include a portion of the value of the random number that results in a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each win/lose lottery mode, any random number value other than the "jackpot win" will result in a loss and not a jackpot.
Here, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of failure results: a "special failure result (small win result)" and a "normal failure result." These failure results have in common that neither triggers a transition to the win/lose lottery mode or the support mode. However, they differ in that the "special failure result" triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal failure result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 29.
The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper operating port 25, and is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower operating port 26.
Then, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (allocation lottery) for the type of the jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for each type of jackpot.
The random number values relating to the allocation destinations of the types of jackpots are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as allocation information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 7. The allocation table includes a first allocation table (first allocation information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second allocation table (second allocation information group) shown in FIG. 7(b).
The MPU 42 compares these distribution tables with the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery for determining the type of big win.

The first allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the reserve area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning the upper operating port 25.
7(a), the first allocation table allocates a plurality of allocation results, including "low probability result (special allocation result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit few-round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", "explicit few-round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", and "most favorable result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)". Specifically, in the first allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to "low probability result", "10 to 14" is allocated to "non-explicit few-round high probability result", "15 to 19" is allocated to "explicit few-round high probability result", and "20 to 29" is allocated to "most favorable result".

The second allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the reserve area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning the lower operating port 26.
7B, the second allocation table allocates two allocation results, a "low probability result" and a "most favorable result." Specifically, in the second allocation table, of the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are allocated to the "low probability result," and "10 to 29" are allocated to the "most favorable result."

The respective allocation results differ in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win/lose lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed; (2) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed; (3) Opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 27 in the opening/closing execution mode.

First, the difference between the winning/losing lottery modes (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "non-explicit few-round high probability result,""explicit few-round high probability result," and "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the open/close execution mode ends. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode transitions to the low frequency support mode when the number of times of play reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is an allocation result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode was the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "high probability result with fewer rounds" and the "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

The differences in the manner in which the variable winning device 27 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 238.
The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss result" rather than a "jackpot win."
Specifically, when the win/loss lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" but in a "normal miss result," the MPU 42 compares the reach table with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, and generates the reach display if the lottery determines that the reach display should be generated. The reach table is a table that stores random number values related to the generation of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 (see FIG. 4).

Here, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result," the pattern display device 36 will stop and display, as the stop result, a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers on the valid line L. Also, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "low probability result," the pattern display device 36 will stop and display, as the stop result, a combination of symbols having the same even numbers on the valid line L. Furthermore, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result," or if the win/loss lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win," the pattern display device 36 will stop and display, as the stop result, a combination of special symbols having different numbers (e.g., "3, 4, 1") that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the win/loss lottery, rather than a combination of symbols having the same numbers.

The reach display occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a combination of symbols with the same numbers is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "most favorable result" or "low probability result"). Furthermore, the reach display does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a special combination of symbols is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "non-disclosed low-round high probability result" or "disclosed low-round high probability result" or the distribution lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win").

The reach display mode is such that some of the multiple pattern sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 (for example, pattern sequence Z1 and pattern sequence Z3) are displayed stopped on the valid line L, thereby displaying the same pattern combination to suggest the stopping result, and in this state, the remaining pattern sequences (for example, pattern sequence Z2) are displayed in a variable manner.
Therefore, by generating a reach display, the pachinko machine 1 can make the player hope that after the variable display starts on the pattern display device 36 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player will have won the jackpot in the win/lose lottery and will have been allocated to a low probability result or a most favorable result in the allocation lottery.

The reach display format is not limited to this; some symbol rows may be displayed statically, while the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, with predetermined characters or the like displayed as animation in the background, or each symbol row may be displayed in a reduced size or hidden, with predetermined characters or the like displayed as animation across almost the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has an expectation effect as a type of variable display on the symbol display device 36. An expectation effect is an effect that makes the player hopeful that they may have won the jackpot in the win/loss lottery after the variable display starts on the symbol display device 36 and before the specified stop result is displayed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of expectation effects: the reach display mentioned above and the preview display.

The advance notice display is an expected effect that makes it easier for an effect to occur when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" or when the winning/losing lottery results in a "special miss" rather than a "jackpot win" than when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss" rather than a "jackpot win." Instead of making the effect more likely to occur, this advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate, or these may be combined.
The lottery as to whether or not to generate a reach display is executed by the main control device 4, whereas the lottery as to whether or not to generate a preview display is executed by the audio and light emitting control device 5.

Examples of the preview display include a mode in which, among the multiple symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, all of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, a mode in which some symbol sequences (e.g., symbol sequence Z1) are displayed stationary on the pay line L and then multiple symbol sequences (e.g., symbol sequences Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, or a mode in which, in a situation in which a reach display is generated, a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G based on a predetermined timing, or a mode in which a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G based on the player pressing the push button 142. This preview display occurs both when a reach display is generated and when a reach display is not generated, but is set to occur more easily when a reach display is generated than when a reach display is not generated.
The preview display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, or the shape of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed.

Finally, we will explain the fluctuation type counter CS. The fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a maximum value of 198, it returns to 0.
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and each time it is updated it is stored in the lottery counter buffer.
Then, based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer, the MPU 42 determines the display duration of the pattern on the main display unit 34 and the display duration of the pattern on the pattern display device 36. These display durations will be described in detail later.

<Various processes executed by the main control unit>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, as well as main processing that starts when the power is turned on. The timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described below in order.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 42 also executes NMI interrupt processing which is activated by input of a power outage signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105 as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes a read process for the multiple detection sensors 301-306. In this read process, the MPU 42 reads the status of the multiple detection sensors 301-306, determines the status, and stores it in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. If the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301-304 corresponding to the various winning ports have detected the winning of a game ball, it sets a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the prize balls and transmits this set command to the payout control device 46. For example, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the variable winning device 27 has detected the winning of a game ball, it transmits a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the specific unit number of 15 prize balls to the payout control device 46.
In addition, the payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the random number initial value counter CINI has reached its maximum value when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value, it clears the random number initial value counter CINI by returning it to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4 by adding 1 to each of them, and stores the updated values in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 42 clears the values of the counters C1 to C4 by resetting them to 0.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for through play. In this winning process for through play, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 42 stores the value of the electric role opening counter C4 updated in step S103 in the electric role reserve area 443. In addition, the MPU 42 sets a command for turning on the third reserve lamp unit 373 and transmits this set command to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the third reserve lamp unit 373 based on a command sent from the MPU 42. As described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered each through gate 31 is four, and the third reserve lamp unit 373 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the operating port.
The winning process for the operating port will be explained in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 42 determines whether a game ball has entered the upper actuation port 25 (start entry) by determining whether the detection sensor 302 corresponding to the upper actuation port 25 has detected the entry of a game ball. If the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has entered the upper actuation port 25, in step S202, it determines the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display holding area Ra and sets this reserved number as the first start reserve memory number RaN in a specified memory area in the first result display holding area Ra. The MPU 42 then executes the processing from step S205 onwards.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has not entered the upper operating port 25, it determines in step S203 whether the detection sensor 303 corresponding to the lower operating port 26 has detected the entry of a game ball, thereby determining whether a game ball has entered the lower operating port 26 (initial entry).
If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that a gaming ball has not entered the lower actuation port 26, it terminates the winning process for the actuation port. If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that a gaming ball has entered the lower actuation port 26, it determines in step S204 the number of reserved balls stored in the second result display holding area Rb, and sets this reserved number as the second start reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined memory area in the second result display holding area Rb. The MPU 42 then executes the processes from step S205 onward.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 42 determines in step S205 whether the start-pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this reference embodiment).
If the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is not less than the upper limit, it ends the winning process for the operating port. Also, if the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit, it updates the value of the start pending memory number N by adding 1 to it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 42 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing as reserved information in the first free memory area in the result display section reserved area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the start reserved memory number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing as pending information in the first free memory area of the first result display unit reserve area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Ra4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206, which is "4".

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing as pending information in the first free memory area of the second result display unit reserve area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to "3" in step S204, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Rb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206, which is "4."

In step S208, if the MPU 42 has set the first start hold memory number RaN in step S202, it sets a first hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and transmits this set first hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This first hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25. The first hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the first reserved lamp unit 371 and executes a predetermined process based on the first reserved command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the upper operating port 25 is four, and the first reserved lamp unit 371 lights up the number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the first pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

Also, in step S208, if the MPU 42 has set the second start hold memory number RbN in step S204, it sets a second hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and transmits this set second hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This second hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the second result display section hold area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The second hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the second reserved lamp unit 372 and executes a predetermined process based on the second reserved generation command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the lower actuation port 26 is four, and the second reserved lamp unit 372 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the second pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal process.
The MPU 42 executes a main process (described below) that starts when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for progressing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314, as shown in Figure 10. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at 4 msec intervals, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps depending on the determination result of step S308.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes timer interrupt processing, prize-winning processing for the operating port, or external output processing for sending commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a prize ball command has been set, and if it determines that a prize ball command has been set, sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Also, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a command for a presentation, such as a command corresponding to a presentation for a game round or a command corresponding to a presentation for the open/close execution mode, has been set, and if it determines that a command for a presentation has been set, sends the command for that presentation to the sound and light emission control device 5.

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a specified area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, it clears the value of the fluctuation type counter CS by returning it to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes a game round control process for progressing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose lottery and an allocation lottery, and also determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 36 and the main display unit 34.
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game number control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) for starting a demo has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started, and if it determines that the start waiting period has elapsed, it sets a demo command for starting a demo display. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval between repeated executions of the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when it reaches 7,500 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary; for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if a new game session is started while the MPU 42 is counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S306, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process to control the drive of the electric role device 261 provided in the lower operating port 26. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role device release lottery based on the value of the electric role device release counter C4 stored in the electric role device holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and if the electric role device release lottery is won, executes the opening and closing process of the electric role device 261. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 to display the result of the electric role device release lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 causes the power supply and launch control device 47 to execute launch control to launch a game ball based on the player's rotation of the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply and launch control device 47 causes the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a launch intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16. Furthermore, when predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power outage flag has been set in the power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power outage flag is set in the RAM 44 when a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power outage monitoring board 45 outputs this power outage signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power outage. Note that this power outage flag is cleared the next time the main processing is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as RAM 44, and clears various flags by assigning 0 to the flag. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a power outage flag by assigning 1 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set, it executes power outage processing from step S312 onwards without executing processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits timer interrupt processing from occurring. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and saves a RAM judgment value (a checksum of RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set, it determines in step S309 whether the timing has come to execute the next normal processing, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this reference embodiment) has elapsed since the current normal processing started.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is not yet time to execute the next normal process, that is, if remaining time has occurred, it updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310 and updates the fluctuation type counter CS in step S311. Note that the MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal processing, i.e., if there is no remaining time, it executes step S301 again to start the next normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing.
In the main processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 42 executes a startup process when the power is turned on. In this startup process, the MPU 42 waits for a predetermined time (e.g., about 500 msec) after the power is turned on to wait for the sub-side control board (e.g., the control board of the audio/light emitting control device 5) to become operable.

In step S402, the MPU 42 determines whether the permission/prohibition period of 1 second has elapsed. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 second has not elapsed, it repeats the processing of step S402. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 second has elapsed, it executes the processing from step S403 onwards.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether 1 second has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 second has elapsed when the count reaches 10,000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission/prohibition period is arbitrary; for example, the permission/prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 42 permits access to the RAM 44.
In step S404, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply/launch control device 47 is turned on.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not on, it determines in step S405 whether a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is set, it calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 42 determines whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal or not, thereby confirming the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44. Specifically, the MPU 42 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing during power outage) of the normal processing, and if they match, determines that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, determines that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, it clears the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in RAM 44 may be determined by a method other than checking the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, the validity of the data stored in RAM 44 may be confirmed by writing a keyword to a specified area of RAM 44 during power outage processing and then determining whether this keyword was written correctly during main processing.

As described above, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, if it determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, or if it determines in step S407 that the RAM judgment value is not normal, it executes the processing from step S409 onwards.
Specifically, the MPU 42 clears the work area of the RAM 44 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 44 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, when the amusement facility opens for business, the manager of the amusement facility can initialize the data stored in RAM 44 by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM erase switch. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 will initialize the data stored in RAM 44 if the power outage monitoring board 45 does not confirm the occurrence of a power outage or if the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 42 sends an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio and light emission control device 5) in step S411, and in step S412 allows the timer interrupt processing to occur and proceeds to the normal processing described above.
In addition, by receiving the initial command sent in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 41 is proceeding normally and performs its own initialization.

<Game Play Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game play control process.
In the game play control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode. If the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 terminates the game round control process without executing the processes in step S502 and thereafter. Therefore, if the MPU 42 determines that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 does not start the game round regardless of whether or not the MPU 42 has detected the entry of a game ball into each of the actuation ports 25, 26.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the device is in the opening and closing execution mode by referring to the opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44. This also applies to the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the opening and closing execution mode flag when the device transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and clears the opening and closing execution mode flag when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, it determines in step S502 whether the main display unit 34 is displaying a variable value, i.e., whether a game is in progress.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is not displaying a variable value, it executes processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is performing a variable display, it executes the game round progression process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the game start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 42 determines the number of reserved items stored in the first result display area Ra and the number of reserved items stored in the second result display area Rb, and determines whether the total number CRN of these reserved items is equal to or less than 0. If the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than 0, it terminates the game play control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than "0," it executes a data setting process in step S504 to set the reserved information stored in the first result display reserve area Ra or the second result display reserve area Rb for consumption of a game round. Thereafter, in step S505, the MPU 42 executes a fluctuation start process to start a variable display on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to consume a game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 determines whether the second start pending memory count RbN in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit, which was set in step S204 of the winning process for the activation port, is equal to or less than 0. If the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory count RbN is equal to or less than 0, it executes data setting processing for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and if the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory count RbN is not equal to or less than 0, it executes data setting processing for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611.

In this way, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit for consumption of game rounds, and a data setting process for the second result display unit that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit for consumption of game rounds.
Then, if the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0," it executes the data setting process for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. In other words, if the MPU 42 determines that there is pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb based on the winning of a game ball through the lower actuation port 26, it preferentially sets the pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb for consumption of game rounds, regardless of whether there is pending information stored in the first result display unit pending area Ra based on the winning of a game ball through the upper actuation port 25.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending memory number RaN in the first result display section pending area Ra to update it.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display unit pending area Ra. This data shift process shifts the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 sequentially toward the first area Ra1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag stored in RAM 44. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 34, the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342, is to start a variable display when a game round is completed. In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag, which indicates that when a game round is completed, the first result display unit 341 is to start a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25.

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift command for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the first shift command set in step S606 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5. This first shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed for the reserved information stored in the first result display unit reserved area Ra based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the first reserve lamp unit 371 and also executes a predetermined process based on the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lit first reserve lamp units 371 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending memory number RbN in the second result display section pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display section pending area Rb. This data shift process shifts the pending information stored in each of areas Rb1 to Rb4 sequentially toward the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the pending information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the pending information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 44. In this step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag, which indicates that the second result display unit 342 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 as a game round is played.

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift command for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed. Thereafter, the MPU 42 terminates the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the second shift command set in step S611 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5. This second shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed for the reserved information stored in the second result display reserve area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the second reserve lamp unit 372 and also executes a predetermined process based on the second shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lit second reserve lamp units 372 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower actuation port 26 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode, then in step S702 it reads out the win/loss table for the low probability mode (see Figure 6(a)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43, and if it determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, then in step S703 it reads out the win/loss table for the high probability mode (see Figure 6(b)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43.

After executing the processing of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose determination process in step S704. In this win/lose determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/lose table read out in step S702 or step S703. As mentioned above, the win/lose result is either a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," or a "normal loss result," and this is the same whether the win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode or high probability mode.

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether the result determined in step S704 is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S706 onward; if the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S712 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S706 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and therefore in step S707, the first allocation table (see Figure 7(a)) is read from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and therefore in step S708, the second allocation table (see Figure 7(b)) is read from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.

After executing the processing of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 42 executes the allocation determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the allocation lottery (allocation result) by comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read in step S707 or step S708.

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for a jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be ultimately stopped and displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34 according to the allocation result determined in step S709, and stores the determined information in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be ultimately stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 by comparing the allocation result determined in step S709 with a stop result table for a jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 43. This stop result table for a jackpot result specifies different patterns to be stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 for each allocation result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag corresponding to the allocation result determined in step S709 in the RAM 44. Specifically, if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it sets a low probability result flag; if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is an "unspecified low round high probability result," it sets a unspecified low round high probability result flag; if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is an "explicit low round high probability result," it sets a specified low round high probability result flag; and if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result," it sets a most advantageous result flag. Thereafter, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S716 onwards.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines the allocation result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (the process from step S712 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result determined in step S704 is a "special losing result."
If MPU42 determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is not a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S715 onwards.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a special losing result. In this stop result setting process for a special losing result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 by referring to a stop result table for a special losing result stored in advance in the ROM 43. The pattern of the symbols set in this stop result table for a special losing result is different from the pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 42 sets a special loss flag in the RAM 44.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

In response to this, in step S715, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a normal loss result. In this stop result setting process for a normal loss result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be ultimately displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be ultimately displayed in the main display section 34 by referencing a stop result table for a normal loss result that is pre-stored in ROM 43. The pattern of symbols set in this stop result table for a normal loss result differs from the pattern of symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result and the stop result table for a special loss result.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 42 executes a process for setting the display duration (display duration period) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44 .

Furthermore, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a reach display will occur on the symbol display device 36. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur if the allocation result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result," or if the win/loss result determined in step S704 is a "normal loss result" and the reach occurrence lottery is won. As described above, the MPU 42 executes the reach occurrence lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

When the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

Specifically, the display duration table for when reach does not occur is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display duration when the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 is consumed is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items related to the upper actuation port 25 increases. And the display duration when the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 is consumed is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items related to the lower actuation port 26 increases. Furthermore, the display duration table for when reach does not occur is set so that the display duration shortens when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode compared to when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of reserved items is the same, the display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

The non-reach display duration table may be set to the opposite relationship to that described above, such that the display duration increases as the number of reserved items increases, or may be configured not to change depending on the number of reserved items or support mode. Separate display duration tables may also be set for the win/fail result and the allocation result.

In step S717, the MPU 42 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S717 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, and does not include information regarding whether or not a reach display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach non-occurrence are different from each other.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not a reach display will occur is not included in the variation command, it is possible for the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the sub-control device, to determine whether or not a reach display will occur based on information related to the display duration. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display will occur. Note that the variation command may also directly include information on whether or not a reach display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/loss result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the win/loss result, such as a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," and a "normal loss result." The type command also includes information related to the allocation result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the "low probability result,""non-explicit low round high probability result,""explicit low round high probability result," and "most advantageous result," such as information related to the allocation result.
In the following description, the win/loss result and the allocation result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, and based on the determination result, starts a variable display on the main display unit 34. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the variable start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 should start displaying a changing value based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 when a game round is played, and so the MPU 42 causes the first result display unit 341 to start displaying a changing value.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 should start displaying a changing value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 when a game round is played, and so the MPU 42 starts displaying a changing value in the second result display unit 342.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process, the game round progression process in steps S506 to S509 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 42 determines whether the main display unit 34 is displaying a changing image, and if it determines that the main display unit 34 is displaying a changing image, it executes processing for progressing the game round in steps S506 to S509.

In step S506, the MPU 42 determines whether the display duration time set in step S716 of the variation start processing has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the value set in the display duration time counter in RAM 44 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this display duration time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has not elapsed, it executes variable display processing in step S507. In this variable display processing, the MPU 42 updates the display on the main display unit 34 during the variable display. The MPU 42 then terminates the game play control processing.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, it executes a variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 42 identifies information (information related to the image to be finally displayed as a stopped image on the main display unit 34) stored in the RAM 44 in any of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the variation start process executed when starting a variable display on the main display unit 34. Then, at the end of a game round, the MPU 42 executes display control on the main display unit 34 so that an image corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the main display unit 34 during the variable display.

Here, the image that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the gaming facility or the like can check the game result by visually checking the main display unit 34 at the end of a game round. This allows the manager of the gaming facility or the like to easily check whether or not fraudulent activity is being committed, for example, by attempting to make the pachinko machine 1 behave in the same way as if a jackpot had been won in a lottery.
Furthermore, the main display unit 34 has a smaller display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and the pictures displayed in a stopped state on the main display unit 34 are harder for the player to recognize than the sequence of symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed in a stopped state on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Therefore, when a round of play ends, the player will determine whether or not they have won a jackpot by checking the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 rather than the main display unit 34, which can increase the attention paid to the display screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 42 sets a fluctuation end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game number control processing.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 executes processing to end the presentation of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the sound and light emitting control device 5 may be configured to end the presentation of the game round independently without needing to receive the variation end command.

<Game status transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode.
If it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it executes the processes in and after step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes from step S811 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S802 onward) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display has ended on the main display unit 34. If the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display unit 34 has not ended, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the winning/losing result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" or a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the pass/fail result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in RAM 44 and then executes the processing from step S804 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result"), it terminates the game state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S805 it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter that allows the MPU 42 to determine the total number of times the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not a "special miss result," i.e., that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it determines in step S806 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is a low-round, high-probability result, then in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "2." Also, if the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is not a low-round, high-probability result, i.e., if it determines that the allocation result is a "low-probability result" or a "most advantageous result," then in step S808 it sets the round counter RC to "15." This round counter RC is a counter that the MPU 42 uses to determine the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has multiple opening/closing execution modes with different termination conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," and a number-of-opening/closing-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "special loss result."

The round count mode ends when a predetermined number of rounds have been played, where the number of rounds corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number-defined mode ends when the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 271. Here, the total number of times the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number-defined mode does not end when the number of rounds of play has been reached.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening 271 once per round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by meeting one of the following two conditions:
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of game balls entering the large prize slot 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing any one of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 42 sets "1000" as the opening wait time (wait period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 in step S809. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the opening wait time is 2 seconds. Note that the opening wait time is not limited to this and can be any value.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. The MPU 42 then terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process from step S811 onwards) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes the big prize opening/closing process.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening.
In the special prize opening opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether the big prize opening 271 is open or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open, it executes the processing from step S902 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open, it executes the processes from step S906 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S902 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not less than "0", it determines in step S903 whether the value of the timer counter T is less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of opening the big prize opening in step S904.
The process of opening the big prize slot in step S904 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening process.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "8" in step S1002, and sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003. As mentioned above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 seconds.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is not a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC to "8" in step S1004, and determines in step S1005 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is a high probability result in a small number of rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not a high probability result for a few rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution processing of the special prize opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution processing, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state by executing drive control of the variable prize opening drive unit 273. The MPU 42 then terminates the special prize opening opening processing.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 specifies the upper limit on the total number of game balls that can enter the large winning slot 271. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to the same value ("8" in this embodiment) when it determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result" and when it determines that the winning result is not a "special losing result," but different values may also be set in the winning counter PC.

The value set in timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 also specifies the maximum duration time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two different maximum duration times by setting timer counter T to "85" or "15,000." Specifically, the MPU 42 sets a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 30 seconds, and a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 0.17 seconds, which is shorter than the long-term mode.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds, thereby causing the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Also, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to "8", thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 271 to eight.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch period, it is easy to get the upper limit of eight game balls to enter the large prize opening 271.
In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch cycle (more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle), so it is difficult to get a game ball to enter the large prize opening 271. However, depending on the timing, it is possible to get about one game ball to enter the large prize opening 271.

Returning to the explanation of the big prize opening/closing process, the process from step S905 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the special prize opening process in step S904, the MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905. Furthermore, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S905 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the special prize opening opening and closing process.
Based on the open command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S906 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than 0. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the special prize opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S907.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S918.

First, the process (the process from step S907 onwards) when it is determined in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize opening 271. The determination of whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize opening 271 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the special prize opening 271.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no win has occurred in the special prize opening 271, it ends the special prize opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a win has occurred in the big win slot 271, it updates the value of the win counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the prize counter PC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the prize counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big prize opening opening process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0," it executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to set the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the close command set in step S911 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
Based on the close command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the result is not a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S913 onwards.
In step S913, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0," then in step S915, the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 specifies the open waiting time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, to when it is set to the closed state and then when it is set to the open state again. In this reference embodiment, the open waiting time is 1 second. This open waiting time is the same regardless of the type or progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and can be any value.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, as with the waiting time for the opening, i.e., the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening and closing processing.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the ending command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S918 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the result is not a "special miss result," that is, if it determines that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S921 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-mentioned processing from S916 onwards.

Next, the processing (processing from step S923 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-described processing from S916 onwards.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process, the process from step S812 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the large prize opening/closing process in step S811, the MPU 42 determines in step S812 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0," then in step S814, it clears the open/close execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 44, and then executes transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition processing.
The transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result," it executes the processing from step S1102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result," it executes the processing from step S1105 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S1102 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicitly few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 42 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 44.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In step S1104, the MPU 42 sets the high probability mode flag in RAM 44. If the high probability mode flag is already set in RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/loss lottery mode to high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win." The MPU 42 then ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed, the MPU 42 clears the flags set in RAM 44 according to the allocation results (low probability result flag, non-explicit few rounds high probability result flag, explicit few rounds high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) and the special loss flag. Also, in step S701 of the aforementioned fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in RAM 44.

Next, the processing (processing from step S1105 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1106 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1108 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S1106 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, it executes the processes from step S1103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44 in step S1107. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/loss lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the processing (processing from step S1108 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is a "low probability result."

If MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is not a "low probability result" (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "special loss result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it executes the processes from step S1109 onwards.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high-probability mode flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the win/loss lottery mode to low-probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result becomes anything other than a "low-probability result."

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 42 sets the value of the number of games counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "100".
In step S1112, the MPU 42 sets the number of times limit flag in the RAM 44. If the number of times limit flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number limit flag is set, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games have been played, which is the termination reference number set in the game number counter. When 100 games have been played, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 executes these processes as electric support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "most favorable result" or a "high probability result with an explicit few rounds," the game state will transition to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round count specified mode) regardless of the current game state. The high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

Also, if the current support mode is high-frequency support mode and the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is an "unspecified few-round high-probability result," the game state will transition to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round-number-specified mode). The high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In contrast, if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode and the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is an "unspecified few-round high-probability result," the game state will transition to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round-number-specified mode). The high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "low probability result," the game state will transition to low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round count mode) regardless of the current game state. Low probability mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win," and high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode if 100 game rounds have been played without a "jackpot win" in the win/loss lottery.

In addition, if the result of the lottery is not a "jackpot win," that is, if the result of the lottery is a "special miss" or "normal miss," the game state will not change.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
19, the audio and light emission control device 5 includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and the RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the push button 142. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 controls the driving of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main control unit 4 and information input from the push button 142 when operated by the player.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

Figure 20 shows the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area.
As shown in Figure 20, the sub-side reservation information storage area 543 has a first sub-side reservation area SRa, a second sub-side reservation area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side hold area SRa, provided as the first sub-side acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas: first area SRa1 to fourth area SRa4. Each of areas SRa1 to SRa4 has a storage capacity large enough to store normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores normal hold information or advance hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRa1 to SRa4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the first hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the first hold generation command sent from the MPU 42, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRa1 → second area SRa2 → third area SRa3 → fourth area SRa4.

As such, the first sub-side reserve area SRa has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the first reserve generation command can be reserved. The first sub-side reserve area SRa also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of areas SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side hold area SRb, which is provided as the second sub-side acquired information storage means, has four storage areas: a first area SRb1 to a fourth area SRb4. Each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 has a storage capacity large enough to store normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores normal hold information or advance hold information as sub-side hold information in each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the second hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the second hold generation command sent from the MPU 42, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRb1 → second area SRb2 → third area SRb3 → fourth area SRb4.

As such, the second sub-side reserve area SRb has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the second reserve generation command can be reserved. The second sub-side reserve area SRb also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of areas SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is an area for moving the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa or the second sub-side reserved area SRb when starting the variable display of the pattern display device 36.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device.
21, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video RAM 67. The MPU 62 is a chip-integrated device that includes not only the program ROM 63 and the work RAM 64, but also a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. The MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 5 and performs predetermined calculations based on these commands to control the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 36. Because the VDP 65 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual function is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the commands generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs to be displayed on the design display device 36. The character ROM 66 stores bitmap image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36, and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 can be changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 67.

The video RAM 67 includes a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has multiple frame areas 691 and 692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692.

Each frame area 691, 692 is set to a capacity sufficient to store one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each frame area 691, 692 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a memory capacity sufficient to store data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area uses a full-color system, allowing 256 colors to be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each RGB color, for a total memory capacity of at least 3 bytes.

While drawing data created in one frame area (e.g., first frame area 691) is being used to draw on the pattern display device 36, the VDP 65 creates the next drawing data to be used in the other frame area (e.g., second frame area 692). In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double-buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691, 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts this drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution using a scaler (not shown) so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 then generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2001 to S2006 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 52 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 52 receives a command from the MPU 42, it stores the command in the RAM 54. Specifically, the RAM 54 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands sent from the MPU 42, and the MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order in which they were sent from the MPU 42. The MPU 52 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they were stored.

In step S2002, the MPU 52 executes a reservation determination process based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the reservation determination process, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of a reservation symbol, the shift of a reservation symbol, etc. This reservation determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S2003, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining effects based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the process for determining effects, the MPU 52 determines effects for the game round, effects for the open/close execution mode, etc. This process for determining effects will be described in detail later.
In step S2004, the MPU 52 executes a performance execution process based on the contents of the hold determination process in step S2002 and the performance determination process in step S2003. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2005, the MPU 52 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes a demo display when a predetermined waiting period for starting a demo (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control for the various lamp units 124 and audio control for the speaker unit 125.

In step S2006, a command transmission process is executed to transmit the commands set in the hold determination process in step S2002 and the effect determination process in step S2003 to the display control device 6. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether it is time to transmit the various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 to the display control device 6, and if it determines that it is time to transmit the various commands to the display control device 6, it transmits the commands to the display control device 6. The MPU 52 then terminates the timer interrupt process.

<Regarding the hold determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the hold determination process.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a reservation determination process to generate a reservation pattern, shift the reservation pattern, etc. In this reservation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2101 to S2104 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a hold generation command (first hold generation command or second hold generation command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has not received a hold generation command, it executes the processes in and after step S2103.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has received a hold generation command, it executes a hold generation process in step S2102. In this hold generation process, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. This hold generation process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S2102, or if it is determined in step S2101 that a hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2103 and onward.
In step S2103, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a pending shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that the hold shift command has not been received, it ends the hold determination process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that it has received a hold shift command, it executes hold shift processing in step S2104. In this hold shift processing, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold shift command. This hold shift processing will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the hold determination processing.

<Hold occurrence processing>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the reservation generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 24. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation. In this lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not advance notice reservation will occur.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the advance notice hold is a hold that executes an advance notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc. to notify the player of the expected degree of the hold, or an advance notice display that generates a pre-reading effect that notifies the player of the expected degree of the hold by displaying the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of the above-mentioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the notice pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
Based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the advance notice hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the normal reserved information includes information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery). Therefore, the sub-side reserved information (notice reserved information and normal reserved information) includes information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In addition, based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the normal hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207 or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold or a normal hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold image or normal hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process.
As described above, the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes the hold shift process in step S2104 of the hold determination process. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308 as shown in Fig. 25. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold area based on the contents of the hold shift command.

In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received a first shift command, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304, and if it determines in step S2301 that it has not received a first shift command (if it determines that it has received a second shift command), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304 will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 sequentially to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 sequentially to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

After executing the processing of step S2304 or step S2307, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display shift command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 26 shows the preview reserved pattern and the normal reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in Figure 26, the MPU 62 displays on the display screen G pedestals B11 to B14 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa, pedestals B21 to B24 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and an execution pedestal AB provided between pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE.

The first holding lamp unit 371 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa. On the other hand, the bases B11 to B14 are provided from right to left to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa.
The second holding lamp units 372 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Similarly, the bases B21 to B24 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb.

The bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or a normal hold by placing a notice hold pattern or a normal hold pattern thereon.
Specifically, when MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the bases B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white spherical image, which is a normal hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a flashing white sphere pattern, which is an advance notice hold pattern, on the execution base AB.

26, the MPU 62 places regular reserved symbols on the bases B11 and B12, places a notice reserved symbol on the base B13, and places a regular reserved symbol on the execution base AB. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places a regular reserved symbol on the base B21. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place symbols on the bases B14, B22 to B24.
In this embodiment, the images of the normal hold and the notice hold are different from each other, but they may be the same. Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB on the display screen G, but it is not necessary to display each base on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a performance determination process to execute a performance for a game round, a performance for an open/close execution mode, etc. In this performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has not received any command, it executes the processes in and after step S2409.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has received each command, it determines in step S2402 whether the game result is a ``most advantageous result'' or a ``low probability result'' based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the gaming result is a "most advantageous result" or a "low probability result," it executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of gaming result in step S2403. In this symbol determination process, if the MPU 52 determines that the gaming result is a "most advantageous result," it determines information regarding a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L; if the MPU 52 determines that the gaming result is a "low probability result," it determines information regarding a combination of symbols having the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L. Note that the odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result," then in step S2404 it determines whether the game result is a "normal miss result" based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not a "normal loss result," i.e., if the game result is one of a "special loss result," a "non-indicated low-round high-probability result," or a "indicated low-round high-probability result," it executes a common symbol determination process in step S2405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information regarding a special symbol combination as the stop result to be ultimately displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 determines a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the lottery, rather than a symbol combination having the same number. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal miss result," it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information relating to the combination of symbols in the reach display as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines, by lottery or the like, a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols in a reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining an effect pattern in step S2407. In this process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing an effect table pre-stored in ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration period) and effect content as the effect pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display, such as displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the display screen G, based on the player pressing the push button 142, for example.

In addition, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 52 performs the effect execution process of step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and also controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command that includes information related to the stop result determined in any one of the processes in steps S2403, S2405, and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start command and the stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable display start command and stop result command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 starts the variable display and then finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the active line L.

After executing the process of step S2408, or if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes in and after step S2413.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that an opening command has been received, then in step S2410 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S2411, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining an effect for the open/close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2410. In the process for determining an effect for the open/close execution mode, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2410 that the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-expressed few-round high-probability result," it selects effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "expressed few-round high-probability result," it selects effect B as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "most advantageous result," it selects effect C or effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result," it selects effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode.
The duration of effects A and B corresponds to the time required to open and close the large prize opening 271 twice in a short time in the opening and closing execution mode. The duration of effects C and D corresponds to the time required to open and close the large prize opening 271 15 times in a long time in the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, based on the selection result of effects A to D, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 during the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S2412, the MPU 52 sets an open/close execution mode command that includes information related to the effects for the open/close execution mode selected in step S2411. The MPU 52 then stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This open/close execution mode command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the open/close execution mode command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the open/close execution mode effect on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the open/close execution mode effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2412, or if it is determined in step S2409 that an opening command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2413 and subsequent steps.
In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In the other processing, the MPU 52 executes processing for progressing the effects for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, close command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the effect determination processing.

<Relationship between game results and game status, etc.>
The relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be explained below.
Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. Specifically, Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results excluding "normal miss results" and game states, etc., with game results arranged in columns and game states, etc. arranged in rows.
As shown in Figure 28, the pachinko machine 1 has, as game results excluding the "normal miss result", the win/loss results of the "jackpot win" and the "special miss result", and the allocation results of the "non-explicit low-round high-probability result", the "explicit low-round high-probability result", the "most advantageous result", and the "low-probability result".

Here, the "special losing result" is the game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" (symbol × in the figure), as shown in the second column of the table in Figure 28. Also, the allocation result is the game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" (symbol ○ in the figure).
The following describes the relationship between game results, excluding "normal miss results," and game states, etc. In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the relationship between game results and game states, etc. as follows, but the combinations of game results and game states, etc., the content of game results, and the content of game states, etc. are arbitrary.

In the "special losing result", the opening/closing execution mode is switched to the opening/closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening and closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. Also, in the "special losing result", the winning/losing lottery mode is not switched.
In the "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number specified mode in which rounds are played with a maximum of two times, and the opening/closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time. Also, in the "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result", the winning/losing lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode.
In this way, although the "special miss result" and the "non-disclosed short round high probability result" have different types of opening and closing execution modes, they have in common that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the case of a "special miss result" or an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the stop result will be a special combination of symbols, and the effect for the open/close execution mode will be effect A. Furthermore, in the case of a "special miss result" or an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the support mode will not be switched to. Furthermore, in the game round after the open/close execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 will not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is in the high probability mode.

Therefore, by checking the stop result or the effects for the open/close execution mode, the player cannot know whether the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-disclosed few-round high probability result." In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in a "non-disclosed few-round high probability result" and the game transitions to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 36 will disguise the game as if the game had not transitioned to the win/lose lottery mode in the game round after the open/close execution mode ends.
Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game while predicting whether or not the win/lose lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number specified mode in which round play is played with a maximum of two times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the win/lose lottery mode transitions to a high probability mode. Also, in the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the stopping result is a special combination of symbols, and the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode is Presentation B. Also, in the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 displays an image on the display screen G indicating that it is in the high probability mode.
Therefore, by checking the stop result and the effects for the opening and closing execution mode, the player can understand that the game result is an "explicit few-round high-probability result."

In the case of the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode switches to a round number specified mode in which rounds of play are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
Here, in the "most favorable result," the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers, the win/lose lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the presentation for the open/close execution mode becomes presentation C or presentation D. Specifically, if the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers, the presentation for the open/close execution mode becomes presentation C, and if the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even numbers, the presentation for the open/close execution mode becomes presentation D.
Furthermore, in the case of a "low probability result," the stopping result will be a combination of symbols having the same even numbers, the winning/losing lottery mode will shift to a low probability mode, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode will be effect D. Furthermore, in the case of a "most advantageous result" and a "low probability result," the support mode will shift to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the stopped result is a combination of symbols with the same odd number and the effect for the open/close execution mode is effect C, the player can tell that the game result is the "most advantageous result." However, if the stopped result is a combination of symbols with the same even number, the player cannot tell whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" by checking the stopped result or the effect for the open/close execution mode.

Then, in the game round after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the final effect for the opening and closing execution mode is effect D, the symbol display device 36 will not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is a high probability mode.

Specifically, the symbol display device 36 does not display an image on the display screen G clearly indicating that the high probability mode is in effect, but instead displays an image on the display screen G informing players that the high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode when the number of play times reaches a reference number for ending the mode (specifically, 100 play times). In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in the "most advantageous result," the symbol display device 36 will disguise the game result as a "low probability result" in the play times after the end of the open/close execution mode if the final effect for the open/close execution mode is effect D.

If the allocation result is the "most favorable result," the symbol display device 36 will not result in a "jackpot win" in the win/lose lottery, and after 100 games have been played, will display an image on the display screen G indicating that the game is in high probability mode. In other words, the symbol display device 36 will cancel the disguise that was applied, making it appear as if the game result was a "low probability result."

[Modifications of the main embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described main embodiment, but includes modifications and improvements within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the jackpot opening 271 once per round of play. However, the pachinko machine 1 may open and close the jackpot opening 271 multiple times per round of play.
(2) In this reference embodiment, after the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed or when the total number of game balls entering the large prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In contrast, for example, the upper limit number may be varied depending on the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state again when the total number of game balls entering the large prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit of eight. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit to any number other than eight. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set a different upper limit depending on the allocation results. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set a different upper limit for each round during one opening/closing execution mode.

(4) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when the total number of game balls entering the special prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to include an end trigger opening that sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state when a game ball enters the special prize opening, and to allow a ball to enter the end trigger opening after a predetermined time has elapsed.
(5) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the door 272 to the open state, and then sets the door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the door 272 to the open state, and then set the door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined time has elapsed since a prize was won in the special prize opening 271.

(6) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the door 272 to the open state, and then sets the door 272 to the closed state again. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the door 272 to the open state, and then proceed to the next round of play without setting the door 272 to the closed state again.
(7) In the present embodiment, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set to be shorter than the ball launch cycle. In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode may be set to be equal to or longer than the ball launch cycle, but equal to or shorter than n times the ball launch cycle (n = 1, 2, or 3).

(8) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 had two types of opening/closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 had an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is played twice with a short-time upper limit duration, and an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is played 15 times with a long-time upper limit duration. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may have opening/closing execution modes that differ in the type of upper limit duration or the number of times round games are played. Furthermore, instead of being configured to set multiple types of opening/closing execution modes by varying the type of upper limit duration, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to set multiple types of opening/closing execution modes by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 272, such as half open or fully open. Furthermore, the type of upper limit duration may be set so that although it appears to the player to be the same, the exact upper limit duration is different.

(9) In this reference embodiment, the game results and the effects for the open/close execution mode were preset to correspond one-to-one. In contrast, for example, the effects for the open/close execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from multiple types of effects without corresponding to the game results, or may be set by selecting from multiple types of effects by lottery or the selection rate may vary depending on the game results.

(10) In this reference form, when the game result is either a "special losing result," "non-disclosed low-round high-probability result," or "disclosed low-round high-probability result," the MPU 52 determines information related to a special symbol combination as the stop result to be finally displayed on the pay line L, and this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result. Alternatively, the MPU 52 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result, making it difficult for the player to determine which game result it is.

(11) In this embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine whether a jackpot occurs, and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. Alternatively, the MPU 42 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 does not need to be provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

(12) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of loss results: a "special loss result" and a "normal loss result." The MPU 42 executes the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot by comparing a win/lose table that stores the value of a random number that will result in a jackpot with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442. In other words, the MPU 42 executes the lottery for the "special loss result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Alternatively, the MPU 42 may execute the lottery for the "special loss result" by using a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 that is provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to execute the lottery for the "special loss result."

(13) In this reference form, in a gaming state in which the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, there are two random number values that result in a "special missing result," and in a gaming state in which the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, there is one random number value that results in a "special missing result." In other words, the probability of a "special missing result" is set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. In contrast, the probability of a "special missing result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, or may be set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Furthermore, the probability of a "special missing result" may be set to be zero in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 creates advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by setting the win/lose lottery mode and the support mode. However, it may also create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by setting game states other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game plays for which the high-frequency support mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by determining whether or not to transition to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game plays for which the high-probability mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

(15) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 stores the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 in the first result display reserve area Ra and stores the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 in the second result display reserve area Rb, thereby separately storing the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may store the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 together.
(16) In this embodiment, the MPU 42 preferentially sets the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 for consumption of game times regardless of whether there is reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25. In contrast, the MPU 42 may set the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 for consumption of game times in the order in which the reserved information is awarded.

(17) In this embodiment, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the audio and light emitting control device 5, and the audio and light emitting control device 5 transmits a command resulting from analyzing the command to the display control device 6, thereby controlling the display control device 6. Alternatively, the main control device 4 may transmit a command to the display control device 6, and the display control device 6 may transmit a command resulting from analyzing the command to the audio and light emitting control device 5, thereby controlling the audio and light emitting control device 5. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control device 4 to the audio and light emitting control device 5 and the commands transmitted from the audio and light emitting control device 5 to the display control device 6 are not limited to the commands described in this embodiment and are arbitrary.
(18) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control device 4, the sound and light emitting control device 5, and the display control device 6 as separate control devices. However, for example, the sound and light emitting control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be included as the same control device, or at least one of the sound and light emitting control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be included as the same control device as the main control device 4.

(19) In this embodiment, the symbol display device 36 executes a game round effect on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on a winning combination in the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, thereby starting a variable symbol display. However, the game round effect is not limited to the effect described in this embodiment and is optional. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining and operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 2 with the symbol display device 36. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining and operating a light-emitting member provided on the game board 2 with the symbol display device 36. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining and operating these decorative members and light-emitting members with the symbol display device 36.

(20) In this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 executes an internal lottery (win/lose lottery and allocation lottery) based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, and then the main display unit 34 and the pattern display device 36 execute a variable display and, as a result of stopping the variable display, display the result of the internal lottery executed based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. In contrast, for example, the main display unit 34 and the pattern display device 36 may start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and, as a result of stopping the variable display, display the result of the internal lottery executed after starting the variable display. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is executed and the stop result, etc. are set.

(21) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main display unit 34, which executes the variable display of the images and displays the result of the internal lottery as the result of the variable display stopping. In contrast, for example, the main display unit 34 may display the same stop result as the result of the variable display stopping, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, or may display the stop result randomly so that the result of the internal lottery cannot be identified. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with a main display unit 34.

(22) In this reference embodiment, the pattern display device 36 executes a game round effect on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, thereby starting a variable display of the patterns. In contrast, the pattern display device 36 may execute a game round effect on the display screen G by displaying a pattern (picture) that clearly indicates the result of an internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 36 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area smaller than the area displaying the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 and an area on the periphery of the area displaying the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3, and when the variable display of the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbol displayed in this predetermined area may be variable or may be hidden while the variable display of the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is in progress.

The symbols displayed in the designated area may use letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for players to distinguish, or a combination of these. Furthermore, even if the letters, colors, or patterns are not difficult for players to distinguish, similar symbols or combinations of similar symbols may be used to make the symbols difficult for players to distinguish. This allows the gaming center manager, for example, to easily check whether fraudulent activity is occurring by visually checking the symbol display device 36, without visually checking the main display unit 34, at the end of a round of play, in an attempt to make the pachinko machine 1 behave in the same way as if it had won a jackpot lottery.

(23) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to operate independently, but it may also be configured to send and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. For example, the gaming machine may be configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like on the gaming machine, and the optical code information can be captured and read by a camera on a mobile phone or the like, and then accessed to a website, thereby transmitting gaming machine information to a web server. The gaming machine may also be configured so that information from a web server can be received by a player operating a button or the like on the gaming machine to enter a password issued by accessing a website into the gaming machine.

(24) In this embodiment, a pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a type of pachinko machine different from pachinko machine 1. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine that releases an electric device a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area, or a pachinko machine that generates the right to win a jackpot when a gaming ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of gaming machine, such as an arrange ball machine or a mahjong ball machine.

[Reference form M]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment M of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In this reference embodiment, the main control device 4 executes processing different from that in the main reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the winning processing for the operating port differs from that in the main reference embodiment. The details of the winning processing for the operating port in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port according to the reference form M of the present invention.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208M as shown in Fig. 29. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the main embodiment in that it executes the process of step S208M instead of the process of step S208.

In step S208M, when the MPU 42 sets the first start hold memory number RaN in step S202, it sets a first hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and transmits this set first hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This first hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25. The first hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the first reserve lamp unit 371 and executes other predetermined processes based on the first reserve generation command sent from the MPU 42. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the upper operating port 25 is four, and the first reserve lamp unit 371 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the first pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

Also, in step S208M, when the MPU 42 sets the second start hold memory number RbN in step S204, it sets a second hold generation command for recognizing that the hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Rb for the second result display section, and transmits this set second hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This second hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the second result display section hold area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The second hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the second reserve lamp unit 372 and executes other predetermined processes based on the second reserve generation command sent from the MPU 42. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the lower actuation port 26 is four, and the second reserve lamp unit 372 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the second pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the main reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing are different from those in the main reference embodiment. The contents of the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Hold occurrence processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 30. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process of step S2204, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2210M before executing the process of step S2205, and differs from the main embodiment in that it executes the process of step S2207M instead of the process of step S2207.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2210M, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210M that there is no advance notice reservation information, it executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation in step S2205. In this lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue an advance notice reservation.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, a notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc. to notify the player of the expected level of the hold, or a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect that notifies the player of the expected level of the hold by displaying the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that in this reference form, a notice hold that executes a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect will be explained, and an explanation of notice holds that execute other notice displays will be omitted.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the notice pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
Based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the advance notice hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, or if it determines in step S2210M that notice hold information exists, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of the aforementioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In this way, in this reference form, the MPU 52 can generate only one advance notice hold in the sub-side hold area that executes an advance notice display that generates a pre-reading effect, and cannot generate multiple advance notice holds in the sub-side hold area.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 is not configured to be able to generate multiple advance reservations in the sub-side reservation area, but it may be configured to be able to do so.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207M or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold or a normal hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold image or normal hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process.
In the hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2309M to S2308 as shown in Fig. 31. Note that this embodiment differs from the main embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2309M before executing the process of step S2301, executes the process of step S2310M after executing the process of step S2304, and executes the process of step S2311M after executing the process of step S2307.

In step S2309M, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
The process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur will be described in detail below.

<Pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
In the process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur, the MPU 52 executes steps S5001 to S5011 as shown in FIG.
In step S5001, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5001 that there is no advance notice pending information, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5002 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5001 that there is advance notice pending information, it determines in step S5002 whether or not a look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for identifying that a look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the look-ahead effect occurring flag when a look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the look-ahead effect occurring flag when the look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S5003 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it acquires the pre-reading pending number PN in step S5003.

Here, the number of advance pending information PN is the total number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area that will be executed before the advance pending information.
For example, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

In this case, even if normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the normal hold information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa will be executed after the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In step S5004, the MPU 52 acquires the notice pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) included in the notice pending information and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In step S5005, the MPU 52 determines whether the win/loss result acquired in step S5004, i.e., the win/loss result included in the advance notice reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area, is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S5005 that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S5006 onward, and if it determines in step S5005 that the win/loss result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S5009 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S5006 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5005 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S5006, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S5003 is "4" or less.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5006 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "4" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5007 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5006 that the number of pre-read pending PN is "4" or less, it sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007.
In step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0" for the number of times. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.

Next, the process (the process from step S5009 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5005 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S5009, the MPU 52 determines whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery acquired in step S5004, i.e., the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area, is a "win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win," it executes the processing from step S5010 onwards, and if it determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win," it executes the processing from step S5011 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S5010 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "winning" will be described.
In step S5010, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S5003 is "3" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the pre-read pending number PN is "3" or less, it executes the processes from step S5007 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "3" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5007 onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S5011 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" will be described.
In step S5011, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S5003 is "2" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5011 that the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "2", it executes the processes from step S5007 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5011 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "2" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5007 onwards.

In this way, in this reference form, if the number of pre-reading pending PN is "4" or less, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process determines in step S5007 that a pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 and that a pre-reading effect will be generated.
Specifically, the pre-reading effect occurs when the result of the pre-reading held information is a "jackpot win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "4" or less, when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "3" or less, and when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is not a "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "2" or less.

In other words, if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN, which is the sum of the number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that is executed before the advance pending information, is "4", then the win/loss result contained in the advance pending information is confirmed to be "jackpot win", and if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", then the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance pending information is confirmed to be "win".
In this reference form, the pre-reading effect also occurs when advance notice hold information is executed, so if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "4", it will occur four times in a row, if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", it will occur three times in a row, and if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "2", it will occur two times in a row.

Returning to the explanation of the hold shift process, the process from step S2301 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received a first shift command, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S2302 to S2310M, and if it determines in step S2301 that it has not received a first shift command (if it determines that it has received a second shift command), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2311M.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2310M will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 sequentially to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

In step S2310M, the MPU 52 clears the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54. This second hold effect flag is a flag for identifying that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE. In step S2310M, the MPU 52 clears the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54, which indicates that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa has been moved to the execution area SAE.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2311M will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 sequentially to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

In step S2311M, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect flag in RAM 54. This second hold effect flag is a flag for identifying that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE. In step S2311M, the MPU 52 sets the second hold effect flag in RAM 54, which indicates that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE.

After executing the processing of step S2310M or step S2311M, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display shift command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the main reference embodiment. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the main reference embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 33, instead of the process of step S2407, it executes the process of step S2407M.

In step S2407M, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407M, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S5101 to S5108 as shown in FIG.

In step S5101, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5101 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S5102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5101 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S5106 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S5102 onwards) when it is determined in step S5101 that the MPU 52 has set a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 will be described.
In step S5102, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect has been consumed.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect has been consumed.
In the process of determining whether to consume the advance reading effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S5201 to S5214 as shown in FIG.

In step S5201, the MPU 52 obtains the execution-time prefetch pending number APN.

Here, the execution-time pre-read hold number APN is the total number of advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area at the time of execution of the current sub-side hold information, and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that will be executed before the advance hold information.
For example, as mentioned above, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Thereafter, when executing the normal hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.
In this case, if normal hold information is also stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the three sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.

In step S5202, the MPU 52 determines whether the execution time pre-reading pending number APN acquired in step S5201 is less than the pre-reading pending number PN.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processes in step S5203 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-reading pending number APN is not less than the pre-reading pending number PN, it executes the processes from step S5210 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S5203 onward) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5203, "0" is substituted into the pending synthesis notice consumption count CN stored in the RAM 54 to reset it. The pending synthesis notice consumption count CN will be described in detail later.

In step S5204, the MPU 52 executes a pre-reading effect generation process. In this pre-reading effect generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether a pre-reading effect will occur based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54. Specifically, if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "0," the MPU 52 determines whether a first pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "1," the MPU 52 determines whether a second pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "2," the MPU 52 determines whether a third pre-reading effect will occur; and if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "3," the MPU 52 determines whether a fourth pre-reading effect will occur.

In step S5205, the MPU 52 sets a pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the pre-reading effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 is included in the pre-reading effect generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This pre-reading effect generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the pre-reading effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect is to be played PRN included in the pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the first look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the second look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the third look-ahead effect has occurred; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the fourth look-ahead effect has occurred.

In step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S5207, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.

In step S5208, it is determined whether the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5208 that the value of the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "0", then in step S5209, the MPU 52 clears the pre-read effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read effect.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5208 that the value of the number of pre-read pending PN is not "0" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance consumption determination process without executing the processing of step S5209.

Next, the process (the process from step S5210 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5210, the MPU 52 executes a reserved composite notice generation process. In this reserved composite notice generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether to generate a reserved composite notice based on the number of times CN of reserved composite notices stored in the RAM 54.

Here, the reserved combination notice is a notice display that combines multiple play times to make it appear to the player as a single play time. This reserved combination notice occurs only while a pre-reading effect is occurring, and the reserved time is consumed without consuming the pre-reading effect. In this reference form, the reserved combination notice generates a pseudo consecutive effect in which a pseudo-variable display showing a predetermined stop result is executed over multiple play times after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 36, thereby pseudo-combining multiple play times to make it appear to the player as a single play time.
In this embodiment, the reserved combination notice employs a pseudo-consecutive effect, but other notice displays may be employed. In short, the reserved combination notice may be a notice display that artificially combines multiple game turns to make it appear to the player as a single game turn.

Specifically, in the hold combination notice generation process of step S5210, if the number of times the hold combination notice has been played, CN, is "0", MPU 52 determines that the first hold combination notice will be played, i.e., the first pseudo consecutive effect will occur; if the number of times the hold combination notice has been played, CN, is "1", MPU 52 determines that the second hold combination notice will be played, i.e., the second pseudo consecutive effect will occur; and if the number of times the hold combination notice has been played, CN, is "N", MPU 52 determines that the N+1th hold combination notice will be played, i.e., the N+1th pseudo consecutive effect will occur.

In step S5211, the MPU 52 sets a hold composite notice generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the hold composite notice generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times CN that the hold composite notice has been consumed stored in the RAM 54 is included in the hold composite notice generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold composite notice generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a reserved composite notification on the symbol display device 36 based on the reserved composite notification generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the reserved composite notification has been consumed (CN) included in the reserved composite notification generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the reserved composite notification on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the reserved composite notification. Specifically, if the number of times the hold combination notification has been used, CN, is "0", the MPU 52 notifies the player of the first hold combination notification, i.e., the first occurrence of a pseudo consecutive effect; if the number of times the hold combination notification has been used, CN, is "1", the MPU 52 notifies the player of the second hold combination notification, i.e., the second occurrence of a pseudo consecutive effect; and if the number of times the hold combination notification has been used, CN, is "N", the MPU 52 notifies the player of the N+1th hold combination notification, i.e., the N+1th occurrence of a pseudo consecutive effect.

In step S5212, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pending synthesis notice has been consumed CN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S5213, the MPU 52 determines whether the value of the number of times CN that the pending synthesis notice has been consumed, stored in the RAM 54, is "1" or less.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5213 that the value of the number of times CN of the reserved combination notice is consumed is "1" or less (if the first reserved combination notice is generated), it executes the processing from step S5204 onwards. In other words, the MPU 52 executes the generation of the pre-reading effect and the first reserved combination notice, i.e., the generation of the first pseudo consecutive effect, during one game round.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5213 that the value of the number of times the reserved synthesis notice has been consumed CN is not less than "1" (if the second or subsequent reserved synthesis notice has been generated), it determines in step S5214 whether the value of the execution-time pre-read reserve number APN obtained in step S5201 is less than "0".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5214 that the value of the execution time pre-read pending number APN is "0" or less, it executes the processing from step S5208 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5214 that the value of the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not "0" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance consumption determination process.
In this way, the MPU 52 is configured not to execute the occurrence of the pre-reading effect and the second or subsequent pending synthesis notice, i.e., the second or subsequent pseudo consecutive effect, during one game round.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process, the process from step S5103 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S5102, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S5103 onwards described above.

In step S5103, it is determined whether the value of the number of times CN of the reserved synthesis notice stored in RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5103 that the value of the consumption count CN of the reserved composite notice is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of determining a pseudo consecutive effect in step S5104. In the process of determining a pseudo consecutive effect, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display that generates a normal pseudo consecutive effect in which the above-mentioned pseudo variable display is executed multiple times during one game.

After executing the process of step S5104, or if it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the consumption count CN of the reserved composite notice is not "0" or less, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining other effect patterns in step S5015. In the process of determining other effect patterns, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display other than the pre-reading effect and the pseudo consecutive effect. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the process of determining the effect pattern.
In this way, the MPU 52 is configured not to generate the normal pseudo consecutive effects when a pending composite notice occurs.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5101 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, it determines in step S5106 whether the second pending effect flag is set in RAM 54.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5106 that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S5104 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5106 that the second hold effect flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a second hold effect generation process in step S5107. In this second hold effect generation process, the MPU 52 generates a second hold effect that is executed only when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE in a state where no pre-reading effect is occurring. This second hold effect will be described in detail later.

In step S5108, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the second hold effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This second hold effect generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the second hold effect generation command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the second hold effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G to notify the player that the second hold effect has occurred.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Specifically, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 36(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 36(D) is a diagram showing the state in which the third pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 36(E) is a diagram showing the state in which the fourth pre-reading effect related to this advance notice pending information is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area.

As shown in Figure 36 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 36 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of symbols based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 36, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 36 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 36 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
36A, the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa stores advance notice pending information, and the first, second, and third areas SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa store regular pending information. In this case, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "4" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and will set the advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007 only if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win."
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the third hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 36, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is a "jackpot win."

In the example of Figure 36, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
36B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the regular pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2. In this case, the two sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the pattern display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 36(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B13) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 36(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and bases B11 and B12).

In the example of Figure 36 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 36 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 36 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 36 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "3".
36C, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 36 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 36 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 36 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 36 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "2".
36(D), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 36 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 36 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 36 (E), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 36 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the third pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 36 (E), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 36 (E), the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "3." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching 8 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 36, the pre-reading effect occurs four times in a row, so it is confirmed that the win/loss result contained in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached a maximum of eight marks, so using this as a guide, the player can determine that the win/loss result contained in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

Figure 37 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 37(A) shows the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 37(B) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 37(C) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 37(D) shows the state in which the third pre-reading effect related to advance notice pending information has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area.

As shown in Figure 37(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 37(A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 37, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B13.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 37 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 37 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
37A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the regular pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2. In this case, the two sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 37, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 37, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win." Therefore, when the first hold shift process is performed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
37B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the pattern display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 37(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 37(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 37 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 37 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 37 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 37 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "2".
37C, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 37 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 37 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 37 (D), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 37 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 37 (D), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 37 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 37, the pre-read effect occurs three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 38 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 38(A) shows the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 38(B) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 38(C) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect related to this advance notice pending information has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area.

As shown in Figure 38(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 38(A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 38, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 38 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 38 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
38A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 38, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 38, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
38B, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 38 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 38 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 38 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 38 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 38 (C), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 38 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

As such, in the example of Figure 38, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

Figure 39 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area and before the pre-reading effect occurs. Specifically, Figure 39(A) shows the state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 39(B) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 39(C) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 39(D) shows the state in which the third pre-reading effect related to this advance notice hold information has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area.

As shown in Figure 39(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 39(A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 39, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 39 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B12 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 39 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
39A, the advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side pending area SRb. In this case, the two sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 39, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 39, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win." Therefore, when the first pending shift process is performed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
39B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the pattern display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 39(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 39(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 39 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 39 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 39 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 39 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".
39C, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 39 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 39 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 39 (D), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 39 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 39 (D), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 39 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 39, the pre-read effect occurs three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

<About the flow when normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area after the pre-reading effect occurs>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when, after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area, normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area after the occurrence of a pre-reading effect. Specifically, FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 40(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 40(C) is a diagram showing a state in which normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area when the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 40(D) is a diagram showing a state in which the second pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 40(E) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect is generated. Also, FIG. 40(F) is a diagram showing a state in which the second pre-reading effect is generated.

As shown in Figure 40 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 40 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 40, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 40 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 40 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
40A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 40, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 40, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
40B, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 40 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Here, after the pre-reading effect occurs, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the base B21, as shown in Figure 40 (C).

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 40 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 40 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Here, in the example of Figure 40 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
40(D), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5210, executes a pending synthesis notification generation process, and in step S5211, sets a pending synthesis notification generation command.
Then, based on the hold composite notice generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times CN that the hold composite notice has been consumed, which is included in this hold composite notice generation command, the MPU 62 displays the hold composite notice on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the hold composite notice.

Specifically, in step S5203, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pending combination announcement has been consumed, CN, stored in RAM 54, by substituting "0". Therefore, based on the stop result command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as stop results to notify the result of the win/loss lottery. As shown in FIG. 40(E), the MPU 62 displays a devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the first pending combination announcement, i.e., the first pseudo-consecutive effect, by having this character say "One more time!"

Thereafter, since the first pseudo consecutive performance has been completed, in step S5212 the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite notice has been consumed stored in the RAM 54, thereby updating it to "1." Therefore, in step S5213 the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite notice has been consumed stored in the RAM 54 is "1" or less, so in step S5204 it executes a look-ahead performance generation process, and in step S5205 it sets a look-ahead performance generation command.
Then, based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN contained in this pre-reading effect generation command, MPU 62 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect (see Figures 40 (D) and (E)).

In the examples of Figures 40 (D) and (E), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 40 (F), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 40 (F), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 40 (F), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "0".
Also, in the example of Figure 40 (F), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5210, executes a pending synthesis notification generation process, and in step S5211, sets a pending synthesis notification generation command.
Then, based on the hold composite notice generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times CN that the hold composite notice has been consumed, which is included in this hold composite notice generation command, the MPU 62 displays the hold composite notice on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the hold composite notice.

Specifically, since the first pseudo consecutive display has been completed, in step S5212 the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the reserved combination notification has been completed, CN, stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40 (F), the MPU 62 displays "x2" in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to notify the player of the second reserved combination notification, i.e., the occurrence of the second pseudo consecutive display.

Thereafter, since the second pseudo consecutive performance has been completed, in step S5212 the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite announcement that has been consumed stored in the RAM 54, updating it to "2." Therefore, in step S5213 the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite announcement that has been consumed stored in the RAM 54 is not "1" or less, and in step S5214 determines that the value of the execution-time pre-read reserved number APN is "0" or less.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S5208 that the value of the read-ahead pending number PN is equal to or less than "0," and therefore clears the read-ahead performance flag stored in the RAM 54 in step S5209 to terminate the read-ahead performance. As a result, the MPU 52 terminates the read-ahead performance without executing the third read-ahead performance.

As such, in the example of Figure 40, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

<About the flow when normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when no pre-reading performance has occurred>
Figure 41 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when no pre-reading effect has occurred. Specifically, Figure 41 (A) is a diagram showing a state in which normal reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area, and normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area. Also, Figure 41 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first reserved shift process has been executed after normal reserved information has been stored in each area. Also, Figure 41 (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the second reserved shift process has been executed after normal reserved information has been stored in each area.

As shown in Figure 41 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 41 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes a normal hold generation process in step S2208 and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 41, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and stores the normal hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserve area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that a normal hold has occurred.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the base B12. Also, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the base B21.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 41 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it, and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B12 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 41 (B), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
Here, in the example of Figure 41 (A), normal hold information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after normal hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it determines in step S5001 that there is no advance hold information, and therefore does not set the pre-reading performance occurrence flag in RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 does not set the pre-reading effect occurring flag in the RAM 54, it determines in step S5106 whether the second pending effect flag is set in the RAM 54.

Here, in the example of Figure 41 (B), the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE, so in step S2311M, the second hold effect flag is set in RAM 54.
Therefore, in step S5106, the MPU 52 determines that the second hold effect flag is set in the RAM 54, and therefore in step S5107, executes the second hold effect generation process, and in step S5108, sets the second hold effect generation command.
Then, based on the second hold effect generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the second hold effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the MPU 62 displays the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying and executing the second pending effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 41 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, and shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 41 (C), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 41 (C), the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa has been moved to the execution area SAE, so in step S2310M, the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54 is cleared.
Therefore, in step S5106, the MPU 52 determines that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54, and therefore in step S5104, executes a process to determine a pseudo consecutive effect, and in step S5105, executes a process to determine other effect patterns.

In this way, in the example of FIG. 41, when a pre-reading effect is not occurring, normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, and therefore when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 generates the second hold effect. Furthermore, the second hold effect is only executed when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE when a pre-reading effect is not occurring, so the player can enjoy an effect that is different from the effect executed when a pre-reading effect is occurring or when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa is moved to the execution area SAE.

In this way, in this embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance.
The process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect in step S5102 functions as a period effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (period effect) for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 (first starting ball entry means).
In addition, the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S2407M functions as a special presentation generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second pending presentation (special presentation) different from the pre-reading presentation based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 (second starting ball entry means), and executes the pre-reading presentation instead of the second pending presentation based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period.

In this reference embodiment, the first starting ball entry means employs the upper actuation port 25, and the second starting ball entry means employs the lower actuation port 26, but any configuration may be used. For example, the first starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, various actuation ports, and a through gate, and the second starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, various actuation ports, and a through gate. Furthermore, the first starting ball entry means and the second starting ball entry means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize entry port or inside the special device.

With this configuration, the effect pattern determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect, which is different from the look-ahead effect, based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26, and executes a look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 during a predetermined period. In this way, if the pachinko machine 1 has executed a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25, it can execute a look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the pattern display device 36 is executing a variable display, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process (first hold storage means) of step S2202 in which hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, a process (second hold storage means) of step S2203 in which hold information is stored in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 in which the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is shifted toward the execution area SAE.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

With this configuration, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect instead of the second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

In this reference embodiment, the hold shift process in step S2104 prioritizes shifting the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, but the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb does not have to prioritize shifting toward the execution area SAE. For example, the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb may be shifted toward the execution area SAE in the order in which the balls entered.

In addition, in this reference form, when reserve information is stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa by the first reserve storage means, the period effect is a pre-reading effect that notifies the player of the expected value of the reserved information by an effect based on the reserved information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which will be consumed before the reserved information.

Here, since the period effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa while causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the effect pattern determination process can execute a look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower actuation port 26 during a specified period, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

In this reference embodiment, the period effect uses a look-ahead effect, but any effect can be used as long as it is executed by the symbol display device 36 for a predetermined period of time. For example, other effects such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved symbol to notify the player of the expected degree of the reserved symbol may also be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predictive effect notifies the player of the expectation of the predictive effect based on the length of a predetermined period.
Specifically, if the pre-reading effect occurred four times in a row, the result of the win/loss contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "jackpot win," and if it occurred three times in a row, the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "win."

With this configuration, the predictive effect notifies the player of the expected outcome based on the length of the specified period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the specified period.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the likelihood of a predictive effect based on the number of times it occurs consecutively, but it is sufficient if the player is notified of the likelihood of a predictive effect based on the length of a predetermined period of time. For example, the player may be notified of the likelihood of a predictive effect based on the length of the effect's duration.

In addition, in this reference form, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during a specified period, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on the priority reserve information (first reserve combination notice) with the effect based on the reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb that is to be consumed after the priority reserve information (second reserve combination notice), and functions as an effect combination means that presents the result to the player as a single game session.

With this configuration, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on the reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game session.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the symbol display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in place of the second reserve effect based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

In this reference form, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect combines an effect based on priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that will be consumed after the priority hold information, but it may also be possible to combine an effect based on priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that will be consumed before the priority hold information.

In addition, in this reference form, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect stops the progress of the pre-reading effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo-consecutive effect (special effect) based on priority hold information with a pseudo-consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb, which is consumed after the priority hold information.
The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance different from the pre-reading performance and the second hold performance, and can be executed in overlap with the pre-reading performance.

With this configuration, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process stops the progress of the pre-reading effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

In this reference form, the special effect uses a pseudo-consecutive effect, but this is different from the pre-reading effect and the second hold effect, and any effect that can be executed in conjunction with the pre-reading effect may be used. For example, it may be an effect that displays a specific character or the like as a video on the display screen G, an effect that displays a background by changing it, or an effect that displays a changed form of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

In addition, in this reference form, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect in step S5102 functions as a development effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (development effect) that develops gradually over a predetermined number of game plays based on the establishment of the first trigger (the game ball entering the upper operating port 25).
In addition, the hold shift processing in step S2104 functions as a means for increasing the number of times the advancement performance is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger (the game ball entering the lower operating port 26).
The process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect functions as a means for reducing the number of times of development effect play when the number of times of play of the pre-reading effect is increased by the hold shift process.

With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that decreases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played if the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the first trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port 25, and the second trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the lower operating port 26, but any other elements may be used. For example, the first trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize port, V prize port, general prize port, each operating port, or through gate, and the second trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize port, V prize port, general prize port, each operating port, or through gate. Furthermore, the first trigger and the second trigger may be triggered by elements other than a game ball entering the port.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, the hold shift process can increase the number of times the pre-reading effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the development effect is a look-ahead effect, so if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that reduces the number of times the look-ahead effect is played when the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number of times based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the predictive effect notifies the player of the expected outcome based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single play round.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play rounds of the pre-reading effect through reserve shift processing based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, without changing the number of play rounds.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the look-ahead effect consumption determination process stops the progress of the look-ahead effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play times of the look-ahead effect through the hold shift process based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

In addition, in this reference form, the process of determining whether to consume the advance reading effect in step S5102 functions as a first game round effect generation means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect (game round effect) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25.
In addition, the process of determining whether to consume the advance-reading effect also functions as a second game turn effect generating means that causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26.
The process of determining whether to consume the advance-reading effects also functions as a game-round effect synthesis means that synthesizes the pseudo consecutive effects of the first game-round effect generation means and the pseudo consecutive effects of the second game-round effect generation means, and presents the result to the player as a single game-round effect.

With this configuration, the first game turn effect generation means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the upper actuation port 25, and the second game turn effect generation means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the lower actuation port 26. The game turn effect synthesis means then synthesizes the pseudo consecutive effect of the first game turn effect generation means and the pseudo consecutive effect of the second game turn effect generation means, making it appear to the player as a single pseudo consecutive effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference form, the game round effect uses a pseudo-consecutive effect, but any effect that occurs over one game round can be used. For example, it can be an effect in which a specific character is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G, an effect in which the background is changed, or an effect in which the shape of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is changed and displayed.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the actuation ports 25, 26 both open upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically, with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. In contrast, the actuation ports 25, 26 may be arranged, for example, on both sides in the horizontal left and right directions, or in any other positional relationship. Furthermore, while the actuation ports 25, 26 are configured to allow game balls that have passed through separate flow paths to enter, they may also be configured, for example, to distribute game balls that have passed through a common flow path to one of the actuation ports 25, 26, allowing the distributed game balls to enter.

In addition, in this reference form, the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S2407M functions as a continuous presentation generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a series of pseudo consecutive presentations (continuous presentations) that consecutively repeat multiple presentations based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26).
The pseudo consecutive performances include a reserved composite notice (composite consecutive performance) that executes a series of pseudo consecutive performances by combining multiple game plays, and a normal pseudo consecutive performance (normal consecutive performance) that executes a series of pseudo consecutive performances during one game play.

With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a presentation pattern determination process in step S2407M that causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a series of pseudo consecutive presentations that consecutively execute multiple presentations based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. The pseudo consecutive presentations include a hold combination notice that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations by combining multiple play rounds, and a regular pseudo consecutive presentation that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations during a single play round. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the types of pseudo consecutive presentations.

In this reference embodiment, the continuous effects employ pseudo-continuous effects, but any effect can be used as long as it involves multiple effects being performed in succession. For example, it can be an effect in which a specific character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G, an effect in which the background is changed, or an effect in which the shape of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is changed and displayed.

In this embodiment, the specified trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, but any other trigger may be used. For example, the specified trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize port, V prize port, general prize port, each actuation port, or through gate. Furthermore, the specified trigger may be triggered by a different trigger than a game ball entering the port.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The process of determining the effect pattern causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect that is different from the look-ahead effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26, and causes the look-ahead effect to be executed in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 during a predetermined period. According to this, when the pachinko machine 1 has caused the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25, it can execute a look-ahead effect in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(2) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect instead of the second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

(3) Because the period effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb while the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, the continuity of the look-ahead effect will be lost. With this configuration, the effect pattern determination process can execute the look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower actuation port 26 during a predetermined period, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.
(4) The predictive effect notifies the player of the expectation level of the predictive effect based on the length of the predetermined period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the predetermined period.

(5) When the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines an effect based on this priority reserve information with an effect based on reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game session.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in place of the second reserve effect based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

(6) The process for determining whether to complete the look-ahead effect stops the progress of the look-ahead effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute the look-ahead effect in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

(7) The audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that decreases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played if the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased to a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

(8) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, the hold shift process can increase the number of times the pre-reading effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

(9) Since the development effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect will be lost. According to this configuration, the sound and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that reduces the number of times the look-ahead effect is played when the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number of times based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times.
(10) The predictive effect notifies the player of the expectation of the predictive effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

(11) When the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single play round.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play rounds of the pre-reading effect through reserve shift processing based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, without changing the number of play rounds.

(12) The process for determining whether to complete the look-ahead effect stops the progress of the look-ahead effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play times of the look-ahead effect through the hold shift process based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the specified number of play times, without changing the specified number of play times.

(13) The first game turn effect generating means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the upper actuation port 25, and the second game turn effect generating means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the lower actuation port 26. The game turn effect combining means combines the pseudo consecutive effect of the first game turn effect generating means and the pseudo consecutive effect of the second game turn effect generating means, and presents the result to the player as a single pseudo consecutive effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(14) The audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a process for determining a presentation pattern in step S2407M, which causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a series of pseudo consecutive presentations that consecutively execute multiple presentations based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. The pseudo consecutive presentations include a hold combination notice that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations by combining multiple play rounds, and a regular pseudo consecutive presentation that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations during a single play round. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can make a series of multiple types of pseudo consecutive presentations appear to the player as the same series of pseudo consecutive presentations, thereby diversifying the types of pseudo consecutive presentations and allowing the player to play comfortably.

[Reference form N]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment N of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the reference form M, the pending synthesis notice generates a pseudo consecutive effect in which a pseudo-variable display showing a predetermined stop result is executed over multiple game rounds after the variable display has started on the pattern display device 36, thereby pseudo-combining multiple game rounds and making it appear to the player as a single game round.
In contrast, in this reference form, the hold synthesis effect occurs only while the pre-reading effect is occurring, and differs from the reference form M in that one pre-reading effect is consumed by synthesizing multiple play times from the start to the end of the hold synthesis effect.

In this reference form, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the reference form M. Specifically, in this reference form, the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur and the process for determining the effect pattern are different from those in the reference form M. The details of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur and the process for determining the effect pattern in this reference form are described below.

<Pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process according to the reference form N of the present invention.
In the process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur, the MPU 52 executes steps S5001 to S5012N as shown in Fig. 42. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment M in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S5008 and then executes the process of step S5012N.

In step S5012N, the MPU 52 clears and resets the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in RAM 54. This pending composite effect occurrence flag will be explained in detail later.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S5101 to S5108 as shown in FIG. 43. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment M in that the MPU 52 executes step S5102N instead of step S5102, and does not execute step S5103.

In step S5102N, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect has been consumed.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the process of determining whether to consume the advance reading effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S5201 to S5224N as shown in FIG.

In step S5201, the MPU 52 obtains the execution-time prefetch pending number APN.

Here, the execution-time pre-read hold number APN is the total number of advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area at the time of execution of the current sub-side hold information, and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that will be executed before the advance hold information.
For example, as mentioned above, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Thereafter, when executing the normal hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.
In this case, if normal hold information is also stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the three sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.

In step S5202, the MPU 52 determines whether the execution time pre-reading pending number APN acquired in step S5201 is less than the pre-reading pending number PN.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processing of step S5215N and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processing of step S5216N and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process from step S5215N onward) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5215N, it is determined whether a pending composite effect flag is set in the RAM 54. This pending composite effect flag is a flag for identifying that a pending composite effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the pending composite effect flag when a pending composite effect occurs, and clears the pending composite effect flag when the pending composite effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is not occurring, so it executes the processing from step S5204 onwards, as in the reference form M, and generates a pre-reading effect.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect generation flag is set in the RAM 54, this indicates that pending composite effect is occurring, and therefore executes the processing from step S5222N onward. The processing from step S5222N onward will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process after step S5216N) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5216N, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, similarly to step S5215N.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the pending composite effect occurring flag is not set in RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is not occurring, and therefore executes a pending composite effect start process in step S5217N. In this pending composite effect start process, the MPU 52 determines the start of a pending composite effect based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in RAM 54.

Here, the reserved combination effect is a notice display that consumes one read-ahead effect by combining multiple game times. This reserved combination effect occurs only while the read-ahead effect is occurring, and by combining multiple game times from the start to the end of the reserved combination effect, one read-ahead effect is consumed.
Specifically, in the pending combination effect start processing of step S5217N, the MPU 52 determines the start of a pending combination effect that consumes half of one pre-reading effect based on the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been consumed, which is stored in the RAM 54.

In step S5218N, the MPU 52 sets a hold compositing effect start command. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been used PRN stored in RAM 54 is included in the hold compositing effect start command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. The MPU 52 then stores the hold compositing effect start command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold compositing effect start command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the start of the reserved composite effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the reserved composite effect start command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect will be consumed PRN included in this reserved composite effect start command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the reserved composite effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the start of the reserved composite effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the first look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the second look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the third look-ahead effect; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the fourth look-ahead effect.

In step S5219N, the MPU 52 sets a pending composite effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54. The MPU 52 then terminates the pre-reading effect consumption determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is occurring, and therefore executes a pending composite effect digestion process in step S5220N. In this pending composite effect digestion process, the MPU 52 determines whether to digest the pending composite effect.
Specifically, in the pending composite effect consumption process of step S5220N, the MPU 52 determines to consume the pending composite effect by extending and prolonging one pre-reading effect without progressing it.

In step S5221N, the MPU 52 sets a pending composite effect consumption command. The MPU 52 then stores the pending composite effect consumption command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. The MPU 52 then terminates the pre-reading effect consumption determination process. This pending composite effect consumption command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the reserved composite effect consumption command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the consumption of the reserved composite effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to display the reserved composite effect on the display screen G and notify the player that the reserved composite effect has been consumed. Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the reserved composite effect, which is extended without progressing one look-ahead effect, has been consumed.

Next, the processing (processing from step S5222N onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54 will be described.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is occurring, and therefore executes pending composite effect termination processing in step S5222N. In this pending composite effect termination processing, the MPU 52 determines the termination of the pending composite effect based on the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been consumed, which is stored in the RAM 54.

Here, the reserved combination effect is a notice display that consumes one read-ahead effect by combining multiple game times. This reserved combination effect occurs only while the read-ahead effect is occurring, and by combining multiple game times from the start to the end of the reserved combination effect, one read-ahead effect is consumed.
Specifically, in the pending composite effect termination process of step S5222N, the MPU 52 determines the termination of the pending composite effect, which consumes half of one pre-reading effect, based on the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been consumed, stored in the RAM 54.

In step S5223N, the MPU 52 sets a pending composite effect end command. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been used PRN stored in RAM 54 is included in the pending composite effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. The MPU 52 then stores the pending composite effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This pending composite effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the pending composite effect end command sent from MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect has been used (PRN) included in the pending composite effect end command, the MPU 62 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the end of the pending composite effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the pending composite effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the end of the pending composite effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the first look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the second look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the third look-ahead effect; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the fourth look-ahead effect.

In step S5224N, the MPU 52 clears the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S5206 onwards, as in the above-mentioned reference form M.

<About the flow when normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area after the pre-reading effect occurs>
45 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when, after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area, normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area after the occurrence of a pre-reading effect. Specifically, FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 45(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 45(C) is a diagram showing a state in which normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area when the first pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 45(D) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area and a pre-reading effect related to the second pre-reading effect has been started. 45(E) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved composite effect related to the second pre-reading effect is consumed after the advance notice reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. Also, FIG. 45(F) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved composite effect related to the second pre-reading effect is terminated after the advance notice reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area.

As shown in Figure 45(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 45(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 45, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 45 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 45 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
45A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 45, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 45, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
45B, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5215N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
Here, in step S5012N, the MPU 52 clears and resets the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. In other words, when the MPU 52 generates a pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 clears and resets the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54.

Therefore, if the pending composite performance has not started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite performance occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, and therefore executes a pre-reading performance generation process in step S5204 and sets a pre-reading performance generation command in step S5205.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 45 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Here, after the pre-reading effect occurs, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 and the second area SRb2 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the bases B21 and B22, as shown in Figure 45 (C).

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 45 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B22, onto base B21, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 45 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 45 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
45(D), advance notice pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side pending area SRb. In this case, one sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5216N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the reserved combination effect has not started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the reserved combination effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, and therefore executes the reserved combination effect start process in step S5217N and sets the reserved combination effect start command in step S5218N. Thereafter, the MPU 52 sets the reserved combination effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5219N.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of the hold composite performance by displaying the hold composite performance on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold composite performance start command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-read performance has been consumed, which is included in this hold composite performance start command.

Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Based on this number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combined effect in which the gauge GB has reached three marks in order to perform half of the second pre-reading effect.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 45 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 45 (E), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 45 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first advance reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
45(E), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5216N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the pending composite effect has started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the pending composite effect occurring flag is set in RAM 54, and therefore executes the pending composite effect digestion process in step S5220N, and sets the pending composite effect digestion command in step S5221N.
Then, based on the reserved composite effect consumption command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the reserved composite effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that the reserved composite effect has been consumed.

Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the pending composite effect has been extended without progressing the second look-ahead effect. In other words, the MPU 62 keeps the gauge GB at three marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 45 (F), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 45 (F), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 45 (F), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 45 (F), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5215N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the reserved combination effect has started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the reserved combination effect in progress flag is set in the RAM 54, and then executes a reserved combination effect end process in step S5222N and sets a reserved combination effect end command in step S5223N. Thereafter, the MPU 52 clears the reserved combination effect in progress flag stored in the RAM 54 in step S5224N.
Then, based on the pending composite effect end command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in this pending composite effect end command, the MPU 62 displays the pending composite effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the end of the pending composite effect.

Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Based on this number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the pending combined effect, which has accumulated up to four marks on the gauge GB in order to perform half of the second pre-reading effect.

Then, in step S5207, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "0." In step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the pre-read pending number PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in RAM 54 to end the pre-read performance. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read performance without executing a third pre-read performance.

In this way, in the example of Figure 45, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

In this way, in this reference form, the predictive performance generation process functions as a first development performance generation means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a predictive performance (development performance) that develops gradually over a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25.
In addition, the pending composite effect start process functions as a second development effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26.
The pending synthesis effect consumption process and the pending synthesis effect end process function as an advanced effect synthesis means that synthesizes the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the pending synthesis effect start process to execute a series of look-ahead effects.

With this configuration, the look-ahead effect generation process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect that develops in stages over a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper operating port 25, and the hold combination effect start process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower operating port 26. The hold combination effect consumption process and hold combination effect end process can then execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effects of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effects of the hold combination effect start process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the actuation ports 25, 26 both open upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically, with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. In contrast, the actuation ports 25, 26 may be arranged, for example, on both sides in the horizontal left and right directions, or in any other positional relationship. Furthermore, while the actuation ports 25, 26 are configured to allow game balls that have passed through separate flow paths to enter, they may also be configured, for example, to distribute game balls that have passed through a common flow path to one of the actuation ports 25, 26, allowing the distributed game balls to enter.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.The hold composite effect consumption process and hold composite effect end process can then execute a series of pre-reading effects by combining the pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process and the pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the development effect is a look-ahead effect, so if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area while causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the hold composite effect consumption process and the hold composite effect end process execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the hold composite effect start process, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effects.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (11) in the embodiment M, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(15) The look-ahead effect generation process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect that develops stepwise over a predetermined period based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25, and the hold combination effect start process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The hold combination effect consumption process and the hold combination effect end process can execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the hold combination effect start process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(16) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The hold composite effect consumption process and the hold composite effect end process can execute a series of pre-reading effects by combining the pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process and the pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process.

(17) Because the development effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area while causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the hold composite effect consumption process and the hold composite effect end process execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the hold composite effect start process, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

[Reference form O]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment O of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned reference form M, when the number of times of playing the pre-reading effect is increased in the pending shift process, the MPU 52 causes the symbol display device 36 to continue executing the pre-reading effect.
In contrast, in this reference form, the MPU 52 differs from the reference form M in that when the number of times the pre-reading performance is played is increased by the hold shift processing, the MPU 52 causes the pattern display device 36 to stop executing the pre-reading performance.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in the reference embodiment M. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the processing for determining the presentation pattern differs from that in the reference embodiment M. The details of the processing for determining the presentation pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining a presentation pattern according to the reference form O of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern to select a presentation duration (presentation duration) and a presentation content as a presentation pattern. In this process for determining a presentation pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S5101 to S5108 as shown in Fig. 46. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 52 executes a pre-reading presentation completion determination process in step S5102O instead of the pre-reading presentation completion determination process in step S5102, and differs from the embodiment M in that it does not execute the process in step S5103.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the process of determining whether to perform the look-ahead effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S5201 to S5209 as shown in Fig. 47. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment M in that the MPU 52 does not execute the process of step S5203 and the processes of steps S5210 to S5214.

In step S5201, the MPU 52 obtains the execution-time prefetch pending number APN.

Here, the execution-time pre-read hold number APN is the total number of advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area at the time of execution of the current sub-side hold information, and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that will be executed before the advance hold information.
For example, as mentioned above, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Thereafter, when executing the normal hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.
In this case, if normal hold information is also stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the three sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.

In step S5202, the MPU 52 determines whether the execution time pre-reading pending number APN acquired in step S5201 is less than the pre-reading pending number PN.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processes from step S5204 onwards, as in the above-mentioned reference form M.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-reading pending number APN is not less than the pre-reading pending number PN, it executes the processes in and after step S5209.

<About the flow when normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area after the pre-reading effect occurs>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then normal pending information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserve area after the occurrence of a pre-reading effect. Specifically, FIG. 48(A) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 48(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 48(C) is a diagram showing a state in which normal pending information is stored in the second sub-side reserve area when the first pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 48(D) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and the pre-reading effect has ended. Also, FIG. 48(E) is a diagram showing a state in which the first variable display has started after the pre-reading effect has ended. Also, Figure 48 (F) is a diagram showing the state in which the second variable display has started after the pre-reading performance has ended.

As shown in Figure 48 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 48 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of symbols based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 48, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B13.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 48 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 48 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
48A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the regular pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2. In this case, the two sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," and if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," it will set a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54, the pre-reading effect will be continuously generated until the pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54 is cleared.
In the example of Figure 48, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 48, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
48B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5204, executes a pre-read performance generation process, and in step S5205, sets a pre-read performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 48 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Here, after the pre-reading effect occurs, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the base B21, as shown in Figure 48 (C).

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 48 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B12 without shifting it, and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 48 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Here, in the example of Figure 48 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".
48(D), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, one sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read performance without executing a second pre-read performance.

As such, in the example of Figure 48, the pre-read effect occurs only once, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached two marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

In this reference form, when the pre-reading effect is ended, the MPU 52 is configured not to generate the second hold effect even when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE, but the second hold effect may also be generated.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 48 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 48 (E), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

If the look-ahead effect had continued without ending it, it would have occurred three times in a row, and the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information would have been confirmed as a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player would know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance pending information was a "win" without waiting for the changing symbol display to stop.

However, since the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information is "winning" or not is predetermined regardless of the number of consecutive pre-reading effects, there may be a contradiction with the number of consecutive pre-reading effects.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 ends the look-ahead performance without executing the look-ahead performance a second time, thereby avoiding such a contradiction.

In this reference form, the MPU 52 ends the look-ahead performance without executing a second look-ahead performance, but if there is no contradiction between whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information is a "win" or not and the number of consecutive look-ahead performances, in other words, if the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information is a "win," the look-ahead performance may be continued.
In addition, in this reference form, the MPU 52 ends the look-ahead performance without executing the look-ahead performance a second time, but if the win/loss result included in the advance notice information is a "jackpot win," the look-ahead performance will always be executed four or more times, so the look-ahead performance may be continued.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 48 (F), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 48 (F), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

In the example of Figure 48, the result of the pending notice information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," so the MPU 62 will generate a reach display.

In addition, in this reference form, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect in step S5102O functions as a development effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (development effect) that develops gradually over a predetermined number of game plays based on the establishment of the first trigger (the game ball entering the upper operating port 25).
In addition, the hold shift processing in step S2104 functions as a means for increasing the number of times the advancement performance is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger (the game ball entering the lower operating port 26).
The pre-reading performance consumption determination process functions as a development performance stopping means that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop the execution of the pre-reading performance when the number of times the pre-reading performance is played is increased by the hold shift process.

With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the pre-reading effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a hold shift process that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop the execution of the pre-reading effect if the hold shift process increases the number of times the pre-reading effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the pre-reading effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the pre-reading effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the first trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port 25, and the second trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the lower operating port 26, but any other elements may be used. For example, the first trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize port, V prize port, general prize port, each operating port, or through gate, and the second trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize port, V prize port, general prize port, each operating port, or through gate. Furthermore, the first trigger and the second trigger may be triggered by elements other than a game ball entering the port.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the development effect is a look-ahead effect. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the look-ahead effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect completion determination process that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop executing the look-ahead effect when the hold shift process increases the number of play times for the look-ahead effect. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of play times.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (4), (8), and (10) in the embodiment M, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(18) The audio and light-emitting control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a look-ahead effect completion determination process that causes the symbol display device 36 to stop executing the look-ahead effect if the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

(19) Because the development effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the look-ahead effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop executing the look-ahead effect when the hold shift process increases the number of play times for the look-ahead effect. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of play times.

[Reference form P]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment P of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In this reference embodiment, the main control device 4 executes processing different from that in the main reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the winning processing for the operating port differs from that in the main reference embodiment. The details of the winning processing for the operating port in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Winning process for operating port>
Figure 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port according to the reference form P of the present invention.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208P as shown in Fig. 49. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the main reference embodiment in that it executes the process of step S208P instead of the process of step S208.

In step S208P, when the MPU 42 sets the first start hold memory number RaN in step S202, it sets a first hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and transmits this set first hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This first hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25. The first hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the first reserve lamp unit 371 and executes other predetermined processes based on the first reserve generation command sent from the MPU 42. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the upper operating port 25 is four, and the first reserve lamp unit 371 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the first pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

Also, in step S208P, when the MPU 42 sets the second start hold memory number RbN in step S204, it sets a second hold generation command for recognizing that the hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and transmits this set second hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This second hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the second result display section hold area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The second hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the second reserve lamp unit 372 and executes other predetermined processes based on the second reserve generation command sent from the MPU 42. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the lower actuation port 26 is four, and the second reserve lamp unit 372 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the second pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the main reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing are different from those in the main reference embodiment. The contents of the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Holding process>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 50. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process of step S2204, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2210P before executing the process of step S2205, and differs from the main embodiment in that it executes the process of step S2207P instead of the process of step S2207.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2210P, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210P that there is no advance notice hold information, it executes a lottery process for advance notice hold in step S2205. In this lottery process for advance notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue an advance notice hold.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image to notify the player of the expected level of the hold, or a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect that notifies the player of the expected level of the hold by displaying the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that this reference form will explain a notice hold that executes a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect, and will omit explanations of notice holds that execute other notice displays. When implementing a notice hold that executes multiple notice displays, the MPU 52, for example, can prepare multiple flags for each type of notice display and set one or more of these flags to execute various notice displays.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of the above-mentioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the notice pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
Based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the advance notice hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, or if it determines in step S2210P that notice hold information exists, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the normal pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
In addition, based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the normal hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In this way, in this reference form, the MPU 52 can generate only one advance notice hold in the sub-side hold area that executes an advance notice display that generates a pre-reading effect, and cannot generate multiple advance notice holds in the sub-side hold area.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 is not configured to be able to generate multiple advance reservations in the sub-side reservation area, but it may be configured to be able to do so.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207P or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold or a normal hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold image or normal hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process.
In the hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2309P to S2308 as shown in Fig. 51. Note that this embodiment differs from the main embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2309P before executing the process of step S2301, executes the process of step S2310P after executing the process of step S2304, and executes the process of step S2311P after executing the process of step S2307.

In step S2309P, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
The process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur will be described in detail below.

<Pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
In the process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur, the MPU 52 executes steps S6001 to S6012 as shown in FIG.
In step S6001, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6001 that there is no advance notice pending information, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6002 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6001 that there is advance notice pending information, it determines in step S6002 whether or not a look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for identifying that a look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the look-ahead effect occurring flag when a look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the look-ahead effect occurring flag when the look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6003 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it determines in step S6003 whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

For example, if advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory areas of the first sub-side holding area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa.

For example, if advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, the second area SRb2, and the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRb1 and the second area SRb2 of the second sub-side holding area SRb) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes in step S6004 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that the reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, it acquires the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004.

Here, when it is determined in step S6001 that there is advance pending information in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the number of advance pending information PN is the sum of the number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa that will be executed before the advance pending information.
For example, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In addition, when it is determined in step S6001 that there is advance pending information in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the number of advance pending information PN is the sum of the number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb that will be executed before the advance pending information.
For example, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, the second area SRb2, and the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, so MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In step S6005, the MPU 52 acquires the notice pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) included in the notice pending information and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In step S6006, the MPU 52 determines whether the win/loss result acquired in step S6005, i.e., the win/loss result included in the advance notice reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area, is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S6007 onward, and if it determines in step S6006 that the win/loss result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S6010 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S6007 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6007, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is equal to or less than "4".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6007 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "4" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6008 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6007 that the number of pre-read pending PN is "4" or less, it sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008.
In step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0" for the number of times. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.

Next, the process (processing from step S6010 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6010, the MPU 52 determines whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery acquired in step S6005, i.e., the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area, is a "win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win," it executes the processing of step S6011 and thereafter, and if it determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win," it executes the processing of step S6012 and thereafter.

First, the process (the process from step S6011 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "winning" will be described.
In step S6011, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is "3" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the pre-read pending number PN is "3" or less, it executes the processing from step S6008 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "3" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6008 onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S6012 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" will be described.
In step S6012, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is "2" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6012 that the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "2", it executes the processes from step S6008 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6012 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "2" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6008 onwards.

In this way, in this reference form, if the number of pre-read pending PN is "4" or less, the pre-read performance occurrence determination process determines in step S6008 that a pre-read performance occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 and that a pre-read performance will occur.
Specifically, the pre-reading effect occurs when the result of the pre-reading held information is a "jackpot win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "4" or less, when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "3" or less, and when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is not a "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "2" or less.

In other words, if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN, which is the sum of the number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of each sub-side hold area and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of each sub-side hold area that is executed before the advance pending information, is "4", then the win/loss result contained in the advance pending information is confirmed to be "jackpot win", and if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", then the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance pending information is confirmed to be "win".
In this reference form, the pre-reading effect also occurs when advance notice hold information is executed, so if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "4", it will occur four times in a row, if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", it will occur three times in a row, and if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "2", it will occur two times in a row.

Returning to the explanation of the hold shift process, the process from step S2301 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received a first shift command, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S2302 to S2310P, and if it determines in step S2301 that it has not received a first shift command (if it determines that it has received a second shift command), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2311P.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2310P will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 sequentially to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

In step S2310P, the MPU 52 clears the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54. This second hold effect flag is a flag for identifying that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE. In step S2310P, the MPU 52 clears the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54, which indicates that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa has been moved to the execution area SAE.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2311P will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 sequentially to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

In step S2311P, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect flag in RAM 54. This second hold effect flag is a flag for identifying that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE. In step S2311P, the MPU 52 sets the second hold effect flag in RAM 54, which indicates that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE.

After executing the processing of step S2310P or step S2311P, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display shift command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the main reference embodiment. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the main reference embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 53, instead of the process of step S2407, it executes the process of step S2407P.

In step S2407P, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407P, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S6101 to S6107 as shown in FIG.

In step S6101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the second pending effect flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6101 that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6101 that the second pending effect flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6105 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S6102 onwards) when it is determined in step S6101 that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54 by the MPU 52 will be described.
In step S6102, the MPU 52 determines whether a pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6102 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6104 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6102 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S6201 to S6206 as shown in FIG.

In step S6201, the MPU 52 executes a pre-reading effect generation process. In this pre-reading effect generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether a pre-reading effect will occur based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54. Specifically, if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "0," the MPU 52 determines whether a first pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "1," the MPU 52 determines whether a second pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "2," the MPU 52 determines whether a third pre-reading effect will occur; and if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "3," the MPU 52 determines whether a fourth pre-reading effect will occur.

In step S6202, the MPU 52 sets a pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the pre-reading effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 is included in the pre-reading effect generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This pre-reading effect generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the pre-reading effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect is to be played PRN included in the pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the first look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the second look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the third look-ahead effect has occurred; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the fourth look-ahead effect has occurred.

In step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S6204, the MPU 52 updates the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S6205, it is determined whether the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "0", then in step S6206, the MPU 52 clears the pre-read effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read effect.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pre-read pending PN is not "0" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance consumption determination process without executing the process of step S6206.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process, the processing from step S6104 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S6104 onwards.

In step S6104, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining other presentation patterns. In the process for determining other presentation patterns, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the start-time pre-reading presentation. The MPU 52 then terminates the process for determining presentation patterns.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6101 that the second hold effect flag is set in RAM 54, it executes a second hold effect generation process in step S6105. In this second hold effect generation process, the MPU 52 generates a second hold effect that is executed only when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE. This second hold effect will be described in detail later.

In step S6106, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the second hold effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This second hold effect generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the second hold effect generation command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the second hold effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G to notify the player that the second hold effect has occurred.

In step S6107, the MPU 52 clears the look-ahead effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. This causes the MPU 52 to end the look-ahead effect. The MPU 52 then ends the effect pattern determination process.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Specifically, FIG. 56(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 56(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 56(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 56(D) is a diagram showing the state in which the third pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 56(E) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area after the fourth pre-reading effect related to this advance notice pending information is consumed.

As shown in Figure 56 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 56 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of symbols based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 56, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 56 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 56 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
56(A), the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores advance notice pending information, and the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores regular pending information. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 56 (A), advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the three sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed by referencing information relating to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information relating to the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "4" as the advance pending number PN in step S6004, and will set the advance pending performance occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008 only if the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win."
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win" or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the third hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 56, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is "jackpot win", the win/loss result included in the regular reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win".

In the example of Figure 56, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance pending information is executed, obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the symbol display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 56(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B13) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 56(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and bases B11 and B12).

In the example of Figure 56 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 56 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 56 (C), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 56 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "3".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 56 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 56 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 56 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 56 (D), after the advance notice hold information was stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 56 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 56 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 56 (E), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 56 (E), after the advance notice hold information was stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has consumed the third pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 56 (E), the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "3." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB scale having accumulated to 8 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 56, the pre-reading effect occurs four times in a row, so it is confirmed that the win/loss result contained in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to a maximum of eight marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result contained in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

Figure 57 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 57(A) shows the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 57(B) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 57(C) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 57(D) shows the state in which the third pre-reading effect related to advance notice pending information has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area.

As shown in Figure 57(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 57(A), the MPU 62 starts the display of symbols based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 57, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B13.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 57 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 57 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
57A, the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of FIG. 57(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "3" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 57, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a "jackpot win" but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win."

In the example of Figure 57, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win." Therefore, when the first hold shift process is executed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice hold information is executed, obtains "3" as the pre-read hold number PN, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the symbol display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 57(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before that hold (in the example of FIG. 57(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 57 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 57 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 57 (C), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 57 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 57 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 57 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on display screen G of symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 57 (D), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 57 (D), after the advance notice hold information was stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 57 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 57, the pre-read effect occurs three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 58 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 58(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 58(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 58(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect related to this advance notice pending information has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area.

As shown in Figure 58 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 58 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 58, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 58 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 58 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
58A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S6004, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 58, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 58, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first hold shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance pending information is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 58 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 58 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 58 (C), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 58 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 58 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

As such, in the example of Figure 58, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 59 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side hold area, and then normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area while a pre-reading effect is occurring. Specifically, Figure 59(A) shows the state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 59(B) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 59(C) shows the state in which the first hold shift process has been performed after normal hold information has been stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Figure 59(D) shows the state in which the second hold shift process has been performed after normal hold information has been stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Figure 59(E) shows the state in which the third hold shift process has been performed after normal hold information has been stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area.

As shown in Figure 59(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 59(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 59, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 59 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on display screen G of symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 59 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
59(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 59 (A), advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the three sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed by referencing information relating to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information relating to the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "4" as the advance pending number PN in step S6004, and will set the advance pending performance occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008 only if the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win."
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win" or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the third hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 59, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is "jackpot win", the win/loss result included in the regular reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win".

In the example of Figure 59, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance pending information is executed, obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the symbol display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 59(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on pedestal B13) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 59(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution pedestal AB and pedestals B11 and B12).

In the example of Figure 59 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208 and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Figure 59 (B), the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserve area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that a normal hold has occurred.
Specifically, when MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on base B21.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 59 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, and places it on the execution base AB, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, on base B11 without shifting it, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, on base B12 without shifting it, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, on base B13 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 59 (C), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 59 (C), the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE, so in step S2311P, the second hold effect flag is set in RAM 54.
Therefore, in step S6101, the MPU 52 determines that the second reserved effect flag is set in the RAM 54, and therefore executes the second reserved effect generation process in step S6105 without executing the pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103, and sets the second reserved effect generation command in step S6106. Also, in step S6107, the MPU 52 clears the pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54 to end the pre-reading effect.
Then, based on the second hold effect generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the second hold effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the MPU 62 displays the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying and executing the second pending effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 59 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 59 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
59(C), the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of FIG. 59(C), advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "3" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after normal hold information has been stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it will obtain "3" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004. Therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," it will again set the pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, if the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54, the pre-reading effect will be generated continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.

In the example of Figure 59, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the second pending shift process is executed after normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side pending area SRb, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance pending information is executed, obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB having eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the pattern display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 59(D), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 59(D), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 59 (D), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 59 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 59 (E), MPU 62 has started the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 59 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 59 (E), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as in Figure 57 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB (not shown).

Also, as in Figure 57 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to six marks (not shown).

In this way, in the example of Figure 59, the pre-read effect occurs three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

In the example of Figure 59, we have explained a case where, after advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb while the first advance reading performance has been completed.
In contrast, if normal reserved information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb after the third pre-reading effect has been consumed after the pre-reading effect has been stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, a contradictory situation may occur in which the reach display does not occur even though the pre-reading effect has occurred three times in a row. In this case, the win/loss result included in the pre-reading information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa is confirmed to be a "jackpot win."

Figure 60 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area and a reach display occurs before the advance notice information is executed. Specifically, Figure 60(A) shows the state in which advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 60(B) shows the state in which the first reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 60(C) shows the state in which the second reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 60(D) shows the state in which the third reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 60(E) shows the state in which the fourth reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area.

As shown in Figure 60(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 60(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 60, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 60 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 60 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
60(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 60 (A), advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the three sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed by referencing information relating to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information relating to the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6004 onwards, and therefore the pre-reading effect will not occur.
In the example of Figure 60, the case will be described where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is "jackpot win", and when the advance reservation information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the normal reservation information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa is "win".

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 60 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 60 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
60(B), the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of FIG. 60(B), advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6004 onwards, and therefore the pre-reading effect will not occur.
In addition, in Figure 60 (C), when the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the normal hold information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa is "win", so the MPU 52 generates a reach display.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 60 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 60 (D), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P.
60(C), the advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 60 (C), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, one piece of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the MPU 52 will execute one sub-side pending information stored in each area before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore, in step S6004, the MPU 52 will obtain "2" as the number of advance notice pending information PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the third hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, if the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54, the pre-reading effect will be generated continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.

In the example of Figure 60, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the third hold shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance pending information is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB having eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the pattern display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 60(D), the hold related to the pre-notification hold pattern placed on base B11) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before that hold (in the example of FIG. 60(D), the hold related to the normal hold pattern placed on execution base AB).

In the example of Figure 60 (D), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 60 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 60 (E), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 60 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 60 (E), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 60, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

In this way, in this embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance.
In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26).
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the pattern display device 36 is executing a variable display, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the starting ball entry means.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process (first hold storage means) of step S2202 in which hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 (first start ball entry means), a process (second hold storage means) of step S2203 in which hold information is stored in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 (second start ball entry means), and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 in which the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is shifted for each play.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207P functions as a continuation effect generation determination means that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information (advance notice hold information) to generate a continuation effect (prediction effect) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game plays.
In this reference form, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6103 function as a continuation effect execution means that, when a pre-effect based on pending information stored in multiple pending areas that is consumed before the continuation effect pending information includes a pre-effect (reach display) that is different from the continuation effect, causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information after consuming the pending information including this pre-effect.

With this configuration, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309P and the pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103 cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information after the pending information including the pre-reading effect has been consumed. This prevents a pre-reading effect from occurring while a continuation effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the continuation effect pending information is set in the advance notice pending generation process of step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means employs the upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26, but any other configuration may be employed. For example, the starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, each actuation port, or a through gate. The starting ball entry means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize entry port or inside a special device.
In addition, in this reference embodiment, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6103 are configured to prevent the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of a continuation effect by having the symbol display device 36 execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information after the pending information including the pre-reading effect has been consumed. In contrast, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6103 do not have to be configured to prevent the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of a continuation effect when the win/loss result included in the continuation effect pending information is a "jackpot win," and the continuation effect may be configured to be able to occur five or more times in succession.

In addition, in this reference form, the continuation effect uses a look-ahead effect, but any effect can be used as long as it can be continued over a predetermined number of games. For example, other effects such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved image to notify the player of the expected level of the reserved effect may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6103 determine whether a pre-reading effect is included in the pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process in step S2104.

With this configuration, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309P and the pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S6103 determine whether or not a pre-reading effect is included in the pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each play in the hold shift process of step S2104.Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after it is determined to be continuation effect hold information in the advance hold generation process of step S2207P, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of the continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309P determines whether or not a pre-effect is included in the pre-effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process of step S2104. However, the timing of this determination does not have to be each time the hold information is shifted for each game. For example, the pre-effect determination means may be configured to make a determination only once when the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect hold information is to be set, or may be configured to make a determination only once before the continuation effect is executed.

In addition, in this reference form, the pre-effect is a reach display, so it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation effect, and if it is determined in the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207P that continuation effect hold information is to be generated, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

In this reference embodiment, the pre-effect is a reach display, but it may be something else. For example, the pre-effect may be an effect that encourages the player to press a button, a pseudo-consecutive effect, an effect that gradually enlarges the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, or an effect that changes the length of the display duration. Furthermore, the pre-effect is not limited to an effect that displays an image on the symbol display device 36, but may also be an effect that activates a role device, for example. In short, the pre-effect may be any effect based on hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player is notified of the likelihood of the continuation effect based on the number of predetermined game plays.
Specifically, if the pre-reading effect occurred four times in a row, the result of the win/loss contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "jackpot win," and if it occurred three times in a row, the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "win."
According to this configuration, the continuation effect notifies the player of the expectation of this continuation effect based on the number of times the game has been played a predetermined number of times, so the player will pay attention to the number of times the game has been played a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the number of times the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S2309P (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103).

With this configuration, the number of games in which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S2309P. This prevents a pre-reading effect from occurring while a continuation effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading effect pending information is to be executed in the pre-reading effect occurrence process in step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

In this embodiment, if the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309P determines that a pre-reading effect is included, the process of determining whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, starting from the next game turn, after the pending information including this pre-reading effect has been consumed. However, the pattern display device 36 may also execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, starting from the next game turn, or the pattern display device 36 may not execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, starting from another game turn. In other words, the game turn in which the pattern display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information may change based on the determination result of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309P.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309P and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6103 consume the reserved information including the pre-reading effect, and then have the symbol display device 36 execute a continuation effect based on the reserved information for continuation effect. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of a continuation effect, and when it is determined that the reserved information for continuation effect is to be set in the process of pre-notification reservation in step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(2) The pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309P and the pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S6103 determine whether or not a pre-reading effect is included in the pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process of step S2104.Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after it is determined to be continuation effect hold information in the advance hold generation process of step S2207P, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of the continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

(3) Since the pre-effect is a reach display, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation effect, and if it is determined in the advance hold generation processing of step S2207P that the continuation effect is to be held, it is possible to reliably execute the continuation effect without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.
(4) The continuation effect notifies the player of the likelihood of this continuation effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

(5) The number of game plays at which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the judgment made in the pre-reading effect occurrence judgment process of step S2309P. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect while a continuation effect is being executed. If it is judged that the continuation effect pending information is to be executed in the advance notice pending generation process of step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

[Reference form Q]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment Q of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.
In the reference form P, when the advance notice pending information is stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area, the pre-reading effect does not occur when the sub-side pending information stored in the execution area is executed, but occurs when the advance notice pending information is executed.
In contrast, in this reference form, the pre-reading effect does not occur when the advance notice pending information is executed, but rather occurs when the advance notice pending information is stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area and the sub-side pending information stored in the execution area is executed, which is different from reference form P.

In this reference form, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 perform processing different from that of the reference form P. Specifically, in this reference form, the hold shift processing and presentation determination processing are different from those of the reference form P. The contents of the hold shift processing and presentation determination processing in this reference form are explained below.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reserved shift processing according to the reference form Q of the present invention.
In the hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308 as shown in Fig. 61. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment P in that the MPU 52 does not execute the process of step S2309P.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the reference form P. Note that in this reference form, as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2407Q instead of the process of step S2407P, and differs from the reference form P in that it executes the processes of steps S2414Q to S2416Q before executing the other processes of step S2413.

In step S2407Q, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407Q, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S6101 to S6107 in substantially the same manner as in the reference form P. Note that this reference form differs from the reference form P in that the MPU 52 does not execute the processes of steps S6102 to S6103, as shown in FIG.

Returning to the explanation of the effect determination process, the processing of steps S2414Q to S2416Q will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S2414Q, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414Q that it has not received a fluctuation end command, it executes the processing from step S2413 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414Q that it has received a variation end command, it executes a process for determining a game round end effect in step S2415Q. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a game round end effect corresponding to the variation end command by referring to a table for effects stored in the ROM 53 in advance.

In step S2416Q, the MPU 52 sets a game round end command that includes information related to the game round end effect selected in step S2415Q. The MPU 52 then stores the game round end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This game round end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the game round end effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the game round end command transmitted from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the game round end effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.
The process for determining the effects to be used to end a game will be explained in detail below.

Figure 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the presentation to be given at the end of a game round.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a game round end effect to select a game round end effect corresponding to the variable end command as a game round end effect. In this process for determining a game round end effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S6301 to S6304 as shown in FIG.

In step S6301, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
The process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur will be described in detail below.

<Pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
In the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur, the MPU 52 executes steps S6001 to S6012 in substantially the same manner as in the above-described reference form P. Note that in this reference form, the MPU 52 differs from the above-described reference form P in that, as shown in FIG. 64, instead of the process of step S6004, it executes the process of step S6004Q.

In step S6001, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6001 that there is no advance notice pending information, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6002 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6001 that there is advance notice pending information, it determines in step S6002 whether or not a look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for identifying that a look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the look-ahead effect occurring flag when a look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the look-ahead effect occurring flag when the look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6003 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it determines in step S6003 whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

For example, if advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory areas of the first sub-side holding area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa.

For example, if advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, the second area SRb2, and the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRb1 and the second area SRb2 of the second sub-side holding area SRb) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, it terminates the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur without executing the processes in step S6004Q and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that the reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, it acquires the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004Q.

Here, when it is determined in step S6001 that there is advance pending information in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the number of advance pending information PN is the total number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa that will be executed before the advance pending information, and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the execution area SAE.
For example, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In addition, when it is determined in step S6001 that there is advance pending information in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the number of advance pending information PN is the total number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb that will be executed before the advance pending information, and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the execution area SAE.
For example, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, the second area SRb2, and the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, so MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In step S6005, the MPU 52 acquires the notice pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) included in the notice pending information and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In step S6006, the MPU 52 determines whether the win/loss result acquired in step S6005, i.e., the win/loss result included in the advance notice reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area, is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S6007 onward, and if it determines in step S6006 that the win/loss result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S6010 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S6007 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6007, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is equal to or less than "4".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6007 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "4" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6008 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6007 that the number of pre-read pending PN is "4" or less, it sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008.
In step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0" for the number of times. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.

Next, the process (the process from step S6010 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6010, the MPU 52 determines whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery acquired in step S6005, i.e., the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area, is a "win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win," it executes the processing of step S6011 and thereafter, and if it determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win," it executes the processing of step S6012 and thereafter.

First, the process (the process from step S6011 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "winning" will be described.
In step S6011, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is "3" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the pre-read pending number PN is "3" or less, it executes the processing from step S6008 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "3" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6008 onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S6012 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" will be described.
In step S6012, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is "2" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6012 that the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "2", it executes the processes from step S6008 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6012 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "2" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6008 onwards.

In this way, in this reference form, if the number of pre-read pending PN is "4" or less, the pre-read performance occurrence determination process determines in step S6008 that a pre-read performance occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 and that a pre-read performance will occur.
Specifically, the pre-reading effect occurs when the result of the pre-reading held information is a "jackpot win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "4" or less, when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "3" or less, and when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is not a "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "2" or less.

In other words, if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN, which is the sum of the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of each sub-side hold area that is executed before the advance notice hold information and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the execution area, is "4", then the win/loss result contained in the advance notice hold information is confirmed to be "jackpot win", and if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", then the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice hold information is confirmed to be "win".
In this reference form, the pre-reading effect also occurs when the sub-side pending information stored in the execution area is executed, so if it occurs when the pre-reading pending number PN is "4", it will occur four times in a row, if it occurs when the pre-reading pending number PN is "3", it will occur three times in a row, and if it occurs when the pre-reading pending number PN is "2", it will occur two times in a row.

Returning to the explanation of the process for determining the presentation for the end of a game round, the process from step S6302 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 64.
In step S6302, the MPU 52 determines whether a pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6302 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6304 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6302 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the process of determining whether to consume the look-ahead effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S6201Q to S6206 in substantially the same manner as in the reference form P. Note that in this reference form, the MPU 52 differs from the reference form P in that, as shown in FIG. 66, instead of the process of step S6201, it executes the process of step S6201Q.

In step S6201Q, the MPU 52 executes a pre-reading effect generation process. In this pre-reading effect generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether a pre-reading effect will occur based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54. Specifically, if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "0," the MPU 52 determines whether a first pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "1," the MPU 52 determines whether a second pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "2," the MPU 52 determines whether a third pre-reading effect will occur; and if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "3," the MPU 52 determines whether a fourth pre-reading effect will occur. Note that in this reference form, the content of the pre-reading effect differs from that in the reference form P. The content of this pre-reading effect will be explained in detail later.

In step S6202, the MPU 52 sets a pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the pre-reading effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 is included in the pre-reading effect generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This pre-reading effect generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the pre-reading effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect is to be played PRN included in the pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the first look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the second look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the third look-ahead effect has occurred; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the fourth look-ahead effect has occurred. Note that in this reference form, the content of the look-ahead effect differs from that in the reference form P. The content of this look-ahead effect will be explained in detail later.

In step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S6204, the MPU 52 updates the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S6205, it is determined whether the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "0", then in step S6206, the MPU 52 clears the pre-read effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read effect.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pre-read pending PN is not "0" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance consumption determination process without executing the process of step S6206.

Returning to the explanation of the process for determining the presentation for the end of a game round, the process from step S6304 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 64.
After executing the pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303, or if it determines in step S6302 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, MPU 52 executes the process from step S6304 onwards.

In step S6304, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining other effects for ending a game round. In the process for determining other effects for ending a game round, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining effects for ending a game round other than the pre-reading effect. The MPU 52 then terminates the process for determining effects for ending a game round.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. Specifically, FIG. 67(A) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice reservation information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 67(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the second pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice reservation information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 67(C) is a diagram showing a state in which the third pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice reservation information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 67(D) is a diagram showing a state in which the fourth pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice reservation information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 67(E) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice reservation information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area and the game play related to this advance notice reservation information has been consumed.

Based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 begins the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 67 (A), MPU 62 begins the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, as shown in Figure 67 (A), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, the MPU 52 executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 67, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
67(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 67 (A), advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the three sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed by referencing information relating to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information relating to the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004Q.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first game round after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "4" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and will set the advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008 only if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win."
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the second round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win" or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the third round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 67, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is "jackpot win", the win/loss result included in the regular reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win".

In the example of Figure 67, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," so when the first round of play is completed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice hold information is executed, obtains "4" as the pre-read hold number PN, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the MPU 62 places an angel character on the left edge of the display screen G and has this character speak to suggest to the player that the look-ahead effect has been consumed. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-announcement hold, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the hold (in the example of FIG. 67(A), the hold related to the pre-announcement hold symbol placed on pedestal B14) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 67(A), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution pedestal AB and pedestals B11-B13).

In the example of Figure 67 (A), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold and advance hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 67 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 67 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 67 (B), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 67 (B), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-read performance, and therefore in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "3".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 67 (B), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x2."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 67 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 67 (C), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 67 (C), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 67 (C), after the advance notice hold information was stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 67 (C), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x3."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 67 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 67 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 67 (D), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 67 (D), after the advance notice hold information was stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has consumed the third pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 67 (D), the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "3", and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x4".

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 67 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 67 (E), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In this way, in the example of Figure 67, the pre-reading effect occurs four times in a row, so it is confirmed that the result of the pending preview information is a "jackpot win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the fourth pre-reading effect is executed with the angel character's line "x4," so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the result of the pending preview information is a "jackpot win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 68 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 68(A) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 68(B) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 68(C) shows the state in which the third pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 68(D) shows the state in which the game play related to this advance notice hold information has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area.

Based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins the display of symbol variations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 68 (A), MPU 62 begins the display of variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, as shown in Figure 68 (A), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, the MPU 52 executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 68, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B13.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
68(A), the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of FIG. 68(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the two sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004Q.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first game round after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the second round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 68, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a "jackpot win" but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win."

In the example of Figure 68, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win." Therefore, when the first round of play is completed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice hold information is executed, obtains "3" as the pre-read hold number PN, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the MPU 62 places an angel character on the left edge of the display screen G and has this character speak to suggest to the player that the look-ahead effect has been consumed. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-announcement hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 68(A), the hold related to the pre-announcement hold symbol placed on base B13) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 68(A), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and bases B11 and B12).

In the example of Figure 68 (A), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 68 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 68 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 68 (B), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 68 (B), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 68 (B), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x2."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 68 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 68 (C), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 68 (C), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 68 (C), after the advance notice hold information was stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 68 (C), the MPU 62 executes the third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes the third look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x3."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 68 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 68 (D), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In this way, in the example of Figure 68, the pre-reading effect occurs three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the pre-reading effect is executed for the third time with the angel character's line "x3," so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

Figure 69 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 69(A) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 69(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 69(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the game play related to this advance notice hold information has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area.

Based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed variation period by starting the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 69 (A), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, as shown in Figure 69 (A), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 69, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
In the example of Figure 69 (A), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, one sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S6004Q, the MPU 52 will obtain "2" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004Q. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 69, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 69, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first round of play is completed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice hold information is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-read hold number PN, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 69 (A), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 69 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 69 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 69 (B), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 69 (B), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 69 (B), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x2."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 69 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 69 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In this way, in the example of Figure 69, the pre-reading effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the pre-reading effect is executed a second time with the angel character's line "x2", so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 70 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side hold area, and then normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area while a pre-reading effect is occurring. Specifically, Figure 70(A) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 70(B) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 70(C) shows the state in which the first hold shift process has been performed after normal hold information has been stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Figure 70(D) shows the state in which the second hold shift process has been performed after normal hold information has been stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Figure 70(E) shows the state in which the third hold shift process has been performed after normal hold information has been stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area.

Based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins the variable display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 begins the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 70 (A), MPU 62 begins the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, as shown in Figure 70 (A), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, the MPU 52 executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 70, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
70(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 70 (A), advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the three sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed by referencing information relating to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information relating to the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S6004Q.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first game round after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "4" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and will set the advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008 only if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win."
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the second round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win" or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the third round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004Q, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 70, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is "jackpot win", the win/loss result included in the regular reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win".

In the example of Figure 70, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," so when the first round of play is completed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice hold information is executed, obtains "4" as the pre-read hold number PN, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 70(A), the MPU 62 places an angel character on the left edge of the display screen G and has this character speak to suggest to the player that the look-ahead effect has been consumed. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-announcement hold, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the hold (in the example of Figure 70(A), the hold related to the pre-announcement hold symbol placed on base B14) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of Figure 70(A), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and bases B11-B13).

In the example of Figure 70 (A), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 70 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 70 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 70 (B), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 70 (B), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "3".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 70 (B), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x2."

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208 and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Figure 70 (B), the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserve area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that a normal hold has occurred.
Specifically, when MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on base B21.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 70 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, and places it on the execution base AB, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, on base B11 without shifting it, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, on base B12 without shifting it, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, on base B13 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 70 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 70 (C), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 70 (C), the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE, so in step S2311P, the second hold effect flag is set in RAM 54.
Therefore, in step S6101, the MPU 52 determines that the second reserved effect flag is set in the RAM 54, and therefore executes the second reserved effect generation process in step S6105 without executing the pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103, and sets the second reserved effect generation command in step S6106. Also, in step S6107, the MPU 52 clears the pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54 to end the pre-reading effect.
Then, based on the second hold effect generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the second hold effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the MPU 62 displays the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying and executing the second pending effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 70 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 70 (D), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 70 (D), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
70(D), the advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 70 (D), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, one piece of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the MPU 52 will execute one sub-side pending information stored in each area before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore, in step S6004Q, the MPU 52 will obtain "2" as the number of advance notice pending information PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after normal hold information has been stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004Q. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," or the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win," the pre-read effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 again in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, if the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54, the pre-reading effect will be generated continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.

In the example of Figure 70, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the second pending shift process is executed after normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side pending area SRb, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance pending information is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-read pending number PN, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 70(D), the MPU 62 places an angel character on the left edge of the display screen G and has this character speak to suggest to the player that the predictive effect has been consumed. This predictive effect is an effect for consuming a pre-read hold, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the hold (in the example of Figure 70(D), the hold related to the predictive hold pattern placed on base B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the pre-read hold (in the example of Figure 70(D), the hold related to the normal hold pattern placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 70 (D), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 70 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 70 (E), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 70 (E), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 70 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 70 (E), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x2."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 68 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the preview hold image placed on base B11, and places it on execution base AB (not shown).

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). Note that, by executing the pending shift process, MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE.

As such, in the example of Figure 70, the pre-reading effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the second pre-reading effect is executed with the angel character's line "x2", so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

In the example of Figure 70, we have explained a case where, after advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb while the second advance reading performance has been completed.
In contrast, if normal reserved information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb after the third pre-reading effect has been consumed after the pre-reading effect has been stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, a contradictory situation may occur in which the reach display does not occur even though the pre-reading effect has occurred three times in a row. In this case, the win/loss result included in the pre-reading information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa is confirmed to be a "jackpot win."

Figure 71 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area and a reach display occurs before the advance notice information is executed. Specifically, Figure 71(A) shows the state in which advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 71(B) shows the state in which the first reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 71(C) shows the state in which the second reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 71(D) shows the state in which the third reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Figure 71(E) shows the state in which the fourth reserve shift process is executed after advance notice information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area.

Based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed variation period by starting the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 71 (A), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, as shown in Figure 71 (A), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, the MPU 52 executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207P and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 71, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
71(A), advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2, and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 71 (A), advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the three sub-side pending information stored in the memory areas of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed by referencing information relating to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information relating to the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6004Q onwards, and therefore the pre-reading effect will not occur.
In the example of Figure 71, the case will be described where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is "jackpot win", and when the advance reservation information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the normal reservation information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa is "win".

In the example of Figure 71, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," and when the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the regular hold information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa is "win." Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first game after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will not generate a pre-reading effect.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 71 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 71 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 71 (B), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
71(B), the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of FIG. 71(B), advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will occur before the advance notice information is executed, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6004Q onwards, and therefore the pre-reading effect will not occur.

In the example of Figure 71, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," and when the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the regular hold information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa is "win." Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the second round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will not generate a pre-reading effect.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 71 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 71 (C), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(C), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result.
In addition, in Figure 71 (C), when the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the normal hold information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa is "win", so the MPU 52 generates a reach display.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301.
71C, the advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, in step S6003, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice pending information is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice hold information by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side hold information, which is executed before the advance notice hold information, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 71 (C), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, one piece of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side pending area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before executing the advance notice pending information by referencing information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information, the MPU 52 will execute one sub-side pending information stored in each area before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore, in step S6004Q, the MPU 52 will obtain "2" as the number of advance notice pending information PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004Q. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008.

Then, in step S6008, if the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54, the pre-reading effect will be generated continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.

In the example of Figure 71, the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," so when the second hold shift process is executed after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice hold information is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-read hold number PN, and sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008.

If the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 71 (C), the MPU 62 places an angel character on the left edge of the display screen G and has this character speak to suggest to the player that the look-ahead effect has been consumed. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-announcement hold, which notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of Figure 71 (C), the hold related to the pre-announcement hold pattern placed on base B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of Figure 71 (C), the hold related to the normal hold pattern placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 71 (C), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 71 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 71 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 71 (D), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 71 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first pre-read performance, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008, it executes a process to determine whether the pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201Q, and sets the pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206, clears the pre-reading performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-reading performance.

In the example of Figure 71 (D), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x2."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 71 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 71 (E), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In this way, in the example of Figure 71, the pre-reading effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the second pre-reading effect is executed with the angel character's line "x2", so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

In this way, in this embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance.
In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26).
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the pattern display device 36 is executing a variable display, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the starting ball entry means.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process (first hold storage means) of step S2202 in which hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 (first start ball entry means), a process (second hold storage means) of step S2203 in which hold information is stored in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 (second start ball entry means), and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 in which the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is shifted for each play.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207P functions as a continuation effect generation determination means that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information (advance notice hold information) to generate a continuation effect (prediction effect) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game plays.
In this reference form, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301 and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6303 function as a continuation effect execution means at the end of a game that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect hold information at the end of the game round as the effect for the game round related to the hold information that includes a pre-effect (reach display) that is different from the continuation effect, when the pre-effect based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information includes this pre-effect.

With this configuration, the predictive effect occurrence determination process of step S6301 and the predictive effect completion determination process of step S6303 cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game turn as the effect for the game turn related to the pending information including the advance effect. Therefore, if it is determined that the continuation effect is pending information in the advance pending generation process of step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. This makes it possible to increase the number of game turns in which a continuation effect is executed compared to when the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game turn to be consumed next after the game turn related to the pending information including the advance effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means employs the upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26, but any other configuration may be employed. For example, the starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, each actuation port, or a through gate. The starting ball entry means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize entry port or inside a special device.
In addition, in this reference embodiment, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301 and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6303 are configured to prevent a pre-reading effect from occurring during the execution of a continuation effect by having the symbol display device 36 execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game round as the effect of the game round related to the pending information including the pre-reading effect. In contrast, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301 and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6303 do not have to be configured to prevent a pre-reading effect from occurring during the execution of a continuation effect if the win/loss result included in the continuation effect pending information is a "jackpot win," and the continuation effect may be configured to be able to occur five or more times in succession.

In addition, in this reference form, the continuation effect uses a look-ahead effect, but any effect can be used as long as it can be continued over a predetermined number of games. For example, other effects such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved image to notify the player of the expected level of the reserved effect may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301 and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6303 determine whether a pre-reading effect will be included in the pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process in step S2104.

With this configuration, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301 and the pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S6303 determine whether or not a pre-reading effect is included in the pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each play in the hold shift process of step S2104.Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after it is determined to be continuation effect hold information in the advance hold generation process of step S2207P, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of a continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301 determines whether or not a pre-effect is included in the pre-effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process of step S2104. However, the timing of this determination does not have to be each time the hold information is shifted for each game. For example, the pre-effect determination means may be configured to perform a determination only once when the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect hold information is to be set, or may be configured to perform a determination only once before the continuation effect is executed.

In addition, in this reference form, the pre-effect is a reach display, so it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation effect, and if it is determined in the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207P that continuation effect hold information is to be generated, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

In this reference embodiment, the pre-effect is a reach display, but it may be something else. For example, the pre-effect may be an effect that encourages the player to press a button, a pseudo-consecutive effect, an effect that gradually enlarges the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, or an effect that changes the length of the display duration. Furthermore, the pre-effect is not limited to an effect that displays an image on the symbol display device 36, but may also be an effect that activates a role device, for example. In short, the pre-effect may be any effect based on hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player is notified of the likelihood of the continuation effect based on the number of predetermined game plays.
Specifically, if the pre-reading effect occurred four times in a row, the result of the win/loss contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "jackpot win," and if it occurred three times in a row, the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "win."
According to this configuration, the continuation effect notifies the player of the expectation of this continuation effect based on the number of times the game has been played a predetermined number of times, so the player will pay attention to the number of times the game has been played a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the number of times the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301 (the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6303).

With this configuration, the number of games in which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S6301. This prevents a pre-reading effect from occurring while a continuation effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading effect pending information is to be executed in the pre-reading effect occurrence process in step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

In this embodiment, if the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301 determines that a pre-effect is included, the pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, starting from the game turn related to the pending information including this pre-effect. However, it is not necessary to cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information starting from this game turn, and the pattern display device 36 may execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information starting from another game turn. In short, the game turn in which the pattern display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information may change based on the determination result of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S6301 and the process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will be consumed in step S6303 cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of a game round related to the pending information including a pre-reading effect. Therefore, when it is determined that the continuation effect is pending information in the pre-notification pending generation process in step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. This increases the number of game rounds in which a continuation effect is executed compared to when the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game round to be consumed next after the game round related to the pending information including a pre-reading effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

(2) The pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301 and the pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S6303 determine whether or not a pre-reading effect is included in the pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process of step S2104.Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after it is determined to be continuation effect hold information in the advance hold generation process of step S2207P, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect during the execution of the continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

(3) Since the pre-effect is a reach display, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation effect, and if it is determined in the advance hold generation processing of step S2207P that the continuation effect is to be held, it is possible to reliably execute the continuation effect without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.
(4) The continuation effect notifies the player of the likelihood of this continuation effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

(5) The number of game plays at which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the judgment made in the pre-reading effect occurrence judgment process of step S6301. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-reading effect while a continuation effect is being executed. If it is judged that the continuation effect pending information is to be executed in the advance notice pending generation process of step S2207P, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

[Reference form R]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment R of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.
In the reference form P, the sound and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are configured to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a pre-reading performance.
In contrast, in this reference form, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 differ from the reference form P in that they are configured not only to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a pre-reading performance, but also to avoid the occurrence of different types of pre-reading performance during the execution of a pre-reading performance.

In this reference form, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 perform different processing than in reference form P. Specifically, in this reference form, the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing are different from those in reference form P. The contents of the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing in this reference form are explained below.

<Hold occurrence processing>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reservation generation process according to the reference form R of the present invention.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 72. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment P in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2210R instead of the process of step S2210P, and executes the process of step S2207R instead of the process of step S2207P.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2210R, the MPU 52 determines whether there are two or more pieces of advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210R that there are not two or more pieces of advance notice hold information (if it determines that there is 0 or 1 piece of advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area), it executes a lottery process for advance notice hold in step S2205. In this lottery process for advance notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice hold.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image to notify the player of the expected level of the hold, or a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect that notifies the player of the expected level of the hold by displaying the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that this reference form will explain a notice hold that executes a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect, and will omit explanations of notice holds that execute other notice displays. When implementing a notice hold that executes multiple notice displays, the MPU 52, for example, can prepare multiple flags for each type of notice display and set one or more of these flags to execute various notice displays.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207R. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the notice pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
Based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the advance notice hold information.

The advance notice pending information also includes information regarding the type of look-ahead effect. Specifically, the advance notice pending information includes a start look-ahead effect flag that specifies that a start look-ahead effect will be executed, and an end look-ahead effect flag that specifies that an end look-ahead effect will be executed. In this reference form, the start look-ahead effect is the same effect as the look-ahead effect in reference form P, and the end look-ahead effect is the same effect as the look-ahead effect in reference form Q.

If the MPU 52 determines in the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207R that both the start time look-ahead performance flag and the end time look-ahead performance flag are not set in RAM 54, it randomly selects either the start time look-ahead performance flag or the end time look-ahead performance flag and sets it in RAM 54 in association with the advance notice hold information.
In addition, if the MPU 52 determines in the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207R that either the start time pre-reading effect flag or the end time pre-reading effect flag has been set in RAM 54, it associates the other flag, either the start time pre-reading effect flag or the end time pre-reading effect flag, with the advance notice hold information and sets it in RAM 54.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, or if it determines in step S2210R that there are two or more notice hold information items, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of the aforementioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the normal pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
In addition, based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the normal hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In this way, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 is capable of generating up to two preview holds in the sub-side hold area that execute preview displays that generate pre-reading effects.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 is not configured to allow three or more advance reservations to occur in the sub-side reservation area, but it may be configured to allow this.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207R or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold or a normal hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold image or normal hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process.
In the hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2309R to S2308 as shown in Fig. 73. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment P in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2309R instead of the process of step S2309P.

In step S2309R, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur at the start of the game.
The process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur at the start will be described in detail below.

<Start time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
Figure 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur at the start.
In the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S6001R to S6012 as shown in FIG.
In step S6001R, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the start-time pre-read performance flag.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6001R that there is no pending notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, it terminates the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6002R onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6001R that there is pending notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, it determines in step S6002R whether a start-time pre-reading effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This start-time pre-reading effect occurring flag is a flag for specifying that a start-time pre-reading effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurring flag when a start-time pre-reading effect occurs, and clears the start-time pre-reading effect occurring flag when the start-time pre-reading effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6002R that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the start-time pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6003R onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6002R that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, it determines in step S6003R whether or not a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side pending information, which is executed before the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

For example, if advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the start-time look-ahead performance flag is executed by referencing information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

Furthermore, for example, if advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, second area SRb2, and fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRb1 and second area SRb2 of the second sub-side holding area SRb) will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading performance flag is executed by referencing information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserve information stored in the first area SRb1 and second area SRb2 of the second sub-side reserve area SRb, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6003R that a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, it terminates the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6013R onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6003R that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information related to the start-time look-ahead effect flag, it determines in step S6013R whether or not an end-time look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This end-time look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for specifying that an end-time look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the end-time look-ahead effect occurring flag when an end-time look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the end-time look-ahead effect occurring flag when the end-time look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6013R that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the end-time pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6004 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6013R that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it acquires the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6004.

Here, when it is determined in step S6001R that there is advance notice pending information related to the start-time advance notice performance flag in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the advance notice pending number PN is the sum of the number of advance notice pending information related to the start-time advance notice performance flag stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa that will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time advance notice performance flag.
For example, if advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In addition, when it is determined in step S6001R that there is advance notice pending information related to the start-time advance notice performance flag in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the advance notice pending number PN is the sum of the number of advance notice pending information related to the start-time advance notice performance flag stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb that will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time advance notice performance flag.
For example, if advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, the second area SRb2, and the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In step S6005R, the MPU 52 acquires the notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) included in the notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In step S6006, the MPU 52 determines whether the win/loss result acquired in step S6005R, i.e., the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-read performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area, is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S6007 onward, and if it determines in step S6006 that the win/loss result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S6010 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S6007 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6007, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004 is equal to or less than "4".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6007 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "4" or less, it terminates the process of determining whether or not a pre-read effect will occur at the start without executing the processes from step S6008R onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6007 that the number of pending pre-reads PN is "4" or less, it sets a flag indicating that the pre-read effect is occurring at the start in the RAM 54 in step S6008R.
In step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0." Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.

Next, the process (processing from step S6010 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6006 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6010, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the result of the reach occurrence lottery acquired in step S6005R, i.e., the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area, is a "win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win," it executes the processing of step S6011 and subsequent steps, and if the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win," it executes the processing of step S6012 and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process from step S6011 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "winning" will be described.
In step S6011, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004R is "3" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the pre-read pending number PN is "3" or less, it executes the processes from step S6008R onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "3" or less, it terminates the process of determining whether or not a pre-read effect will occur at the start without executing the processes from step S6008R onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S6012 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6010 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" will be described.
In step S6012, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6004R is equal to or less than "2".
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6012 that the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "2", it executes the processes from step S6008R onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6012 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "2" or less, it terminates the process of determining whether or not a pre-read effect will occur at the start without executing the processes from step S6008R onwards.

In this manner, in this reference form, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process determines that a start-time pre-reading effect will occur by setting a start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008R when the pre-reading pending number PN is "4" or less.
Specifically, the start-time pre-reading effect occurs when the result of the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is "jackpot win" and the advance notice pending number PN is "4" or less, when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is "win" and the advance notice pending number PN is "3" or less, and when the result of the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win" and the advance notice pending number PN is "2" or less.

In other words, if the start-time pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN, which is the sum of the number of advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of each sub-side hold area and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of each sub-side hold area that is executed before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, is "4," then the win/loss result contained in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is confirmed to be "jackpot win," and if the pre-reading hold number PN is "3," then the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is confirmed to be "win."
In this reference form, the start-time pre-reading effect also occurs when the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is executed, so if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "4", it will occur four times in a row, if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", it will occur three times in a row, and if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "2", it will occur two times in a row.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the reference form P. Note that in this reference form, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2407R instead of the process of step S2407P, as shown in FIG. 75, and differs from the reference form P in that it executes the processes of steps S2414R to S2416R before executing the other processes of step S2413.

In step S2407R, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407R, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S6101 to S6107R in substantially the same manner as in the reference form P. Note that, in this reference form, the MPU 52 executes steps S6102R and S6103R instead of steps S6102 and S6103, and executes step S6107R instead of step S6107, as shown in FIG.

In step S6101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the second pending effect flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6101 that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6102R onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6101 that the second pending effect flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6105 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S6102R onward) when it is determined in step S6101 that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54 by the MPU 52 will be described.
In step S6102R, the MPU 52 determines whether a start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6102R that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6104 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6102R that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process in step S6103R.
The process for determining the consumption of the pre-reading effect at the start will be explained in detail below.

<Start time pre-reading effect consumption determination process>
Figure 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed at the start.
In the start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S6201R to S6206R in substantially the same manner as in the reference form P described above.

In step S6201R, the MPU 52 executes a start-time pre-reading effect generation process. In this start-time pre-reading effect generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether a start-time pre-reading effect will occur based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54. Specifically, if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "0," the MPU 52 determines whether a first start-time pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "1," the MPU 52 determines whether a second start-time pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "2," the MPU 52 determines whether a third start-time pre-reading effect will occur; and if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "3," the MPU 52 determines whether a fourth start-time pre-reading effect will occur.

In step S6202R, the MPU 52 sets a start-time pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the start-time pre-reading effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 is included in the start-time pre-reading effect generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This start-time pre-reading effect generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the start-time pre-reading effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the start-time pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect will be played PRN included in the start-time pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the start-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the start-time pre-reading effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the first look-ahead effect at the start has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the second look-ahead effect at the start has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the third look-ahead effect at the start has occurred; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the fourth look-ahead effect at the start has occurred.

In step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S6204, the MPU 52 updates the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S6205, it is determined whether the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0," it clears in step S6206R the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the start-time pre-reading effect.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6205 that the value of the number of pre-read pending PN is not "0" or less, it terminates the process of determining whether to consume the pre-read performance at the start without executing the process of step S6206R.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process, the processing from step S6104 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S6103R, MPU 52 executes the processes of step S6104 and subsequent steps.

In step S6104, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining other effect patterns. In the process for determining other effect patterns, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the pre-reading effect. The MPU 52 then terminates the process for determining effect patterns.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6101 that the second hold effect flag is set in RAM 54, it executes a second hold effect generation process in step S6105. In this second hold effect generation process, the MPU 52 generates a second hold effect that is executed only when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE.

In step S6106, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the second hold effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This second hold effect generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the second hold effect generation command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the second hold effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G to notify the player that the second hold effect has occurred.

In step S6107R, the MPU 52 clears the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. This causes the MPU 52 to end the start-time pre-reading effect. The MPU 52 then ends the effect pattern determination process.

Returning to the explanation of the effect determination process, the processing of steps S2414R to S2416R will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S2414R, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414R that it has not received a fluctuation end command, it executes the processing from step S2413 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414R that it has received a variation end command, it executes a process for determining a game round end effect in step S2415R. In this process, the MPU 52 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 53 to select a game round end effect corresponding to the variation end command.

In step S2416R, the MPU 52 sets a game round end command that includes information related to the game round end effect selected in step S2415R. The MPU 52 then stores the game round end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This game round end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the game round end effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the game round end command transmitted from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the game round end effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.
The process for determining the effects to be used to end a game will be explained in detail below.

Figure 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the presentation to be given at the end of a game round.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a game round end effect to select a game round end effect corresponding to the variable end command as a game round end effect. In this process for determining a game round end effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S6301R to S6304 as shown in FIG.

In step S6301R, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur at the end of the game.
The process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur at the end will be described in detail below.

<End-time look-ahead effect occurrence determination process>
Figure 79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.
In the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S6401 to S6412 as shown in FIG.

In step S6401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the end-time pre-read performance flag.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6401 that there is no pending notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, it terminates the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6402 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6401 that there is pending notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, it determines in step S6402 whether or not an end-time pre-reading effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This end-time pre-reading effect occurring flag is a flag for specifying that an end-time pre-reading effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurring flag when an end-time pre-reading effect occurs, and clears the end-time pre-reading effect occurring flag when the end-time pre-reading effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6402 that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the end-time pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6403 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6402 that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, it determines in step S6403 whether or not a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead effect flag by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side reserve information, which is executed before the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead effect flag, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

For example, if advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead performance flag is executed by referencing information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

Furthermore, for example, if advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, second area SRb2, and fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb (the sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRb1 and second area SRb2 of the second sub-side holding area SRb) will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead performance flag is executed by referencing information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserve information stored in the first area SRb1 and second area SRb2 of the second sub-side reserve area SRb, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6403 that a reach display will occur before the execution of the notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, it terminates the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6413 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6403 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information related to the end-time look-ahead effect flag, then in step S6413, it determines whether or not a start-time look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This start-time look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for specifying that a start-time look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the start-time look-ahead effect occurring flag when a start-time look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the start-time look-ahead effect occurring flag when the start-time look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6413 that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the start-time pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S6404 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6413 that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it acquires the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6404.

Here, when it is determined in step S6401 that there is advance notice pending information related to the end-time advance notice performance flag in the memory area of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the number of advance notice pending information PN is the total number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserve area SRa that will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the end-time advance notice performance flag, and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the execution area SAE.
For example, if advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, second area SRa2, and fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In addition, when it is determined in step S6401 that there is advance notice pending information related to the end-time advance notice performance flag in the memory area of the second sub-side reserve area SRb, the number of advance notice pending information PN is the sum of the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserve area SRb that will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the end-time advance notice performance flag and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the execution area SAE.
For example, if advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1, the second area SRb2, and the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side holding area SRb will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRb3 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN.
In this case, even if hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In step S6405, the MPU 52 acquires the notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the storage area of the sub-side reserve area. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) included in the notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In step S6406, the MPU 52 determines whether the win/loss result acquired in step S6405, i.e., the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-read performance flag stored in the storage area of the sub-side pending area, is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6406 that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing of step S6407 and subsequent steps, and if it determines in step S6406 that the win/loss result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing of step S6410 and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process from step S6407 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6406 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6407, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6404 is "4" or less.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S6407 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "4" or less, it terminates the process of determining whether or not a pre-read effect will occur at the end without executing the processes in step S6408 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6407 that the number of pending pre-reads PN is "4" or less, it sets a flag indicating that the pre-read effect at the end is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6408.
In step S6409, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0". Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.

Next, the processing (processing from step S6410 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6406 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S6410, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the result of the reach occurrence lottery acquired in step S6405, i.e., the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice reserve information related to the end-time pre-read performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area, is a "win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S6410 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win," it executes the processing of step S6411 and subsequent steps, and if it determines in step S6410 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win," it executes the processing of step S6412 and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process from step S6411 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6410 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "winning" will be described.
In step S6411, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6404 is "3" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6410 that the pre-read pending number PN is "3" or less, it executes the processing from step S6408 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6410 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "3" or less, it terminates the end-time pre-read performance occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6408 onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S6412 onward) when the MPU 52 determines in step S6410 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" will be described.
In step S6412, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S6404 is "2" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6412 that the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "2", it executes the processing from step S6408 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6412 that the number of pre-read pendings PN is not "2" or less, it terminates the end-time pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S6408 onwards.

In this way, in this reference form, the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process determines in step S6408 that an end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 and an end-time pre-reading effect will be generated if the pre-reading pending number PN is "4" or less.
Specifically, the end-time pre-reading effect occurs when the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is "jackpot win" and the pre-reading pending number PN is "4" or less, when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is "win" and the pre-reading pending number PN is "3" or less, and when the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win" and the pre-reading pending number PN is "2" or less.

In other words, if the end-time pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN, which is the sum of the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of each sub-side hold area that is executed before the advance notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the execution area, is "4," then the win/loss result contained in the advance notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is confirmed to be "jackpot win," and if the pre-reading hold number PN is "3," then the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is confirmed to be "win."
In this reference form, the end-time pre-reading effect also occurs when the sub-side pending information stored in the execution area is executed, so if it occurs when the pre-reading pending number PN is "4", it will occur four times in a row, if it occurs when the pre-reading pending number PN is "3", it will occur three times in a row, and if it occurs when the pre-reading pending number PN is "2", it will occur two times in a row.

Returning to the explanation of the process for determining the effects for ending a game round, the process from step S6302R onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 78.
In step S6302R, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6302R that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S6304 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6302R that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a process to determine whether the end-time pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6303R.
The process of determining the end-time pre-reading effect consumption will be explained in detail below.

<End-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process>
Figure 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process.
In the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S6501 to S6506 as shown in FIG.

In step S6501, the MPU 52 executes end-time pre-reading effect generation processing. In this end-time pre-reading effect generation processing, the MPU 52 determines whether an end-time pre-reading effect will occur based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54. Specifically, if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "0," the MPU 52 determines whether a first end-time pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "1," the MPU 52 determines whether a second end-time pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "2," the MPU 52 determines whether a third end-time pre-reading effect will occur; and if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "3," the MPU 52 determines whether a fourth end-time pre-reading effect will occur.

In step S6502, the MPU 52 sets a command to generate a look-ahead effect at the end. The MPU 52 then stores the look-ahead effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 is included in the look-ahead effect generation command at the end stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This look-ahead effect generation command at the end is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the end-time pre-reading effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the end-time pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of pre-reading effects PRN included in this end-time pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the end-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the end-time pre-reading effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the first look-ahead effect will occur at the end of the game; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the second look-ahead effect will occur at the end of the game; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the third look-ahead effect will occur at the end of the game; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the fourth look-ahead effect will occur at the end of the game.

In step S6503, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S6504, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.

In step S6505, it is determined whether the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S6505 that the value of the number of pending read-aheads PN is equal to or less than "0," the MPU 52 clears in step S6506 the end-time read-ahead effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the end-time read-ahead effect.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6505 that the value of the number of pre-read pending PN is not "0" or less, it terminates the end-time pre-read performance consumption determination process without executing the processing of step S6506.

Returning to the explanation of the process for determining the presentation for the end of a game round, the process from step S6304 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 78.
After executing the end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process in step S6303R, or if it determines in step S6302R that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, MPU 52 executes the process from step S6304 onwards.

In step S6304, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining other effects for ending a game round. In the process for determining other effects for ending a game round, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining effects for ending a game round, which are used to end effects for a game round other than the end-time pre-reading effect. The MPU 52 then terminates the process for determining effects for ending a game round.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
81 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserve area. Specifically, FIG. 81(A) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 81(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then the first advance notice pending effect is consumed. Also, FIG. 81(C) is a diagram showing a state in which the second advance notice pending effect is consumed after advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 81(D) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then the third advance notice pending effect related to this advance notice pending information is consumed. Also, Figure 81 (E) is a diagram showing the state in which the first end-time pre-reading performance has been completed based on the advance notice hold information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area.

As shown in Figure 81(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 81(A), the MPU 62 starts the display of fluctuations based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, when it is determined in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, the MPU 52 executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207R and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area of the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 81, the MPU 52 stores notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance notice hold information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance notice hold image, on the base B13.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 81 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 81 (B), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S2309R.
81(A), the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, and the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores regular reserve information. In this case, in step S6003R, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side pending information, which is executed before the advance notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 81 (A), advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the start-time look-ahead performance flag is executed by referencing information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for a jackpot occurrence (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).

Then, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6003R that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, and determines in step S6013R that the end-time pre-reading effect occurring flag is not set in RAM 54, the two sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6004.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after storing the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S6004, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008R.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after storing the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the pre-reading hold number PN in step S6004. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008R.

Then, in step S6008R, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a start-time pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the start-time pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 81, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance notice information related to the start-time advance reading performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not ``jackpot win'', but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is ``win''.

In the example of Figure 81, the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win." Therefore, when the first hold shift process is performed after the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003R that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is executed, obtains "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008R.

When the MPU 52 sets the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008R, it executes a start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103R.
In the start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes the start-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201R, and sets the start-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202R.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the start-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the start-time pre-reading effect generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the start-time pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the start-time pre-reading effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the symbol display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a start-up look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This start-up look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 81(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on pedestal B12) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before that hold (in the example of FIG. 81(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution pedestal AB and on pedestal B11).

In the example of Figure 81 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first start-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by assigning "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first start-time pre-reading effect with the gauge GB filled up to two marks based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 81 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 81 (C), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 81 (C), after the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first start-time pre-reading effect, so in step S6204, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a start-time pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008R, it executes a process to determine whether the start-time pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103R.
In the start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes the start-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201R, and sets the start-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202R.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the start-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the start-time pre-reading effect generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the start-time pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the start-time pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 81 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second start-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second start-time pre-reading effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes notice hold generation processing in step S2207R, and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should not be generated, or if it determines in step S2210R that there are two or more notice hold information items, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208, and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 81(C), the MPU 52 stores normal hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and stores notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern and the notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the normal hold and the notice hold.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the base B12, and if it determines that advance hold information related to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is a advance hold image, on the base B13.

In addition, in step S6413, the MPU 52 determines that the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54. Therefore, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 does not execute the processing from step S6404 onwards in the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination processing of step S6301R, and does not generate the end-time pre-reading effect.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 81 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 81 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading performance flag newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 81 (D), after the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 consumes the second start-time pre-reading effect, and therefore in step S6204, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a start-time pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54 in step S6008R, it executes a process to determine whether the start-time pre-reading effect has been consumed in step S6103R.
In the start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes the pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201R, and sets the start-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202R.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the start-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the start-time pre-reading effect generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the start-time pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect.
Thereafter, in step S6205, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6206R, clears the start-time pre-read performance occurrence flag stored in RAM 54, thereby ending the start-time pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 81 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third start-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third start-time pre-reading effect with the gauge GB scale filled to 6.

In this way, in the example of Figure 81, the start-time pre-reading effect has occurred three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

In addition, in step S6206R, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in RAM 54 is cleared to end the start-time pre-reading effect, so when executing the end of the game round, MPU 52 executes the processing from step S6404 onwards in the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination processing of step S6301R.
81(D), the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, and the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores regular pending information. In this case, one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, so in step S6404, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-reading pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first round of play after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the number of advance notice holds PN in step S6404. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information related to the end-time advance notice effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the end-time advance notice effect in progress flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6408.

Then, in step S6408, when the MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54, it causes the end-time pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 81, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 81, the win/loss result included in the notice pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first game is completed after the notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6403 that a reach display will not occur before the notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-reading hold number PN in step S6404, and sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6408.

If the MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6408, it executes the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303R.
In the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes end-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6501, and sets an end-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6502.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the end-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the end-time pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the end-time pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the end-time pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 81 (E), the MPU 62 executes the first end-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6409, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first end-time pre-reading effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN.

Figure 82 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area, and then advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 82(A) shows the state in which the first end-time pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 82(B) shows the state in which the second end-time pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 82(C) shows the state in which the third end-time pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 82(D) shows the state in which the game play related to the advance notice hold information related to the end-time look-ahead effect flag has been consumed after the advance notice hold information related to this advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 82(E) shows the state in which the first start-time look-ahead effect has been consumed based on the advance notice hold information related to the start-time look-ahead effect flag stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area.

Based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed variation period by starting the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 82 (A), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, as shown in Figure 82 (A), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, in step S2207R, it executes a notice hold generation process and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area of the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 82, the MPU 52 stores notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance notice hold information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance notice hold image, on the base B13.

In addition, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 executes the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R.
82(A), the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, and the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores regular reserve information. In this case, in step S6403, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is executed.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the execution of the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead effect flag by determining whether the win/loss result included in the sub-side reserve information, which is executed before the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead effect flag, is a "jackpot win" or not, and whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" or not.

In the example of Figure 82 (A), advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so the two sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side holding area SRa (sub-side pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa) will be executed before the advance notice pending information relating to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur before the advance notice information related to the end-time read-ahead performance flag is executed by referencing information related to the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, and information related to the result of the lottery for whether a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).

Then, if the MPU 52 determines in step S6403 that a reach display will not occur before the execution of the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag, and determines in step S6413 that the start-time pre-reading effect occurring flag is not set in RAM 54, the two sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and therefore the MPU 52 will obtain "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6404.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the first game round after the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6404, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side holding area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6408.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the end of the second round of play after the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag has been stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the advance notice pending number PN will be "2" in step S6404. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S6408.

Then, in step S6408, when the MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54, it causes the end-time pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 82, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance notice information related to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not "jackpot win", but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win".

In the example of Figure 82, the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win." Therefore, when the first game is completed after the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6403 that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is executed, obtains "3" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6404, and sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6408.

If the MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6408, it executes the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303R.
In the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes end-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6501, and sets an end-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6502.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the end-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the end-time pre-reading effect generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the end-time pre-reading effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the MPU 62 places an angel character on the left edge of the display screen G and has this character speak to suggest to the player that the look-ahead effect has been completed. This end-time look-ahead effect is an effect for completing a preview hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of the hold (in the example of FIG. 82(A), the hold related to the preview hold symbol placed on base B13) by displaying a game turn based on the hold that will be completed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 82(A), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and bases B11 and B12).

In the example of Figure 82 (A), the MPU 62 executes the first end-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6409, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first end-time pre-reading effect with the angel character's line "x1" based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 82 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 82 (B), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 82 (B), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 82 (B), after the advance notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the first end-time pre-reading effect, so in step S6504, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6408, it executes the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303R.
In the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes end-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6501, and sets an end-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6502.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the end-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the end-time pre-reading effect generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the end-time pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 82 (B), the MPU 62 executes a second end-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6503, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1," and therefore, based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second end-time pre-reading effect with the angel character's line "x2."

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 82 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 82 (C), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, as shown in Figure 82 (C), based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, in the example of Figure 82 (C), after the advance notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has consumed the second end-time pre-reading effect, so in step S6504, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".

In addition, if the MPU 52 sets the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6408, it executes the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6303R.
In the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes end-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6501, and sets an end-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6502.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the end-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the end-time pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the end-time pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the end-time pre-reading effect.
Thereafter, in step S6505, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is equal to or less than "0", and therefore in step S6506, clears the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in RAM 54, thereby ending the end-time pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 82 (C), the MPU 62 executes a third end-time look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the end-time look-ahead effect flag. Specifically, in step S6503, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third end-time look-ahead effect with the angel character's line "x3."

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes notice hold generation processing in step S2207R, and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should not be generated, or if it determines in step S2210R that there are two or more notice hold information items, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208, and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 82(C), the MPU 52 stores normal hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and stores notice hold information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern and the notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the normal hold and the notice hold.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the base B12, and if it determines that advance hold information related to the start-time pre-reading performance flag is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is a advance hold image, on the base B13.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 82 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 82 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance notice pending information related to the end-time pre-reading performance flag newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In this way, in the example of Figure 82, the end-time pre-reading effect has occurred three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the third read-ahead effect is executed with the angel character's line "x3," so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information related to the end-time pre-reading effect flag is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

In addition, in step S6013R, the MPU 52 determines that the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54. Therefore, when executing the end of a game round, the MPU 52 does not execute the processing from step S6004 onwards in the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination processing of step S2309R, and does not generate the start-time pre-reading effect.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the advance notice hold information related to the end-time pre-reading performance flag stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes it by displaying the shift of the normal hold and advance notice hold on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 82 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In Figure 82 (E), MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S2309R.
82(E), the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag, and the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa stores regular pending information. In this case, one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6004.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after storing advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-read effect flag in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S6004. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information related to the start-time pre-read effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win," the start-time pre-read effect in progress flag is set in RAM 54 in step S6008R.

Then, in step S6008R, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a start-time pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the start-time pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice pending information relating to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 82, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance notice information related to the start-time advance reading performance flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 82, the win/loss result included in the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win." Therefore, when the first hold shift process is performed after the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, the MPU 52 determines in step S6003R that a reach display will not occur before the advance notice pending information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag is executed, obtains "2" as the pre-reading pending number PN in step S6004, and sets a start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S6008R.

When the MPU 52 sets the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S6008R, it executes a start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S6103R.
In the start-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes the start-time pre-reading effect generation process in step S6201R, and sets the start-time pre-reading effect generation command in step S6202R.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the start-time pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the start-time pre-reading effect generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the start-time pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the start-time pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 82 (E), the MPU 62 executes the first start-time pre-reading effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information related to the start-time pre-reading effect flag. Specifically, in step S6009, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by assigning "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first start-time pre-reading effect with the gauge GB scale filled up to two marks based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN.

In this way, in this embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance.
In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26).
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the pattern display device 36 is executing a variable display, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the starting ball entry means.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process (first hold storage means) of step S2202 in which hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 (first start ball entry means), a process (second hold storage means) of step S2203 in which hold information is stored in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 (second start ball entry means), and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 in which the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is shifted for each play.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

In addition, in this reference form, the notice hold generation processing of step S2207R functions as a continuation effect generation determination means that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information (notice hold information) to generate a continuation effect (pre-read effect at the start) that will continue the effect over a predetermined number of game rounds.
In this reference form, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R and the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R function as a continuation effect execution means that, when a pre-effect based on pending information stored in multiple pending areas that is consumed before the continuation effect pending information includes a pre-effect (reach display and end-time pre-reading effect) that is different from the continuation effect, after the pending information including this pre-effect is consumed, causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information.

With this configuration, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R and the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information after consuming the pending information including the pre-effect. This prevents the pre-effect from occurring while a continuation effect is being executed, and if it is determined in the advance pending generation process of step S2207R that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference form, the notice hold generation processing of step S2207R functions as a continuation effect generation determination means that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information (notice hold information) to generate a continuation effect (end-time pre-reading effect) that continues the effect for a predetermined number of game rounds.
In this reference form, the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R and the end-time pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S6303R function as end-time continuation effect execution means that, when a pre-effect based on hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information includes a pre-effect (reach display and start-time pre-reading effect) that is different from the continuation effect, causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect hold information at the end of the game round as the effect for the game round related to the hold information that includes this pre-effect.

With this configuration, the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R and the end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game turn as the effect for the game turn related to the pending information including the advance effect. Therefore, if it is determined that the continuation effect pending information is to be set in the advance pending generation process of step S2207R, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. This makes it possible to increase the number of game turns in which a continuation effect is executed compared to when the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game turn to be completed next to the game turn related to the pending information including the advance effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means employs the upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26, but any other configuration may be employed. For example, the starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, each actuation port, or a through gate. The starting ball entry means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize entry port or inside a special device.
In addition, in this reference embodiment, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R (end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R) and the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R (end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R) are configured to prevent the occurrence of a pre-effect during the execution of a continuation effect by having pattern display device 36 execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information after the pending information including the pre-effect is consumed. In contrast, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R (end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R) and the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R (end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R) do not have to be configured to prevent the occurrence of a pre-effect during the execution of a continuation effect if the win/loss result included in the continuation effect pending information is a "jackpot win," and the continuation effect may be configured to be able to occur five or more times consecutively.

In addition, in this reference form, the continuation effects use start-time look-ahead effects and end-time look-ahead effects, but any effect can be used as long as it can be continued over a predetermined number of game plays. For example, other effects such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved image to notify the player of the expected level of the reserved effect may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R, the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R, the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R, and the end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R determine whether or not a pre-performance is included in the pre-performance based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process of step S2104.

With this configuration, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R, the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R, the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R, and the end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R determine whether a pre-time effect is included in the pre-time effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas is shifted for each play in the hold shift process of step S2104.Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after it is determined to be continuation effect hold information in the advance hold generation process of step S2207R, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-time effect during the execution of a continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

In this embodiment, the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R, the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R, the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R, and the end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R determine whether a pre-time effect is included in the pre-time effect based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold information stored in multiple hold areas is shifted for each game in the hold shift process of step S2104, but the timing of this determination does not have to be each time the hold information is shifted for each game. For example, the pre-time effect determination means may be configured to make a determination only once when the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that continuation effect hold information is to be set, or may be configured to make a determination only once before the continuation effect is executed.

In addition, in this reference form, the pre-effect is a reach display, so it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation effect, and if it is determined in the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207R that continuation effect hold information is to be set, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance performance is a different type of continuation performance (a start-time pre-read performance or an end-time pre-read performance) that is different from the continuation performance (a start-time pre-read performance or an end-time pre-read performance), so the simultaneous occurrence of a continuation performance and a different type of continuation performance can be avoided, and if it is determined that the continuation performance is pending information in the advance hold generation processing of step S2207R, the continuation performance can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation performance.

In this reference embodiment, the pre-effects are reach displays and pre-reading effects, but other effects are also possible. For example, the pre-effects may be effects that encourage the player to press a push button, pseudo-consecutive effects, effects that gradually enlarge the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, or effects that change the length of the display duration. Furthermore, the pre-effects are not limited to effects that display images on the symbol display device 36, but may also be effects that activate role devices, for example. In short, the pre-effects may be any type of pre-effects based on hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player is notified of the likelihood of the continuation effect based on the number of predetermined game plays.
Specifically, if the start-time pre-reading effect and the end-time pre-reading effect occurred four times in a row, the result of the win/loss contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "jackpot win," and if they occurred three times in a row, the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "win."
According to this configuration, the continuation effect notifies the player of the expectation of this continuation effect based on the number of times the game has been played a predetermined number of times, so the player will pay attention to the number of times the game has been played a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the number of game rounds in which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the determination result of the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S2309R or the determination result of the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S6301R (start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process in step S6103R or end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process in step S6303R).

With this configuration, the number of game rounds at which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the result of the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process in step S2309R. This prevents a pre-effect from occurring while a continuation effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading effect occurrence process in step S2207R determines that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the number of game rounds at which the symbol display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the determination result of the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R, so it is possible to avoid a pre-effect occurring during the execution of a continuation effect, and if it is determined in the advance notice pending generation process of step S2207R that continuation effect pending information has been issued, it is possible to reliably execute the continuation effect without canceling its execution.

In this embodiment, if the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R determines that a pre-effect is included, the start-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6103R causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, starting from the next game turn, after consuming the pending information including this pre-effect. However, the pattern display device 36 may also execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information starting from the next game turn, or it is not necessary for the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information starting from another game turn. In short, the game turn in which the pattern display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information may change based on the determination result of the start-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S2309R.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R determines that a pre-effect is included, the end-time pre-reading effect completion determination process of step S6303R causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, starting from the game turn related to the pending information including this pre-effect. However, it is not necessary to cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information starting from this game turn, and the pattern display device 36 may execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information starting from another game turn. In other words, the game turn in which the pattern display device 36 executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information may change based on the determination result of the end-time pre-reading effect occurrence determination process of step S6301R.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice hold generation processing of step S2207R also functions as a first continuation effect generation determination means that can determine whether to generate first continuation effect hold information (advance notice hold information related to a start-time pre-reading effect or advance notice hold information related to an end-time pre-reading effect) that will generate a first continuation effect (start-time pre-reading effect or end-time pre-reading effect) that will continue the effect for a predetermined number of game rounds.
Furthermore, in this reference form, the notice hold generation processing of step S2207R also functions as a second continuation effect generation determination means that can determine whether or not to generate second continuation effect hold information (notice hold information relating to end-time pre-reading effect or notice hold information relating to start-time pre-reading effect) that will generate a second continuation effect (end-time pre-reading effect or start-time pre-reading effect) that will continue the effect for a predetermined number of game rounds.
The advance hold generation process of step S2207R determines that the first continuation effect hold information will be generated if the advance effect based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26 includes a second continuation effect.

With this configuration, the advance notice hold generation process of step S2207R determines that the first continuation effect hold information is to be generated when the second continuation effect is included in the advance effect based on the hold information stored in multiple hold areas that is consumed before the hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the game ball entering the upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26.This allows the pachinko machine 1 to generate different types of continuation effects in parallel, preventing confusion between continuation effects compared to when the same type of continuation effects are generated in parallel.This means that the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference form, the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect are executed at different times during a game round (at the start and end of the game round), so the pachinko machine 1 can generate different types of continuation effects in parallel, preventing confusion between continuation effects compared to when the same type of continuation effects are generated in parallel. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this reference embodiment, the first and second continuation effects are executed at different times in a game round by setting the timing for executing the effects at the start and end of the game round. In contrast, the first and second continuation effects may be executed at different times in a game round, thereby setting the timing for executing the effects at different times in a game round.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the functions and effects of the embodiments P and Q, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The advance notice hold generation process of step S2207R determines that the first continuation effect hold information is to be generated when the second continuation effect is included in the advance effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the entry of game balls into the upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can generate different types of continuation effects in parallel, and can prevent confusion between continuation effects compared to when the same type of continuation effects are generated in parallel. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(2) Because the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect are executed at different times during a game, the pachinko machine 1 can generate different types of continuation effects in parallel, preventing confusion between continuation effects compared to when the same type of continuation effect is generated in parallel. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

[Reference form S]
A reference embodiment S of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 executes processing differently from that in the main reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the timer interrupt processing differs from that in the main reference embodiment. The details of the timer interrupt processing in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device according to the reference form S of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2001 to S2006 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in Fig. 83. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the main reference embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes steps S2003S and S2004S instead of steps S2003 and S2004.

In step S2003S, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining effects based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the process for determining effects, the MPU 52 determines effects for the game round, effects for the open/close execution mode, etc. This process for determining effects will be described in detail later.
In step S2004S, the MPU 52 executes a performance execution process based on the contents of the hold determination process in step S2002 and the performance determination process in step S2003S. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 84. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the main reference embodiment in that it executes the process of step S2407S instead of the process of step S2407.

After executing any one of steps S2403, S2405, and S2406, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining an effect pattern in step S2407S. In this process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing an effect table pre-stored in ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration period) and effect content as the effect pattern. In step S2407S, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display, such as displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the display screen G, based on the player pressing the push button 142, for example.

In this embodiment, only the preview display related to the push button 142 among the preview displays that execute the lottery in the process of determining the presentation pattern will be explained, and explanations of the other preview displays will be omitted.
In this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display related to the push button 142, and a lottery to determine whether or not to generate other preview displays, but it may also execute only a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display related to the push button 142.

Here, the preview display related to the push button 142 is composed of two parts: an operation preview part that suggests to the player how to operate the push button 142, and a preview result notification part that notifies the player of the result of the preview display when the push button 142 is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the push button 142 suggested in the operation preview part.
In this embodiment, the content of the preview display related to the push button 142 is one type, but it may be two or more types, and if there are two or more types, the expectation level may be different for each type of preview display.

Fig. 85 is a diagram showing the operation preview part of the preview display. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing the preview result notification part of the preview display. Specifically, Fig. 86(A) is a diagram showing the success presentation of the preview display related to the push button 142, and Fig. 86(B) is a diagram showing the failure presentation of the preview display related to the push button 142.
The preview display related to the push button 142 suggests to the player to press the push button 142 in the operation preview part, and notifies the player of the result of the preview display in the preview result notification part.

Specifically, the preview display related to the push button 142 suggests to the player that he or she should press the push button 142 during the operation preview part, so the MPU 52 displays an image GB1 representing the push button 142 and a timer gauge GB2 indicating the duration of the operation preview part on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. 85, and displays the word "PUSH" superimposed on this image GB1. The MPU 52 also displays an angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and suggests to the player that he or she should press the push button 142 by having this character say, "Press the button and fireworks will go off! It'll be super exciting!"

The preview display associated with push button 142 transitions to the preview result notification part when push button 142 is pressed, and in the preview result notification part, the MPU 52 notifies the player of a successful preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in FIG. 86(A). The MPU 52 also notifies the player of a failed preview display by not launching fireworks, as shown in FIG. 86(B).

Here, in the preview result notification part, the MPU 52 executes a lottery with a predetermined probability that if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," it will be easier to select a success effect and harder to select a failure effect, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal miss result," it will be harder to select a success effect and harder to select a failure effect. If the MPU 52 wins this lottery, it notifies the player of a success effect, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal miss result," it will notify the player of a failure effect. In other words, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," the MPU 52 is more likely to select a success effect, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal miss result," it is more likely to select a failure effect.

In this reference form, the MPU 52 is more likely to select a success presentation when the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win," and is more likely to select a failure presentation when the result of the lottery is a "normal miss result," but the opposite relationship may also be true.
In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 is likely to select a success effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," and is likely to select a failure effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal loss result," but the MPU 52 may be configured to select a success effect and a failure effect without executing a lottery for selecting a success effect and a failure effect. Specifically, for example, the MPU 52 may select a success effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," and may select a failure effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal loss result."

FIG. 87 shows the timing at which a preview display is generated.
The advance notice display related to the push button 142 occurs at a predetermined timing after the period PD1 from the start of the variable display of the symbols to the occurrence of the reach display has elapsed and after the period PD2 from the occurrence of the reach display to the stop of the variable display of the symbols has begun, as shown in Fig. 87. In other words, the advance notice display related to the push button 142 occurs at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of the reach display, as shown by the character "push" in a circle in Fig. 87.
The advance notice display associated with the push button 142 ends before the variable display of the symbols stops. Specifically, the advance notice display associated with the push button 142 occurs during a predetermined period PD3 that is shorter than the period PD2.

In this reference form, the preview display related to push button 142 occurs at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of a reach display, but it may also occur at a predetermined timing after the start of the display of changing patterns, a predetermined timing after the occurrence of a super reach that can develop after the occurrence of a reach display, or a predetermined timing before the display of changing patterns stops.
In addition, in this reference form, the preview display related to the push button 142 occurs only once, but it may also occur multiple times at predetermined times from the start to the end of a game round.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
In the process of determining the effect pattern in step S2407S, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S7001 to S7004 as shown in FIG.
In step S7001, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

If the MPU 52 determines that the reach display will not occur, it executes the processes of step S7004 and thereafter without executing the processes of step S7002 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, then in step S7002, it executes processing for setting a preview display related to the push button 142. In this processing for setting a preview display, the MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display related to the push button 142, the timing for generating the preview display related to the push button 142, and a period PD3 for generating the preview display related to the push button 142.

As described above, the MPU 52 executes a lottery with a predetermined probability that if the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win," it will be easier to select a successful presentation and harder to select a failed presentation; and if the result of the lottery is a "normal miss," it will be harder to select a successful presentation and harder to select a failed presentation. If the lottery is won, the MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display to notify the player of a successful presentation, and if the lottery is not won, it sets the result of the preview display to notify the player of a failed presentation.

As described above, the MPU 52 also sets the timing for generating the warning display so that it occurs at a predetermined timing after the period PD1 from the start of the display of the changing patterns to the occurrence of the reach display has elapsed, and after the start of the period PD2 from the occurrence of the reach display to the end of the display of the changing patterns.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 sets the timing for generating the warning display immediately after the start of period PD2, but the timing for generating the warning display may also be set to occur at a different time.
In addition, in this reference form, when the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it executes a setting process for the preview display and generates a preview display related to the push button 142, but it may also be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display, and generate the preview display based on the result of this lottery.

Here, the MPU 52 acquires the time (display duration) from the start of the variable display of the patterns to the end of the variable display of the patterns based on the content of the variable command, and sets the periods PD1 and PD2 based on this display duration. For example, if the MPU 52 acquires a display duration of 20 seconds based on the content of the variable command, it sets the period PD1 to 5 seconds and the period PD2 to 15 seconds. In this case, the MPU 52 sets the period PD3 to 10 seconds, for example.
Note that period PD3 does not have to be a fixed period, and the selection rate of successful and unsuccessful effects may be varied depending on the length of period PD3. Furthermore, period PD3 may be set to be longer when the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win" and shorter when the result of the lottery is a "normal loss result," or the reverse relationship may be established. In short, period PD3 may be set to be shorter than period PD2.

After executing the preview display setting process in step S7002, the MPU 52 executes the elapsed time setting process in step S7003. In this elapsed time setting process, the MPU 52 suggests to the player that they press the push button 142 in the operation preview part, and after detecting that the player has pressed the push button 142, it transitions to the preview result notification part, where it sets the elapsed time until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display.

Specifically, the MPU 52 sets the elapsed time so that it is shorter than the difference between periods PD2 and PD3 (maximum elapsed time). For example, as mentioned above, if period PD2 is set to 15 seconds and period PD3 is set to 10 seconds, the elapsed time is set so that it is shorter than the difference of 5 seconds between periods PD2 and PD3. In this embodiment, the MPU 52 randomly sets the elapsed time between 0 and the maximum elapsed time (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the MPU 52 sets the elapsed time so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display before the changing symbol display stops.

In this reference form, the elapsed time is set so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display before the display of the changing patterns stops, but it may also be set so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display after the display of the changing patterns stops or after the display of the changing patterns in the next game starts.
In addition, in this embodiment, the elapsed time is set randomly, but it may be set to a predetermined elapsed time instead of being set randomly. The elapsed time may be set to be longer when the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win" and shorter when the result of the lottery is a "normal loss result," or the reverse relationship may be set. In short, the MPU 52 may set the elapsed time between 0 and the maximum elapsed time.

After executing the processing of step S7003, or if it is determined in step S7001 that a reach display will not occur, the MPU 52 executes processing to set other presentation patterns in step S7004. In the processing to set other presentation patterns, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. The MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether to generate a preview display other than the preview display associated with the push button 142.

<Regarding the performance execution process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect execution process.
The MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S7101 to S7119 as shown in FIG. 89 based on the contents of the hold determination process of step S2002 and the presentation determination process of step S2003S.

In step S7101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the timing for issuing a notice display related to the push button 142 has arrived.
If the MPU 52 determines that the timing for the advance notice display has not yet arrived, it skips steps S7102 to S7105 and executes the processes from step S7106 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that the timing for the preview display has arrived, in other words, if it determines that period PD1 has elapsed and period PD2 has begun, it executes the operation preview part in step S7102.
In the process of executing the operation notice part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the indicator lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to execute the operation notice part.

After executing the operation preview part execution process, the MPU 52 sets an operation preview part execution command in step S7103. The MPU 52 then stores the operation preview part execution command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This operation preview part execution command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the operation notice part on the pattern display device 36 based on the operation notice part execution command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the operation notice part.

Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 displays an image GB1 representing the push button 142 and a timer gauge GB2 indicating the duration of the operation preview part on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and displays the word "PUSH" superimposed on this image GB1. The MPU 62 also displays an angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and suggests to the player that they press the push button 142 by having this character say, "Press the button and fireworks will go off! It'll be super exciting!" (See Figure 85). The timer gauge GB2 decreases over time, and the period until the timer gauge GB2 reaches 0 corresponds to the period PD3 during which the preview display is generated.

After setting the operation preview part execution command in step S7103, the MPU 52 sets the period PD3 for generating the preview display related to the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process in step S7002 in the timer counter ST provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54 in step S7104. The value set in this timer counter ST is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, for example, if the timer counter ST is set to "5000", the period PD3 will be 10 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S7104, the MPU 52 sets an operation notification flag in RAM 54 in step S7105. This operation notification flag is a flag for identifying that the operation notification part is being executed.

After executing the processing of step S7105, or if it is determined in step S7101 that the timing for the preview display has not yet arrived, the MPU 52 determines in step S7106 whether an operation preview flag is set in RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S7106 that the operation notice flag has not been set in the RAM 54, it skips steps S7107 to S7113 and executes the processes in and after step S7114.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7106 that the operation notice flag is set in the RAM 54, it determines in step S7107 whether the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7107 that the value of the timer counter ST is less than or equal to "0" (if it determines that the period PD3 for generating the preview display related to the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process of step S7002 has elapsed), it executes the processing from step S7111 onwards without executing the processing of steps S7108 to S7110.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7107 that the value of the timer counter ST is not less than "0" (if it determines that the period PD3 for generating the preview display related to the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process of step S7002 has not elapsed), it determines in step S7108 whether or not it has detected the player pressing the push button 142.

If the MPU 52 determines that it has not detected the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the processes from step S7114 onwards without executing the processes of steps S7109 to S7113.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it sets a button press flag in the RAM 54 in step S7109. This button press flag is a flag for specifying that the pressing of the push button 142 has been detected.

After setting the button press flag in RAM 54 in step S7109, MPU 52 sets the elapsed time set in the elapsed time setting process in step S7003 in timer counter ST provided in various counter area 542 of RAM 54 in step S7110. The value set in this timer counter ST is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, for example, if timer counter ST is set to "1000", the elapsed time will be 2 seconds.

After executing the process of step S7110, or if it is determined in step S7107 that the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 52 executes the process of ending the operation notice part in step S7111.
In the process of ending the operation notice part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the indicator lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to end the operation notice part.

After executing the operation preview part end processing, the MPU 52 sets an operation preview part end command in step S7112. The MPU 52 then stores the operation preview part end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This operation preview part end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending processing of step S2006 described above.

Based on the operation preview part end command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for ending the operation preview part on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to end the operation preview part.

Specifically, the MPU 62 erases the image GB1, timer gauge GB2, and angel character GB3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.

After setting the operation notification part end command in step S7112, the MPU 52 clears the operation notification flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7113.

After clearing the operation notification flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7113, if it is determined in step S7106 that the operation notification flag is not set in RAM 54, or if it is determined in step S7108 that a press of the push button 142 by the player has not been detected, the MPU 52 determines in step S7114 whether a button press flag is set in RAM 54.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7114 that the button press flag is not set in the RAM 54, it skips steps S7115 to S7118 and executes the processes from step S7119 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7114 that the button press flag is set in the RAM 54, it determines in step S7115 whether the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7115 that the value of the timer counter ST is not less than "0" (if it determines that the elapsed time set in the elapsed time setting process of step S7003 has not elapsed), it executes the processes from step S7119 onwards without executing the processes of steps S7116 to S7118.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7115 that the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0" (if it determines that the elapsed time set in the elapsed time setting process in step S7003 has elapsed), it executes the result notification part execution process in step S7116.
In the execution process of the result notification part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to execute the result notification part.

After executing the result notification part execution process, the MPU 52 sets a result notification part execution command in step S7117. The MPU 52 then stores the result notification part execution command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This result notification part execution command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the result notification part on the pattern display device 36 based on the result notification part execution command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the result notification part.

Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player of a successful preview display by launching fireworks based on the results of the preview display associated with the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process of step S7002 (see FIG. 86(A)). Furthermore, the MPU 62 notifies the player of a failed preview display by not launching fireworks based on the results of the preview display associated with the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process of step S7002 (see FIG. 86(B)).

After setting the result notification part execution command in step S7117, the MPU 52 clears the button press flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7118.

After clearing the button press flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7118, if it is determined in step S7114 that the button press flag is not set in RAM 54, or if it is determined in step S7115 that the value of the timer counter ST is not less than "0", MPU 52 executes processing to execute other effects in step S7119.
In the process of executing other effects, the MPU 52 executes other effects different from the preview display related to the push button 142 based on the contents of the hold determination process of step S2002 and the effect determination process of step S2003S.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the performance execution process.

<About the occurrence of the reach display and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 90 shows the display screen of the symbol display device after the occurrence of a reach display and a timing chart of the advance notice display. Specifically, FIG. 90(A) shows the state in which the operation advance notice part of the advance notice display related to the push button 142 is executed after the reach display is generated, FIG. 90(B) shows the state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the period PD3, and FIG. 90(C) shows the state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is not detected within the period PD3. Also, FIG. 90(D) shows the state in which the player is notified of a success effect in the result notification part of the advance notice display, and FIG. 90(E) shows the state in which the player is notified of a failure effect in the result notification part of the advance notice display. Note that in FIGS. 90(A) to 90(E), the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is arranged in the upper row, and the timing chart is arranged in the lower row.

The MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variable start command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command, and if it determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information regarding the combination of symbols in the reach display as the final stop result to be displayed on the valid line L.
Then, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the MPU 62 generates the reach display after the period PD1 from the start of the variable display of the symbols to the generation of the reach display has elapsed.
In Figure 90, the timing at which the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 arranged in the upper row becomes in this state is shown by a black circle in the timing chart arranged in the lower row.

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it is time for a preview display related to the push button 142 to occur, and if it determines that it is time for a preview display to occur, in other words, if it determines that period PD1 has elapsed and period PD2 has begun, it executes the process of executing the operation preview part in step S7102.
In the execution process of this operation notice part, the MPU 62 displays an image GB1 representing the push button 142 and a timer gauge GB2 indicating the duration of the operation notice part on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and displays the word "PUSH" superimposed on this image GB1. The MPU 62 also displays an angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and suggests to the player that he press the push button 142 by having this character say, "Press the button and fireworks will go off! It'll be super exciting!" The timer gauge GB2 decreases over time, and the period until the timer gauge GB2 reaches 0 corresponds to the period PD3 during which the notice display is generated.

During the period PD3 during which the advance notice display is generated, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has detected the player pressing the push button 142.
If the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, then in step S7109, it sets a button press flag in the RAM 54, and in step S7110, it sets the elapsed time set in the elapsed time setting process of step S7003 in a timer counter ST provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54. Thereafter, in step S7111, the MPU 52 executes the end process of the operation notice part.
In the process of ending this operation notice part, the MPU 62 erases the image GB1, timer gauge GB2, and angel character GB3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 90 (B).
In FIG. 90, the timing at which the player's pressing of the push button 142 is detected is indicated by a white circle in the timing chart arranged at the bottom.

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it determines in step S7115 whether the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7115 that the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0" (if it determines that the elapsed time set in the elapsed time setting process in step S7003 has elapsed), it executes the result notification part of the process in step S7116.

In the execution process of this result notification part, the MPU 52 notifies the player of a success or failure presentation based on the result of the preview display set in the preview display setting process of step S7002.
Specifically, when a successful effect is set as the result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the successful effect of the preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in Fig. 90(C). Note that in Fig. 90(C), the timing chart arranged in the lower part shows the elapsed time DE set in the elapsed time setting process of step S7003. The MPU 52 randomly sets the elapsed time DE so as to notify the player of the successful effect or the failed effect of the preview display before the variable display of the symbols stops.

In addition, if a failure effect is set as a result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002, the MPU 62 will notify the player of the failure effect of the preview display by not launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 90 (D).
In this embodiment, the failure effect is such that the fireworks are not launched, so although the pachinko machine 1 notifies the player of the failure effect of the advance notice display after the elapse of the elapsed time DE, the player is not able to recognize the failure effect of the advance notice display. On the other hand, the failure effect of the advance notice display may be such that the player can recognize it.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that the period PD3 for generating a preview display related to the push button 142 has elapsed without detecting the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the end processing of the operation preview part in step S7111 without setting a button press flag in RAM 54 and without setting the elapsed time in the timer counter ST provided in the various counter areas 542 of RAM 54.
In the process of ending this operation notice part, the MPU 62 erases the image GB1, timer gauge GB2, and angel character GB3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. 90(E).

In this embodiment, if the MPU 52 determines that the period PD3 for generating a notice display related to the push button 142 has elapsed without detecting a player pressing the push button 142, it executes the end processing of the operation notice part in step S7111 without setting a button press flag in RAM 54 or setting the elapsed time in the timer counter ST provided in the various counter areas 542 of RAM 54. However, it may also be possible to set a button press flag in RAM 54 and set the elapsed time in the timer counter ST provided in the various counter areas 542 of RAM 54. In other words, if the MPU 52 determines that the period PD3 for generating a notice display related to the push button 142 has elapsed without detecting a player pressing the push button 142, it may execute subsequent processing as if it had detected a player pressing the push button 142.

After that, when period PD2 has elapsed, MPU 62 stops the variable display of the symbols (see Figure 90 (D)).

In this manner, in this reference form, the operation preview part functions as an operation presentation means that suggests to the player the operation mode of the push button 142, and the result notification part functions as an operation presentation execution means that executes a fireworks display as a predetermined operation presentation when the push button 142 is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the push button 142 suggested in the operation preview part.
In this embodiment, the operation means is the push button 142, but it may be, for example, a direction key, a cross key, a joystick, a jog dial, etc. In short, the operation means may be any means that can execute a predetermined operation effect based on the player's operation.

In addition, in this reference form, the operation advance notice part suggests to the player how to operate the push button 142 via the symbol display device 36, and the result notification part causes a fireworks effect to be executed via the symbol display device 36. In other words, in this reference form, the operation advance notice part and the result notification part suggest to the player how to operate the push button 142 via an image, and cause a fireworks effect to be executed.
In contrast to this, the operation presentation means and the operation presentation execution means may suggest to the player the operation mode of the operation means through other information such as sound or the movement of a role-playing device, and cause a predetermined operation presentation to be executed.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the predetermined operation effect is a fireworks effect, but it may be other effects. For example, the predetermined operation effect may be an effect that changes the reserved image, an effect that displays a character's lines, an effect that causes a cut-in to occur, an effect that activates a role-playing device, a pre-reading effect that occurs when the display of changing images begins or stops, an effect that selects one character from multiple characters, or an effect that changes the background image, the mode in which the player is staying, etc. In short, the predetermined operation effect may be any effect that can be executed based on the player's operation of the operating means.

In this embodiment, the fireworks display is executed when a predetermined elapsed time DE has elapsed since the push button 142 was operated.
According to this configuration, the fireworks display is executed when a predetermined elapsed time DE has elapsed after the push button 142 is operated, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the timing at which the fireworks display is executed after the player operates the push button 142, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Note that the fireworks display may be performed when a predetermined elapsed time DE has elapsed since the push button 142 was operated, and the push button 142 may be operated in any manner until the predetermined elapsed time DE has elapsed. For example, the push button 142 may be pressed multiple times or continuously.
Furthermore, the push button 142 may be configured to execute a lottery each time the player operates it, and if the lottery is won, it is determined that the push button 142 has been operated by the player. This allows for a greater variety in the combinations of operating the push button 142 and executing fireworks effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this reference embodiment, the elapsed time DE is set randomly, so even if the player does not immediately recognize the execution of the fireworks display after operating the push button 142, the player can continue playing in anticipation of the fireworks display being executed after the elapsed time DE has passed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the elapsed time is set randomly, but it may be set to be longer when the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win" and shorter when the result of the lottery is a "normal loss result." In other words, the predetermined elapsed time may be set to be longer when the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery is high and shorter when the probability of winning is low.
With this configuration, the predetermined elapsed time is set to be longer when the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is high and shorter when the probability of winning is low, so the probability of winning increases the longer the time from when the operating means is operated until the operation presentation is executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation means is one push button 142, but two or more operation means may be provided.
For example, the operation means may include push button 142 as a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means. In this case, the operation performance execution means may be configured to be able to execute a predetermined operation performance by changing a specific timing in a fireworks performance as the predetermined operation performance when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, and to execute the predetermined operation performance without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation performance when the second operation means is operated.

Here, the second operating means may be anything different from the first operating means, and may be a push button different from push button 142, a directional key, a cross key, a joystick, a jog dial, or the like.
The first operating means and the second operating means may be provided integrally, for example, like the up and down and left and right of a cross key.

Furthermore, the specified condition may be any condition, not just when a reach display is occurring, and may be, for example, when the number of game plays is being displayed in a variable manner, when an opening/closing execution mode is being executed, when a demo display is being executed, or when an opening or ending is being executed.
The specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation may be any timing as long as it is a specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation. For example, in the case of the firework presentation described above, the specific timing may be the timing when the fireworks start to be launched or the timing when the fireworks open.

With this configuration, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the timing at which the predetermined operation effect is executed to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, the operation effect is executed without changing the specific timing of the predetermined operation effect, allowing the player to select and operate the first operation means and the second operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The fireworks display is executed when a predetermined elapsed time DE has elapsed after the push button 142 is operated. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the timing of executing the fireworks display after the player operates the push button 142, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
(2) Because the elapsed time DE is set randomly, even if the player does not immediately recognize the execution of the fireworks display after operating the push button 142, the player can continue playing in anticipation of the execution of the fireworks display after the elapse of the elapsed time DE. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

[Reference form T]
A reference embodiment T of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the reference form S, the advance notice display related to the push button 142 is configured so that the push button 142 can be pressed only once after the operation advance notice part is executed.
In contrast, in this reference form, the preview display related to the push button 142 differs from the reference form S in that after the operation preview part is executed, the push button 142 can be pressed multiple times.

Fig. 91 is a diagram showing the operation preview part of the preview display according to reference form T of the present invention. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing the preview result notification part of the preview display. Specifically, Fig. 92(A) is a diagram showing the success presentation of the preview display related to the push button 142, and Fig. 92(B) is a diagram showing the failure presentation of the preview display related to the push button 142.
The preview display related to the push button 142 suggests to the player to press the push button 142 in the operation preview part, and notifies the player of the result of the preview display in the preview result notification part.

Specifically, the preview display related to the push button 142 suggests to the player that he should press the push button 142 in the operation preview part, so the MPU 52 displays an angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. 91, and suggests to the player that he should press the push button 142 by having this character say, "Press the button and fireworks will go off, it'll be super exciting!"

The preview display associated with push button 142 transitions to the preview result notification part when push button 142 is pressed, and in the preview result notification part, the MPU 52 notifies the player of a successful preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in FIG. 92(A). The MPU 52 also notifies the player of a failed preview display by not launching fireworks, as shown in FIG. 92(B).

Here, in the preview result notification part, the MPU 52 executes a lottery with a predetermined probability that if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," it will be easier to select a success effect and harder to select a failure effect, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal miss result," it will be harder to select a success effect and harder to select a failure effect. If the MPU 52 wins this lottery, it notifies the player of a success effect, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal miss result," it will notify the player of a failure effect. In other words, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," the MPU 52 is more likely to select a success effect, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal miss result," it is more likely to select a failure effect.

In this reference form, the MPU 52 is more likely to select a success presentation when the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win," and is more likely to select a failure presentation when the result of the lottery is a "normal miss result," but the opposite relationship may also be true.
In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 is likely to select a success effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," and is likely to select a failure effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal loss result," but the MPU 52 may be configured to select a success effect and a failure effect without executing a lottery for selecting a success effect and a failure effect. Specifically, for example, the MPU 52 may select a success effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win," and may select a failure effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal loss result."

FIG. 93 shows the timing at which a preview display is generated.
The advance notice display related to the push button 142 occurs at a predetermined timing after the period PD1 from the start of the variable display of the symbols to the occurrence of the reach display has elapsed and after the period PD2 from the occurrence of the reach display to the stop of the variable display of the symbols has begun, as shown in Fig. 93. In other words, the advance notice display related to the push button 142 occurs at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of the reach display, as shown by the character "push" in a circle in Fig. 93.
The advance notice display associated with the push button 142 ends before the display of the varying symbols stops. Specifically, the advance notice display associated with the push button 142 occurs during a predetermined period PD3, which is the same as the period PD2.

In this reference form, the preview display related to push button 142 occurs at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of a reach display, but it may also occur at a predetermined timing after the start of the display of changing patterns, a predetermined timing after the occurrence of a super reach that can develop after the occurrence of a reach display, or a predetermined timing before the display of changing patterns stops.
In addition, in this reference form, the preview display related to push button 142 differs from reference form S in that, as mentioned above, after the operation preview part is executed, push button 142 can be pressed multiple times in a clear manner.

Here, in this reference form, the period PD3 during which the preview display related to the push button 142 is generated transitions to the preview result notification part after detecting the player pressing the push button 142, and in the preview result notification part, it has a normal period PD31 in which no elapsed time is set until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display, and a specific period PD32 in which an elapsed time is set.
In this embodiment, the first half of the period PD3 during which the advance notice display is generated is the normal period PD31, and the second half is the specific period PD32, but this may be reversed.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the reference embodiment S. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the processing for determining the effect pattern and the processing for executing the effect are different from those in the reference embodiment S. The processing for determining the effect pattern and the processing for executing the effect in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
In the process of determining the effect pattern, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S7001 to S7004 as shown in Fig. 94. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S7002T instead of the process of step S7002, and differs from the above-described embodiment S in that it does not execute the process of step S7003.

In step S7001, the MPU 52 determines whether a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

If the MPU 52 determines that the reach display will not occur, it executes the processes of step S7004 and thereafter without executing the processes of step S7002T and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, then in step S7002T, it executes processing for setting a preview display related to the push button 142. In this processing for setting a preview display, the MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display related to the push button 142, the timing for generating the preview display related to the push button 142, and a period PD3 for generating the preview display related to the push button 142.

As described above, the MPU 52 executes a lottery with a predetermined probability that if the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win," it will be easier to select a successful presentation and harder to select a failed presentation; and if the result of the lottery is a "normal miss," it will be harder to select a successful presentation and harder to select a failed presentation. If the lottery is won, the MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display to notify the player of a successful presentation, and if the lottery is not won, it sets the result of the preview display to notify the player of a failed presentation.

As described above, the MPU 52 also sets the timing for generating the warning display so that it occurs at a predetermined timing after the period PD1 from the start of the display of the changing patterns to the occurrence of the reach display has elapsed, and after the start of the period PD2 from the occurrence of the reach display to the end of the display of the changing patterns.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 sets the timing for generating the warning display immediately after the start of period PD2, but the timing for generating the warning display may also be set to occur at a different time.
Also, in this reference form, when the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it executes a setting process for the preview display and generates a preview display related to the push button 142, but it may also be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display, and generate the preview display based on the result of this lottery.

Here, the MPU 52 obtains the time (display duration) from the start of the changing display of the patterns to the end of the changing display of the patterns based on the content of the change command, and sets periods PD1 and PD2 based on this display duration. For example, if the MPU 52 obtains a display duration of 20 seconds based on the content of the change command, it sets period PD1 to 5 seconds and period PD2 to 15 seconds. In this case, the MPU 52 sets period PD3 to 15 seconds. Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 sets the normal period PD31 to 12 seconds and the specific period PD32 to 3 seconds, but the time allocation of the normal period PD31 and the specific period PD32 may be set to other time allocations.

After executing the process for setting the preview display in step S7002T, or if it is determined in step S7001 that a reach display will not occur, the MPU 52 executes the process for setting other presentation patterns in step S7004. In the process for setting other presentation patterns, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. The MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether to generate a preview display other than the preview display associated with the push button 142.

<Regarding the performance execution process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect execution process.
Based on the contents of the hold determination process in step S2002 and the effect determination process in step S2003S, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S7101 to S7119 as shown in Fig. 95. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S7104T instead of the process of step S7104, executes the process of step S7106, and then executes the processes of step S7120T and onward before executing the process of step S7114, and executes the process of step S7128T instead of the process of step S7115, which is different from the reference embodiment S.

In step S7101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the timing for issuing a notice display related to the push button 142 has arrived.
If the MPU 52 determines that the timing for the advance notice display has not yet arrived, it skips steps S7102 to S7105 and executes the processes from step S7106 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that the timing for the preview display has arrived, in other words, if it determines that period PD1 has elapsed and period PD2 has begun, it executes the operation preview part in step S7102.
In the process of executing the operation notice part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the indicator lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to execute the operation notice part.

After executing the operation preview part execution process, the MPU 52 sets an operation preview part execution command in step S7103. The MPU 52 then stores the operation preview part execution command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This operation preview part execution command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the operation notice part on the pattern display device 36 based on the operation notice part execution command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the operation notice part.

Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 displays the angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and suggests to the player to press the push button 142 by having this character say, "Press the button and fireworks will go off! It'll be super exciting!" (See Figure 91).

After setting the operation notice part execution command in step S7103, the MPU 52 sets the normal period PD31 set in the notice display setting process in step S7002T to the timer counter ST provided in the various counter area 542 of RAM 54 in step S7104T. The value set in this timer counter ST is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, for example, if the timer counter ST is set to "6000", the normal period PD31 will be 12 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S7104T, the MPU 52 sets an operation notification flag in RAM 54 in step S7105. This operation notification flag is a flag for identifying that the operation notification part is being executed.

After executing the processing of step S7105, or if it is determined in step S7101 that the timing for the preview display has not yet arrived, the MPU 52 determines in step S7106 whether an operation preview flag is set in RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S7106 that the operation notice flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processes in step S7119 and thereafter without executing the processes in step S7120T and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7106 that the operation notice flag is set in the RAM 54, it determines in step S7120T whether or not pressing of the push button 142 by the player has been detected.

If the MPU 52 determines that it has not detected the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the processes from step S7124T onwards without executing the processes from step S7121T onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it determines in step S7121T whether the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7121T that the value of the timer counter ST is not less than "0" (if it determines that the normal period PD31 set in the preview display setting process in step S7002T has not elapsed), it executes the result notification part execution process in step S7122T.
In the execution process of the result notification part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to execute the result notification part.

After executing the result notification part execution process, the MPU 52 sets a result notification part execution command in step S7123T. The MPU 52 then stores the result notification part execution command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This result notification part execution command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the result notification part on the pattern display device 36 based on the result notification part execution command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the result notification part.

Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player of a successful preview display by launching fireworks based on the results of the preview display associated with the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process of step S7002 (see FIG. 92(A)). Furthermore, the MPU 62 notifies the player of a failed preview display by not launching fireworks based on the results of the preview display associated with the push button 142 set in the preview display setting process of step S7002 (see FIG. 92(B)).

In this embodiment, if a successful presentation is set as the result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the successful presentation of the preview display in the result notification part each time it detects that the player has pressed the push button 142. However, it may also be configured to execute a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) and notify the player of the successful presentation of the preview display only if the lottery is won. Also, in this case, after notifying the player of the successful presentation of the preview display at least once, it may be configured to notify the player of the successful presentation of the preview display each time it detects that the player has pressed the push button 142.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S7119 onwards.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7121T that the value of the timer counter ST is equal to or less than "0" (if it determines that the normal period PD31 set in the preview display setting process in step S7002T has elapsed and the specific period PD32 has begun), it sets a button press flag in RAM 54 in step S7109. This button press flag is a flag for identifying that a press of the push button 142 has been detected.

After setting the button press flag in RAM 54 in step S7109, or if it is determined in step S7120T that the player has not pressed the push button 142, the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T whether the timing has come to stop the variable display of the symbols.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T that it is not time to stop the variable display of the symbols, it executes the processing of step S7119 without executing the processing of step S7125T and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T that it is time to stop the variable display of the symbols, it executes the process of ending the operation notice part in step S7125T.

In the process of ending the operation notice part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the indicator lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to end the operation notice part.
After executing the operation preview part end processing, the MPU 52 sets an operation preview part end command in step S7126T. Then, the MPU 52 stores the operation preview part end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This operation preview part end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing in step S2006 described above.

Based on the operation preview part end command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for ending the operation preview part on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to end the operation preview part.

Specifically, the MPU 62 erases the angel character GB3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.

After setting the operation notification part end command in step S7126T, the MPU 52 clears the operation notification flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7127T.

After clearing the operation notice flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7127T, the MPU 52 determines in step S7114 whether a button press flag is set in RAM 54.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S7114 that the button press flag is not set in the RAM 54, it skips steps S7128T to S7118 and executes the processes in and after step S7119.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7114 that the button press flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T.

In the replacement process of the result of the preview display, the MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a success presentation when the result of the winning/losing lottery is "a big win," and replaces the result of the preview display with a failure presentation when the result of the winning/losing lottery is "a normal loss result."
In this reference form, when the MPU 52 detects that the player has pressed the push button 142 during a specific period PD32, it executes the process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T, but it is also possible to maintain the result of the preview display without executing this process.

After executing the process of step S7128T, the MPU 52 executes the execution process of the result notification part in step S7116.
In the execution process of the result notification part, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in order to execute the result notification part.

After executing the result notification part execution process, the MPU 52 sets a result notification part execution command in step S7117. The MPU 52 then stores the result notification part execution command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This result notification part execution command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the result notification part on the pattern display device 36 based on the result notification part execution command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the result notification part.

Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player of a successful preview display by launching fireworks as described above based on the result of the preview display associated with the push button 142 replaced in the preview display result replacement process of step S7128T (see FIG. 92(A)). Also, the MPU 62 notifies the player of a failed preview display by not launching fireworks based on the result of the preview display associated with the push button 142 replaced in the preview display result replacement process of step S7128T (see FIG. 92(B)).

After setting the result notification part execution command in step S7117, the MPU 52 clears the button press flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7118.

After clearing the button press flag stored in RAM 54 in step S7118, and then executing the processing of step S7123T, if it is determined in step S7106 that the operation notice flag is not set in RAM 54, if it is determined in step S7124T that the timing to stop the display of changing patterns has not arrived, or if it is determined in step S7114 that the button press flag is not set in RAM 54, then in step S7119, MPU 52 executes processing to execute other effects.
In the process of executing other effects, the MPU 52 executes other effects different from the preview display related to the push button 142 based on the contents of the hold determination process of step S2002 and the effect determination process of step S2003S.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the performance execution process.

<About the occurrence of the reach display and the subsequent flow>
96 shows the display screen of the symbol display device after the occurrence of a reach display and a timing chart of the advance notice display. Specifically, FIG. 96(A) shows a state in which the operation advance notice part of the advance notice display related to the push button 142 is executed after the reach display is generated. FIG. 96(B) shows a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the normal period PD31 and the player is notified of the success of the advance notice display. FIG. 96(C) shows a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the normal period PD31 and the player is notified of the failure of the advance notice display. Also, FIG. 96(D) shows a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the specific period PD32 and the player is notified of the success of the advance notice display. FIG. 96(E) shows a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the specific period PD32 and the player is notified of the failure of the advance notice display. In Figures 96(A) to (E), the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is placed on the upper row, and the timing chart is placed on the lower row.

The MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variable start command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command, and if it determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information regarding the combination of symbols in the reach display as the final stop result to be displayed on the valid line L.
Then, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the MPU 62 generates the reach display after the period PD1 from the start of the variable display of the symbols to the generation of the reach display has elapsed.
In Figure 96, the timing at which the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 arranged in the upper row becomes in this state is shown by a black circle in the timing chart arranged in the lower row.

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it is time for a preview display related to the push button 142 to occur, and if it determines that it is time for a preview display to occur, in other words, if it determines that period PD1 has elapsed and period PD2 has begun, it executes the process of executing the operation preview part in step S7102.
In the execution process of this operation notice part, the MPU 62 displays an angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and suggests to the player to press the push button 142 with the character's line, "Press the button and fireworks will go off, it'll be super hot!"

During the period PD3 during which the advance notice display is generated, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has detected the player pressing the push button 142.
During the normal period PD31 (a period in which no time is set for the time that elapses until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display), if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the execution process for the result notification part in step S7122T.
In FIG. 96, the timing at which the player's pressing of the push button 142 is detected is indicated by a white circle in the timing chart arranged at the bottom.

In the execution process of this result notification part, the MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display so as to notify the player of a successful or unsuccessful presentation based on the result of the preview display set in the preview display setting process of step S7002T.
Specifically, if a successful presentation is set as the result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the successful presentation of the preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 96 (B).
In addition, if a failure effect is set as a result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, the MPU 62 will notify the player of the failure effect of the preview display by not launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 96 (C).
In this embodiment, the failure effect is such that the fireworks are not launched, so although the pachinko machine 1 notifies the player of the failure effect of the advance notice display, the player is not able to recognize the failure effect of the advance notice display. On the other hand, the failure effect of the advance notice display may be such that the player can recognize it.

During a specific period PD32 (a period that sets the time that elapses until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display), if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it sets a button press flag in RAM 54 in step S7109, and determines in step S7124T whether the timing has come to stop the display of the changing patterns.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T that it is time to stop the display of the changing patterns, it executes the process of ending the operation notice part in step S7125T.
In the process of ending this operation notice part, the MPU 62 erases the angel character GB3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Then, in step S7114, the MPU 52 determines whether a button press flag is set in RAM 54, and if it determines that a button press flag is set in RAM 54, in step S7128T, it executes a process to replace the results of the preview display.

In the process of replacing the result of the preview display, if the result of the lottery is a "jackpot win," the MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a success presentation, and if the result of the lottery is a "normal miss," the MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a failure presentation.

Then, in step S7116, the MPU 52 executes the execution process for the result notification part.

In the execution process of this result notification part, the MPU 52 notifies the player of a success or failure presentation based on the result of the preview display replaced in step S7128T.
Specifically, if a successful presentation is set as the result of the preview display in the process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the successful presentation of the preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 96 (D).
In addition, if a failure display is set as the result of the preview display in the process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T, the MPU 62 will notify the player of the failure display of the preview display by not launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 96 (E).
In this embodiment, the failure effect is such that the fireworks are not launched, so although the pachinko machine 1 notifies the player of the failure effect of the advance notice display, the player is not able to recognize the failure effect of the advance notice display. On the other hand, the failure effect of the advance notice display may be such that the player can recognize it.

Then, the MPU 62 stops the changing display of the symbols.

In this embodiment, when the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T that it is time to stop the variable display of the symbols, it executes the execution process of the result notification part in step S7116. In other words, the MPU 52 sets the elapsed period so that it executes the execution process of the result notification part when it is time to stop the variable display of the symbols.
In contrast, the MPU 52 may randomly set the elapsed time, as in the reference embodiment S. In other words, the MPU 52 may set the elapsed time so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display by the time the variable symbol display stops. In this case, the elapsed time may be set to be longer if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win" and shorter if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal loss result," or the reverse relationship may be set. Note that the elapsed time may be set so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display after the variable symbol display stops or after the variable symbol display for the next game round begins.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the MPU 52 determines that the specific period PD32, which sets the elapsed time, has elapsed without detecting the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the end processing of the operation notice part in step S7125T without setting a button press flag in RAM 54. However, the button press flag may be set in RAM 54. In other words, if the MPU 52 determines that the specific period PD32, which sets the elapsed time, has elapsed without detecting the player pressing the push button 142, it may execute subsequent processing as if it had detected the player pressing the push button 142.

In this manner, in this reference form, the operation preview part functions as an operation presentation means that suggests to the player the operation mode of the push button 142, and the result notification part functions as an operation presentation execution means that executes a fireworks display as a predetermined operation presentation when the push button 142 is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the push button 142 suggested in the operation preview part.
In this embodiment, the operation means is the push button 142, but it may be, for example, a direction key, a cross key, a joystick, a jog dial, etc. In short, the operation means may be any means that can execute a predetermined operation effect based on the player's operation.

In addition, in this reference form, the operation advance notice part suggests to the player how to operate the push button 142 via the symbol display device 36, and the result notification part causes a fireworks effect to be executed via the symbol display device 36. In other words, in this reference form, the operation advance notice part and the result notification part suggest to the player how to operate the push button 142 via an image, and cause a fireworks effect to be executed.
In contrast to this, the operation presentation means and the operation presentation execution means may suggest to the player the operation mode of the operation means through other information such as sound or the movement of a role-playing device, and cause a predetermined operation presentation to be executed.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the predetermined operation effect is a fireworks effect, but it may be other effects. For example, the predetermined operation effect may be an effect that changes the reserved image, an effect that displays a character's lines, an effect that causes a cut-in to occur, an effect that activates a role-playing device, a pre-reading effect that occurs when the display of changing images begins or stops, an effect that selects one character from multiple characters, or an effect that changes the background image, the mode in which the player is staying, etc. In short, the predetermined operation effect may be any effect that can be executed based on the player's operation of the operating means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fireworks display is executed when the timing for stopping the display of the changing patterns comes after the push button 142 is operated (when a predetermined time has elapsed).
According to this configuration, the fireworks display is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the push button 142 is operated, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the timing at which the fireworks display is executed after the player operates the push button 142, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to coincide with the timing of the execution of the fireworks effect and the timing of the stopping of the variable display of the symbols. In other words, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to coincide with the specific timing of the predetermined operation effect and the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.
The specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation may be any timing as long as it is a specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation. For example, in the case of the firework presentation described above, the specific timing may be the timing when the fireworks start to be launched or the timing when the fireworks open.

According to this configuration, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the fireworks display with the timing when the changing display of the patterns stops, so the player can grasp the specific timing in the fireworks display, and the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
In this reference form, the timing for switching the display of the change in the number of games is the timing when the display of the change in the pattern stops, but it may also be the timing when the display of the change in the pattern starts, or it may be the timing that straddles the timing between the stop and start of the display of the change in the pattern.

In addition, in this reference form, the specified elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the specified operation presentation with the timing at which the variable display of the number of games played is switched, but it may also be set so as to align the specific timing in the specified operation presentation with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the specified operation presentation.
According to this configuration, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the predetermined operation presentation, so that the player can grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to play comfortably.
In addition, the other effects may be any effect different from the specified operation effects, and may be an effect that changes the reserved image, an effect that displays the lines of a character, an effect that causes a cut-in to occur, an effect that causes a role device to operate, a pre-reading effect that occurs when the display of the changing image starts or stops, an effect that selects one character from multiple characters, or an effect that changes the background image, the mode in which the player stays, etc.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the specific timing of the fireworks display can be changed when the push button 142 is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), but is not configured so that the specific timing of the fireworks display can be changed when the push button 142 is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) that is different from the first period. The fireworks display is then executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the push button 142 is operated during the specific period PD32.
According to this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 can change the specific timing in the fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated during the specific period PD32, and does not change the specific timing in the fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated during the normal period PD31. Therefore, the specific timing in the fireworks display can be made different based on the transition between the specific period PD32 and the normal period PD31, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in this reference form, as mentioned above, if a successful presentation is set as the result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, each time the MPU 62 detects that the player has pressed the push button 142, it may execute a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) in the result notification part, and notify the player of the successful presentation of the preview display only if the lottery is won.
When configured in this manner, the normal period PD31 of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not to execute a fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated, and functions as a display determination period in which the fireworks display is executed if it is determined that the display should be executed, and the specific period PD32 functions as a non-display determination period in which the fireworks display is executed without determining whether or not to execute the fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated.
According to this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a normal period PD31 in which, when the push button 142 is operated, it determines whether or not to execute a fireworks display, and executes the display if it determines that the display should be executed, and a specific period PD32 in which, when the push button 142 is operated, it executes the fireworks display without determining whether or not to execute the fireworks display. Therefore, whether or not to execute a fireworks display can be determined based on the transition between the normal period PD31 and the specific period PD32, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation means is one push button 142, but two or more operation means may be provided.
For example, the operation means may include push button 142 as a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means. In this case, the operation performance execution means may be configured to be able to execute a predetermined operation performance by changing a specific timing in a fireworks performance as the predetermined operation performance when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, and to execute the predetermined operation performance without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation performance when the second operation means is operated.

Here, the second operating means may be anything different from the first operating means, and may be a push button different from push button 142, a directional key, a cross key, a joystick, a jog dial, or the like.
The first operating means and the second operating means may be provided integrally, for example, like the up and down and left and right of a cross key.

Furthermore, the specified condition may be any condition, not just when a reach display is occurring, and may be, for example, when the number of game plays is being displayed in a variable manner, when an opening/closing execution mode is being executed, when a demo display is being executed, or when an opening or ending is being executed.
The specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation may be any timing as long as it is a specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation. For example, in the case of the firework presentation described above, the specific timing may be the timing when the fireworks start to be launched or the timing when the fireworks open.

With this configuration, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the timing at which the predetermined operation effect is executed to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, the operation effect is executed without changing the specific timing of the predetermined operation effect, allowing the player to select and operate the first operation means and the second operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of (1) in the embodiment S, the following effects can be achieved.
(1) The predetermined elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the fireworks display with the timing when the changing display of the patterns stops, so that the player can grasp the specific timing in the fireworks display, and the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) Pachinko machine 1 can change the specific timing in the fireworks display when push button 142 is operated during specific period PD32, but does not change the specific timing in the fireworks display when push button 142 is operated during normal period PD31. Therefore, the specific timing in the fireworks display can be made different based on the transition between specific period PD32 and normal period PD31, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

[Reference form U]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment U of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the reference form T, in the process of replacing the result of the preview display, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a "jackpot win," the MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a success presentation, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a "normal miss result," the MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a failure presentation.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 is different from the embodiment T in that it replaces the results of the preview display based on predetermined conditions in the process of replacing the results of the preview display.

In this reference form, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in reference form T. Specifically, in this reference form, the performance execution processing differs from that in reference form T. The details of the performance execution processing in this reference form are explained below.

<Regarding the performance execution process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance execution process according to the reference form U of the present invention.
Based on the contents of the hold determination process of step S2002 and the effect determination process of step S2003S, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S7101 to S7119 as shown in Fig. 97. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S7105, then executes the process of step S7129U, executes the process of step S7123T, then executes the process of step S7130U, executes the process of step S7114, then executes the process of step S7131U, which is different from the reference embodiment T.

In step S7129U, the MPU 52 resets the number of times PUN the push button 142 has been pressed, stored in the RAM 54, by substituting "0." This number of times PUN the push button 142 has been pressed is a value indicating the number of times the push button 142 has been pressed by the player during the normal period PD31 (a period during which no elapsed time is set until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display).
In step S7130U, the MPU 52 updates the value PUN, which is the number of times the push button 142 has been pressed and is stored in the RAM 54, by adding 1 to the value.

In step S7131U, the MPU 52 determines whether the value PUN of the number of times the push button 142 has been pressed, which is stored in the RAM 54, is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 52 determines in step S7131U that the number of presses PUN is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7131U that the number of presses PUN is not "0" or less, it executes the processes from step S7116 onwards without executing the process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T.

<About the occurrence of the reach display and the subsequent flow>
98A and 98B are diagrams showing the display screen of the symbol display device after the occurrence of a reach display and a timing chart of the advance notice display. Specifically, FIG. 98A is a diagram showing a state in which the operation advance notice part of the advance notice display related to the push button 142 is executed after the reach display is generated. FIG. 98B is a diagram showing a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the normal period PD31 and the player is notified of the successful presentation of the advance notice display. FIG. 98C is a diagram showing a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is not detected within the normal period PD31. Also, FIG. 98D is a diagram showing a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the specific period PD32 and the player is notified of the successful presentation of the advance notice display. FIG. 98E is a diagram showing a state in which the player's press of the push button 142 is detected within the specific period PD32 and the player is notified of the failed presentation of the advance notice display. In Figures 98(A) to (E), the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is placed on the upper level, and the timing chart is placed on the lower level.

In the example of Figure 98, we will explain the case where, in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, the result of the win/lose lottery is a "normal miss result," but the success effect is selected to set the preview display result.

The MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variable start command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result.

Here, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command, and if it determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information regarding the combination of symbols in the reach display as the final stop result to be displayed on the valid line L.
Then, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the MPU 62 generates the reach display after the period PD1 from the start of the variable display of the symbols to the generation of the reach display has elapsed.
In Figure 96, the timing at which the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 arranged in the upper row becomes in this state is shown by a black circle in the timing chart arranged in the lower row.

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it is time for a preview display related to the push button 142 to occur, and if it determines that it is time for a preview display to occur, in other words, if it determines that period PD1 has elapsed and period PD2 has begun, it executes the process of executing the operation preview part in step S7102.
In the execution process of this operation notice part, the MPU 62 displays an angel character GB3 in the lower right position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and suggests to the player to press the push button 142 with the character's line, "Press the button and fireworks will go off, it'll be super hot!"

During the period PD3 during which the advance notice display is generated, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has detected the player pressing the push button 142.
During the normal period PD31 (a period in which no time is set for the time that elapses until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display), if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the execution process for the result notification part in step S7122T.

In the execution process of this result notification part, the MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display so as to notify the player of a successful or unsuccessful presentation based on the result of the preview display set in the preview display setting process of step S7002T.
Specifically, in this reference embodiment, in the process of setting the preview display in step S7002T, although the result of the lottery is a "normal miss result," the result of the preview display is set by selecting a success effect, and therefore the MPU 62 notifies the player of the success effect of the preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 98 (B).

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that it has not detected the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the processing from step S7124T onwards without executing the processing from step S7122T onwards, and therefore, as shown in Figure 98 (C), the MPU 62 does not launch fireworks and does not notify the player of the successful presentation of the preview display.
In FIG. 98, the timing at which the player's pressing of the push button 142 is detected is indicated by a white circle in the timing chart arranged at the bottom.

During a specific period PD32 (a period that sets the time that elapses until the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display), if the MPU 52 determines that it has detected the player pressing the push button 142, it sets a button press flag in RAM 54 in step S7109, and determines in step S7124T whether the timing has come to stop the display of the changing patterns.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T that it is time to stop the display of the changing patterns, it executes the process of ending the operation notice part in step S7125T.
In the process of ending this operation notice part, the MPU 62 erases the angel character GB3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Then, in step S7114, the MPU 52 determines whether a button press flag is set in RAM 54, and if it determines that a button press flag is set in RAM 54, in step S7131U, it determines whether the value PUN of the number of presses of the push button 142 stored in RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S7131U that the number of presses PUN is "0" or less (if it does not detect any press of the push button 142 by the player within the normal period PD31), it executes a process to replace the result of the preview display in step S7128T.

In the replacement process of the result of the preview display, the MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a success presentation when the result of the winning/losing lottery is "a big win," and replaces the result of the preview display with a failure presentation when the result of the winning/losing lottery is "a normal loss result."
In this reference form, in the process of setting the preview display in step S7002T, although the result of the winning/losing lottery is a "normal losing result," the result of the preview display is set by selecting a success effect, so MPU 52 replaces the result of the preview display with a failure effect.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S7131U that the number of presses PUN is not "0" or less (if it detects that the player has pressed the push button 142 at least once within the normal period PD31), it executes the processing from step S7116 onwards without executing the process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T.
In this reference form, in the process of setting the preview display in step S7002T, although the result of the winning/losing lottery is a "normal losing result," the result of the preview display is set by selecting a success presentation, so MPU 52 sets the result of the preview display to a success presentation.

Then, in step S7116, the MPU 52 executes the execution process for the result notification part.

In the execution process of this result notification part, the MPU 52 notifies the player of a success or failure presentation based on the result of the preview display set in the preview display setting process of step S7002T or the result of the preview display replaced in step S7128T.
Specifically, in this reference form, if it is detected that the player has pressed the push button 142 even once within the normal period PD31 (see Figure 98 (B)), in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, even though the result of the win/lose lottery is a "normal miss result," the success presentation has been selected to set the preview display result, so the MPU 62 notifies the player of the success presentation of the preview display by launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 98 (D).
Furthermore, if the player's pressing of the push button 142 is not detected even once within the normal period PD31 (see Figure 98 (C)), a failure effect is set as the result of the preview display in the preview display result replacement process of step S7128T, and therefore the MPU 62 notifies the player of the preview display failure effect by not launching fireworks, as shown in Figure 98 (E).
In this embodiment, the failure effect is such that the fireworks are not launched, so although the pachinko machine 1 notifies the player of the failure effect of the advance notice display, the player is not able to recognize the failure effect of the advance notice display. On the other hand, the failure effect of the advance notice display may be such that the player can recognize it.

Then, the MPU 62 stops the changing display of the symbols.

In this embodiment, when the MPU 52 determines in step S7124T that it is time to stop the variable display of the symbols, it executes the execution process of the result notification part in step S7116. In other words, the MPU 52 sets the elapsed period so that it executes the execution process of the result notification part when it is time to stop the variable display of the symbols.
In contrast, the MPU 52 may randomly set the elapsed time, as in the reference embodiment S. In other words, the MPU 52 may set the elapsed time so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display by the time the variable symbol display stops. In this case, the elapsed time may be set to be longer if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "jackpot win" and shorter if the result of the win/loss lottery is a "normal loss result," or the reverse relationship may be set. Note that the elapsed time may be set so that the player is notified of the success or failure of the preview display after the variable symbol display stops or after the variable symbol display for the next game round begins.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the MPU 52 determines that the specific period PD32, which sets the elapsed time, has elapsed without detecting the player pressing the push button 142, it executes the end processing of the operation notice part in step S7125T without setting a button press flag in RAM 54. However, the button press flag may be set in RAM 54. In other words, if the MPU 52 determines that the specific period PD32, which sets the elapsed time, has elapsed without detecting the player pressing the push button 142, it may execute subsequent processing as if it had detected the player pressing the push button 142.

Furthermore, in this reference form, if the MPU 52 does not detect any pressing of the push button 142 by the player even once within the normal period PD31, it executes the process of replacing the result of the preview display in step S7128T, but the result of the preview display may also be replaced based on other conditions.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the MPU 52 does not detect a player pressing the push button 142 even once during the normal period PD 31, the MPU 52 executes a process of replacing the result of the advance notice display in step S7128T. On the other hand, if the MPU 52 does not detect a player pressing the push button 142 even once during the normal period PD 31, the MPU 52 may execute a process different from the process of replacing the result of the advance notice display, for example, a process of replacing the specific period PD 32 with the normal period PD 31.

In this manner, in this reference form, the operation preview part functions as an operation presentation means that suggests to the player the operation mode of the push button 142, and the result notification part functions as an operation presentation execution means that executes a fireworks display as a predetermined operation presentation when the push button 142 is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the push button 142 suggested in the operation preview part.
In this embodiment, the operation means is the push button 142, but it may be, for example, a direction key, a cross key, a joystick, a jog dial, etc. In short, the operation means may be any means that can execute a predetermined operation effect based on the player's operation.

In addition, in this reference form, the operation advance notice part suggests to the player how to operate the push button 142 via the symbol display device 36, and the result notification part causes a fireworks effect to be executed via the symbol display device 36. In other words, in this reference form, the operation advance notice part and the result notification part suggest to the player how to operate the push button 142 via an image, and cause a fireworks effect to be executed.
In contrast to this, the operation presentation means and the operation presentation execution means may suggest to the player the operation mode of the operation means through other information such as sound or the movement of a role-playing device, and cause a predetermined operation presentation to be executed.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the predetermined operation effect is a fireworks effect, but it may be other effects. For example, the predetermined operation effect may be an effect that changes the reserved image, an effect that displays a character's lines, an effect that causes a cut-in to occur, an effect that activates a role-playing device, a pre-reading effect that occurs when the display of changing images begins or stops, an effect that selects one character from multiple characters, or an effect that changes the background image, the mode in which the player is staying, etc. In short, the predetermined operation effect may be any effect that can be executed based on the player's operation of the operating means.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the fireworks display is executed when it is determined that the timing for the changing display of the patterns to stop has arrived after the push button 142 is operated (when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed).
According to this configuration, the fireworks display is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the push button 142 is operated, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the timing at which the fireworks display is executed after the player operates the push button 142, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to coincide with the timing of the execution of the fireworks effect and the timing of the stopping of the variable display of the symbols. In other words, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to coincide with the specific timing of the predetermined operation effect and the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.
The specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation may be any timing as long as it is a specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation. For example, in the case of the firework presentation described above, the specific timing may be the timing when the fireworks start to be launched or the timing when the fireworks open.

According to this configuration, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the fireworks display with the timing when the changing display of the patterns stops, so the player can grasp the specific timing in the fireworks display, and the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
In this reference form, the timing for switching the display of the change in the number of games is the timing when the display of the change in the pattern stops, but it may also be the timing when the display of the change in the pattern starts, or it may be the timing that straddles the timing between the stop and start of the display of the change in the pattern.

In addition, in this reference form, the specified elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the specified operation presentation with the timing at which the variable display of the number of games played is switched, but it may also be set so as to align the specific timing in the specified operation presentation with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the specified operation presentation.
According to this configuration, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the predetermined operation presentation, so that the player can grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to play comfortably.
In addition, the other effects may be any effect different from the specified operation effects, and may be an effect that changes the reserved image, an effect that displays the lines of a character, an effect that causes a cut-in to occur, an effect that causes a role device to operate, a pre-reading effect that occurs when the display of the changing image starts or stops, an effect that selects one character from multiple characters, or an effect that changes the background image, the mode in which the player stays, etc.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the specific timing of the fireworks display can be changed when the push button 142 is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), but is not configured so that the specific timing of the fireworks display can be changed when the push button 142 is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) that is different from the first period. The fireworks display is then executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the push button 142 is operated during the specific period PD32.
According to this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 can change the specific timing in the fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated during the specific period PD32, and does not change the specific timing in the fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated during the normal period PD31. Therefore, the specific timing in the fireworks display can be made different based on the transition between the specific period PD32 and the normal period PD31, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in this reference form, as mentioned above, if a successful presentation is set as the result of the preview display in the preview display setting process of step S7002T, each time the MPU 62 detects that the player has pressed the push button 142, it may execute a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) in the result notification part, and notify the player of the successful presentation of the preview display only if the lottery is won.
When configured in this manner, the normal period PD31 of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not to execute a fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated, and functions as a display determination period in which the fireworks display is executed if it is determined that the display should be executed, and the specific period PD32 functions as a non-display determination period in which the fireworks display is executed without determining whether or not to execute the fireworks display when the push button 142 is operated.
According to this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a normal period PD31 in which, when the push button 142 is operated, it determines whether or not to execute a fireworks display, and executes the display if it determines that the display should be executed, and a specific period PD32 in which, when the push button 142 is operated, it executes the fireworks display without determining whether or not to execute the fireworks display. Therefore, whether or not to execute a fireworks display can be determined based on the transition between the normal period PD31 and the specific period PD32, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in this reference embodiment, the result notification part executes a fireworks effect multiple times each time the push button 142 is operated, according to the operation mode of the push button 142 suggested in the operation notice part. Specifically, if the push button 142 is operated once or more during the normal period PD31, the fireworks effect can notify a success effect both when the result of the win/lose lottery is a "jackpot win" and when the result of the win/lose lottery is a "normal loss result." Furthermore, if the push button 142 is operated zero times during the normal period PD31, the fireworks effect can notify a success effect only when the result of the win/lose lottery is a "jackpot win." In other words, the value of the fireworks effect changes based on the number of times the push button 142 is operated.
According to this configuration, the value of the fireworks effect changes based on the number of times the push button 142 is operated, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the value of the fireworks effect and increase the player's attention to the game.
In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 changes the expectation level of the effect to change the value of the effect, but the content of the effect may be changed, or the payout of game balls may be changed based on the effect. In short, the value of the predetermined operation effect may change based on the number of times the operation means is operated. Also, in the pachinko machine 1, the value of the effect is changed in two stages, 0 times or 1 time or more, depending on the number of times the operation means is operated, but the value of the effect may be changed in multiple stages, 3 or more times.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a RAM 54 as an operation setting storage means capable of storing the number of presses PUN as setting information for revealing the value of the fireworks effect based on the operation mode of the push button 142 during the normal period PD31 as a predetermined operation setting period. As described above, the value of the fireworks effect changes based on the number of presses PUN stored in the RAM 54.
According to this configuration, the value of the fireworks effect changes based on the number of presses PUN stored in RAM 54, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the value of the fireworks effect and increase the player's interest in the game.
In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 associates one setting information with a change in the value of one effect, but it may associate a plurality of setting information with changes in the value of a plurality of effects, respectively. Also, the setting information is a numerical value of the number of presses PUN, but it may be a simple flag, the time for which the push button 142 is continuously pressed, or any other information. In short, the setting information may be any information that can cause the value of a predetermined operation effect to appear based on the operating mode of the operating means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation means is one push button 142, but two or more operation means may be provided.
For example, the operation means may include push button 142 as a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means. In this case, the operation performance execution means may be configured to be able to execute a predetermined operation performance by changing a specific timing in a fireworks performance as the predetermined operation performance when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, and to execute the predetermined operation performance without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation performance when the second operation means is operated.

Here, the second operating means may be anything different from the first operating means, and may be a push button different from push button 142, a directional key, a cross key, a joystick, a jog dial, or the like.
The first operating means and the second operating means may be provided integrally, for example, like the up and down and left and right of a cross key.

Furthermore, the specified condition may be any condition, not just when a reach display is occurring, and may be, for example, when the number of game plays is being displayed in a variable manner, when an opening/closing execution mode is being executed, when a demo display is being executed, or when an opening or ending is being executed.
The specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation may be any timing as long as it is a specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation. For example, in the case of the firework presentation described above, the specific timing may be the timing when the fireworks start to be launched or the timing when the fireworks open.

With this configuration, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the timing at which the predetermined operation effect is executed to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, the operation effect is executed without changing the specific timing of the predetermined operation effect, allowing the player to select and operate the first operation means and the second operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the embodiment T, the following effects can be achieved.
(1) Since the value of the fireworks display changes based on the number of times the push button 142 is operated, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the value of the fireworks display and increase the player's attention to the game.
(2) Since the value of the fireworks effect changes based on the number of presses PUN stored in RAM 54, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the value of the fireworks effect and increase the player's attention to the game.

[Reference form V]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment V of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described and parts that have the same function but are different in shape or arrangement will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Here, a conventional gaming machine is provided with, for example, a rotating body as a decorative device, and when a variable effect is executed on a display device, which is an effect device, the rotating body performs a rotational motion as a decoration for the variable effect.
Such a rotating body has, for example, a lens or decorative part on the surface of the rotating part, and an LED as a light source on the back side, and the light from the LED and the rotation of the rotating part enhance the decorativeness.

However, in such conventional rotating bodies, decoration is only applied to the surface side of the rotating portion, and the decoration tends to be monotonous.
For this reason, there is a demand for further improvements in the decorativeness of the rotating bodies in gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, which comprises:
special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition;
A gaming machine that transitions to a specific control state advantageous to a player when the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
A light emitting means visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotation means configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
a second rotation means configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means;
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate part is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate,
The gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in a predetermined rotation state in a predetermined game state;
The second rotating means is characterized by having a second state in which, by moving the second rotating means to a second position, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light-emitting means at a specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate portion which is in a predetermined rotation state.

According to such a gaming machine, the decorativeness of the rotating body can be improved without relying solely on the surface side of the rotating portion.
Specifically, the rotating part of a conventional rotating body comprises, for example, a transparent or translucent plate part provided on the front side and an LED, which is an illuminant, provided on the back side of this plate part, making the LED visible through the plate part and enabling the light emission state and color of the LED to be changed.
However, since the back side of the rotating part of such a rotating body cannot be seen, simply changing the light emission state or color of the LEDs results in a monotonous effect, which makes it difficult to attract the player's attention to the game.

In contrast, the gaming machine of the present invention has a first state in which, in a specified gaming state, the light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specified rotational state, and a second state in which, as the second rotating means moves to the second position, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light-emitting means at a specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specified rotational state. This makes it possible to diversify the objects visible through the rotating plate of the first rotating means. In other words, it is possible to diversify the objects visible not only based on the front side of the rotating plate of the first rotating means, but also depending on the position of the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating plate, thereby improving decorativeness.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the various configurations may be embodied in any manner and are not limited to the respective reference embodiments.
For example, the special information acquisition means may acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and may be any type that can achieve the gist of the present invention. For example, the predetermined acquisition condition may be a prize winning at one of various winning slots, a game ball entering a predetermined opening, a game ball passing through a gate provided in the game area, etc., or may be the result of a predetermined lottery being executed, a player's operation input via a launch handle, a push button, a touch panel, etc., or the execution of a specific effect by an effect device, etc.

The special information determination means may be any means that determines whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies the specified winning conditions, and may be any means that achieves the spirit of the present invention. Furthermore, the gaming machine may transition to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies the specified winning conditions, and may be any means that achieves the spirit of the present invention. For example, the specific control state may be an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc.

The light-emitting means may be any light-emitting body that is visible when viewed from the front of the gaming board and that can achieve the spirit of the present invention. For example, the light-emitting means may be an LED, plasma, CRT, or organic EL display, or may be projection mapping, or may be any of various lamp units provided in the center frame, any of various lamp units provided in the outer frame, any of various lamp units provided on the back side of a gaming board made of translucent polycarbonate, or may be an LED, fluorescent lamp, tritium gas, or other light-emitting element, or may be light-emitting due to a chemical reaction.

The first rotation means is rotatable when viewed from the front of the gaming board, rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis, and equipped with a rotating plate that can switch between a predetermined rotation state and a predetermined stationary state. Any rotating body may be used as long as it can achieve the spirit of the present invention. For example, the first rotation means may be any of various devices attached to the center frame, various devices attached to the outer frame, a rotating display attached to the gaming board, various devices such as a windmill attached to the gaming board, or various devices housed inside a translucent polycarbonate push button. Furthermore, for example, the first rotation means may be a door for opening and closing a large prize opening, a payout gear for discharging gaming balls using a payout device, a launch handle for launching gaming balls toward the gaming area, a sphere installed in or built into the gaming machine, or a push button or jog dial for receiving player input.

The first rotation means may be provided on the surface of the game board, inside one of the various winning openings, or in any other location. The first rotation means may be rotatable by any drive source, may be rotatable using an actuator such as a solenoid, or may be rotatable using the force of a game ball that has entered the outlet opening or other game balls flowing downstream. The rotation speed of the first rotation means may be variable.

The rotating plate portion may be of any type as long as it is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting means located on the back side to be visible, and the object of the present invention can be realized. The rotating plate portion may be transparent or translucent and may be made of any material. The rotating plate portion may have a uniform light transmittance or may have different light transmittances depending on the portion. The rotating plate portion may be a single plate or may be made of two or more plates. The rotating plate portion may be fixed to a predetermined rotation axis.
The predetermined rotating shaft may be transparent, translucent, or opaque and may be made of any material. The predetermined rotating shaft may be movable or fixed in a predetermined position. The predetermined rotating shaft may be removable or non-removable.

The second rotation means is configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and is configured to be movable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate. Any rotating body may be used as long as it can achieve the spirit of the present invention. For example, the second rotation means may be any of various devices attached to the center frame, various devices attached to the outer frame, a rotating display attached to the gaming board, a gaming ball launched into the playing area, various devices housed inside a translucent polycarbonate push button, a sphere installed in or built into the gaming machine, a push button or jog dial for receiving player input, etc.

The second rotation means may be rotatable in any manner, and may be rotatable by utilizing the force of contact with another member. The second rotation means may move to the back side of the rotating plate portion via any path, and may be able to move not only via one path but also via multiple paths. The second rotation means may or may not be translucent, as long as it is visible. The rotation speed of the second rotation means may be variable. The movement speed of the second rotation means may be variable.

In this reference embodiment, which is an example of the present invention, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a game board 2V that is different from the game board 2 in the main reference embodiment. The game board in this reference embodiment will be described below.

Figure 99 is a front view of a game board according to reference form V of the present invention.
As shown in Figure 99, the game board 2V has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned game area is formed on the game board 2V so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. Almost the entire game area can be seen from the front through the window portion 122.
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 23 guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 by the player rotating the launch handle 16, which is a rotating body, to the top of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit is located on one side of the play area and faces the center of the top of the play area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the play area shifts from the side where the exit of the guide rail 23 is located to the opposite side as the player rotates the launch handle 16 more. In this reference form, the exit of the guide rail 23 is located on the left side of the play area.

Here, the game board 2V is made of polycarbonate and is translucent, allowing the player to see the light on the back side of the game board 2V (emissions from electric lights, etc., as described below). Furthermore, because the game board 2V is translucent, the player can see game balls that have moved to the back side of the game board 2V, such as the back side of the stage or the back side of the various winning slots, and the game balls remain visible to the player. This allows the game balls to remain visible to the player after being launched toward the game area until they are ejected from this game area.

The game board 2V has multiple large and small openings in the game area that are formed by routing to penetrate the game board in the forward and backward directions and serve as special information acquisition means. Each opening on the game board 2V is equipped with a general winning opening (not shown), an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry means) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry means) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an outlet 28. The game board 2V also has through gates 31, which serve as special information acquisition means, located on the left and right sides of the center, a main display device 32 that is an illuminant located on the upper right side, and a variable display unit 33 that is an illuminant located in the center. The game board 2V also has various components (gimmicks) in the game area, such as numerous nails NL and windmills WM, planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the direction in which the game balls fall.

Each nail NL is planted in the playing area of the game board 2V, and the spacing between each nail NL includes some areas where it is wider than the width of one game ball, and some areas where it is narrower than the width of one game ball. The areas where it is wider than the width of one game ball allow the game ball to fall and impart spin to the game ball by contacting the nail NL as it falls. The areas where it is narrower than the width of one game ball guide the game ball along the nail NL and impart spin to the game ball by contacting the nail NL as it is guided.

The windmill WM is configured to rotate around a rotating shaft, which serves as a predetermined axis of rotation and is embedded in the game board 2V, as viewed from the front of the game board 2V. The windmill WM includes a disk-shaped windmill plate that can switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stationary state, and three rectangular ribs formed on the back side of the windmill plate. The windmill plate is sized to allow multiple game balls to move simultaneously on its back side. Furthermore, since the rotating shaft is longer than the length of one game ball but shorter than the length of two game balls, game balls that move to the back side of the windmill plate move in a way that does not block other game balls.
Here, the windmill plate and each rib are translucent. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the game board 2V, the thick ribbed portion of the windmill WM (first region) has a first translucency, and the thin ribbed portion (second region) has a second translucency higher than the first translucency. In other words, the ribbed portion and the non-ribbed portion are arranged adjacent to each other when viewed from the front of the game board 2V. Furthermore, each portion has a different thickness, and therefore a different translucency.

Here, the windmill board and each rib are translucent, so players can see the light from the back side of the windmill WM (the light emitted by electric lights, etc., as described below). Also, because the windmill board and each rib are translucent, players can see the game balls that have moved to the back side of the windmill board, so the game balls will not become invisible to the player. This means that after the game balls are launched towards the play area, they will not become invisible to the player until they are ejected from this play area.

Each of the various winning openings, including the general winning opening, upper operating opening 25, lower operating opening 26, and variable winning device 27, is equipped with detection sensors 301-304 (see Figure 4) that detect the entry of game balls. These detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2V. Specifically, the general winning opening is equipped with detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is equipped with detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is equipped with detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 is equipped with detection sensor 304. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of detection sensors 301-304. Note that detection sensors 301-304 may be any type capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls; for example, electromagnetic induction proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls when a ball lands in the normal winning port. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls when a ball lands in the upper actuation port 25 and when a ball lands in the lower actuation port 26. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls when a ball lands in the variable winning device 27. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each actuation port 25, 26 may be different.
Therefore, winning a prize at the general winning port, each operating port 25, 26 or variable winning device 27 causes the pachinko machine 1 to pay out prize balls, which is an advantageous situation for the player.

The pachinko machine 1 executes payout control to cause a payout device 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit to pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players when playing).
The payout device 48 is equipped with a payout gear having slits for storing game balls one by one, and a stepping motor for rotating the payout gear, and by rotating the payout gear, which is a rotating body, with the stepping motor, the game balls can be sent out one by one and discharged.

The outlet 28 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2V. Game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area through this outlet 28. The outlet 28 also has a detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of game balls, and this detection sensor 305 is disposed on the back side of the game board 2V. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.
Therefore, when a ball enters the outlet 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, so this is an unfavorable state for the player, rather than an advantageous state.

Each through gate 31 is equipped with a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2V. Note that when a ball enters a through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from a game ball entering the outlet 28, a game ball entering the various winning openings will also be referred to as "winning." Furthermore, a ball entering the through gate 31 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. A ball entering this through gate 31 will also be referred to as "winning," just like a ball entering the various winning openings.

The upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26 are unitized as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 2V. Each actuation port 25, 26 opens upward to allow the game ball, which is a rotating body flowing down the game area, to enter, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with the upper actuation port 25 positioned above and the lower actuation port 26 positioned below. The lower actuation port 26 has an electric device 261 serving as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.
The game ball has a first moving path that passes along the back side of the windmill board and has a high probability of winning at each of the operating ports 25, 26, and a second moving path that passes along the back side of the windmill board, which is an overlapping path with the first moving path, and has a lower probability of winning at each of the operating ports 25, 26 than the first moving path.

The electric device 261 is connected to an electric device drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2V. This electric device 261 is driven by the electric device drive unit 262 to be set in either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is closed by rotating the electric device 261, which is a rotating body, and bringing the upper ends of the electric device 261 closer together in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is opened by rotating the electric device 261 and moving the upper ends of the electric device 261 apart in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is narrower than the width of one game ball. Also, when the electric device 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is wider than the width of one game ball. Therefore, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the lower operating port 26.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the electric device 261 may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state), and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26. Furthermore, the lower actuation port 26 may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the lower actuation port 26 rather than by setting the electric device 261. In this configuration, the lower actuation port 26 need not be equipped with the electric device 261.

The player can guide the game ball to each operating port 25, 26 by rotating the launch handle 16 to a medium degree and shifting the game ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center. Specifically, when the game ball's arrival position is shifted to the center, the game ball passes between the numerous nails NL and reaches the windmill WM. When viewed from the front of the game board 2V, the game ball is visible between the numerous nails NL without passing through the windmill plate of the windmill WM. However, as the game ball moves to the back side of the windmill plate, it becomes visible through the windmill plate. Here, when the game ball contacts the rib, which serves as a restricting portion, the rotation state of the windmill WM changes between a clockwise state (first rotation state) and a counterclockwise state (second rotation state) by being pushed by the game ball through the rib.

Therefore, based on the clockwise rotation of the windmill WM and the movement of the game ball from the first position, between the numerous nails NL, to the second position, behind the windmill board, it becomes more likely that the ball will enter each operating port 25, 26. Conversely, based on the counterclockwise rotation of the windmill WM and the movement of the game ball, it becomes more likely that the ball will enter the outlet 28. Furthermore, the game ball can rotate in any direction, and the probability of winning a prize at each operating port 25, 26 can vary depending on the direction of rotation of the game ball. Furthermore, the rotational state of the game ball changes depending on the rotational state of the windmill WM, friction, and other factors when the game ball comes into contact with the ribs of the windmill WM.

The variable winning device 27 is equipped with a large winning opening 271 that opens to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotation amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27.

Here, the game board 2V is provided with a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. This cover 29 is provided with a transparent panel 291 formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel 292 provided around this transparent panel 291 and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.
Here, the transparent panel 291 is translucent, so that the player can see the light (emission of electric lights, etc., which will be described later) on the back side of the transparent panel 291. Also, because the transparent panel 291 is translucent, the player can see the gaming ball that has moved to the back side of the transparent panel 291, so that the gaming ball does not become invisible to the player. In this way, after the gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area, it can be ensured that it does not become invisible to the player until it is ejected from this gaming area.

The big prize opening 271 is located in an opening formed in the gaming area by router processing, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of gaming balls. Based on the detection results, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2V so as to be rotatable around one of its lower sides as a central axis. The opening/closing door 272 has an open state in which it opens the opening of the big prize opening 271 by rotating toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2V, and a closed state in which it closes the opening of the big prize opening 271 by rotating toward the inside of the game board 2V and sinking into the game board 2V.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272, which is a rotating body, to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state, is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter.
The open/close execution mode refers to a mode in which the open/close door 272 is set to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 271. In the open/close execution mode, the period from when the open/close door 272 is set to an open state until when it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and a normal pattern display section 35, and is configured by arranging multiple display devices such as a segment display (not shown) in which multiple segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2V so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. In other words, the main display device 32 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. The distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the width of one game ball. This prevents the pachinko machine 1 from dropping game balls between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from dropping in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 includes a first result display unit 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the upper operating port 25, and a second result display unit 342 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the lower operating port 26 (see Figure 4). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for indicating the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode when the open/close execution mode is activated (or when the open/close execution mode is activated).

The first result display unit 341 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the upper operating port 25, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the upper operating port 25 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the lower operating port 26, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 26 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

The normal symbol display unit 35 displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at each through gate 31, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning at each through gate 31 as the result of stopping the changing display. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the electric role open state, the normal symbol display unit 35 displays the predetermined stop result. The pachinko machine 1 then transitions to the electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric role device 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 are configured with a segment display, a dot display, or the like, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix. Furthermore, the images displayed on the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple colors that can be switched between.

The variable display unit 33 is equipped with a pattern display device 36, which is an illuminant that variably displays (variably displays or switches between) a pattern, which is a type of picture. The variable display unit 33 also has a center frame 37 that is arranged to surround the pattern display device 36. The upper part of this center frame 37 is arranged to bulge out towards the window panel 123 provided on its front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as a decrease in visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

The symbol display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 36 starts displaying a variable symbol based on a winning combination in the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. That is, when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display accordingly.
The pattern display device 36 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or other display device.

The pachinko machine 1 increases the player's attention to the game by illuminating numerous LEDs and other light-emitting devices installed in the game area during game states (predetermined game states) such as when a variable display is being executed or when the opening and closing execution mode is being executed. Specifically, the illumination status of the illumination includes a first illumination status associated with an expectation effect that makes the player hopeful that the game state will transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and a second illumination status that is not associated with such an expectation effect. Here, the occurrence of an expectation effect indicates to the player that the game state may transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and is therefore an advantageous state that is favorable to the player. In contrast, the non-occurrence of an expectation effect does not indicate to the player that the game state may transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and is therefore an unfavorable state that is more unfavorable to the player than an advantageous state. The pachinko machine 1 then switches between each illumination status based on the results of an internal lottery.

The center frame 37 includes a first hold lamp unit 371, which is an illuminant located in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36, a second hold lamp unit 372, which is an illuminant located in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, and a third hold lamp unit 373, which is an illuminant located in the area to the right of the second hold lamp unit 372.

The first reserve lamp unit 371 is a unit that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This first reserve lamp unit 371 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the first result display unit 341 and the pattern display device 36.
The second reserve lamp unit 372 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This second reserve lamp unit 372 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the second result display unit 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third reserve lamp unit 373 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This third reserve lamp unit 373 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol display unit 35.
In addition, each of the hold lamp sections 371 to 373 may have other configurations, such as being displayed as an image on part of the pattern display device 36.

In this way, in a given game state, the player can see the light of each illumination from the front of the game board 2V, and the player is playing in a first state in which the light of illuminations at specific positions on the back side of each component can be seen through various translucent components such as the game board 2V, transparent panel 291, and the windmill plate of the windmill WM. If the game ball moves to the back side of various translucent components such as the game board 2V, transparent panel 291, and the windmill plate of the windmill WM, the light of the illuminations will be blocked by the game ball because the game ball is made of metal and does not have translucency. Instead, the player is playing in a second state in which the game ball can be seen through various translucent components such as the game board 2V, transparent panel 291, and the windmill plate of the windmill WM.

The center frame 37 also includes an upper rotating device 7, which is a rotating body provided in the upper central area of the pattern display device 36, and a lower rotating device 8, which is a rotating body provided in the lower area of the pattern display device 36.
The lower rotating device 8 includes a lower right rotating device 81 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, and a lower left rotating device 82 provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36.
The upper rotating device 7 and the lower rotating device 8 will be described in detail below.

Figure 100 is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the upper rotating device. Specifically, the left figure in Figure 100 is a front view of the upper rotating device 7, and the right figure is an A-A cross-sectional view of the upper rotating device 7 shown in the left figure.
The upper rotating accessory 7 is a accessory that imitates the shape of a flower, as shown in Figure 100. This upper rotating accessory 7 has five petals 71 and a disk-shaped petal support 72 that is located in the center of these petals 71 and supports each petal 71.
Of the five petals 71, one petal 71 has a lens 711 attached to a round hole formed in the approximate center. This lens 711 is a convex lens. Therefore, the player can view an enlarged image of what is behind the petal 71, such as the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, through the lens 711.

Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view of the upper rotating device.
100 and 101, each petal 71 is formed in a shape that narrows toward the petal support 72. Each petal 71 has a protrusion 712 formed at the end on the petal support 72 side. This protrusion 712 is formed in a trapezoidal cross section with the long side on the front side and the short side on the back side.
101, the petal support 72 has five grooves 721 formed on the rear surface at equal intervals and extending in the radial direction. Each groove 721 has a trapezoidal cross section with the long side on the front surface and the short side on the rear surface.
Each petal 71 is supported by the petal support 72 so that it can move freely back and forth along the radial direction of the petal support 72 by inserting its protrusion 712 into each groove 721 of the petal support 72 .

As shown in Figures 100 and 101, the upper rotating accessory 7 is equipped with a petal rotation mechanism 73 that rotates the petal support 72 around its central axis, a petal expansion/contraction mechanism 74 that expands and contracts each petal 71 by moving each petal 71 forward and backward along the radial direction of the petal support 72, and a petal lifting mechanism 75 (see Figure 100) that raises and lowers the petal support 72 in the vertical direction.

The petal rotation mechanism 73 comprises a cylindrical shaft 731 fixed to the center of the petal support 72 and extending along the central axis of the petal support 72, a cylindrical body 732 extending along the central axis of the petal support 72 and housing the cylindrical shaft 731 inside so that it can rotate freely around its axis, and a cylindrical drive unit 733 fixed to the back side of the cylinder 732 and rotating the cylindrical shaft 731.

The cylindrical body 732 has a flange portion 734 formed at the end on the rear side.
The cylindrical drive unit 733 has a motor whose output shaft is fixed to the cylindrical shaft body 731 and whose housing is fixed to the flange portion 734 of the cylindrical body 732. Therefore, by driving the motor, the cylindrical drive unit 733 can rotate the cylindrical shaft body 731 about its axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in FIG. 100 ). Then, each petal 71 and petal support 72 rotates about the axis of the petal support 72 in conjunction with the rotation of the cylindrical shaft body 731. In other words, the cylindrical drive unit 733 executes drive control to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 about the axis of the petal support 72.

The petal expansion/contraction mechanism 74 comprises an inner annular body 741 through which the cylindrical shaft 731 is inserted so that it can move back and forth along the cylindrical shaft 731, and an outer annular body 742 that covers the front side of the outer surface of the inner annular body 741 and is fitted into the inner annular body 741 so that it can rotate freely around the axes of the cylindrical shaft 731 and the inner annular body 741. The petal expansion/contraction mechanism 74 also comprises five links 743 that connect each petal 71 and the outer annular body 742, and an annular body drive unit 744 that is fixed to the outer surface of the cylindrical body 732 and moves the inner annular body 741 back and forth along the cylindrical shaft 731.

100, the inner annular body 741 has a recess with a rectangular cross section formed along the entire circumference of its outer circumferential surface, while the outer annular body 742 is made of a flexible material and has a protrusion with a rectangular cross section formed along the entire circumference of its inner circumferential surface.
The inner circular body 741 and the outer circular body 742 are integrated by bending the outer circular body 742 and fitting the convex portion of the outer circular body 742 into the concave portion of the inner circular body 741. Therefore, the inner circular body 741 and the outer circular body 742 can freely advance and retreat along the cylindrical shaft 731, and the outer circular body 742 can freely rotate around the axis of the cylindrical shaft 731 and the inner circular body 741.

100 and 101, the outer annular body 742 has five brackets 745 attached along the outer circumferential surface at equal intervals. The petals 71 each have a bracket 713 fixed to their rear surfaces (see FIG. 101).
The link 743 has one end rotatably supported by the bracket 745 of the outer annular body 742 , and the other end rotatably supported by the bracket 713 of the petal 71 .

The torus drive unit 744 has an actuator whose output shaft is fixed to the inner torus 741 and whose housing is fixed to the outer surface of the cylindrical body 732. Therefore, by driving the actuator, the torus drive unit 744 can move the inner torus 741 and outer torus 742 back and forth along the cylindrical shaft body 731.

Figure 102 is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the upper rotating device showing the state in which the inner and outer rings are advanced to the front side. Specifically, the left figure in Figure 102 is a front view of the upper rotating device 7, and the right figure is an A-A cross-sectional view of the upper rotating device 7 shown in the left figure.
When the inner annular body 741 and the outer annular body 742 are advanced toward the front side (the direction of the arrow in the figure) along the cylindrical shaft 731, each petal 71 advances toward the radially outer side of the petal support body 72 via the link 743, as shown in Figure 102. In other words, each petal 71 spreads outward radially from the petal support body 72 as the center.
In contrast to this, when the inner annular body 741 and the outer annular body 742 are retracted toward the rear side along the cylindrical shaft 731, each petal 71 retracts toward the inside in the radial direction of the petal support body 72 via the link 743, as shown in Figure 100. In other words, each petal 71 contracts radially around the petal support body 72.
Therefore, the annular body driving unit 744 executes drive control to expand and contract each petal 71 around the petal support 72 .

Here, the cylindrical shaft 731 has an expanded diameter portion 735 formed at the end on the front side. This expanded diameter portion 735 restricts the movement of the inner circular body 741 and the outer circular body 742 toward the front side. In addition, the front end face of the cylindrical body 732 restricts the movement of the inner circular body 741 and the outer circular body 742 toward the rear side. In other words, the inner circular body 741 and the outer circular body 742 can freely advance and retreat along the cylindrical shaft 731 between the end face of the cylindrical body 732 and the expanded diameter portion 735 of the cylindrical shaft 731.

As shown in Figure 100, the petal lifting mechanism 75 supports the cylindrical body 732 and includes a rectangular upper long plate 751 with its long side extending in the vertical direction and attached to the back side of the center frame 37 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction, and an upper long plate drive unit 752 attached to the back side of the center frame 37 and used to raise and lower the upper long plate 751 in the vertical direction.

The upper long plate 751 is attached so as to be slidable in a guide groove (not shown) formed in the vertical direction on the back surface of the center frame 37. This upper long plate 751 has a gear 753 formed in the vertical direction on the back surface. The upper long plate 751 also has a round hole formed in the lower end, and the cylindrical body 732 is inserted into this round hole and a flange portion 734 of the cylindrical body 732 is fixed to the back surface of the upper long plate 751, thereby supporting the cylindrical body 732.
The upper long plate drive unit 752 has a motor whose output shaft gear is engaged with the gear 753 of the upper long plate 751 and whose housing is fixed to the back side of the center frame 37. Therefore, by driving the motor, the upper long plate drive unit 752 can raise and lower the upper long plate 751 in the vertical direction (see the up and down arrows in the figure). In other words, the upper long plate drive unit 752 executes drive control to raise and lower each petal 71 and petal support 72 in the vertical direction.

103 is a front view and a side view of the right-bottom rotating device. Specifically, the left figure in FIG. 103 is a front view of the right-bottom rotating device 81, and the right figure is a side view of the right-bottom rotating device 81.
103, the lower-right rotating device 81 comprises a rectangular lower-right plate 811 with semicircular ends on both long sides, and a rectangular lower-right long board 812 with its long side extending in the vertical direction, which is disposed on the back side of the non-transparent lower-right plate 811 and is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. The lower-right rotating device 81 also comprises a lower-right plate drive unit 813 which is fixed to the lower-right long board 812 and rotates the lower-right plate 811, and a lower-right long board drive unit 814 which is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 and moves the lower-right long board 812 up and down in the vertical direction.

The lower right plate 811 has two disk-shaped panels 815 and 816 attached to the front of both ends. Panel 815 displays the word "BIG" in black letters. Panel 816 displays the word "BIG" in rainbow-colored letters.
The lower right long plate 812 is attached so as to be slidable in a guide groove (not shown) formed along the vertical direction on the rear surface side of the center frame 37. This lower right long plate 812 has a gear 817 formed on the right side surface side along the vertical direction.

The lower right plate driving unit 813 has an output shaft fixed to the center of the lower right plate 811 and a motor with a housing fixed to the back surface of the lower right long plate 812. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower right plate driving unit 813 can rotate the lower right plate 811 around the central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure).
The lower right long plate drive unit 814 has a gear on its output shaft that engages with a gear 817 of the lower right long plate 812 via an intermediate gear 814V, and has a motor whose housing is fixed to the back side of the center frame 37. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower right long plate drive unit 814 can raise and lower the lower right long plate 812 in the vertical up and down direction (see the up and down arrows in the drawing).

104 is a front view and a side view of the left-bottom rotating device 82. Specifically, the left view of FIG. 104 is a front view of the left-bottom rotating device 82, and the right view is a side view of the left-bottom rotating device 82.
104, the lower-left rotating device 82 comprises a rectangular lower-left plate 821 with semicircular ends on both long sides, and a rectangular lower-left long board 822 with its long side extending in the vertical direction, which is disposed on the back side of the non-transparent lower-left plate 821 and is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. The lower-left rotating device 82 also comprises a lower-left plate drive unit 823 which is fixed to the lower-left long board 822 and rotates the lower-left plate 821, and a lower-left long board drive unit 824 which is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 and moves the lower-left long board 822 up and down in the vertical direction.

The lower left plate 821 has two disk-shaped panels 825 and 826 attached to the front of both ends. Panel 825 displays the word "small" in black letters. Panel 826 displays the word "small" in rainbow-colored letters.
The lower left long plate 822 is attached so as to be slidable in a guide groove (not shown) formed along the vertical direction on the rear surface side of the center frame 37. This lower left long plate 822 has a gear 827 formed on the left side surface side along the vertical direction.

The lower-left plate driving unit 823 has an output shaft fixed to the center of the lower-left plate 821 and a motor with a housing fixed to the back surface of the lower-left long plate 822. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower-left plate driving unit 823 can rotate the lower-left plate 821 around the central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure).
The lower-left long plate drive unit 824 has a gear on its output shaft that engages with a gear 827 of the lower-left long plate 822 via an intermediate gear 824V, and has a motor whose housing is fixed to the back side of the center frame 37. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower-left long plate drive unit 824 can raise and lower the lower-left long plate 822 in the vertical up and down direction (see the up and down arrows in the drawing).

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
105, the audio and light emission control device 5 comprises an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the push button 142. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, which are light emitters, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6. The output port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the upper rotary accessory drive units of the cylinder drive unit 733, the annular body drive unit 744, and the upper long plate drive unit 752, and the lower rotary accessory drive units of the lower right plate drive unit 813, the lower right long plate drive unit 814, the lower left plate drive unit 823, and the lower left long plate drive unit 824.
The MPU 52 controls the driving of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, the upper rotating device driving unit, and the lower rotating device driving unit based on commands sent from the main control unit 4 and information input from the push button 142 when operated by the player.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 perform different processing than in the main embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is different from that in the main embodiment. The details of the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment are explained below.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2001 to S2006 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in Fig. 106. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the main reference embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes steps S2003V and S2004V instead of steps S2003 and S2004.

In step S2003V, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining effects based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the process for determining effects, the MPU 52 determines effects for the game round, effects for the open/close execution mode, etc. This process for determining effects will be described in detail later.
In step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes a performance execution process based on the contents of the hold determination process in step S2002 and the performance determination process in step S2003V. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125. In addition, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the rotation of the upper rotating device 7 and the lower rotating device 8, and executes display control of the symbol display device 36.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 107. Note that this embodiment differs from the main embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2407V instead of the process of step S2407.

In step S2407V, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407V, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, based on the selected performance pattern, in the performance execution process of step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125. Furthermore, based on the selected performance pattern, in the performance execution process of step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes display control of the symbol display device 36 and executes drive control of the rotation of the upper rotating device 7 and the lower rotating device 8, etc.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S8001 to S8006 as shown in FIG. 108.

In step S8001, the MPU 52 determines whether the result is a "jackpot win" or not based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8001 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the process of step S8006 without executing the processes from step S8002 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8001 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes a process for determining the upper role presentation in step S8002. In this process for determining the upper role presentation, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of an upper role presentation for informing the player that the result is a "jackpot win" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7.

In the performance execution process of step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes the upper role performance based on the contents of the upper role performance determination process of step S8002. Here, the MPU 52 executes the upper role performance after stopping the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display device 36 and before receiving the variation end command (before stopping the variable display on the first result display unit 341 of the main display unit 34 or before stopping the variable display on the second result display unit 342 of the main display unit 34).
Specifically, in the upper role-playing performance, the MPU 52 executes light emission control for the various lamp units 124, 371-373 and executes audio control for the speaker unit 125. The MPU 52 causes the column drive unit 733 to execute drive control for rotating each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72. The MPU 52 causes the torus drive unit 744 to execute drive control for expanding and contracting each petal 71 around the petal support 72. The MPU 52 causes the upper long plate drive unit 752 to execute drive control for raising and lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 in the vertical direction.

After executing the upper reel effect determination process in step S8002, the MPU 52 sets an upper reel effect command in step S8003. The MPU 52 then stores the upper reel effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This upper reel effect command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

Based on the upper-side reel effect command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 of display control device 6 reads from program ROM 63 a data table for executing the upper-side reel effect on symbol display device 36. Then, MPU 62 outputs a command to VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). Based on the content of the command generated by MPU 62, VDP 65 reads image data from character ROM 66 and stores this image data in expansion buffer 68. Furthermore, VDP 65 creates drawing data in frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in expansion buffer 68. As a result, symbol display device 36 displays the upper-side reel effect on display screen G and notifies the player that the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win." Here, after stopping the display of the changing symbols on symbol display device 36, MPU 62 executes the upper-side reel effect before receiving the change end command.

Figure 109 shows the state in which the upper role performance is being performed.
The player can guide the game ball to each operating port 25, 26 by rotating the launch handle 16 to a medium degree and shifting the game ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center. Specifically, when the game ball's arrival position is shifted to the center, the game ball passes between the multiple nails NL and reaches the rotating body, the windmill WM. The game ball then wins a prize in each operating port 25, 26 based on the rotation state of the windmill WM and the movement of the game ball. If a "jackpot win" is determined in the lottery based on the winning or losing of each operating port 25, 26, the MPU 62 stops the display of the changing symbols and then displays a reduced version of the symbol in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. 109 .
In the example of FIG. 109, the MPU 62 displays the symbol "666" at the bottom right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 execute the upper role performance before receiving the variation end command.
Specifically, the MPU 52 controls the column driver 733 to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). The MPU 52 also controls the upper long plate driver 752 to lower each petal 71 and petal support 72 vertically downward (see the downward arrow in the figure). After lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 to its lowest position, the MPU 52 controls the torus driver 744 to expand each petal 71 around the petal support 72 (see the outward radial arrow in the figure).

The MPU 62 displays a plurality of light spots GP at display positions on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 that correspond to the trajectory of the lens 711 of the petal 71 that is being rotated around the axis of the petal support 72 by the cylinder drive unit 733. In other words, the MPU 62 displays a plurality of light spots GP so as to draw a circular trajectory on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Here, the plurality of light spots GP are white spots displayed on a black background and are arranged at equal intervals from one another.
Therefore, the light spot GP magnified by the lens 711 appears to move counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the game board 2V.

After executing the processing of step S8003, the MPU 52 executes the processing for determining the lower role effect in step S8004, as shown in FIG. 108. In this processing for determining the lower role effect, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of a lower role effect to notify the player of whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7 and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8.

In the performance execution process of step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes the lower role performance based on the content of the determination process of the lower role performance of step S8004. Here, after executing the upper role performance, the MPU 52 executes the lower role performance before receiving the variation end command.
Specifically, in the lower role performance, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125. The MPU 52 causes the column drive unit 733 to execute drive control to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72. Here, the MPU 52 executes the lower role performance while maintaining the state after the upper role performance is executed (a state in which each petal 71 is expanded around the petal support 72 after each petal 71 and petal support 72 has been lowered to its lowest position).

The MPU 52 also causes the lower right plate drive unit 813 to execute drive control to rotate the lower right plate 811 around its central axis, and causes the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to raise and lower the lower right long plate 812 in the vertical up-down direction. The MPU 52 also causes the lower left plate drive unit 823 to execute drive control to rotate the lower left plate 821 around its central axis, and causes the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to raise and lower the lower left long plate 822 in the vertical up-down direction.

Figure 110 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the lower role performance.
The MPU 52 executes a process for determining the lower-side bonus effect in order to notify the player whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result." In this process for determining the lower-side bonus effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S8101 to S8107 as shown in FIG.

In step S8101, the MPU 52 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result," it executes a process of determining a BIG character in step S8102. In the process of determining a BIG character, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower role presentation will be "BIG" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7 and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8, in order to notify the player that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result."
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" (if the allocation result is determined to be a "low probability result"), it executes a process of determining a small character in step S8103. In the process of determining a small character, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower role presentation will be "small" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7 and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8, in order to notify the player that the allocation result is a "low probability result".

After executing the processing of step S8102 or step S8103, the MPU 52 acquires the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area in step S8104. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot, which is included in the sub-side reserved information.

In step S8105, the MPU 52 determines whether the winning/losing result obtained in step S8104, i.e., the winning/losing result contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area, is a "jackpot win."
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8105 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes a process for determining rainbow-colored characters in step S8106. In the process for determining rainbow-colored characters, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower-side role presentation will be rainbow-colored characters by having the upper-side rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper-side rotary role 7 and the lower-side rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower-side rotary role 8, in order to notify the player that a jackpot has occurred in the reserved area.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8105 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes a process of determining black characters in step S8107. In the process of determining black characters, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower role presentation will be displayed in black characters by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7 and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8, in order to notify the player that a jackpot will not occur in the reserved area.
After executing the processing of step S8106 or the processing of step S8107, the MPU 52 ends the process of determining the lower role performance.

After executing the process for determining the lower reel effect in step S8004, the MPU 52 sets a lower reel effect command in step S8005, as shown in FIG. 108. The MPU 52 then stores the lower reel effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This lower reel effect command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

Based on the lower-side reel effect command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the lower-side reel effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to display the lower-side reel effect on the display screen G and notify the player whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result." Here, after executing the upper-side reel effect, the MPU 62 executes the lower-side reel effect before receiving the variation end command.

Fig. 111 is a front view showing a state in which the lower role performance is being performed. Fig. 112 is a right side view showing a state in which the lower role performance is being performed.
After executing the upper role performance, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 execute the lower role performance before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, as shown in Figures 111 and 112, the MPU 52 maintains the state after the upper role performance has been executed (after lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 to the lowest position, each petal 71 is expanded around the petal support 72), and continues to cause the cylindrical drive unit 733 to perform drive control to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72 (see counterclockwise arrow in Figure 111).

The MPU 52 also controls the lower-right plate driver 813 to rotate the lower-right plate 811 around its central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure), and the lower-right long plate driver 814 to lift the lower-right long plate 812 vertically upward (see the upward arrow in the figure). The MPU 52 also controls the lower-left plate driver 823 to rotate the lower-left plate 821 around its central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure), and the lower-left long plate driver 824 to lift the lower-left long plate 822 vertically upward (see the upward arrow in the figure).
Here, each petal 71, the lower right plate 811, and the lower left plate 821 are arranged at a predetermined distance apart, as shown in Figure 112, so that the upper rotating device 7 and the lower rotating device 8 do not come into contact when the lower device performance is performed.

As shown in FIG. 111, the MPU 62 displays an angel character GB4 in the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and the character says, "BIG or small/Rainbow is a great chance!" to inform the player whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result," and to inform the player that a jackpot will occur in the reserved area.

Figure 113 shows the state in which the word "BIG" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After starting the lower role presentation, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the BIG character determination process is executed in step S8102 and the black character determination process is executed in step S8107, the MPU 52 causes the cylindrical drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 having the lens 711 at a predetermined position (the right position of the petal support 72) by stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, as shown in FIG. 113.

In addition, the MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and stops the lifting of the lower right long plate 812, thereby causing the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811 at a position (see Figure 112) where a panel 815 displaying the word "BIG" in black letters can be seen through the lens 711.
The MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower left plate 821 and stops the lifting of the lower left long plate 822, thereby causing the lower left plate drive unit 823 and the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to perform drive control to stop the lower left plate 821.

Figure 114 shows the state in which the word "small" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After starting the lower role presentation, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the small character determination process is executed in step S8103 and the black character determination process is executed in step S8107, the MPU 52 causes the cylindrical drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 having the lens 711 at a predetermined position (the left side position of the petal support 72) by stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, as shown in FIG. 114.

In addition, the MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower left plate 821 and stops the lifting of the lower left long plate 822, thereby causing the lower left plate drive unit 823 and the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to stop the lower left plate 821 in a position where a panel 825 displaying the word "small" in black letters can be seen through the lens 711.
The MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and stops the lifting of the lower right long plate 812, thereby causing the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811.

Figure 115 shows the state in which the rainbow-colored letters "BIG" are announced to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After starting the lower role presentation, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the BIG character determination process is executed in step S8102 and the rainbow character determination process is executed in step S8106, the MPU 52 causes the cylindrical drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 having the lens 711 at a predetermined position (the right position of the petal support 72) by stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, as shown in FIG. 115.

In addition, the MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and stops the lifting of the lower right long plate 812, thereby causing the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811 in a position where a panel 816 displaying the word "BIG" in rainbow-colored letters can be seen through the lens 711.
The MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower left plate 821 and stops the lifting of the lower left long plate 822, thereby causing the lower left plate drive unit 823 and the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to perform drive control to stop the lower left plate 821.

Figure 116 shows the state in which the rainbow-colored letters "small" are notified to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After starting the lower role presentation, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the process of determining small characters is executed in step S8103 and the process of determining rainbow characters is executed in step S8106, the MPU 52 causes the cylindrical drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 having the lens 711 at a predetermined position (the left side position of the petal support 72) by stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, as shown in FIG. 116.

In addition, the MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower left plate 821 and stops the lifting of the lower left long plate 822, thereby causing the lower left plate drive unit 823 and the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to perform drive control to stop the lower left plate 821 in a position where a panel 826 displaying the word "small" in rainbow-colored letters can be seen through the lens 711.
The MPU 52 stops the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and stops the lifting of the lower right long plate 812, thereby causing the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811.

When the lower role performance is to end, the MPU 52 causes the torus drive unit 744 to execute drive control to shrink each petal 71 around the petal support 72, and causes the cylinder drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 with the lens 711 at a predetermined position (the upper position of the petal support 72) by rotating each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72. The MPU 52 then causes the upper long plate drive unit 752 to execute drive control to raise each petal 71 and petal support 72 vertically upward.

When the lower role performance is to be ended, the MPU 52 causes the lower right plate drive unit 813 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811 at a predetermined position (a position where panel 815 is on the upper side and panel 816 is on the lower side) by rotating the lower right plate 811. Thereafter, the MPU 52 causes the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to lower the lower right plate 811 vertically downward.
Furthermore, when the lower role performance is to be ended, the MPU 52 causes the lower left plate drive unit 823 to execute drive control to stop the lower left plate 821 at a predetermined position (a position where panel 825 is on the upper side and panel 826 is on the lower side) by rotating the lower left plate 821. Thereafter, the MPU 52 causes the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to lower the lower left plate 821 vertically downward.

After executing the processing of step S8005, or if it is determined in step S8001 that the result is not a "jackpot win," the MPU 52 executes processing to determine other presentation patterns in step S8006, as shown in FIG. 108. In the processing to determine other presentation patterns, the MPU 52 determines whether to generate presentations other than the upper and lower role presentations, and executes a lottery to determine whether to generate a preview display. The MPU 52 then terminates the processing to determine the presentation pattern.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 (gaming machine) is equipped with an operating port winning process (special information acquisition means) in step S105 that acquires a jackpot random number counter C1 (special information) based on the establishment of a winning entry (predetermined acquisition condition) in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26, and a fluctuation start process (special information determination means) in step S505 that determines whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies the predetermined winning condition. When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to an opening/closing execution mode (special control state) that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with a symbol display device 36 (light-emitting means), which is an illuminant visible from the front of the gaming board 2V. Note that, although the illuminant is the symbol display device 36 in this embodiment, it may also be an illuminant such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the gaming board, and the illuminant may be provided in any location as long as it is visible from the front of the gaming board.

In this reference embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with an upper rotating device 7 (first rotation means), which is a rotating body configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the gaming board 2V. This rotating body is configured to be rotatable around a petal support 72 (a predetermined rotation axis) and is equipped with petals 71 (rotating plate portion) that can switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state. The rotating plate portion is configured to allow the light from the light-emitting element located on the back side to be visible. In other words, this rotating body is translucent.

The rotating body may be provided on the surface of the game board, inside various winning holes, or in any other location. The rotating body may be rotatable by any driving source, may be rotatable using an actuator such as a solenoid, or may be rotatable using the force of a game ball that has entered an outlet or other game balls flowing down. The rotational speed of the rotating body may be variable.
Furthermore, the predetermined rotation axis may be movable in a direction different from the vertical direction, or may be fixed at a predetermined position. The rotating plate portion may be a single plate, or may consist of two or more plates. The rotating plate portion may not be expandable or contractible, or may be fixed to the predetermined rotation axis. The rotating plate portion may be configured to reduce the light from the light-emitting body located on the back side so that it can be seen, or may not be configured to expand or contract so that it can be seen.

In this reference embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with a lower rotating device 8 (second rotation means), which is a rotating body configured to rotate when viewed from the front of the gaming board 2V. This rotating body is configured to be movable between a position where panels 815, 816, 825, and 826 cannot be seen through the lens 711 when viewing the gaming board 2V from the front (a first position where they can be seen without passing through the rotating plate), and a position where panels 815, 816, 825, and 826 can be seen through the lens 711 when viewing the gaming board 2V from the front (a second position where they can be seen through the rotating plate) by moving to the back side of the rotating plate. In other words, this rotating body is a rotating body that moves between the first position and the second position.

The rotating body may be rotatable in any manner, and may be rotatable by utilizing the force of contact with another member. The rotating body may move to the back side of the rotating plate through any path, and may be able to move through not only one path but also multiple paths. The rotating body may or may not be translucent, as long as it is visible. The rotational speed of the rotating body may be variable. The moving speed of the rotating body may be variable.

In this reference form, the gaming machine has an upper role presentation (first state) in which the light from the light-emitting element at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state during a game round (specific game state), and a lower role presentation (second state) in which the rotating element blocks the light from the light-emitting element at the specific position by moving the rotating element to a second position, making the rotating element visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state.

The first state and the second state may be transitioned at any time as long as they are in the gaming state of the gaming machine. In other words, the transition between the first state and the second state may occur between the time a gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and the time the gaming ball is ejected from the gaming area. The first state may be such that the light from the light-emitting element at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a predetermined rotational state, and the reflected light (or transmitted light) from the light-emitting element at the specific position via other components is visible. The second state may be such that the rotating element blocks the light from the light-emitting element at the specific position, and the rotating element may be visible through the rotating plate in a predetermined rotational state, and the reflected light (or transmitted light) from the light-emitting element at the specific position via other components is blocked by the rotating element.

According to this configuration, the gaming machine has, in a predetermined gaming state, a first state in which the light of the light-emitting body (light-emitting means) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a predetermined rotation state, and a second state in which the rotating body (second rotating means) moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting body (light-emitting means) at the specific position, making the rotating body (second rotating means) visible through the rotating plate in the predetermined rotation state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate of the rotating body (first rotating means). Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, with the above-described configuration, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the rotating body (first rotating means) while enhancing decorativeness on the back side of the rotating body (first rotating means).

In this reference embodiment, the rotating plate portion has a central portion (first region) of the lens 711 having a first light transmittance, and a peripheral portion (second region) of the lens 711 having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region.
In addition, the rotating plate portion does not have to be lens-shaped, and can be a member of any shape as long as it has a thin, low-transmittance portion (first region) when viewed from the front of the game board, and a thick, high-transmittance portion (second region) when viewed from the front of the game board.

According to this configuration, the rotating plate portion has a first region having a first light transmittance and a second region having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region, so that the appearance of the light from the light-emitting body (light-emitting means) at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the rotating body (second rotating means) in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the rotating body (first rotating means) whose back side is visible has areas with different light transmittance, the appearance of light on the back side of the rotating body (first rotating means) can be made more diverse, and even when used alone, the rotating body (first rotating means) whose back side is visible can provide high decorativeness that is no different from conventional rotating bodies used for performances.

In this embodiment, the first and second regions have different thicknesses when viewed from the front of the game board, and therefore have different light transmittances.
With this configuration, the first area and the second area have different thicknesses when viewed from the front of the game board, and therefore different light transmittances, which simplifies the configuration of the rotating plate portion.

In this embodiment, the first area and the second area are provided adjacent to each other when viewed from the front of the game board.
With this configuration, the first area and the second area are arranged adjacent to each other when viewed from the front of the game board, thereby simplifying the configuration of the rotating plate section compared to when they are arranged a predetermined distance apart when viewed from the front of the game board.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine includes a plurality of rotating bodies, which are movable simultaneously to the rear side of the rotating plate portion of the rotating body.
The gaming machine may include three or more rotating bodies. After one rotating body moves to the rear side of the rotating plate portion of the rotating body, other rotating bodies may move to the rear side of the rotating plate portion while the first rotating body remains at the rear side of the rotating plate portion.

With this configuration, multiple rotating bodies (second rotating means) can simultaneously move to the back side of the rotating plate portion of the rotating body (first rotating means), which makes it possible to diversify the light from the light-emitting body (light-emitting means) at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the rotating body (second rotating means) in the second state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the plurality of rotating bodies are configured to move so that one rotating body does not block the other rotating bodies when the game board is viewed from the front.
Note that one rotating body may move so as to partially block other rotating bodies, provided that it does not block the other rotating bodies entirely.

With this configuration, when the game board is viewed from the front, the multiple rotating bodies (second rotating means) move so that one rotating body (second rotating means) does not obstruct the other rotating bodies (second rotating means), allowing the player to see all of the multiple rotating bodies (second rotating means).

In this embodiment, a predetermined rotation axis of a rotating body in a predetermined rotation state remains without moving for at least a predetermined period of time.
The predetermined rotation axis of the rotating body may be configured to remain stationary without moving for any period of time as long as it is in a predetermined rotation state, and may be a predetermined period in the gaming state of the gaming machine or any other period. In other words, the predetermined rotation axis of the rotating body may be configured to move without remaining stationary unless it is in a predetermined rotation state.

With this configuration, the specified rotation axis of the rotating body (first rotation means) in a specified rotation state remains stationary without moving for at least a specified period of time, allowing the player to stably view the rotating plate portion of the rotating body (first rotation means) in a specified rotation state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the rotating body is movable to the second position in a state where the predetermined rotation axis of the rotating body remains stationary without moving.
With this configuration, the rotating body (second rotating means) can move to the second position when the predetermined rotation axis of the rotating body (first rotating means) remains stationary without moving, so the player will pay attention to the movement status of the rotating body (second rotating means) when the predetermined rotation axis of the rotating body (first rotating means) remains stationary without moving.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) In a predetermined game state, the pachinko machine 1 has a first state in which the light of the pattern display device 36 at a specific position is visible through the petals 71 in a predetermined rotational state, and a second state in which the lower rotating device 8 moves to a second position, blocking the light of the pattern display device 36 at a specific position with the lower rotating device 8, making the lower rotating device 8 visible through the petals 71 in a predetermined rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the petals 71 of the upper rotating device 7. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(2) The petals 71 have a central portion of the lens 711 having a first light transmittance and a peripheral portion of the lens 711 having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region, so that the appearance of the light of the pattern display device 36 at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the lower rotating device 8 in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the upper rotating device 7, the back side of which is visible, is also provided with regions with different light transmittances, the appearance of the light on the back side of the upper rotating device 7 can be diversified, and the upper rotating device 7, the back side of which is visible, can also provide high decorativeness comparable to conventional rotating devices for performances, even when used alone.
(3) The central portion of the lens 711 and the peripheral portion of the lens 711 have different thicknesses when viewed from the front of the game board 2V, and therefore have different light transmittances, which simplifies the configuration of the petals 71.
(4) The central portion of lens 711 and the peripheral portion of lens 711 are arranged adjacent to each other when viewed from the front of the game board 2V, so the configuration of petals 71 can be simplified compared to when they are arranged a predetermined distance apart when viewed from the front of the game board 2V.

(5) Since the multiple lower rotating devices 8 (lower right rotating device 81 and lower left rotating device 82) can be simultaneously moved to the back side of the petals 71 on the upper rotating device 7, the light of the pattern display device 36 at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the lower rotating device 8 in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
(6) When the game board 2V is viewed from the front, the multiple lower rotating devices 8 (lower right rotating device 81 and lower left rotating device 82) move so that one lower rotating device 8 does not block the other lower rotating devices 8, so that the player can see all of the multiple lower rotating devices 8.

(7) The petal support 72 on the upper rotating device 7 in a predetermined rotation state remains without moving for at least a predetermined period of time, so that the player can stably view the petals 71 on the upper rotating device 7 in a predetermined rotation state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
(8) Since the lower rotating device 8 can be moved to the second position when the petal support 72 in the upper rotating device 7 remains stationary without moving, the player will pay attention to the movement of the lower rotating device 8 when the petal support 72 in the upper rotating device 7 remains stationary without moving.

[Reference form W]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment W of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 117 is a front view of a game board according to reference form W of the present invention.
In the reference form V, the center frame 37 is provided with an upper rotating device 7 and a lower rotating device 8, and the lower rotating device 8 is provided with a lower right rotating device 81 and a lower left rotating device 82.
In contrast, in this reference form, the center frame 37 is equipped with an upper rotating device 7W, which is a rotating body, and a lower rotating device 8W, which is also a rotating body, and the lower rotating device 8W differs from the reference form V in that it is equipped with a lower right rotating device 81W and a lower left rotating device 82W.

Figure 118 is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the upper rotating accessory. Specifically, the left figure in Figure 118 is a front view of the upper rotating accessory 7W, and the right figure is an A-A cross-sectional view of the upper rotating accessory 7W shown in the left figure.
The upper rotating accessory 7W is a accessory that imitates the shape of a flower, as shown in Fig. 118. This upper rotating accessory 7W has five petals 71 and a disk-shaped petal support 72 that is positioned in the center of these petals 71 and supports each petal 71.
Of the five petals 71, the petal 71 located in the upper left in the figure has a lens 714 attached to a circular hole formed approximately in the center and a rectangular arc-shaped convex portion 715 that protrudes from the rear side and is formed in an arc-shaped shape on the petal support 72 side of the lens 714. The petal 71 located in the upper right in the figure has a lens 716 attached to a circular hole formed approximately in the center and a rectangular arc-shaped convex portion 717 that protrudes from the rear side and is formed in an arc-shaped shape on the petal support 72 side of the lens 714. Each lens 714, 716 is a convex lens. Therefore, the player can view an enlarged image of an object behind the petal 71, such as the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, through the lenses 714, 716. The lenses 714, 716 have different light transmittances. Specifically, the light transmittance of the material of the lens 714 is higher than the light transmittance of the material of the lens 716 , and therefore the light transmittance of the lens 714 is higher than the light transmittance of the lens 716 .

Figure 119 is a front view and a side view of the right-bottom rotating device. Specifically, the left figure in Figure 119 is a front view of the right-bottom rotating device 81W, and the right figure is a side view of the right-bottom rotating device 81W.
119, the lower-right rotating device 81W comprises a rectangular lower-right plate 811 with semicircular ends on both long sides, and a rectangular lower-right long board 812W with its long side extending in the vertical direction, which is disposed on the back side of the non-transparent lower-right plate 811 and is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. The lower-right rotating device 81W also comprises a lower-right plate drive unit 813 which is fixed to the lower-right long board 812W and rotates the lower-right plate 811, and a lower-right long board drive unit 814 which is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 and moves the lower-right long board 812W up and down in the vertical direction.

The lower right plate 811 has two disk-shaped panels 815 and 816 attached to the front of both ends. Panel 815 displays the word "BIG" in black letters. Panel 816 displays the word "BIG" in rainbow-colored letters.
The lower right long plate 812W, which is a rotating body, includes an upper long plate 812W1 located on the vertically upper side and to which the lower right plate drive unit 813 is fixed, a lower long plate 812W2 located on the vertically lower side and attached to the back side of the center frame 37, and an upper long plate drive unit 818 fixed to the back side of the lower end of the upper long plate 812W1 and which rotates the upper long plate 812W1 relative to the lower long plate 812W2. The lower long plate 812W2 has a gear 817 formed on its right side along the vertical direction.

The lower right plate driving unit 813 has an output shaft fixed to the center of the lower right plate 811 and a motor with a housing fixed to the back surface of the lower right long plate 812W. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower right plate driving unit 813 can rotate the lower right plate 811 around the central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure).
The lower right long plate drive unit 814 has a motor whose output shaft gear is engaged with a gear 817 of the lower right long plate 812W via an intermediate gear 814V, and whose housing is fixed to the back side of the center frame 37. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower right long plate drive unit 814 can raise and lower the lower right long plate 812W in the vertical up and down direction (see the up and down arrows in the drawing).

The upper long plate drive unit 818 has a motor whose output shaft is fixed to a hole formed in the upper end of the lower long plate 812W2 and whose housing is fixed to the back surface of the lower end of the upper long plate 812W1. Therefore, by driving the motor, the upper long plate drive unit 818 can rotate the upper long plate 812W1 relative to the lower long plate 812W2 around the motor's output shaft (see the clockwise arrow in the figure).

Figure 120 is a front view and a side view of the left-bottom rotating device. Specifically, the left figure in Figure 120 is a front view of the left-bottom rotating device 82W, and the right figure is a side view of the left-bottom rotating device 82W.
120, the lower-left rotating device 82W comprises a rectangular lower-left plate 821 with semicircular ends on both long sides, and a rectangular lower-left long board 822W with its long side extending in the vertical direction, which is disposed on the back side of the non-transparent lower-left plate 821 and is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. The lower-left rotating device 82W also comprises a lower-left plate drive unit 823 which is fixed to the lower-left long board 822W and rotates the lower-left plate 821, and a lower-left long board drive unit 824 which is attached to the back side of the center frame 37 and moves the lower-left long board 822W up and down in the vertical direction.

The lower left plate 821 has two disk-shaped panels 825 and 826 attached to the front of both ends. Panel 825 displays the word "small" in black letters. Panel 826 displays the word "small" in rainbow-colored letters.
The lower left long plate 822W, which is a rotating body, is provided with an upper long plate 822W1 located on the vertically upper side and to which the lower left plate drive unit 823 is fixed, a lower long plate 822W2 located on the vertically lower side and attached to the back side of the center frame 37, and an upper long plate drive unit 828 fixed to the back side of the lower end of the upper long plate 822W1 and which rotates the upper long plate 822W1 relative to the lower long plate 822W2. The lower long plate 822W2 has a gear 827 formed on its left side along the vertical direction.

The lower-left plate driving unit 823 has an output shaft fixed to the center of the lower-left plate 821 and a motor with a housing fixed to the back surface of the lower-left long board 822W. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower-left plate driving unit 823 can rotate the lower-left plate 821 around the central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure).
The lower-left long plate drive unit 824 has a gear on its output shaft that engages with a gear 827 of the lower-left long plate 822W via an intermediate gear 824V, and has a motor whose housing is fixed to the back side of the center frame 37. Therefore, by driving the motor, the lower-left long plate drive unit 824 can raise and lower the lower-left long plate 822W in the vertical direction (see the up and down arrows in the drawing).

The upper long plate drive unit 828 has a motor whose output shaft is fixed to a hole formed in the upper end of the lower long plate 822W2 and whose housing is fixed to the back surface of the lower end of the upper long plate 822W1. Therefore, by driving the motor, the upper long plate drive unit 828 can rotate the upper long plate 822W1 relative to the lower long plate 822W2 around the motor's output shaft (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure).

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
As shown in Fig. 121, the audio and light emission control device 5 comprises an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the push button 142. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371-373, which are light emitters, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6. The output port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the upper rotary accessory drive units of the cylinder drive unit 733, the annular body drive unit 744, and the upper long board drive unit 752, and the lower rotary accessory drive units of the lower right plate drive unit 813, the lower right long board drive unit 814, the upper long board drive unit 818, the lower left plate drive unit 823, the lower left long board drive unit 824, and the upper long board drive unit 828.
The MPU 52 controls the driving of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, the upper rotating device driving unit, and the lower rotating device driving unit based on commands sent from the main control unit 4 and information input from the push button 142 when operated by the player.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in Reference Embodiment V. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the processing for determining the presentation pattern differs from that in Reference Embodiment V. The details of the processing for determining the presentation pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S8001 to S8006, as in the reference form V, as shown in FIG. 122. Note that this reference form differs from the reference form V in that the MPU 52 executes steps S8002W to S8005W instead of steps S8002 to S8005.

In step S8001, the MPU 52 determines whether the result is a "jackpot win" or not based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8001 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the process of step S8006 without executing the processes from step S8002W onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8001 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes a process for determining the upper role presentation in step S8002W. In this process for determining the upper role presentation, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of an upper role presentation for informing the player that the result is a "jackpot win" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7W.

In the performance execution process of step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes the upper role performance based on the contents of the upper role performance determination process of step S8002W. Here, the MPU 52 executes the upper role performance after stopping the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 36 and before receiving the variation end command.
Specifically, in the upper role-playing performance, the MPU 52 executes light emission control for the various lamp units 124, 371-373 and executes audio control for the speaker unit 125. The MPU 52 causes the column drive unit 733 to execute drive control for rotating each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72. The MPU 52 causes the torus drive unit 744 to execute drive control for expanding and contracting each petal 71 around the petal support 72. The MPU 52 causes the upper long plate drive unit 752 to execute drive control for raising and lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 in the vertical direction.

Figure 123 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the upper role performance.
The MPU 52 executes a process for determining the upper role effect to notify the player that the result of the winnings is a "jackpot win." In addition, in the process for determining the upper role effect, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for generating a special light emission of the light spot GP to make the player hope that the "most advantageous result" has been obtained in the allocation lottery. In this process for determining the upper role effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S8201 to S8208 as shown in FIG.

In step S8201, the MPU 52 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8201 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result," it sets the probability of special light emission to a high probability (for example, 70%) in step S8202.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8201 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" (if it determines that it is a "low probability result"), then in step S8203 it sets the probability of special light emission to a low probability (e.g., 30%).
Here, when the special light emission is generated, the plurality of light points GP become red points instead of the white points of normal light emission.

After executing the processing of step S8202 or step S8203, in step S8204, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for special light emission based on the probability set in the processing of step S8202 or step S8203.

After executing the lottery process for special light emission in step S8204, the MPU 52 determines in step S8205 whether or not the lottery for special light emission has been won.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8205 that the special light emission lottery has not been won, it executes a process of determining normal light emission in step S8206.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8205 that the special light emission lottery has been won, it executes a process of determining the special light emission in step S8207.

After executing the processing of step S8206 or step S8207, the MPU 52 executes processing to determine other upper role effects in step S8208. Specifically, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of an upper role effect to notify the player that the result of the win/loss test is a "jackpot win" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7W.

After executing the upper reel performance determination process in step S8002W, the MPU 52 sets an upper reel performance command in step S8003W, as shown in FIG. 122. The MPU 52 then stores the upper reel performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This upper reel performance command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

Based on the upper-side reel effect command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 of display control device 6 reads from program ROM 63 a data table for executing the upper-side reel effect on symbol display device 36. Then, MPU 62 outputs a command to VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). Based on the content of the command generated by MPU 62, VDP 65 reads image data from character ROM 66 and stores this image data in expansion buffer 68. Furthermore, VDP 65 creates drawing data in frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in expansion buffer 68. As a result, symbol display device 36 displays the upper-side reel effect on display screen G and notifies the player that the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win." Here, after stopping the display of the changing symbols on symbol display device 36, MPU 62 executes the upper-side reel effect before receiving the change end command.

Figure 124 shows the state in which the upper role performance is being performed.
The player can guide the game ball to each operating port 25, 26 by rotating the launch handle 16 to a medium degree and shifting the game ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center. Specifically, when the game ball's arrival position is shifted to the center, the game ball passes between the multiple nails NL and reaches the windmill WM. The game ball then wins a prize in each operating port 25, 26 based on the rotation state of the windmill WM and the movement of the game ball. If a "jackpot win" is determined in the lottery based on the winning or losing of each operating port 25, 26, the MPU 62 stops the display of the changing symbols and then displays a reduced version of the symbol in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. 124 .
In the example of FIG. 124, the MPU 62 displays the symbol "666" at the bottom right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 execute the upper role performance before receiving the variation end command.
Specifically, the MPU 52 controls the column driver 733 to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). The MPU 52 also controls the upper long plate driver 752 to lower each petal 71 and petal support 72 vertically downward (see the downward arrow in the figure). After lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 to its lowest position, the MPU 52 controls the torus driver 744 to expand each petal 71 around the petal support 72 (see the outward radial arrow in the figure).

When the MPU 52 executes the normal light emission determination process of step S8206, the MPU 62 displays a plurality of light spots GP at display positions on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 that correspond to the trajectory of the lenses 714, 716 of the petal 71 that is being rotated around the axis of the petal supporter 72 by the columnar drive unit 733. In other words, the MPU 62 displays a plurality of light spots GP so as to draw a circular trajectory on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Here, the plurality of light spots GP are white spots (normal light emission) displayed on a black background and are arranged at equal intervals from one another.
Therefore, the light spot GP magnified by the lenses 714, 716 appears to move counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the game board 2V.

The lenses 714 and 716 have different light transmittances. Specifically, the light transmittance of the lens 714 is higher than the light transmittance of the lens 716.
Therefore, the light spot GP enlarged by the lens 716 is less visible than the light spot GP enlarged by the lens 714.

Figure 125 shows the state in which the upper role performance is being performed using special lighting.
The player can guide the game ball to each operating port 25, 26 by rotating the launch handle 16 to a medium degree and shifting the game ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center. Specifically, when the game ball's arrival position is shifted to the center, the game ball passes between the multiple nails NL and reaches the windmill WM. The game ball then enters each operating port 25, 26 based on the rotation state of the windmill WM and the movement of the game ball. If a "jackpot win" is determined in the lottery based on the winning or losing of each operating port 25, 26, the MPU 62 stops the display of the changing symbols and then displays a reduced version of the symbol in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. 125.
In the example of FIG. 125, the MPU 62 displays the symbol "666" at the bottom right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 execute the upper role performance before receiving the variation end command.
Specifically, the MPU 52 controls the column driver 733 to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). The MPU 52 also controls the upper long plate driver 752 to lower each petal 71 and petal support 72 vertically downward (see the downward arrow in the figure). After lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 to its lowest position, the MPU 52 controls the torus driver 744 to expand each petal 71 around the petal support 72 (see the outward radial arrow in the figure).

When the MPU 62 executes the special light emission determination process of step S8207, it displays multiple light spots GP at display positions on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 that correspond to the trajectory of the lenses 714, 716 of the petals 71 that are being rotated around the axis of the petal support 72 by the columnar drive unit 733. In other words, the MPU 62 displays multiple light spots GP so as to draw a circular trajectory on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Here, the multiple light spots GP are red spots (special light emission) displayed on a black background and are arranged at equal intervals from one another. In other words, the multiple light spots GP are not white spots of normal light emission but red spots of special light emission.
Therefore, the light spot GP magnified by the lenses 714, 716 appears to move counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the game board 2V.

The lenses 714 and 716 have different light transmittances. Specifically, the light transmittance of the lens 714 is higher than the light transmittance of the lens 716.
Therefore, the light spot GP enlarged by the lens 716 is less visible than the light spot GP enlarged by the lens 714.

After executing the processing of step S8003W, the MPU 52 executes the processing for determining the lower role effect in step S8004W, as shown in FIG. 122. In this processing for determining the lower role effect, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of a lower role effect to notify the player of whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7W and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8W.

In the performance execution process of step S2004V, the MPU 52 executes the lower role performance based on the content of the determination process of the lower role performance of step S8004W. Here, after executing the upper role performance, the MPU 52 executes the lower role performance before receiving the variation end command.
Specifically, in the lower role performance, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125. The MPU 52 causes the column drive unit 733 to execute drive control to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72. Here, the MPU 52 executes the lower role performance while maintaining the state after the upper role performance is executed (a state in which each petal 71 is expanded around the petal support 72 after each petal 71 and petal support 72 has been lowered to its lowest position).

The MPU 52 also controls the lower right plate driver 813 to rotate the lower right plate 811 around its central axis, and the lower right long plate driver 814 to raise and lower the lower right long plate 812W in the vertical direction. The MPU 52 also controls the upper long plate driver 818 to rotate the upper long plate 812W1 around the motor output shaft relative to the lower long plate 812W2. The MPU 52 also controls the lower left plate driver 823 to rotate the lower left plate 821 around its central axis, and the lower left long plate driver 824 to raise and lower the lower left long plate 822W in the vertical direction. The MPU 52 also controls the upper long plate driver 828 to rotate the upper long plate 822W1 around the motor output shaft relative to the lower long plate 822W2.

Figure 126 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining the lower role performance.
The MPU 52 executes a process for determining the lower role presentation in order to notify the player whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result." In this process for determining the lower role presentation, the MPU 52 executes steps S8101 to S8113 as shown in FIG. 126. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the reference embodiment V in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S8106, then executes the process of step S8108 and subsequent steps, and executes the process of step S8107, then executes the process of step S8109 and subsequent steps.

In step S8101, the MPU 52 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result," it executes a process of determining a BIG character in step S8102. In the process of determining a BIG character, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower role presentation will be "BIG" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7W and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8W in order to notify the player that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result."
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" (if the allocation result is determined to be a "low probability result"), it executes a process of determining a small character in step S8103. In the process of determining a small character, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower role presentation will be "small" by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7W and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8W in order to notify the player that the allocation result is a "low probability result".

After executing the processing of step S8102 or step S8103, the MPU 52 acquires the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area in step S8104. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot, which is included in the sub-side reserved information.

In step S8105, the MPU 52 determines whether the winning/losing result obtained in step S8104, i.e., the winning/losing result contained in the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area, is a "jackpot win."
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8105 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes a process for determining rainbow-colored characters in step S8106. In the process for determining rainbow-colored characters, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower-side role presentation will be displayed as rainbow-colored characters by having the upper-side rotary role drive unit execute drive control for the upper-side rotary role 7W and the lower-side rotary role drive unit execute drive control for the lower-side rotary role 8W, in order to notify the player that a jackpot has occurred in the reserved area. Thereafter, in step S8108, the MPU 52 sets the probability of a special path occurring to a high probability (e.g., 70%).
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8105 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes a process for determining black characters in step S8107. In the process for determining black characters, the MPU 52 determines that the result of the lower role presentation will be displayed in black characters by having the upper rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the upper rotary role 7W and the lower rotary role drive unit execute drive control of the lower rotary role 8W in order to notify the player that a jackpot will not occur in the reserved area. Thereafter, in step S8109, the MPU 52 sets the probability of occurrence of a special path to a low probability (e.g., 30%).
Here, when a special path is generated, the movement path of the center of the lower right plate 811 and the center of the lower left plate 821 is not a monotonically ascending path like the normal path, but a path that describes an arc.

After executing the processing of step S8108 or step S8109, in step S8110, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for a special route based on the probability set in the processing of step S8108 or step S8109.

After executing the lottery process for the special route in step S8110, the MPU 52 determines in step S8111 whether or not the lottery for the special light emission has been won.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S8111 that the special route lottery has not been won, it executes a process of determining a normal route in step S8112.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S8111 that the special route lottery has been won, it executes a process of determining the special route in step S8113.
After executing the processing of step S8112 or the processing of step S8113, the MPU 52 ends the process of determining the lower role performance.

After executing the process for determining the lower reel effect in step S8004W, the MPU 52 sets a lower reel effect command in step S8005W, as shown in FIG. 122. The MPU 52 then stores the lower reel effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This lower reel effect command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

Based on the lower-side reel effect command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the lower-side reel effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to display the lower-side reel effect on the display screen G and notify the player whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result." Here, after executing the upper-side reel effect, the MPU 62 executes the lower-side reel effect before receiving the variation end command.

Figure 127 is a front view showing the state in which the lower role performance is being performed.
After executing the upper role performance, the MPU 52 and the MPU 62 execute the lower role performance before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 127, the MPU 52 maintains the state after the upper role performance is executed (after lowering each petal 71 and petal support 72 to the lowest position, each petal 71 is expanded around the petal support 72), and continues to cause the cylindrical drive unit 733 to perform drive control to rotate each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72 (see counterclockwise arrow in the figure).

The MPU 52 also controls the lower-right plate driver 813 to rotate the lower-right plate 811 about its central axis (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure), and the lower-right long plate driver 814 to lift the lower-right long plate 812W vertically upward (see the upward arrow in the figure). The MPU 52 also controls the lower-left plate driver 823 to rotate the lower-left plate 821 about its central axis (see the clockwise arrow in the figure), and the lower-left long plate driver 824 to lift the lower-left long plate 822W vertically upward (see the upward arrow in the figure).
Here, each petal 71, the lower right plate 811, and the lower left plate 821 are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other so that the upper rotating device 7W and the lower rotating device 8W do not come into contact with each other when the lower device performance is performed.
In this embodiment, the lower right plate 811 and the arc-shaped convex portion 715 come into contact when the result of the lower role effect is notified to the player, and the lower left plate 821 and the arc-shaped convex portion 717 come into contact when the result of the lower role effect is notified to the player. This will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 62 displays an angel character GB4 in the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and the character says, "BIG or small/Rainbow is a great chance!" to inform the player whether the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result," and to inform the player that a jackpot has occurred in the reserved area.

Figure 128 shows the state in which the rotation of the upper rotating device has been stopped.
After starting the lower role performance, the MPU 52 stops the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, as shown in Figure 128, thereby stopping the petal 71 with lens 714 at a predetermined position (the lower right position of the petal support 72), and causes the cylindrical drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 with lens 716 at a predetermined position (the lower left position of the petal support 72).

Figure 129 shows the state in which the word "BIG" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, the MPU 52 and MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the process for determining BIG characters is executed in step S8102 and the process for determining black characters is executed in step S8107, the MPU 52 causes the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and the lifting of the lower right long plate 812W, as shown in Fig. 129, thereby stopping the lower right plate 811 at a position where the panel 815 displaying the characters "BIG" in black characters can be seen through the lens 714. Here, the lower right plate 811 and the arc-shaped convex portion 715 come into contact with each other.

The MPU 52 also stops the rotation of the lower left plate 821 and stops the lifting of the lower left long plate 822W, causing the lower left plate drive unit 823 and the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to stop the lower left plate 821 in a position where the panels 825 and 826 displaying the word "small" cannot be seen through the lens 716.

Figure 130 shows the state in which the word "small" in black letters is notified to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, the MPU 52 and MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the process for determining the small character is executed in step S8103 and the process for determining the black character is executed in step S8107, the MPU 52 causes the lower-left plate driver 823 and the lower-left long plate driver 824 to execute drive control to stop the rotation of the lower-left plate 821 and the lifting of the lower-left long plate 822W, as shown in Fig. 130, thereby stopping the lower-left plate 821 at a position where the panel 825 displaying the character "small" in black characters can be seen through the lens 716. Here, the lower-left plate 821 and the arc-shaped convex portion 717 come into contact with each other.

The MPU 52 also stops the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and stops the lifting of the lower right long plate 812W, causing the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811 in a position where the panels 815 and 816 displaying the word "BIG" cannot be seen through the lens 714.

Figure 131 shows the state in which the rainbow-colored letters "BIG" are announced to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, the MPU 52 and MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the process for determining BIG characters is executed in step S8102 and the process for determining rainbow characters is executed in step S8106, MPU 52 causes lower right plate drive unit 813 and lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the rotation of lower right plate 811 and stop the lifting of lower right long plate 812W, as shown in Fig. 131, thereby stopping lower right plate 811 at a position where panel 816 displaying the characters "BIG" in rainbow colored characters can be seen through lens 714. Here, lower right plate 811 and arc-shaped convex portion 715 come into contact with each other.

The MPU 52 also stops the rotation of the lower left plate 821 and stops the lifting of the lower left long plate 822W, causing the lower left plate drive unit 823 and the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to stop the lower left plate 821 in a position where the panels 825 and 826 displaying the word "small" cannot be seen through the lens 716.

Figure 132 shows the state in which the rainbow-colored letters "small" are notified to the player as a result of the lower role presentation.
After stopping the rotation of each petal 71 and petal support 72, the MPU 52 and MPU 62 notify the player of the result of the lower role presentation before receiving a variation end command.
Specifically, when the process for determining the small character is executed in step S8103 and the process for determining the rainbow colored character is executed in step S8106, MPU 52 causes lower-left plate drive unit 823 and lower-left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to stop the rotation of lower-left plate 821 and stop the lifting of lower-left long plate 822W, as shown in Fig. 132, thereby stopping lower-left plate 821 at a position where panel 826 displaying the character "small" in rainbow colored characters can be seen through lens 716. Here, lower-left plate 821 and arc-shaped convex portion 717 come into contact with each other.

The MPU 52 also stops the rotation of the lower right plate 811 and stops the lifting of the lower right long plate 812W, causing the lower right plate drive unit 813 and the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811 in a position where the panels 815 and 816 displaying the word "BIG" cannot be seen through the lens 714.

Figure 133 is a diagram showing a state in which a lower role performance is being performed on a special path. Figure 134 is a diagram showing a state in which a lower role performance is being further performed on a special path.
When the MPU 52 executes the special path determination process of step S8113, it causes the lower right plate drive unit 813 to execute drive control to rotate the lower right plate 811 around the central axis (see counterclockwise arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 133, and causes the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to raise the lower right long plate 812W vertically upward (see upward arrow in the figure).

The MPU 52 also controls the upper elongated plate driver 818 to execute drive control to rotate the upper elongated plate 812W1 around the output shaft of the motor relative to the lower elongated plate 812W2, thereby tilting the center of the lower right plate 811 to the right (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Thereafter, the MPU 52 controls the upper elongated plate driver 818 to execute drive control to rotate the upper elongated plate 812W1 around the output shaft of the motor relative to the lower elongated plate 812W2, as shown in FIG. 134, thereby tilting the center of the lower right plate 811 to the left (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure).
Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the special path determination process of step S8113, it causes the upper long plate drive unit 818 to execute drive control to rotate the upper long plate 812W1 around the motor output shaft relative to the lower long plate 812W2, thereby making the movement path of the center of the lower right plate 811 a special path that describes a clockwise arc (see arrow CR in the figure) rather than the normal path that monotonically ascends.

When the MPU 52 executes the special path determination process of step S8113, it causes the lower left plate drive unit 823 to execute drive control to rotate the lower left plate 821 around the central axis (see the clockwise arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 133, and causes the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to raise the lower left long plate 822W vertically upward (see the upward arrow in the figure).

The MPU 52 also controls the upper long plate driver 828 to execute drive control to rotate the upper long plate 822W1 around the output shaft of the motor relative to the lower long plate 822W2, thereby tilting the center of the lower-left plate 821 to the left (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). Thereafter, the MPU 52 controls the upper long plate driver 828 to execute drive control to rotate the upper long plate 822W1 around the output shaft of the motor relative to the lower long plate 822W2, as shown in FIG. 134, thereby tilting the center of the lower-left plate 821 to the right (see the clockwise arrow in the figure).
Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the special path determination process of step S8113, it causes the upper long plate drive unit 828 to execute drive control to rotate the upper long plate 822W1 around the motor output shaft relative to the lower long plate 822W2, thereby making the movement path of the center of the lower left plate 821 a special path that traces a counterclockwise arc (see arrow CL in the figure) rather than the normal path that monotonically ascends.

When the lower role performance is to end, the MPU 52 causes the torus drive unit 744 to execute drive control to shrink each petal 71 around the petal support 72, and causes the cylinder drive unit 733 to execute drive control to stop the petal 71 with the lens 714 at a predetermined position (the upper left position of the petal support 72) and the petal 71 with the lens 716 at a predetermined position (the upper right position of the petal support 72) by rotating each petal 71 and petal support 72 around the axis of the petal support 72. The MPU 52 then causes the upper long plate drive unit 752 to execute drive control to raise each petal 71 and petal support 72 vertically upward.

When the lower role performance is to be ended, the MPU 52 causes the lower right plate drive unit 813 to execute drive control to stop the lower right plate 811 at a predetermined position (a position where panel 815 is on the upper side and panel 816 is on the lower side) by rotating the lower right plate 811. Thereafter, the MPU 52 causes the lower right long plate drive unit 814 to execute drive control to lower the lower right plate 811 vertically downward.
Furthermore, when the lower role performance is to be ended, the MPU 52 causes the lower left plate drive unit 823 to execute drive control to stop the lower left plate 821 at a predetermined position (a position where panel 825 is on the upper side and panel 826 is on the lower side) by rotating the lower left plate 821. Thereafter, the MPU 52 causes the lower left long plate drive unit 824 to execute drive control to lower the lower left plate 821 vertically downward.

After executing the processing of step S8005W, or if it is determined in step S8001 that the result is not a "jackpot win," the MPU 52 executes processing to determine other presentation patterns in step S8006, as shown in FIG. 122. In the processing to determine other presentation patterns, the MPU 52 determines whether to generate presentations other than the upper and lower role presentations, and executes a lottery to determine whether to generate a preview display. The MPU 52 then terminates the processing to determine the presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the rotating plate portion includes a lens 716 (first region) having a first light transmittance, and a lens 714 (second region) having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region.

According to this configuration, the rotating plate portion has a first region having a first light transmittance and a second region having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region, so that the appearance of the light from the light-emitting body (light-emitting means) at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the rotating body (second rotating means) in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the rotating body (first rotating means) whose back side is visible has areas with different light transmittance, the appearance of light on the back side of the rotating body (first rotating means) can be made more diverse, and even when used alone, the rotating body (first rotating means) whose back side is visible can provide high decorativeness that is no different from conventional rotating bodies used for performances.

In this embodiment, the second state can generate an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state, based on the rotational state and movement state of the rotating body. Specifically, the second state is more likely to generate an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the movement state of the rotating body is a special path, and is more likely to generate an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state when the movement state of the rotating body is a normal path.
In addition, the movement state of the rotating body may be any state that can generate advantageous and disadvantageous states, and may be not only a movement from a first position to a second position, but also a movement from a second position to the first position.

With this configuration, the second state can generate advantageous states that are favorable to the player and unfavorable states that are more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous states, based on the rotation status of the rotating body (first rotating means) and the movement status of the rotating body (second rotating means). Therefore, the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the rotation status of the rotating body (first rotating means) and the movement status of the rotating body (second rotating means).

Here, the second state may be capable of generating advantageous and disadvantageous states based not only on the movement status of the rotating body, but also on the rotation status of the rotating body, or may be capable of generating advantageous and disadvantageous states based on a combination of the movement status of the rotating body and the rotation status of the rotating body.

For example, the rotating body may have a first rotation state in which the rotating plate portion rotates in a predetermined rotation direction, and a second rotation state in which the rotating plate portion rotates in a direction opposite to the predetermined rotation direction, and the second state may be more likely to generate an advantageous state based on the first rotation state and movement of the rotating body to the second position, and more likely to generate an unfavorable state based on the second rotation state and movement of the rotating body to the second position.
With this configuration, the second state is more likely to produce an advantageous state based on the first rotation state and the movement of the rotating body (second rotation means) to the second position, and is more likely to produce an unfavorable state based on the second rotation state and the movement of the rotating body (second rotation means) to the second position, so the player will pay attention to the rotation direction of the rotating body (first rotation means).

In this embodiment, the rotating body has a plurality of moving paths, and the probability of generating an advantageous state advantageous to the player in the second state can vary depending on the moving path of the rotating body. Specifically, in the second state, the probability of generating an advantageous state advantageous to the player is high when the moving state of the rotating body is a special path, and is low when the moving state of the rotating body is a normal path.
The rotating body may have three or more moving paths. The moving path of the rotating body may be any path as long as it can vary the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and may be not only a path from a first position to a second position, but also a path from a second position to the first position.

With this configuration, the probability that the second state will result in an advantageous state that is favorable to the player can vary depending on the movement path of the rotating body (second rotation means), so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the movement path of the rotating body (second rotation means).
Furthermore, since the back side of the rotating body (first rotating means) is visible, the player can see the multiple movement paths of the rotating body (second rotating means), and if each movement path is given meaning, the attention to the game can be further increased.

In this embodiment, the rotating body has a special path (first moving path) that has a high probability of generating an advantageous state and a normal path (second moving path) that has a lower probability of generating an advantageous state than the first moving path, and the first moving path and the second moving path include paths that overlap with each other. Specifically, the special path and the normal path include starting points and ending points that overlap with each other.
The first movement path and the second movement path may include not only a start point and an end point, but also other paths that overlap with each other, or may not include paths that overlap with each other.

With this configuration, the first movement path and the second movement path include paths that overlap with each other, making it difficult for the player to distinguish the movement path of the rotating body (second rotation means), and instead the player will focus on the movement path of the rotating body (second rotation means).

In this embodiment, the rotating body has arc-shaped convex portions 715, 717 (restricting portions) that restrict the rotation of the rotating body by coming into contact with the rotating body.
The restricting portion may have any shape as long as it can come into contact with the rotating body. The restricting portion does not have to be able to restrict the rotation of the rotating body until it completely stops, and may be pushed and moved by the rotating body when it comes into contact with the rotating body.

With this configuration, the rotating body (first rotating means) is equipped with a restricting portion that restricts the rotation of the rotating body (second rotating means) by abutting against the rotating body (second rotating means). Therefore, by restricting the rotation of the rotating body (second rotating means) with the restricting portion of the rotating body (first rotating means), the rotation of the rotating body (second rotating means) can be changed, and the behavior of the rotating body (second rotating means) at a predetermined position can be stabilized.

In this embodiment, the rotational state of the rotor does not change when the rotor abuts against the restricting portion. Alternatively, the rotational state of the rotor may change when the rotor abuts against the restricting portion.
In addition, the rotational state of the rotating body may be changed by being pushed and moved by the rotating body via the regulating part when the rotating body abuts against the regulating part, or it may be changed by other power.

With this configuration, the rotational state of the rotating body (first rotation means) changes when the rotating body (second rotation means) abuts against the regulating portion, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the rotational state of the rotating body (first rotation means).

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating body is fixed. However, the rotating body may have a plurality of rotation directions, and the probability of the second state being advantageous to the player may vary depending on the rotation direction of the rotating body.
The rotating body may have three or more rotation directions. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be any direction as long as it can vary the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

With this configuration, the probability that the second state will become advantageous to the player can vary depending on the direction of rotation of the rotating body (second rotation means), so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the direction of rotation of the rotating body (second rotation means).

Furthermore, if the second state is configured so that the probability of generating an advantageous state that is favorable to the player can differ depending on the direction of rotation of the rotating body, the rotation state of the rotating body may change, such as by rotating in the opposite direction when the rotating body comes into contact with a regulating portion that regulates the rotation of the rotating body.
The rotational state of the rotating body may be changed by being pushed and moved by the regulating part when the rotating body comes into contact with the regulating part, or may be changed by other power.

With this configuration, the rotational state of the rotating body (second rotation means) changes when the rotating body (second rotation means) comes into contact with the regulating portion that regulates the rotation of the rotating body (second rotation means), allowing the gaming machine to diversify the rotational state of the rotating body (second rotation means).

In this embodiment, the first state is configured to notify the player of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state, based on the light emission state of the light-emitting element. Specifically, the first state is more likely to notify the player of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the light emission state of the light-emitting element is special light emission, and is more likely to notify the player of an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state when the light emission state of the light-emitting element is normal light emission.
The light emitting state of the light emitting element may be any state as long as it can notify advantageous and disadvantageous states, and may be the color of light, blinking, or the speed at which these are switched, etc.

With this configuration, the first state can notify the player of an advantageous state that is favorable to the player and an unfavorable state that is more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous state, based on the light-emitting status of the light-emitting body (light-emitting means), so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the light-emitting status of the light-emitting body (light-emitting means).

In this reference form, the light-emitting element has a special light emission (first light-emitting state) that indicates to the player an advantageous state that is favorable to the player, and a normal light emission (second light-emitting state) that indicates to the player an unfavorable state that is more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous state, and the gaming machine switches between generating the first light-emitting state and the second light-emitting state.
With this configuration, the gaming machine alternates between a first light-emitting state that indicates to the player an advantageous state and a second light-emitting state that indicates to the player an unfavorable state, so that the player can easily distinguish between an advantageous state and an unfavorable state.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine switches between the first light emitting state and the second light emitting state based on the determination result of the special information determination means.
According to this configuration, the gaming machine switches between the first light-emitting state and the second light-emitting state based on the determination result of the special information determination means, so that the player can guess the determination result of the special information determination means based on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting body (light-emitting means). Therefore, the gaming machine can further draw the player's attention to the light-emitting state of the light-emitting body (light-emitting means).

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those (1), (5) to (7) in the embodiment V, the following effects can be achieved.
(1) The petals 71 are provided with lenses 716 having a first light transmittance and lenses 714 having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region, so that the appearance of the light of the pattern display device 36 at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the lower rotating device 8 in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the upper rotating device 7W, whose back side is visible, is provided with regions having different light transmittances, the appearance of the light on the back side of the upper rotating device 7W can be diversified, and the upper rotating device 7W, whose back side is visible, can provide high decorativeness equivalent to that of a conventional rotating device for performance, even when used alone.

(2) The second state can generate an advantageous state that is favorable to the player and an unfavorable state that is more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous state based on the rotation status of the upper rotating device 7W and the movement status of the lower rotating device 8W, so the pachinko machine 1 can draw the player's attention to the rotation status of the upper rotating device 7W and the movement status of the lower rotating device 8W.
(3) The second state is more likely to produce an advantageous state based on the first rotation state and the movement of the lower rotating device 8W to the second position, and is more likely to produce an unfavorable state based on the second rotation state and the movement of the lower rotating device 8W to the second position, so the player will pay attention to the rotation direction of the upper rotating device 7W.

(4) In the second state, the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may differ depending on the movement path of the lower rotating device 8W, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the movement path of the lower rotating device 8W. Furthermore, since the back side of the upper rotating device 7W is visible, the player can see the multiple movement paths of the lower rotating device 8W, and if each movement path is given meaning, the attention to the game can be further increased.
(5) Since the special path and the normal path include paths that overlap with each other, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish the path of movement of the lower rotating device 8W, and the player will focus on the path of movement of the lower rotating device 8W.

(6) The upper rotating device 7W is equipped with arc-shaped convex portions 715, 717 that restrict the rotation of the lower rotating device 8W by abutting against the lower rotating device 8W. Therefore, by restricting the rotation of the lower rotating device 8W with the arc-shaped convex portions 715, 717 on the upper rotating device 7W, the rotation of the lower rotating device 8W can be changed, and the behavior of the lower rotating device 8W at a specified position can be stabilized.

(7) The first state can notify the player of an advantageous state that is favorable to the player and an unfavorable state that is more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous state based on the light-emitting status of the pattern display device 36, so the pachinko machine 1 can draw the player's attention to the light-emitting status of the pattern display device 36.
(8) The pachinko machine 1 alternates between special lighting that indicates to the player an advantageous state and normal lighting that indicates to the player an unfavorable state, so that the player can easily distinguish between advantageous and unfavorable states.
(9) The pachinko machine 1 alternates between special light emission and normal light emission based on the determination result of the fluctuation start process in step S505, so the player can guess the determination result of the fluctuation start process in step S505 based on the light emission status of the symbol display device 36. Therefore, the gaming machine can draw the player's attention further to the light emission status of the symbol display device 36.

[Reference form X]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment X of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described and parts that have the same function but are different in shape or arrangement will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), a predetermined lottery such as a jackpot lottery is executed and a variable display of pictures is initiated. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static manner and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls by, for example, transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such a gaming machine is configured to transition between a plurality of gaming states in addition to the special gaming state described above, based on predetermined conditions.

However, if the transition between multiple game states cannot be properly performed, the gaming machine will be unable to increase the player's interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, which comprises:
a launching means that can adjust the launching force for launching game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and that can execute a first game in which the game balls are launched in a first direction, and a second game in which the game balls are launched in a second direction different from the first direction;
A variable display means for executing variable display of a pattern;
A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game and that can generate a starting condition for the variable display based on the entering ball;
An auxiliary means for assisting in the establishment of the start conditions for the variable display;
A special game execution means for executing a special game state as a profit game based on the result of the variable display;
A gaming machine capable of switching a control state for the auxiliary means to execute a specific gaming state when the number of times that the predetermined variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without generating the special gaming state,
A first ball entry means is provided in the game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path;
an open/close switching means that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a second ball entry means having a specific ball entry area;
An opening execution means for causing the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period of time based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
and a specific game execution means for executing a specific period game for a specific period different from the special game state as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for the predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the execution of the specified specific period of gaming is completed, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

This type of gaming machine allows players to move between multiple game states in an optimal manner, enhancing their interest.

Specifically, conventional gaming machines, for example, can switch the control state of the electric device to enter a "ceiling time reduction" gaming state when a predetermined number of variable display plays reach a predetermined number without triggering a special gaming state. This "ceiling time reduction" gaming state is a gaming state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and when the number of plays of the ceiling time reduction is exhausted without triggering a special gaming state, the control state of the electric device is switched to enter a "normal" gaming state. This "normal" gaming state is a gaming state of low probability mode and low frequency support mode. Note that in this reference form, the "normal" gaming state that is entered when the number of plays of the ceiling time reduction is exhausted without triggering a special gaming state is also referred to as the "ceiling time reduction skip" gaming state.

However, because this "normal" gaming state can transition to other gaming states via a special gaming state, the control state of the electric device cannot be changed to the high-frequency support mode without triggering a special gaming state, which creates the problem that the gaming machine cannot increase the player's interest.

In contrast, with the gaming machine of the present invention, a player can cause the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period by having a gaming ball enter the first ball entry means, and can cause the gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a specific period of play by having a gaming ball enter the specific ball entry area. When the execution of the specific period of play ends in a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the gaming machine changes the control state from the first control state to the second control state that corresponds to the specific game state without passing through a special game state. Therefore, this gaming machine can increase the player's interest by optimally transitioning between multiple game states.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the various configurations may be embodied in any manner and are not limited to the respective reference embodiments.
For example, the auxiliary means may be any means that assists in the establishment of the conditions for starting the variable display, and may be any means that can realize the purpose of the present invention. For example, the auxiliary means may be an electric device having a guide piece, an electric device having a bridge that is provided so as to be able to protrude and retract from the game board, or an electric device support process for executing drive control of these electric devices.

The special game execution means may be any means that executes a special game state as a profitable game based on the results of the variable display, as long as it is capable of realizing the purpose of the present invention. Here, the profit game in the special game state may be any game that can award a profit to the player. For example, it may be a game in which a variable winning device is shifted to a state where a game ball can enter, thereby paying out a large number of game balls and awarding a profit to the player; a game in which an electric device is shifted to a state where a game ball can enter, thereby paying out a small number of game balls and awarding a profit to the player; a game in which a profit is awarded to the player by executing a variable display means to display a changing pattern; a game in which a profit is awarded to the player depending on which of the multiple winning holes formed in the crane the game ball enters; a game in which a profit is awarded to the player by executing light emission control of a lamp or the like, audio control of a speaker or the like, or display control of a liquid crystal display or the like; a game in which a profit is awarded to the player by accepting operation input from a push button; or a game in which a profit is awarded to the player by displaying an explanation of the game machine while a demo display is being executed.

A gaming machine may be any type capable of switching the control state of the auxiliary means to execute a specific gaming state when a predetermined number of variable display executions has been reached without triggering a special gaming state, as long as it can achieve the intent of the present invention. Here, the specific gaming state may be one of multiple gaming states implemented in the gaming machine, and may be a "ceiling time-saving" or "time-saving" gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a "probability change" gaming state, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a "latent probability" gaming state, which is a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, or a "normal" gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode. The gaming machine is designed to allow the player to recognize various gaming states by, for example, varying display control of the LCD display (e.g., the content of the variable display, the content of the presentation, and the background color), lighting control of lamps, etc., and audio control of speakers, etc., for each gaming state.

The first ball entry means may be provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path, and may be of any type as long as it can achieve the intent of the present invention. Here, the first ball entry means may be capable of allowing the game ball to pass through a predetermined opening, and includes not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area after passing through the opening without being discharged. The first ball entry means may or may not execute the payout of prize balls based on the game ball's entry, and may be capable of generating the conditions for starting a variable display.

The second ball entry means may have any configuration that can achieve the spirit of the present invention, as long as it has an open/close switching means that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area. Here, the open/close switching means may have any configuration that can be switched between an open state and a closed state. For example, it may be an open/close door attached to the gaming board to close the opening, a bridge that can be freely protruded and retracted relative to the gaming board to close the opening, or a guide piece attached to the gaming board to close the opening. Furthermore, the specific ball entry area may be a predetermined ball entry area through which a gaming ball can pass, and includes not only situations in which a gaming ball is ejected from the gaming area after passing through the ball entry area, but also situations in which a gaming ball continues to flow down the gaming area without being ejected after passing through the ball entry area. The specific ball entry area may or may not pay out prize balls based on the entry of a gaming ball, and may be capable of generating conditions to trigger a variable display.

The opening execution means may be any means that causes the open/close switching means to open for a predetermined period based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, as long as it is capable of achieving the spirit of the present invention. Here, the opening execution means may immediately cause the open/close switching means to open for a predetermined period based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, or may hold a lottery based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means and cause the open/close switching means to open for a predetermined period based on the results of this lottery. Furthermore, when holding a lottery based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, the opening execution means may include means for withholding the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means.

The specific game execution means may be any means that executes a specific period game for a specific period, different from the special game state, as a profit game based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for a predetermined period, and may be any means that can achieve the intent of the present invention. Here, the specific game execution means may immediately execute a specific period game for a specific period based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, or may execute a lottery based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area and execute a specific period game for a specific period based on the result of this lottery. Furthermore, when executing a lottery based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, the specific game execution means may be equipped with a means for withholding the game ball from entering the specific ball entry area.

Here, the profit game for a specific period of play may be any game that can provide a profit to the player. For example, it may be a game in which a large number of game balls are paid out by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter, thereby providing a profit to the player; a game in which a small number of game balls are paid out by shifting an electric device to a state where game balls can enter, thereby providing a profit to the player; or a game in which a variable display means displays a variable pattern, thereby providing a profit to the player. It may be a game in which a player is awarded a profit depending on which of the multiple winning slots formed in the crane the gaming ball lands in, a game in which a player is awarded a profit by executing light control of a lamp or the like, audio control of a speaker or display control of an LCD display or the like, a game in which a player is awarded a profit by accepting push button operation input, or a game in which a player is awarded a profit by displaying an explanation of the gaming machine while a demo display is being executed. Note that the profit game in the specific period game may be the same type of profit game as the profit game in the special game state, or it may be a different profit game.

The gaming machine may be configured to change the control state from the first control state to a second control state corresponding to a specific gaming state when play ends for a specific period in a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state not corresponding to a specific gaming state. Any control state may be used as long as it achieves the spirit of the present invention. Here, the predetermined gaming state may be one of multiple gaming states implemented in the gaming machine, such as a "ceiling time-saving" or "time-saving" gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a "probability change" gaming state, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a "potential change" gaming state, which is a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, or a "normal" gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode. The first control state may be a control state of the auxiliary means that does not correspond to a specific gaming state, and the second control state may be a control state of the auxiliary means that corresponds to a specific gaming state. Any control state may be used as long as it achieves the spirit of the present invention. Specifically, each control state may be either a control state that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the variable display, or a control state that does not assist in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the variable display.

An example for realizing the above-described invention will be described below based on a specific configuration.
In addition, this gaming machine is equipped with a post-consumption gaming state as a specific gaming state in the present invention, a specific route ball entry port as a first ball entry means, an opening/closing ball entry section as a second ball entry means, a specific opening/closing section as an opening/closing switching means, a specific ball entry section as a specific ball entry area, a specific opening execution section as an opening execution means, a specific ball entry game as a specific period game, a specific ball entry game execution section as a specific game execution means, and a non-compatible gaming state as a predetermined gaming state.

In this reference embodiment, which is an example of the present invention, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a game board 2X that is different from the game board 2 in the main reference embodiment. The game board in this reference embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 135 is a front view of a game board according to reference form X of the present invention.
As shown in Figure 135, the game board 2X has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned game area is formed on the game board 2X so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. Almost the entire game area can be seen from the front through the window portion 122 (see Figure 1).
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 23 guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 when the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the top of the game area.
Here, the launch handle 16 can adjust the launch force with which the game ball is launched toward the game area formed in front of the game board 2X, making it possible to execute left-hand play, in which the game ball is launched in the left-hand direction, and right-hand play, in which the game ball is launched in the right-hand direction, which is different from the left-hand direction.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit is located on one side of the play area and faces the center of the top of the play area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the play area shifts from the side where the exit of the guide rail 23 is located to the opposite side as the player rotates the launch handle 16 more. In this reference form, the exit of the guide rail 23 is located on the left side of the play area.

The game board 2X has multiple large and small openings in the game area, formed by router processing to penetrate the game balls in the front-to-back direction. The game board 2X also has a general winning opening 24, which is a specific path ball entry opening, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry opening) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry opening) 26, a variable winning device 27, an outlet opening 28, which is a specific path ball entry opening, a special electric operating opening 91, which is a specific path ball entry opening, and a special electric winning device 92, which is an opening/closing ball entry section. The game board 2X also has a through gate 31 located on the right side of the center, a main display device 32 located on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 located in the center, and other components (gimmicks) such as windmills, which are planted in the game area to appropriately disperse or adjust the direction in which the game balls fall.

Each of the various winning openings, including the general winning opening 24, which is a specific route ball entry opening, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, the variable winning device 27, the special electric operating opening 91, which is a specific route ball entry opening, and the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry section, is equipped with detection sensors 301-304, 307-309 (see Figure 136) that detect the entry of game balls, and these detection sensors 301-304, 307-309 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2X. Specifically, general winning opening 24, which is a specific path ball entry opening, is equipped with detection sensor 301, upper operating opening 25 is equipped with detection sensor 302, lower operating opening 26 is equipped with detection sensor 303, variable winning device 27 is equipped with detection sensor 304, special electric operating opening 91, which is a specific path ball entry opening, is equipped with detection sensor 307, and special electric winning device 92, which is an opening/closing ball entry section, is equipped with detection sensors 308 and 309. Pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of detection sensors 301-304 and 307-309. Note that detection sensors 301-304 and 307-309 may be any type capable of individually detecting winning game balls; for example, electromagnetic induction proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning port 24, which is a specific route ball entry port. The pachinko machine 1 pays out 3 prize balls when a ball enters the upper actuation port 25 and when a ball enters the lower actuation port 26. The pachinko machine 1 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable winning device 27. The pachinko machine 1 pays out 1 prize ball when a ball enters the special electric actuation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port. The pachinko machine 1 pays out 1 prize ball when a ball enters the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening/closing ball entry section. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls for each actuation port 25, 26 may be different.
Here, the general winning port 24, which is a specific route ball entry port, is located in a position in the game area where the game ball can flow down and reach when playing right-handed, as it is guided by a guide member such as a nail NL.

Outlet 28, a specific path ball entry port, is located in the play area where game balls can flow down and reach it when playing right-handed games, guided by guide members such as nails NL. This outlet 28, a specific path ball entry port, is located at the bottom of the play area of the play board 2X. Game balls that do not enter the various winning ports are discharged from the play area through outlet 28, a specific path ball entry port. In addition, outlet 28, a specific path ball entry port, is equipped with a detection sensor 305 (see Figure 136) that detects game ball entry, and this detection sensor 305 is located on the back side of the play board 2X. Note that when a ball enters outlet 28, a specific path ball entry port, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning ports.

The through gate 31 is located in the gaming area where gaming balls can flow down and reach it when playing right-hand, guided by guide members such as nails NL. This through gate 31 is equipped with a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 136) that detects the entry of gaming balls, and this detection sensor 306 is located on the back side of the gaming board 2X. Note that when a ball enters the through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish game balls entering through the outlet 28, which is a specific route entry port, game balls entering through various entry ports will also be referred to as "winning." Furthermore, a ball entering through the through gate 31 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. A ball entering through the through gate 31 will also be referred to as "winning," just like a ball entering through various entry ports.

The upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26 are unitized as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 2X. Each actuation port 25, 26 opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. The lower actuation port 26 has an electric device 261 serving as a guide piece (support piece) made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric device 261 is connected to an electric device drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2X. This electric device 261 is driven by the electric device drive unit 262 to be set in either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric device 261 closer together in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is opened by moving the upper ends of the electric device 261 apart in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is narrower than the width of one game ball. Also, when the electric device 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is wider than the width of one game ball. Therefore, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the lower operating port 26.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the electric device 261 may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state), and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26. Furthermore, the lower actuation port 26 may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the lower actuation port 26 rather than by setting the electric device 261. In this configuration, the lower actuation port 26 need not be equipped with the electric device 261.

The pachinko machine 1 has multiple support modes that differ in the frequency with which the electric device 261 is set to the open state, thereby allowing game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 causes the electric device 261 to open for a predetermined period of time based on a game ball entering the through gate 31, which is a specific ball entry route. This pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261, which is a specific opening/closing part, is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the lower actuation port 26, which is a specific ball entry portion. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player can play a left-handed game (first game) in which the ball is rotated to the left in the left-handed direction (first direction) with a moderate rotation amount of the launch handle 16, thereby shifting the ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center, thereby increasing the probability of the ball entering the upper actuation port 25 rather than the lower actuation port 26. In the high-frequency support mode, the player can play a right-handed game (second game) in which the ball is rotated to the right in the right-handed direction (second direction) with a maximum rotation amount of the launch handle 16, thereby shifting the ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the ball entering the lower actuation port 26 rather than the upper actuation port 25. Here, the through gate 31 is provided in a gaming area that can be reached when a gaming ball is shot in the right direction with a predetermined shooting force and flows down a specific path. The lower operating port 26 and the electric device 261 function as an opening and closing ball entrance section.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game without losing too many game balls.

The variable winning device 27 is equipped with a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotation amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27.

Here, the game board 2X is provided with a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. This cover 29 is provided with a transparent panel 291 formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel 292 provided around this transparent panel 291 and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.

The big prize opening 271 is located in an opening formed in the gaming area by router processing, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of gaming balls. Based on the detection results, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2X so as to close the opening of the special prize opening 271. The opening/closing door 272 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2X, thereby closing the opening of the special prize opening 271, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2X and is buried in the game board 2X, thereby opening the opening of the special prize opening 271.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272 to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the internal lottery is won to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a special game state, as a profit game based on the result of the variable display, which is a specific ball entry game executed on the symbol display device 36, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the open/close door 272 is set to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 271. In the open/close execution mode, the period from when the open/close door 272 is set to an open state until when it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The special electric operating port 91, which is a special route ball entrance, is arranged so that it opens upward so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter.
The special electric opening 91, which is a special route ball entrance, is located in an opening formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-to-back direction. This special electric opening 91, which is a special route ball entrance, is located in a position in the game area where game balls can flow down and reach when playing right-handed, guided by a guide member such as a nail NL. As mentioned above, this special electric opening 91, which is a special route ball entrance, is equipped with a detection sensor 307 that detects the entry of game balls. Based on the detection result, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (one in this embodiment).

The special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry section, is equipped with a V winning port 921, which is a specific ball entry section that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter and is located in the area to the left of the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry section, a normal winning port 922 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter and is located in the area to the right of the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry section, an opening and closing door 923, which is a specific opening and closing section for opening and closing the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry section, and a special electric winning drive section 924 that drives the opening and closing door 923, which is the specific opening and closing section.
The player can guide the game ball to the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific path ball entrance, and the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entrance, by rotating the launch handle 16 to a medium amount and hitting the ball in the right-hand direction (second direction), thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. Therefore, the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific path ball entrance, is provided in the game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the right-hand direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path.

In this reference embodiment, the specific path that can guide the game ball to the special electric operating port 91, which is the specific path ball entry port, and the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, can be reached by a mid-hit in the right-hand direction (second direction) with a medium rotation amount of the launch handle 16, but it may also be reached by a right-hit in the right-hand direction (second direction) with a maximum rotation amount of the launch handle 16. In other words, the specific path ball entry port only needs to be located in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down the specific path.

The V-shaped entry hole 921, which is a specific ball entry section, is provided in an opening formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-to-back direction. As described above, the V-shaped entry hole 921 is equipped with a detection sensor 308 that detects the entry of game balls. Based on the detection result, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (one in this embodiment).
The normal winning opening 922 is provided in an opening formed in the game area by a router so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. As described above, this normal winning opening 922 is equipped with a detection sensor 309 that detects the entry of game balls. Based on the detection result, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (one in this embodiment).

The opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing part, is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate and is provided on the game board 2X so as to close the openings of the V winning opening 921, which is a specific ball entry part, and the normal winning opening 922. This specific opening/closing part, the opening/closing door 923, has a closed state in which it rotates about a horizontal axis inserted into the vertically lower end to become flush with the surface of the game board 2X, thereby closing the openings of the V winning opening 921, which is a specific ball entry part, and the normal winning opening 922, and an open state in which it rotates about this horizontal axis to protrude from the surface of the game board 2X, thereby opening the openings of the V winning opening 921, which is a specific ball entry part, and the normal winning opening 922.
The special winning drive unit 924 drives the opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing unit, to set the opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing unit, to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the door 923, which is a specific opening/closing part, is normally set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. When a game ball enters the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, and the mode shifts to a special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, the door 923, which is a specific opening/closing part, is set to an open state in which the game ball can enter.
The special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, refers to a mode in which the opening and closing door 923, which is a specific opening and closing part, is set to an open state, and game balls can enter the V winning opening 921, which is a specific ball entry part, and the normal winning opening 922. In the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, the period from when the opening and closing door 923, which is a specific opening and closing part, is set to an open state until it is set to a closed state again is called one special electric round game.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and a normal pattern display section 35, and is configured by arranging multiple display devices such as a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2X so as to bulge toward a window panel 123 (see FIG. 1) provided on the front side of the main display device 32. In other words, the main display device 32 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. The distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the width of one game ball. This prevents the pachinko machine 1 from dropping game balls between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from dropping in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 includes a first result display unit 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the upper operating port 25, and a second result display unit 342 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the lower operating port 26 (see FIG. 136). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for indicating the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode when the open/close execution mode is activated (or when the open/close execution mode is activated).

The first result display unit 341 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the upper operating port 25, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the upper operating port 25 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the lower operating port 26, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 26 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

The normal symbol display unit 35 displays the changing symbols when a winning jackpot is awarded at the through gate 31, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning jackpot at the through gate 31 as the result of stopping the changing display. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a transition to an electric role open state, the normal symbol display unit 35 displays a predetermined stop result. The pachinko machine 1 then transitions to an electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric role device 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 opens in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 are configured with segment displays, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix. Furthermore, the images displayed on the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple colors that can be switched between.

The variable display unit 33 is equipped with a pattern display device 36 that variably displays (variably displays or switches between) patterns, which are a type of picture. The variable display unit 33 also has a center frame 37 that is arranged to surround the pattern display device 36. The upper part of this center frame 37 is arranged to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as a decrease in visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

The symbol display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 36 starts displaying a variable symbol based on a winning combination in the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. That is, when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display accordingly.
The pattern display device 36 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or other display device.

The center frame 37 includes a first hold lamp unit 371 provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36, a second hold lamp unit 372 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, and a third hold lamp unit 373 provided in the upper area of the pattern display device 36.

The first reserve lamp unit 371 is a unit that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This first reserve lamp unit 371 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the first result display unit 341 and the pattern display device 36.
The second reserve lamp unit 372 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This second reserve lamp unit 372 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the second result display unit 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third reserve lamp unit 373 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This third reserve lamp unit 373 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol display unit 35.
Each of the hold lamp sections 371 to 373 may have other configurations, such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 36 described later.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
Figure 136 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in Figure 136, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, an audio/light emitting control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 also has a payout control device 46 and a power/launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/launch control device 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launching mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 is equipped with a main control board 41 that handles the main control of the game (main control), and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 also has a board box that houses the main control board 41 and other components. This board box may have a trace portion that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace portion can be configured by joining multiple case bodies together to form a board box, with connecting portions (crimped portions) that require destruction of specific locations when the case bodies are separated, or by affixing a seal across the boundaries between multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesive object when peeled off. Furthermore, the trace structure can be configured by applying adhesive to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is a chip-integrated device that includes, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that serves as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/lose table storage area 431, an allocation table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile memory unit that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45 provided on the main control unit 4 and to multiple detection sensors 301-309. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the sound and light emission control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric device drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric device 261 of the lower operating port 26, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, the special electric winning drive unit 924 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 923, which is the specific opening and closing part of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball opening part, the main display unit 34, and the normal pattern display unit 35.

The main control board 41 also includes a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the operation of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the variable winning drive unit 273 to open and close the large winning opening 271. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific winning game, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the special electric winning drive unit 924 to open and close the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening/closing winning unit. In each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at the operating openings 25 and 26. In addition, the MPU 42 controls the display of the normal symbol display unit 35 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at the through gate 31.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply and launch control device 47, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301-309 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports, such as the general winning port 24, which is a specific route ball entry port, the upper operating port 25, the lower operating port 26, the variable winning device 27, the special electric operating port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, and the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry section, as well as the out port 28, which is a specific route ball entry port, and the through gate 31. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-309, the MPU 42 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for the various winning ports, the out port 28, which is a specific route ball entry port, and the through gate 31. The MPU 42 also performs an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to have the payout device 48 pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players during play) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) at, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is also equipped with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4, even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply and launch control device 47 also executes launch control, causing the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2X, a ball feed device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When specified launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid, causing the game balls to be launched.

The MPU 42 also has an external terminal 40X that allows the transmission of electrical signals. The external terminal 40X is a terminal for transmitting to the hall computer, for example, a jackpot signal indicating that the win/loss result has been a "jackpot win" and that the game has transitioned to open/close execution mode, a V entry signal which is a specific signal indicating that a game ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific ball entry section, and that the game has transitioned to the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, a fluctuation start signal which indicates that the fluctuation display has been executed, a mode signal indicating the win/loss lottery mode or support mode, and other signals indicating various states of the pachinko machine 1.

<Various processes executed by the main control unit>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing to progress the game. The timer interrupt processing and normal processing will be described below in order.
In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, MPU 42 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but explanation of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the processes of steps S101 to S106X in substantially the same manner as in the main reference mode. Note that in this reference mode, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the operating port in step S105, as shown in FIG. 137, and then executes the winning process for the special electric operating port, which is the specific opening execution part in step S106X.

<Special power outlet prize processing>
Figure 138 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning processing for the special electric operation port.
In the winning process for the special electric activation port, which is the specific opening execution section, the MPU 42 executes the processes of steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the MPU 42 determines in step S3001 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the special electric operated port, which is the specific opening execution unit, without executing the processes in step S3002 and thereafter.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress by referencing the opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 42, which is the special game execution unit, sets the opening and closing execution mode flag when transitioning to the opening and closing execution mode, and clears the opening and closing execution mode flag when the opening and closing execution mode ends. Here, since the opening and closing execution mode is a type of jackpot, when the MPU 42 sets the opening and closing execution mode flag in the RAM 44, it also sets a jackpot flag in the RAM 44, and when it clears the opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44, it also clears the jackpot flag stored in the RAM 44.

In step S3002, the MPU 42 determines whether a special line opening flag is set in the RAM 44. This special line opening flag is a flag for identifying that the special line winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, has been opened. The MPU 42 sets the special line opening flag when the special line winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, is opened, and clears the special line opening flag when the special line winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, is closed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3002 that the special electric opening flag is not set in RAM 44, this indicates that the opening of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, has not occurred, and therefore executes processing from step S3003 onwards in order to open the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3002 that the special electric opening flag is set in RAM 44, this indicates that the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, has already been opened, and therefore executes processing from step S3007 onwards in order to close the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section.

First, the process (the process from step S3003 onward) when it is determined in step S3002 that the special call release flag is not set in the RAM 44 will be described.
In step S3003, the MPU 42 determines whether the detection sensor 307 corresponding to the special electric activation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, has detected the entry of a game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has entered (open entry) the special electric activation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3003 that the game ball has not entered the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, it terminates the entry processing for the special electric operation port, which is a specific opening execution unit, without executing the processing from step S3004 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3003 that the gaming ball has entered the special electric activation port 91, which is a specific route ball entrance, in step S3004, it sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "400". As mentioned above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.8 seconds.

In step S3005, the MPU 42 executes the process of opening the special winning device. In this process of opening the special winning device, the MPU 42 executes the drive control of the special winning drive unit 924 to set the opening/closing door 923, which is the specific opening/closing unit, to an open state.
The value set in the timer counter T in step S3004 defines the maximum duration time from when the specific opening/closing door 923 is set to the open state until when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the maximum duration time to 0.8 seconds by setting the timer counter T to "400."

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 causes the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, is longer than the game ball launch cycle, it is possible to have around one or two game balls enter the specific ball entry section, the V winning port 921 or the normal winning port 922.

In step S3006, the MPU 42 sets the special line release flag in RAM 44. The MPU 42 then terminates the winning process for the special line operation port, which is the specific release execution unit.

Next, the process (the process from step S3007 onwards) when it is determined in step S3002 that the special line release flag is set in the RAM 44 will be described.
In step S3007, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific ball entry area, by determining whether or not the detection sensor 308 corresponding to the V entry port 921, which is a specific ball entry area, has detected the entry of the game ball.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S3007 that the game ball has not entered the V winning hole 921, which is the specific ball entry section, it executes the processing from step S3009 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3007 that the gaming ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry portion, in step S3008, it sets a V entry flag in the RAM 44. This V entry flag is a flag for specifying that the gaming ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry portion. The MPU 42 sets the V entry flag when the gaming ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry portion, and clears the V entry flag at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific entry game.

After executing the processing of step S3008, or if it is determined in step S3007 that the game ball has not entered the specific ball entry section, V entry port 921, MPU 42 determines in step S3009 whether the value of timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S3009 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", it terminates the winning process for the special electric activation port, which is the specific opening execution section, without executing the processes from step S3010 onwards.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3009 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0," it executes a closing execution process in step S3010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the special telephone winning drive unit 924 to set the opening/closing door 923, which is the specific opening/closing unit, to a closed state.
In step S3011, the MPU 42 clears the special line release flag stored in the RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the special line operation port, which is the specific release execution unit.

Here, since the opening and closing execution mode and the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, are both types of jackpot, if it is possible to transition to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, during the opening and closing execution mode, there is a problem in that the player will focus on the opening of the opening and closing door 923, which is the specific opening and closing part, and the transition to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, and will not be able to enjoy the opening and closing execution mode.
In contrast, when the pachinko machine 1 determines in step S3001 that it is in the opening and closing execution mode, it ends the winning process for the special electric operation port, which is the specific opening execution unit, without executing the processes from step S3002 onwards. In other words, since the pachinko machine 1 cannot transition to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, while in the opening and closing execution mode, the player can enjoy the opening and closing execution mode without worrying about opening the opening and closing door 923, which is the specific opening and closing unit, or transitioning to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game.

Furthermore, if the opening of the opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing part, or the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is disabled while the main display unit 34 is displaying changes, the player must wait until the display of changes on the main display unit 34 has ended before firing the game ball along a specific path, which poses the problem that if the goal is to transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, the variable display on the main display unit 34 must not be started.
Furthermore, there is a problem in that the variable display on the main display unit 34 while waiting to aim the game ball at a specific path and launch it is a variable display that should be counted as the number of game plays that need to be played to generate the game state of "ceiling time reduction," which is the game state after the game is played, but is not counted and goes to waste.
In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, without determining whether the variable display on the main display unit 34 has ended or not, so the player can cause the opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing unit, to open for a predetermined period of time by inserting a game ball into the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, without having to worry about the execution of the variable display.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing normal processing.
The MPU 42 executes the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on and will be described later, and then executes the normal processing, which is the main processing for progressing the game. In this normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314, as shown in Figure 139. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at 4 msec intervals, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps depending on the determination result of step S308.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes timer interrupt processing, prize-winning processing for the operating port, or external output processing for sending commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a prize ball command has been set, and if it determines that a prize ball command has been set, sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Also, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a command for a presentation, such as a command corresponding to a presentation for a game round or a command corresponding to a presentation for the open/close execution mode, has been set, and if it determines that a command for a presentation has been set, sends the command for that presentation to the sound and light emission control device 5.

In step S315X, the MPU 42 executes external signal output processing. In this external signal output processing, the MPU 42 transmits to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X, for example, a jackpot signal indicating that the win/loss result has been a "jackpot win" and that the system has transitioned to the open/close execution mode, a V entry signal which is a specific signal indicating that a game ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific ball entry section, and that the system has transitioned to the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, a fluctuation start signal indicating that the variable display has been executed, a mode signal indicating the win/loss lottery mode or support mode, and other signals indicating various states of the pachinko machine 1. The external signal output processing of step S315X will be described in detail later.

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a specified area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, it clears the value of the fluctuation type counter CS by returning it to 0.

In step S303X, the MPU 42 executes a game round control process for progressing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose lottery and an allocation lottery, and also determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 36 and the main display unit 34.
In step S304X, the MPU 42 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game number control process in step S303X and the game state transition process in step S304X will be explained in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) for starting a demo has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started, and if it determines that the start waiting period has elapsed, it sets a demo command for starting a demo display. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval between repeated executions of the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when it reaches 7,500 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary; for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if a new game session is started while the MPU 42 is counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S306X, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process, which is a specific release execution unit for executing drive control of the electric role 261 provided in the lower operating port 26. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role release lottery based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 443 of the RAM 44, and executes opening and closing processing of the electric role 261 if the electric role release lottery is won. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric role release lottery. The electric role support process of step S306X will be explained in detail later.

In step S316X, the MPU 42 executes a process for a special electric winning device, which is a specific ball entry game execution unit for progressing a special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game. In the process for a special electric winning device, which is a specific ball entry game execution unit, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing unit, to an open state and executes a process for enabling game balls to enter the V winning port 921 and the normal winning port 922, which are specific ball entry units.
The processing for the special winning device, which is the specific winning game execution part in step S316X, will be explained in detail later.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 causes the power supply and launch control device 47 to execute launch control to launch a game ball based on the player's rotation of the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply and launch control device 47 causes the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a launch intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16. Furthermore, when predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power outage flag has been set in the power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power outage flag is set in the RAM 44 when a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power outage monitoring board 45 outputs this power outage signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power outage. Note that this power outage flag is cleared the next time the main processing is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as RAM 44, and clears various flags by assigning 0 to the flag. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a power outage flag by assigning 1 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set, it executes power outage processing from step S312 onwards without executing processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits timer interrupt processing from occurring. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and saves a RAM judgment value (a checksum of RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set, it determines in step S309 whether the timing has come to execute the next normal processing, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this reference embodiment) has elapsed since the current normal processing started.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is not yet time to execute the next normal process, that is, if remaining time has occurred, it updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310 and updates the fluctuation type counter CS in step S311. Note that the MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal processing, i.e., if there is no remaining time, it executes step S301 again to start the next normal processing.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Figure 140 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game play control processing.
In the game play control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S510X as shown in Fig. 140. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 executes the process of step S509 and then executes the process of step S510X, which is different from the main reference embodiment.
In step S510X, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the game counter GC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to update it. This game counter GC is a counter that the MPU 42 uses to identify the number of game plays that must be played in order to trigger a "ceiling time reduction" game state (post-play state), which is a function that transitions to the high-frequency support mode when a predetermined number of game plays have been played. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game play control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 determines whether the second start pending memory count RbN in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit, which was set in step S204 of the winning process for the activation port, is equal to or less than 0. If the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory count RbN is equal to or less than 0, it executes data setting processing for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and if the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory count RbN is not equal to or less than 0, it executes data setting processing for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611.

In this way, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit for consumption of game rounds, and a data setting process for the second result display unit that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit for consumption of game rounds.
Then, if the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0," it executes the data setting process for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. In other words, if the MPU 42 determines that there is pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb based on the winning of a game ball through the lower actuation port 26, it preferentially sets the pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb for consumption of game rounds, regardless of whether there is pending information stored in the first result display unit pending area Ra based on the winning of a game ball through the upper actuation port 25.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending memory number RaN in the first result display section pending area Ra to update it.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display unit pending area Ra. This data shift process shifts the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 sequentially toward the first area Ra1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag stored in RAM 44. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 34, the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342, is to start a variable display when a game round is completed. In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag, which indicates that when a game round is completed, the first result display unit 341 is to start a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25.

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift command for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the first shift command set in step S606 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5. This first shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed for the reserved information stored in the first result display unit reserved area Ra based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the first reserve lamp unit 371 and also executes a predetermined process based on the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lit first reserve lamp units 371 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending memory number RbN in the second result display section pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display section pending area Rb. This data shift process shifts the pending information stored in each of areas Rb1 to Rb4 sequentially toward the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the pending information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the pending information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 44. In this step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag, which indicates that the second result display unit 342 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 as a game round is played.

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift command for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed. Thereafter, the MPU 42 terminates the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the second shift command set in step S611 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5. This second shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed for the reserved information stored in the second result display reserve area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the second reserve lamp unit 372 and also executes a predetermined process based on the second shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lit second reserve lamp units 372 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower actuation port 26 decreases.

Figure 142 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start processing.
In the fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode, then in step S702 it reads out the win/loss table for the low probability mode (see Figure 6(a)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43, and if it determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, then in step S703 it reads out the win/loss table for the high probability mode (see Figure 6(b)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43.

After executing the processing of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose determination process in step S704. In this win/lose determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/lose table read out in step S702 or step S703. As mentioned above, the win/lose result is either a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," or a "normal loss result," and this is the same whether the win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode or high probability mode.

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether the result determined in step S704 is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S706 onward; if the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S712 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S706 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and therefore in step S707, the first allocation table (see Figure 7(a)) is read from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and therefore in step S708, the second allocation table (see Figure 7(b)) is read from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.

After executing the processing of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 42 executes the allocation determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the allocation lottery (allocation result) by comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read in step S707 or step S708.

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for a jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be ultimately stopped and displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34 according to the allocation result determined in step S709, and stores the determined information in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be ultimately stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 by comparing the allocation result determined in step S709 with a stop result table for a jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 43. This stop result table for a jackpot result specifies different patterns to be stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 for each allocation result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag corresponding to the allocation result determined in step S709 in the RAM 44. Specifically, if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it sets a low probability result flag; if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is an "unspecified low round high probability result," it sets a unspecified low round high probability result flag; if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is an "explicit low round high probability result," it sets a specified low round high probability result flag; and if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result," it sets a most advantageous result flag. Thereafter, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S716 onwards.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines the allocation result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (the process from step S712 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result determined in step S704 is a "special losing result."
If MPU42 determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is not a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S715 onwards.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a special losing result. In this stop result setting process for a special losing result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 by referring to a stop result table for a special losing result stored in advance in the ROM 43. The pattern of the symbols set in this stop result table for a special losing result is different from the pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 42 sets a special loss flag in the RAM 44.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

In response to this, in step S715, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a normal loss result. In this stop result setting process for a normal loss result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be ultimately displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be ultimately displayed in the main display section 34 by referencing a stop result table for a normal loss result that is pre-stored in ROM 43. The pattern of symbols set in this stop result table for a normal loss result differs from the pattern of symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result and the stop result table for a special loss result.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 42 executes a process for setting the display duration (display duration period) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44 .

Furthermore, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a reach display will occur on the symbol display device 36. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur if the allocation result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result," or if the win/loss result determined in step S704 is a "normal loss result" and the reach occurrence lottery is won. As described above, the MPU 42 executes the reach occurrence lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

When the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

Specifically, the display duration table for when reach does not occur is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display duration when the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 is consumed is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items related to the upper actuation port 25 increases. And the display duration when the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 is consumed is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items related to the lower actuation port 26 increases. Furthermore, the display duration table for when reach does not occur is set so that the display duration shortens when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode compared to when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of reserved items is the same, the display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

The non-reach display duration table may be set to the opposite relationship to that described above, such that the display duration increases as the number of reserved items increases, or may be configured not to change depending on the number of reserved items or support mode. Separate display duration tables may also be set for the win/fail result and the allocation result.

In step S717, the MPU 42 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S717 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, and does not include information regarding whether or not a reach display will occur.
As described above, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach non-occurrence are different from each other.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not a reach display will occur is not included in the variation command, it is possible for the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the sub-control device, to determine whether or not a reach display will occur based on information related to the display duration. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information on whether or not a reach display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/loss result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the win/loss result, such as a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," and a "normal loss result." The type command also includes information related to the allocation result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the "low probability result,""non-explicit low round high probability result,""explicit low round high probability result," and "most advantageous result," such as information related to the allocation result.
In the following description, the win/loss result and the allocation result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, and based on the determination result, starts a variable display on the main display unit 34. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the variable start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 should start displaying a changing value based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 when a game round is played, and so the MPU 42 causes the first result display unit 341 to start displaying a changing value.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 should start displaying a changing value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 when a game round is played, and so the MPU 42 starts displaying a changing value in the second result display unit 342.

In addition, in step S718, when the variable display is executed as a profit game, the MPU 42 is configured to send a variable start signal to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X as a specific signal that can be identified as being different from when the opening/closing execution mode is executed.
Specifically, in the external signal output process of step S315X described above, the MPU 42 transmits a fluctuation start signal indicating that a fluctuation display has been executed to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X. Here, when the MPU 42 has executed a fluctuation display, it transmits only the fluctuation start signal to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X.

<Game status transition processing>
Figure 143 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814X as shown in Fig. 143. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 executes the process of step S802, and then executes the ceiling time-saving transition process of step S815X before executing the process of step S803, and differs from the main reference embodiment in that it executes the process of step S814X instead of the process of step S814.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it executes a ceiling time-saving transition process in step S815X. In the ceiling time-saving transition process, the MPU 42 generates a "ceiling time-saving" gaming state (post-consumption gaming state), which is a function that transitions to high-frequency support mode when a predetermined number of game plays have been played. Thereafter, the MPU 42 executes the processes from step S803 onwards, as in the main reference mode described above.

In step S814X, the MPU 42 executes a transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode after clearing the opening and closing execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
Below, the large prize opening/closing process of step S811, the ceiling time reduction transition process of step S815X, and the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of step S814X will be explained in detail.

Figure 144 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening and closing process.
In the big prize opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether the big prize opening 271 is open or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open, it executes the processing from step S902 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open, it executes the processes from step S906 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S902 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not less than "0", it determines in step S903 whether the value of the timer counter T is less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of opening the big prize opening in step S904.
The process of opening the big prize slot in step S904 will be described in detail below.

Figure 145 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of opening the big prize opening.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "8" in step S1002, and sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003. As mentioned above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 seconds.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is not a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC to "8" in step S1004, and determines in step S1005 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is a high probability result in a small number of rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not a high probability result for a few rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution processing of the special prize opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution processing, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state by executing drive control of the variable prize opening drive unit 273. The MPU 42 then terminates the special prize opening opening processing.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 specifies the upper limit on the total number of game balls that can enter the large winning slot 271. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to the same value ("8" in this embodiment) when it determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result" and when it determines that the winning result is not a "special losing result," but different values may also be set in the winning counter PC.

The value set in timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 also specifies the maximum duration time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two different maximum duration times by setting timer counter T to "85" or "15,000." Specifically, the MPU 42 sets a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 30 seconds, and a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 0.17 seconds, which is shorter than the long-term mode.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds, thereby causing the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Also, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to "8", thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 271 to eight.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch period, it is easy to get the upper limit of eight game balls to enter the large prize opening 271.
In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch cycle (more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle), so it is difficult to get a game ball to enter the large prize opening 271. However, depending on the timing, it is possible to get about one game ball to enter the large prize opening 271.

Returning to the explanation of the large prize opening/closing process, the processing from step S905 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 144.
After executing the special prize opening process in step S904, the MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905. Furthermore, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S905 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the special prize opening opening and closing process.
Based on the open command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S906 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than 0. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the special prize opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in step S907 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S918.

First, the process (the process from step S907 onwards) when it is determined in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize opening 271. The determination of whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize opening 271 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the special prize opening 271.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no win has been made in the special prize opening 271, it ends the special prize opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a win has occurred in the big win slot 271, it updates the value of the win counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the prize counter PC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the prize counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big prize opening opening process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0," it executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to set the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the close command set in step S911 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
Based on the close command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the result is not a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S913 onwards.
In step S913, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0," then in step S915, the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 specifies the open waiting time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, to when it is set to the closed state and then when it is set to the open state again. In this reference embodiment, the open waiting time is 1 second. This open waiting time is the same regardless of the type or progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and can be any value.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, as with the waiting time for the opening, i.e., the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening and closing processing.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the ending command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S918 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the result is not a "special miss result," that is, if it determines that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S921 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-mentioned processing from S916 onwards.

Next, the processing (processing from step S923 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-described processing from S916 onwards.

Figure 146 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ceiling time reduction transition process.
In the ceiling time-saving transition process, the MPU 42 executes the processes of steps S3101 to S3107 as shown in FIG.
In step S3101, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3101 that the win/lose lottery mode is not the low probability mode (if it determines that the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode), it terminates the ceiling time-saving transition process without executing the processes from step S3102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3101 that the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode, it determines in step S3102 whether or not a ceiling time-shortening flag has been set in the RAM 44. This ceiling time-shortening flag is a flag for identifying that a gaming state of "ceiling time-shortening," which is a gaming state after consumption, has occurred. The MPU 42 sets the ceiling time-shortening flag when a gaming state of "ceiling time-shortening," which is a gaming state after consumption, has occurred, and clears the ceiling time-shortening flag at the end of the opening/closing execution mode or the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3102 that the ceiling time reduction flag is set in RAM 44, it has already generated a "ceiling time reduction" gaming state, which is a post-consumption gaming state, and therefore terminates the ceiling time reduction transition processing without executing the processing from step S3103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3102 that the ceiling time-reduction flag is not set in the RAM 44, it determines in step S3103 whether the game counter GC is equal to or less than "0".

In this way, after the pachinko machine 1 has generated the "ceiling time-shortened" gaming state, which is the post-consumer gaming state, it is not configured to count the number of play times that must be played to generate the "ceiling time-shortened" gaming state, which is the post-consumer gaming state. In other words, after the pachinko machine 1 has generated the "ceiling time-shortened" gaming state, which is the post-consumer gaming state, it is not possible to generate the "ceiling time-shortened" gaming state, which is the post-consumer gaming state, no matter how many play times are played thereafter, until it wins the lottery for a jackpot and resets the number of play times that must be played to generate the "ceiling time-shortened" gaming state, which is the post-consumer gaming state.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3103 that the game counter GC is not equal to or less than "0", the predetermined number of games have not been played, and therefore ends the ceiling time-saving transition process without executing the processes from step S3104 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3103 that the game counter GC is equal to or less than "0", then in step S3104 the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S3105, the MPU 42 sets the value of the number of games counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "950".
In step S3106, the MPU 42 sets a number limit flag in the RAM 44.
In step S3107, the MPU 42 sets the ceiling time-shortening flag in the RAM 44. After that, the MPU 42 ends the ceiling time-shortening transition process.

Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is set, the high frequency support mode continues until 950 games have been played, which is the termination reference number set in the game number counter. When 950 games have been played, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag and the number of times limit flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 executes these processes as electric support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when a predetermined number of plays have been played in low probability mode, the game state transitions to high frequency support mode. Low probability mode continues at least until the lottery results in a "jackpot win," and high frequency support mode transitions to low frequency support mode when 950 plays have been played without the lottery resulting in a "jackpot win."

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode is ended.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1114X as shown in Fig. 147. Note that the present embodiment differs from the main embodiment in that the MPU 42 executes the process of steps S1113X and S1114X after executing the process of step S1112.

In step S1113X, the MPU 42 clears the ceiling time-shortening flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S1114, the MPU 42 sets the value of the game counter GC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "600." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.
In addition, when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win," the MPU 42 transitions to a "time-saving" game state, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, with a predetermined probability in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, but this transition may be made always, or the game state may be transitioned to the "time-saving" game state if the winning/losing lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" (if a "special miss result" or a "normal miss result" occurs). Also, in the "time-saving" game state, when game balls are fired toward the game area, the number of game balls fired is greater than the number of prize game balls, and it is configured so that the number of game balls cannot be increased.

In this way, the predetermined number of play times (600 in this example) that must be played to trigger the "ceiling time-saving" play state, which is the play state after consumption, will be initialized if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "low probability result."

Here, conventional gaming machines, in "normal" gaming mode, will not switch to high probability mode or high frequency support mode until a jackpot lottery is won, no matter how many times a player plays. This "normal" gaming mode significantly reduces the number of game balls, making it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

In order to solve such problems, recent gaming machines have a "ceiling time reduction" gaming state, which is a gaming state after consumption. This "ceiling time reduction" gaming state, which is a gaming state after consumption, occurs when a predetermined number of games have been played after winning the lottery for a jackpot, and the machine transitions to a high frequency support mode, so that the player can play without using up too many game balls, allowing the player to play comfortably.
In addition, when a gaming machine having a gaming state of "ceiling time reduction", which is a gaming state after consumption, wins a lottery for generating a jackpot or when the gaming machine is reset, the number of times of play that must be played to generate the gaming state of "ceiling time reduction", which is a gaming state after consumption, is reset, so after generating the gaming state of "ceiling time reduction", which is a gaming state after consumption, the number of times of play that must be played to generate the gaming state of "ceiling time reduction", which is a gaming state after consumption, is generally not counted.
As such, the gaming state of the "ceiling time reduction" after consumption has a large influence on the player's profits, so the conditions for its occurrence and reset are strictly controlled.

However, as mentioned above, if the number of play times that need to be played to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state after the "ceiling time reduction" game state is generated is not counted, then the "ceiling time reduction" game state after the consumption cannot be generated no matter how many play times are played thereafter, and therefore playing on a gaming machine after the "ceiling time reduction" game state after the consumption of the "ceiling time reduction" game state is generated is at a disadvantage to the player compared to playing on a gaming machine after the number of play times that need to be played to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state after the consumption of the "ceiling time reduction" game state is reset.
Furthermore, in a gaming machine after resetting the number of times that must be played to generate the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state after consumption, if a player ends play without winning the lottery for generating a jackpot, the number of times played through the player's own play will become the benefit of a third party, which will be to the player's disadvantage.
In this way, gaming machines that have a "ceiling time reduction" gaming state, which is a post-consumer gaming state, have the problem of reducing players' motivation to play.

The gaming machine of the present invention aims to solve this problem by allowing the player to reset the number of play times that must be completed to trigger the "ceiling time-saving" game state, which is a post-consumption game state, based on the player's wishes. This prevents any disadvantages to the player while maintaining the benefits of the "ceiling time-saving" game state, which is a post-consumption game state.

<Processing for special telephone award winning device>
Figure 148 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for the special telephone winning device.
In the processing for the special winning device, which is the specific winning game execution unit, the MPU 42 executes steps S3201 to S3211 as shown in FIG.
In step S3201, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is in progress.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3201 that it is not in the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, it executes the processing from step S3202 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3201 that the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is in progress, it executes the processing from step S3207 onwards.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is in progress by referencing the special electric opening and closing execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 44. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the special electric opening and closing execution mode in progress flag when transitioning to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, and clears the special electric opening and closing execution mode in progress flag when the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, ends.

First, the processing (processing from step S3202 onwards) when it is determined in step S3201 that the MPU 42 is not in the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, will be described.
In step S3202, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a V winning flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3202 that the V winning flag is not set in RAM 44, it terminates the processing for the special electric winning device, which is the specific ball winning game execution unit, without executing the processing from step S3203 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3202 that the V winning flag is set in the RAM 44, then in step S3203 it sets "2" to a V winning round counter VRC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This V winning round counter VRC is a counter for the MPU 42 to specify the number of special electric round games when transitioning to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a special ball entry game.

In step S3204, the MPU 42 sets "1000" to the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time a timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T becomes 2 seconds.
In step S3205, the MPU 42 sets a special electric open/close execution mode flag in the RAM 44. Here, the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is a type of jackpot, just like the open/close execution mode, so when the MPU 42 sets the special electric open/close execution mode flag in the RAM 44, it also sets a jackpot flag in the RAM 44.

In addition, when the MPU 42 sets the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag in RAM 44 in step S3205, it is configured to send a V winning signal to the hall computer via external terminal 40X as a specific signal that can be identified as being different from when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
Specifically, in the external signal output processing of the aforementioned step S315X, the MPU 42 transmits a V winning signal, which is a specific signal indicating that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag has been set in the RAM 44, to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X.

In step S3206, the MPU 42 sets a V winning command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the V winning command set in step S3206 to the sound and light emitting control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the processing for the special electric winning device, which is the specific winning game execution unit.
The sound and light emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the V winning command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, the processing (processing from step S3207 onwards) when it is determined in step S3201 that the MPU 42 is in the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, will be described.
In step S3207, the MPU 42 executes the special telephone winning device opening and closing process.

Figure 149 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special telephone winning device opening and closing process.
In the special telephone winning device opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S3301 to S3314 as shown in FIG.
In step S3301, the MPU 42 determines whether the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball winning section, is open or not.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3301 that the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball winning section, is not open, it executes the processing from step S3302 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3301 that the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball winning section, is open, it executes the processing from step S3307 onwards.

First, in step S3301, the processing (processing from step S3302 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines that the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, is not open will be described.
In step S3302, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the V winning round counter VRC is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3302 that the value of the V winning round counter VRC is equal to or less than "0", it terminates the special line winning device opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3302 that the value of the V winning round counter VRC is not less than "0", it determines in step S3303 whether the value of the timer counter T is less than "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3303 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it terminates the special telephone winning device opening and closing process.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3303 that the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0", it sets the V prize counter VPC to "8" in step S3304, and sets the timer counter T to "1000" in step S3305.

After executing the processing of step S3305, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution processing of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, in step S3306. In this opening execution processing, the MPU 42 sets the opening and closing door 923, which is the specific opening and closing section, to an open state by executing drive control of the special electric winning drive section 924. The MPU 42 then terminates the special electric winning device opening and closing processing.

The value set in the V entry counter VPC in step S3304 specifies the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the specific entry areas, V entry port 921, and normal entry port 922. In this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 specifies the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the specific entry areas, V entry port 921, and normal entry port 922, but it is also possible to count the number of game balls that can enter the specific entry areas, V entry port 921, and normal entry port 922, separately and specify the upper limit for each.

The value set in timer counter T in step S3305 specifies the maximum duration time that the specific opening/closing door 923 can remain open until it is set back to the closed state. Therefore, by setting timer counter T to "1000," MPU 42 sets the maximum duration time to 2 seconds.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds, thereby causing the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Also, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the V winning counter VPC to "8", thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the V winning port 921, which is the specific ball entry portion, and the normal winning port 922 to 8.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the specific ball entry section, V entry port 921, and the normal entry port 922, and the game ball launch period, it is difficult to have the upper limit of game balls enter the specific ball entry section, V entry port 921, and the normal entry port 922. However, depending on the timing, it is possible to have around two to three game balls enter the specific ball entry section, V entry port 921, and the normal entry port 922.

Next, the processing (processing from step S3307 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S3301 that the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball winning section, is open will be described.
In step S3307, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than 0. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S3305 has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3307 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S3311.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3307 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0," it determines in step S3308 whether or not a win has occurred in the specific winning section, V winning port 921, or the normal winning port 922. The determination of whether or not a win has occurred in the specific winning section, V winning port 921, is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 308 corresponding to the specific winning section, V winning port 921. The determination of whether or not a win has occurred in the normal winning port 922 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 309 corresponding to the normal winning port 922.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3308 that no winning has occurred in the specific winning section, the V winning port 921 or the normal winning port 922, it terminates the special electric winning device opening and closing process without executing the processing from step S3309 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3308 that a win has occurred in a specific entry section, such as the V entry port 921 or the normal entry port 922, then in step S3309 it updates the value of the V entry counter VPC by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S3310, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the V prize counter VPC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S3310 that the value of the V prize counter VPC is not "0" or less, it terminates the special line prize device opening/closing process without executing the processes from step S3311 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3310 that the value of the V winning counter VPC is equal to or less than "0," or if the MPU 42 determines in step S3307 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0," the MPU 42 executes a closing execution process in step S3311. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the special winning drive unit 924 to set the opening/closing door 923, which is the specific opening/closing unit, to a closed state.

In step S3312, the MPU 42 updates the value of the V winning round counter VRC by subtracting 1 from the value.
In step S3313, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the V winning round counter VRC is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3313 that the value of the V winning round counter VRC is "0" or less, it terminates the special line winning device opening and closing process without executing the processes from step S3314 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3313 that the value of the V winning round counter VRC is not equal to or less than "0", then in step S3314 the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500". Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the special line winning device opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S3314 specifies the waiting time for opening the specific opening/closing door 923 after it has been set to the open state and then set to the closed state, before the specific opening/closing door 923 is set to the open state again. In this embodiment, the waiting time for opening is 1 second.

Returning to the explanation of the processing for the special winning device, which is the specific winning game execution unit, the processing from step S3208 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 148.
After executing the special line winning device opening/closing process in step S3207, the MPU 42 determines in step S3208 whether the value of the V winning round counter VRC is "0" or less.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S3208 that the value of the V winning round counter VRC is not less than "0", it terminates the processing for the special electric winning device, which is the specific ball winning game execution unit, without executing the processing from step S3209 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3208 that the value of the V winning round counter VRC is "0" or less, then in step S3209 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3209 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it terminates the processing for the special electric winning device, which is the specific ball winning game execution unit.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3209 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", then in step S3210 it clears the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag stored in RAM 44. Here, the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is a type of jackpot, just like the opening/closing execution mode, so when the MPU 42 clears the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag stored in RAM 44, it also clears the jackpot flag stored in RAM 44.

In step S3211, the MPU 42 executes a transition process when the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. After that, the MPU 42 ends the process for the special electric winning device, which is the specific winning game execution unit.
The transition process at the end of the special power opening/closing execution mode in step S3211 will be described in detail below.

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the special power opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the special line opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S3401 to S3404 as shown in FIG.
In step S3401, the MPU 42 clears the ceiling time-shortening flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S3402, the MPU 42 sets the value of the game counter GC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "600".
In this way, the predetermined number of play times (600 times in this reference form) that must be consumed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" play state, which is the play state after consumption, will be initialized at the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry play.

In step S3403, the MPU 42 clears the V winning flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S3404, the MPU 42 sets a reset command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the reset command set in step S3404 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on a reset command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 can reset the number of play times that must be consumed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, based on the player's will. Specifically, the player can reset the number of play times that must be consumed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, by firing the game ball aiming at a specific path and transitioning to a special electric opening and closing execution mode (specific ball entry game), which is a type of jackpot.
Here, the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is a jackpot that is different from the opening and closing execution mode that is transitioned to based on the consumption of game times (variable display), which is the trigger for counting, when the number of game times that need to be consumed to generate the game state of ``ceiling time reduction'', which is the game state after consumption, is being counted.

However, if the gaming machine is configured so that a player can obtain more gaming balls than the number of gaming balls fired by aiming the gaming ball at a specific path in order to transition to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, then the gaming machine will allow the player to increase the number of gaming balls simply by aiming the gaming ball at a specific path and firing it, which will cause a problem that the playability of the pachinko machine 1 will be destroyed.
In contrast, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 pays out one prize ball based on the game ball entering the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific route entry port, pays out one prize ball based on the game ball entering the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry section, and pays out one prize ball based on the game ball entering the normal entry port 922.Therefore, even if the system is configured to be able to reset the number of play times that need to be consumed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is a game state after consumption, by transitioning to the special electric opening and closing execution mode (specific ball entry game), it is possible to prevent the game from being significantly advantageous to the player and causing a collapse in playability.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 is configured to transition between game states such as a win/lose lottery mode or a support mode during the transition process at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, for example, if a transition occurs to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, while the player is in the "probable change" game state due to a malfunction of the game ball launching mechanism 49 or an error by the player, this "probable change" game state will transition to another game state such as the "normal" game state, which means that the player will not be able to enjoy the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, with peace of mind.
In contrast to this, in the transition process at the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 1 does not transition between game states such as the hit/miss lottery mode or the support mode, unlike the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and is configured so that it will not change before or after the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game.Therefore, the hit/miss lottery mode, which is the probability of executing the opening and closing execution mode as a profit game based on the result of the variable display, will not change from the start to the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, and the player can enjoy the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, with peace of mind.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may have the specific opening/closing section as an opening/closing door 272, the specific ball entry section as a large prize opening 271, and the function of the special electric prize entry device 92, which is the opening/closing ball entry section, also be shared by the variable prize entry device 27.
However, if the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the function of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, is also used by the variable winning device 27, since the number of prize balls in the opening and closing execution mode is desired to be greater than the number of prize balls in the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, the player will be able to increase the number of game balls simply by firing the game ball at a specific path in order to transition to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, which poses the problem that the playability of the pachinko machine 1 will be destroyed.
In contrast, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable winning device 27, which is in a specific open/close state in the open/close execution mode, is different from the special electric winning device 92, which is the open/close ball entry section, so the player can enjoy the game comfortably by being aware of the special electric winning device 92, which is the open/close ball entry section, during the execution of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, and by being aware of the variable winning device 27 during the execution of the open/close execution mode.
In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the function of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening and closing ball entry section, is also used by the variable winning device 27, the number of winning balls in the opening and closing execution mode can be made greater than the number of winning balls in the special electric opening and closing execution mode to solve the above-mentioned problem.

<Electricity support treatment>
Figure 151 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric support processing.
In the electric service support process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1201 to S1208 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the normal symbol display section 35 is displaying a variable symbol, that is, whether or not an electric game is in progress.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1201 that the normal symbol display unit 35 is not displaying a variable symbol, it executes the processing from step S1202 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1201 that the normal symbol display unit 35 is displaying a variable symbol, it executes the processing from step S1205 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S1202 onwards) when it is determined in step S1201 that the normal symbol display unit 35 is not displaying a variable symbol will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 42 determines whether the number of reserved electric games RcN is "0" or less.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1202 that the number of reserved electric roles RcN is "0" or less, it terminates the electric role support processing without executing the processing from step S1203 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1202 that the number of reserved electric symbols RcN is not "0" or less, in step S1203, it executes an electric symbol data setting process for setting the reserved electric symbol information stored in the electric symbol reservation area 443 for consumption of electric symbol game times. After that, in step S1204, the MPU 42 starts variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35, executes an electric symbol variable start process for consuming electric symbol game times, and ends the electric symbol support process.
The electric role data setting process in step S1203 and the electric role change start process in step S1204 will be described in detail below.

Figure 152 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric role data setting process.
In the electric device data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1301 to S1304 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 42 updates the value of the number of reserved electric roles RcN in the electric role reservation area 443 by subtracting 1 from the value.
In step S1302, the MPU 42 moves the electric role hold information stored in the memory area of the electric role hold area 443 to the electric role execution area.
In step S1303, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the electric role reserve information stored in the memory area of the electric role reserve area 443. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the electric role reserve information stored in each memory area of the electric role reserve area 443 to the electric role execution area side.

In step S1304, the MPU 42 sets an electric role shift command for recognizing that a shift of the electric role hold information has been executed, transmits this set electric role shift command to the sound and light emitting control device 5, and ends the electric role data setting process. This electric role shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of the electric role hold information has been executed for the electric role hold information stored in the memory area of the electric role hold area 443 based on the entry of the gaming ball into the through gate 31.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the third reserved lamp unit 373 based on the electric role shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lights in the third reserved lamp unit 373 as the number of electric role reserved game balls that have entered the through gate 31 decreases.

Figure 153 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric role fluctuation start processing.
In the electric utility fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S1401 to S1410 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 42 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1401 that the support mode is not high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode), it reads out the electric role hit/miss table (not shown) for low-frequency support mode from the electric role hit/miss table storage area (not shown) of ROM 43 in step S1402; if it determines in step S1401 that the support mode is high-frequency support mode, it reads out the electric role hit/miss table (not shown) for high-frequency support mode from the electric role hit/miss table storage area (not shown) of ROM 43 in step S1403.

The pachinko machine 1 has multiple support modes that differ in the frequency with which the electric device 261 is set to the open state, thereby allowing game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

Specifically, the electric role win/loss table includes an electric role win/loss table for low frequency support mode (a group of electric role win/loss information for low frequency) and an electric role win/loss table for high frequency support mode (a group of electric role win/loss information for high frequency).
The MPU 42 compares these electric role winning/losing tables with the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443, thereby executing the electric role opening lottery.

These electric role winning/losing tables contain the results of multiple electric role opening lotteries (electric role winning/losing results), including "electric role opening winning" and "electric role opening losing results."
Specifically, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the value of the random number that results in "winning the electric role release" is 1. Therefore, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the probability of "winning the electric role release" is 1/251.
In contrast, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the value of the random number that results in an "electric role win" is 250. Therefore, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the probability of an "electric role win" is 250/251. Here, the value of the random number that results in an "electric role win" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode is included in the value of the random number that results in an "electric role win" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode.

The values and numbers of random numbers stored in each electric role win/loss table are arbitrary, as long as the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of "winning the electric role release" compared to the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the random number value for "winning the electric role release" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode does not have to include the random number value for "winning the electric role release" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode, and may include a portion of the random number value for "winning the electric role release" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode.

After executing the processing of step S1402 or step S1403, the MPU 42 executes an electric role win/loss determination process in step S1404. In this electric role win/loss determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the electric role release lottery (electric role win/loss result) by comparing the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of RAM 44 with the electric role win/loss table read out in step S1402 or step S1403. The electric role win/loss result is either an "electric role release win" or an "electric role release miss result," and this is the same whether the support mode is low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode.

In step S1405, the MPU 42 determines whether the result of the electric role determined in step S1404 is an "electric role opening win" or not.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S1405 that the electric role win result is "electric role release win", in step S1406, it executes a stop result setting process for the electric role release win. In this stop result setting process for the electric role release win, the MPU 42 stores information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 by referring to a stop result table for the electric role release win stored in advance in the ROM 43.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1405 that the electric role win/loss result is not an "electric role release win" (if it determines that the electric role release miss result) then in step S1407 it executes a stop result setting process for the electric role release miss result. In this stop result setting process for the electric role release miss result, the MPU 42 stores information relating to the pattern that will ultimately be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information relating to the pattern that will ultimately be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 by referencing a stop result table for the electric role release miss result that is pre-stored in ROM 43.

After executing the process of step S1406 or step S1407, the MPU 42 executes a process of setting the electric role display duration (electric role display duration period) in step S1408.
In the process of setting the electric role display duration, the MPU 42 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 42 determines that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, it determines the electric role display duration by referring to the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode stored in the ROM 43, and sets the determined electric role display duration in an electric role display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when the MPU 42 determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), it determines the electric role display duration by referring to the electric role display duration table for the low-frequency support mode stored in the ROM 43, and sets the determined electric role display duration in the electric role display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.

Here, the high-frequency support mode electric role display duration table is set to shorten the electric role display duration compared to the low-frequency support mode electric role display duration table. In other words, the electric role display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
In addition, the electric role display duration determined by referring to the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode is different from the electric role display duration determined by referring to the electric role display duration table for the low frequency support mode.
The electric role display duration may be configured not to change depending on the support mode. Also, the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode and the electric role display duration table for the low frequency support mode may be the same.

In step S1409, the MPU 42 sets a command for changing the electric role. This command for changing the electric role includes information related to the duration of the electric role display. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the command for changing the electric role set in step S1409 to the sound and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emitting control device 5 executes predetermined processing based on the electric role variation command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S1410, the MPU 42 causes the normal symbol display unit 35 to start variable display. The MPU 42 then terminates the electric role variable start process.

Returning to the explanation of the electric support processing, the processing from step S1205 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 151.
In step S1201, the MPU 42 determines whether the normal symbol display unit 35 is displaying a changing symbol, and if it determines that the normal symbol display unit 35 is displaying a changing symbol, it executes the processing from step S1205 onwards.

In step S1205, the MPU 42 determines whether the electric role display duration time set in step S1408 of the electric role variation start processing has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the value set in the electric role display duration counter in RAM 64 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this electric role display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1205 that the electric role display duration time has not elapsed, it executes electric role change display processing in step S1206. In this electric role change display processing, the MPU 42 updates the display of the normal symbol display unit 35 during the change display. The MPU 42 then terminates the electric role support processing.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1205 that the electric role display duration has elapsed, it executes electric role variation termination processing in step S1207. In this electric role variation termination processing, the MPU 42 identifies information (information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35) stored in RAM 44 in step S1406 or step S1407 of the electric role variation start processing executed when starting variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35. Then, at the end of the electric role game, the MPU 42 executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 so that the symbol corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 during variable display (electric role variation termination execution processing). The electric role variation termination processing will be described in detail later.

In step S1208, the MPU 42 sets an electric role variation end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the electric role variation end command set in step S1209 to the sound and light-emitting control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the electric role support processing.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 executes a process for ending the presentation of the electric role game round based on the electric role variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the sound and light emitting control device 5 may be configured to end the presentation of the electric role game round independently without needing to receive the electric role variation end command.

Figure 154 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric role change end processing.
In the electric utility fluctuation termination process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1501 to S1505 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the information stored in RAM 44 in step S1406 or step S1407 of the electric role variation start processing executed when starting variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35 (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35) is identified. Then, at the end of the electric role game, the MPU 42 executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 so that the pattern corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 during variable display (electric role variation end execution processing).

In step S1502, the MPU 42 determines whether the result of the electric role win is "electric role open win."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S1502 that the electric role win result is not "electric role open win", it ends the electric role variation end processing without executing the processing from step S1503 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1502 that the electric role win result is "electric role open win", it determines in step S1503 whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1503 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it executes a high-frequency electric role opening execution process in step S1504. In the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1503 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), it executes a low-frequency electric role release execution process in step S1505. In the low-frequency electric role release execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261.
After executing the high frequency electric role release execution process in step S1504 or the low frequency electric role release execution process in step S1505, the MPU 42 ends the electric role variation end process.

Here, compared to the low-frequency electric role release execution process, the high-frequency electric role release execution process sets the electric role 261 to the open state more often when the electric role release lottery is won, and the opening time for each electric role 261 to be set to the open state is also longer. Furthermore, in the high-frequency electric role release execution process, the closing time for setting the electric role 261 to the closed state between each opening in a single electric role open state is shorter than the opening time for each time.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the lower actuation port 26 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the upper actuation port 25 than the lower actuation port 26. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the lower actuation port 26 than the upper actuation port 25.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game without losing too many game balls.
In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1502 that the electric role win result is "electric role opening win", it executes the opening and closing process of the electric role device 261, rather than the opening and closing process of the large prize opening 271 for the opening and closing execution mode, or the opening and closing process of the special electric prize device 92 for the special electric opening and closing execution mode.
The opening and closing process of the electric role device 261 is executed whether in the opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the main display unit 34. Furthermore, when the electric role win/loss result is "electric role opening win", the MPU 42 does not shift to the win/loss lottery mode or the support mode after executing the opening and closing process of the electric role device 261, unlike when the win/loss result is "jackpot win".

<External signal output processing>
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the external signal output process.
In the external signal output process, the MPU 42 executes steps S3501 to S3505 as shown in FIG.
In step S3501, the MPU 42 determines whether a jackpot flag is set in the RAM 44. This jackpot flag is a flag for identifying the occurrence of a jackpot. The MPU 42 sets the jackpot flag at the start of the opening and closing execution mode or the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, and clears the jackpot flag at the end of the opening and closing execution mode or the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3501 that the big win flag is not set in the RAM 44, it executes the processing from step S3505 onwards, which will be described later.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3501 that the jackpot flag is set in the RAM 44, this indicates that a jackpot has occurred, and so executes the processing from step S3502 onwards to output an external signal.

In step S3502, the MPU 42 determines whether an open/close execution mode flag is set in the RAM 44. This open/close execution mode flag is a flag for identifying that the open/close execution mode is in progress. The MPU 42 sets the open/close execution mode flag at the start of the open/close execution mode, and clears the open/close execution mode flag at the end of the open/close execution mode.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S3502 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the RAM 44, it executes a jackpot signal output process in step S3503. In this jackpot signal output process, the MPU 42 transmits a jackpot signal to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X, indicating that the result of the jackpot has become "jackpot" and that the mode has been switched to the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S3502 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in RAM 44 (if it determines that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not set in RAM 44), it executes V winning signal output processing in step S3504. In this V winning signal output processing, the MPU 42 transitions to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, and transmits a V winning signal, which is a specific signal indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning port 921, which is a specific ball entry portion, to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X. Therefore, in this case, the MPU 42 does not transmit a jackpot signal, indicating that the result has become a "jackpot win" and that the mode has been transitioned to the opening/closing execution mode, to the hall computer via the external terminal 40X.

After executing the processing of step S3503 or step S3504, or if it is determined in step S3501 that the jackpot flag has not been set in RAM 44, the MPU 42 executes other signal output processing in step S3505. In other signal output processing, the MPU 42 transmits to the hall computer via external terminal 40X a fluctuation start signal indicating that the fluctuation display has been executed, a mode signal indicating the win/lose lottery mode or support mode, and signals indicating various states of the pachinko machine 1. Thereafter, the MPU 42 terminates the external signal output processing.

Here, in the gaming parlor, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a data display device installed next to this pachinko machine 1. This data display device is connected to the hall computer in the same way as the pachinko machine 1. The hall computer collects various game data by referring to external signals output from the pachinko machine 1, controls the display of the data display based on this game data, and provides various information to the gaming parlor manager and players. Then, for example, the gaming parlor manager monitors players for cheating based on the information displayed on the data display device, and players decide which pachinko machine 1 to play on.
However, if the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game that can be easily entered by the player simply by aiming the game ball at a specific path, is uniformly treated as a jackpot in the same way as the opening and closing execution mode, the meaning of the game data will be lost, and there is a problem that the game facility manager and the player will not be able to make effective use of the game data.
In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 outputs a jackpot signal when it executes the opening and closing execution mode as a profitable game, and does not output a jackpot signal when it executes the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, as a profitable game.Therefore, the hall computer that monitors the signal output at the external terminal 40X can reliably count the number of times the opening and closing execution mode is executed, excluding the number of times the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is executed, by monitoring the output of the jackpot signal.
Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 executes the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game as a profitable game, it outputs a V winning signal, which is a specific signal that can be identified as being different from when the opening and closing execution mode is executed.Therefore, the hall computer that monitors the signal output at the external terminal 40X can reliably count the number of times the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is executed, excluding the number of times the opening and closing execution mode is executed, by monitoring the output of the V winning signal, which is a specific signal.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that of the main reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the performance determination processing differs from that of the main reference embodiment. The details of the performance determination processing in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times that are specific ball entry game execution units, presentations for open/close execution modes, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 156. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the main reference embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2414X to S2419X before executing the process of step S2413.

In step S2414X, the MPU 52 determines whether a V winning command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414X that it has not received a V winning command, it executes processing from step S2417X onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414X that it has received a V winning command, it executes a process of determining a V winning effect in step S2415X. In the process of determining a V winning effect, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above, in order to notify that a gaming ball has entered the V winning hole 921, which is a specific ball entry portion.

In step S2416X, the MPU 52 sets a V prize command. The MPU 52 then stores the V prize command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This V prize command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the V winning command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the V winning effect, which is execution start information, on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the V winning effect, which is execution start information.

After executing the processing of step S2416X, or if it determines in step S2414X that a V winning command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2417X whether a reset command has been received.

If it is determined in step S2417X that the reset command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S2413 onwards, as in the main reference embodiment.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2417X that it has received a reset command, it executes a process of determining a reset effect in step S2418X. In the process of determining a reset effect, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process (profit game) of step S2004 described above, in order to notify that the predetermined number of game times (600 times in this embodiment) that must be consumed to generate the game state of "ceiling time reduction," which is the game state after consumption, has been initialized.

In step S2419X, the MPU 52 sets a reset command. The MPU 52 then stores the reset command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This reset command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the reset command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing a reset effect, which is execution end information, on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a reset effect, which is execution end information.

After executing the processing of step S2419X, or if it determines in step S2417X that a reset command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2413 onwards, as in the main reference embodiment.

<About the occurrence of the "Ceiling Time Reduction" game state and the subsequent flow>
Figure 157 shows the display screen of the pattern display device, the special power operating port, and the special power winning device before the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state occurs.
157, the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of the plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variable start command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols, which are execution start information, by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, based on the variation end command sent from MPU 42, MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of play times that have been played after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. In the example of Figure 157, based on the variation end command sent from MPU 42, MPU 62 displays "GAME 590" in the lower right position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby notifying the player that the number of play times that have been played after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is 590.

Here, each time the MPU 42 executes the game play control process, it updates the value of the number of times played counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of RAM 44 by adding 1. Furthermore, when the opening and closing execution mode ends or when the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, ends, the MPU 42 sets the value of the number of times played counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of RAM 44 to "0". Therefore, the value of the number of times played counter, which is the number of times played at the end of the opening and closing execution mode or the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is initialized after the opening and closing execution mode ends or the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game. The MPU 42 then transmits a variation end command containing information related to the value of this number of times played counter to the audio and light emission control device 5.

Furthermore, based on the variation end command sent from MPU 42, MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of play times that must be completed to trigger the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Here, MPU 42 sends a variation end command including information related to the value of the game counter GC described above to the sound and light emission control device 5. This value of the game counter GC directly indicates the number of play times that must be completed to trigger the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state. In the example of Figure 157, based on the variation end command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 displays "10 play times left until ceiling" in the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby notifying the player that 10 play times are required to trigger the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state.

Then, when the number of play times required to enter the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, has been completed, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to high-frequency support mode and transitions to the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state. This "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, is the same game state as the "time reduction" game state (non-compatible game state) except for the termination reference number. The MPU 42 also sets the value of the play count counter provided in the various counter area 441 of RAM 44 to "950", sets the number of play limit flag in RAM 44, and sets the ceiling time reduction flag in RAM 44.

Figure 158 shows the display screen of the pattern display device, the special power operating port, and the special power winning device after the "ceiling time reduction" game state occurs.
As shown in FIG. 158, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of play times consumed after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, by displaying the number of play times consumed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. In the example of FIG. 158, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the number of play times consumed after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is 650 by displaying "GAME 650" in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. In other words, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the number of play times consumed after the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is a post-consumption game state, is generated is 50.

Furthermore, when a "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is a post-consumption game state, is generated, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of game plays up to the termination reference number set in the game play counter (950 in this embodiment) by displaying the number of game plays up to the termination reference number on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the MPU 42 transmits a variable end command including information related to the value of the game play counter described above to the sound and light emission control device 5. The value of this game play counter directly indicates the number of game plays up to the termination of the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is a post-consumption game state. In the example of FIG. 158, the MPU 62 notifies the player that there are 900 game plays up to the termination of the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is a post-consumption game state, by displaying "900 time reduction plays remaining" in the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 42.

Then, when the reference number of play times set in the play count counter (950 times in this example) has been played and the display of the number of play times has ended, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to low-frequency support mode and transitions to the "normal" play state (post-play state).

Figure 159 shows the display screen of the pattern display device, the special power operating port, and the special power winning device after the end of the "ceiling time reduction" game state.
As shown in FIG. 159, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of play times consumed after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, by displaying the number of play times consumed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. In the example of FIG. 159, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the number of play times consumed after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is 1,560 by displaying "GAME 1560" in the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. In other words, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the number of play times consumed after the end of the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is a post-consumption game state, is 10.

In addition, when the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state, which is the post-consumption gaming state, is terminated, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to low frequency support mode by not displaying any information in the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby notifying the player that the gaming state has transitioned to "normal."

When the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, is terminated, the ceiling time reduction flag is set in RAM 44. Therefore, regardless of the number of subsequent game plays, MPU 42 is in a ceiling non-occurrence state (a "ceiling time reduction skip" game state (non-compatible game state)) in which the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, is not generated. This ceiling non-occurrence state is reset after the opening and closing execution mode ends, or after the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, ends.

Furthermore, if the number of game times consumed after the end of the opening and closing execution mode or the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, exceeds 1,550, which is the total of the predetermined number of game times that must be consumed to generate the game state of ``ceiling time reduction'', which is the game state after consumption, and 950, which is the standard number of game times to end the game state of ``ceiling time reduction'', which is the game state after consumption, it functions as non-compatible information regarding the game state of ``ceiling time reduction through'', which is an incompatible game state, and the player can reliably confirm the game state of ``ceiling time reduction through'', which is an incompatible game state.
Below, we will explain the transition to the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific entry game, and the subsequent flow.

<Transition to special power switching execution mode and subsequent flow>
Figure 160 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device, the special electric operation port, and the special electric winning device when a game ball enters the special electric operation port.
The player rotates the launch handle 16 to a moderate degree to hit the ball in the right-hand hitting direction (second direction), shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby guiding the game ball to the special electric operating port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, and the special electric winning device 92, which is an opening and closing ball entry portion, and can play a right-hand hitting game (second game) in which the game ball wins at the special electric operating port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, as shown in Figure 160 (see downward arrow in Figure 160).

Figure 161 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device, the special electric operation port, and the special electric winning device after the game ball has entered the special electric operation port.
When a gaming ball enters the special electric operation port 91, which is a specific route ball entry port, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for the special electric operation port, which is a specific opening execution unit of step S106X. Then, as shown in FIG. 161, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the special electric entry drive unit 924, thereby setting the opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing unit, to an open state in which the gaming ball can enter.
Here, the MPU 42 specifies the maximum duration of the specific opening/closing door 923, which is set to an open state, before it is set to a closed state again, at 0.8 seconds. Therefore, since the maximum duration of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening/closing ball entry unit, is longer than the game ball launch cycle, it is possible for approximately one or two game balls to enter the V winning hole 921 or the normal winning hole 922, which are specific ball entry units. Note that in the example of Figure 161, the game ball has entered the V winning hole 921, which is the specific ball entry unit.
Below, we will explain the process that occurs after a game ball enters the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry area.

Figure 162 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device, the special electric operating port, and the special electric winning device when a game ball enters the V winning port.
When a game ball enters the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry area, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V entry port 921, which is a specific entry area, by displaying a V entry effect, which is execution start information that displays the letter "V" on the entire display screen G of the pattern display device 36, based on the V entry command sent from the MPU 52, as shown in FIG. 162.

In addition, by executing the special electric winning device opening and closing process in step S3207, the MPU 42 transitions to a special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific winning game in which two special electric round games are played.
Here, the MPU 42 specifies the maximum duration of 2 seconds for the specific opening/closing door 923, which is the specific opening/closing part, after it has been set to the open state during one special electric round game, until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, since the maximum duration of the special electric winning device 92, which is the opening/closing ball entry part, is longer than the game ball launch cycle, it is possible for about 2 to 3 game balls to enter the V winning hole 921 or the normal winning hole 922, which are the specific ball entry parts.

Then, when the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is ended, the MPU 42 executes the transition process at the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode in step S3211, thereby clearing the ceiling time reduction flag stored in RAM 44 and setting the value of the game counter GC provided in the various counter areas 441 of RAM 44 to "600".
In this way, the predetermined number of play times (600 times in this reference form) that must be consumed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" play state, which is the play state after consumption, will be initialized at the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry play.

Figure 163 shows the display screen of the pattern display device, the special electric operating port, and the special electric winning device after the special electric opening and closing execution mode has ended.
As shown in FIG. 163, based on the reset command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays an angel character in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and displays a reset effect, which is execution completion information in which the angel character says "Reset successful!", thereby notifying the player that the predetermined number of game plays required to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-play game state, has been initialized. Therefore, when the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is completed, the display of the angel character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 also functions as execution completion information regarding the game state corresponding to the completion of the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game. The display of this angel character is configured to be erased when one game play is completed.

Furthermore, based on the variation end command transmitted from MPU 42, MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of play times consumed after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, by displaying the number of play times consumed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. In the example of FIG. 163, based on the variation end command transmitted from MPU 42, MPU 62 notifies the player that the number of play times consumed after the end of the open/close execution mode or the end of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is 0 by displaying "GAME 0" in the lower right position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Therefore, when the execution of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, is terminated, the display of "GAME 0" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 also functions as execution end information regarding the game status corresponding to the end of the execution of the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game. This "GAME 0" display is configured to increase in value and remain displayed on the symbol display device 36 until the next opening and closing execution mode ends, or until the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, ends; in other words, until at least a predetermined number of games have been played.

Furthermore, based on the variation end command transmitted from MPU 42, MPU 62 notifies the player of the number of play times that must be completed to trigger the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. In the example of FIG. 163, based on the variation end command transmitted from MPU 42, MPU 62 notifies the player that the number of play times that must be completed to trigger the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, is 600 by displaying "600 play times left until the ceiling" in the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Therefore, when the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is the specific ball entry game, is terminated, the display of "600 play times left until the ceiling" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 also functions as execution end information regarding the game state corresponding to the end of the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is the specific ball entry game. This "600 spins until the ceiling" message is displayed on the symbol display device 36 while decreasing in value until the next opening and closing execution mode ends, or until the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, ends; in other words, until at least a predetermined number of games have been played.

Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, or after the special electric opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, ends, the ceiling time reduction flag is cleared from RAM 44. Therefore, when the MPU 42 has played the number of times required to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, it enters a ceiling generation state in which the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, can be generated. If the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, is generated and then the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state, is terminated, this ceiling generation state will transition to a ceiling non-generation state (a "ceiling time reduction skip" game state (non-compatible game state)).

Here, a player who is not familiar with the specifications of the gaming machine of the present invention, which can reset the number of play times that need to be completed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the game state after consumption, based on the player's will, may start playing by mistakenly determining the number of play times that need to be completed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the game state after consumption, based on the information from the data display device installed next to the pachinko machine 1, without realizing that the number of play times that need to be completed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the game state after consumption, has been reset.
In contrast, when the pachinko machine 1 finishes the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, it displays execution completion information regarding the game state corresponding to the completion of the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a specific ball entry game, on the pattern display device 36.Therefore, by visually checking the execution completion information displayed on the pattern display device 36, the player can reliably confirm that the number of game plays that need to be played to generate the game state of ``ceiling time reduction'', which is the game state after consumption, has been reset.
Furthermore, a third party before starting to play on the pachinko machine 1 can visually check the execution completion information displayed on the pattern display device 36 to reliably confirm that the number of play times that must be completed to generate the "ceiling time reduction" play state, which is the play state after completion, has been reset, making it easier to decide whether or not to start playing on the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, in this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of switching the control state for the electric device 261 and executing the "ceiling time reduction" game state, which is the post-consumption game state (specific game state), when the number of times a predetermined variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number without generating an opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, in this reference form, the special electric operating port 91 functions as a specific path ball entry port (first ball entry means) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball fired in a second direction with a predetermined firing force flows down a specific path, and the special electric winning device 92 functions as an opening/closing ball entry section (second ball entry means) having an opening/closing door 923, which is a specific opening/closing section (opening/closing switching means) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a V winning port 921, which is a specific ball entry section (specific ball entry area).

In addition, in this reference form, the winning processing for the special electric activation port in step S106X functions as a specific opening execution unit (opening execution means) that causes the specific opening/closing unit to open for a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the specific route ball entry port.
In addition, in this reference form, the processing for the special electric winning device in step S316X functions as a specific ball entry game execution unit (specific game execution means) that executes a specific ball entry game (specific period game) for a specific period different from the opening/closing execution mode as a profitable game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry section while the specific opening/closing section is open for a predetermined period.
The pachinko machine 1 is configured to change the control state from the first control state to the second control state corresponding to the post-consumption game state when the execution of a predetermined specific ball entry game is completed in the "ceiling time-reduction through" game state, which is a non-corresponding game state (predetermined game state) that is a first control state in which the control state of the electric device 261 does not correspond to the post-consumption game state.

With this configuration, a player can cause the specific opening/closing section to open for a predetermined period by placing a gaming ball in the specific ball entry port, and can cause the gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry port while the specific opening/closing section is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a specific ball entry game for a specific period by placing a gaming ball in the specific ball entry port. When the pachinko machine 1 completes the execution of a predetermined specific ball entry game in a non-compatible game state, which is a first control state in which the control state of the electric device 261 does not correspond to the post-consumer game state, the control state changes from the first control state to a second control state corresponding to the post-consumer game state. Therefore, a player can change the control state of the electric device 261 from the first control state to the second control state by firing the gaming ball in the second direction with a predetermined firing force and causing the gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry port. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can enhance the player's enjoyment by optimally transitioning between multiple game states.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with an external terminal 40X (signal output means) that can output a signal corresponding to the game status to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. This external terminal 40X is configured to output a jackpot signal (special signal) when the open/close execution mode is executed as a profit game, and not to output a jackpot signal (special signal) when a specific ball entry game is executed as a profit game.

With this configuration, the external terminal 40X outputs a jackpot signal when the open/close execution mode is executed as a profitable game, and does not output a jackpot signal when the specific ball entry game is executed as a profitable game. Therefore, by monitoring the output of the jackpot signal, an external device that monitors the signal output by the external terminal 40X can reliably count the number of times the open/close execution mode is executed, excluding the number of times the specific ball entry game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means (display control device 6) for displaying, when the execution of a specific ball entry game is completed, the number of play times that have been completed after the completion of the specific ball entry game on the symbol display device 36 as execution completion information (game status information) regarding the game status corresponding to the completion of the execution of the specific ball entry game.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means for displaying execution end information regarding the game state corresponding to the end of the execution of the specific ball entry game on the symbol display device 36 when the execution of the specific ball entry game has ended. Therefore, by visually checking the execution end information displayed on the symbol display device 36, the player can reliably confirm, for example, that the control state of the electric device 261 has been changed from the first control state to the second control state.

In this embodiment, the execution end information is configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 36 until the next open/close execution mode ends, or until the specific ball entry game ends; in other words, until at least a predetermined number of game plays have been played.

With this configuration, the execution end information is displayed on the symbol display device 36 until at least the predetermined number of play times have been played. Therefore, by visually checking the execution end information displayed on the symbol display device 36 not only when the execution of the specific ball entry game has ended, but also after play times have been played, the player can reliably confirm, for example, that the control state of the electric device 261 has been changed from the first control state to the second control state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with an external terminal 40X (signal output means) that can output a signal according to the game status to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. This external terminal 40X is configured to output a V winning signal as a specific signal (identification signal) that can be identified as being different from when the open/close execution mode is executed when a specific ball entry game is executed as a profit game.

With this configuration, when a specific ball entry game is executed as a profit game, the external terminal 40X outputs a specific signal that can be identified as being different from when the open/close execution mode is executed. Therefore, an external device that monitors the signal output from the external terminal 40X can reliably count the number of times the specific ball entry game is executed, excluding the number of times the open/close execution mode is executed, by monitoring the output of the specific signal.

In addition, this reference embodiment is equipped with a variable winning device 27 (third ball winning means) that enters a specific open/close state in the open/close execution mode. This variable winning device 27 is different from the open/close winning section.

With this configuration, the variable winning device 27, which enters a specific open/closed state in the open/close execution mode, is different from the open/close winning section, so the player can enjoy the game comfortably by being aware of the open/close winning section during the specific winning game and the variable winning device 27 during the open/close execution mode.

In this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of aiming at the special electric winning device 92 by rotating the launch handle 16 to a medium amount and hitting in the right-hand hitting direction (second direction), and is capable of aiming at the variable winning device 27 by rotating the launch handle 16 to the maximum amount and hitting in the right-hand hitting direction (second direction).
In contrast to this, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured so that both the special electric winning device 92 and the variable winning device 27 can be targeted by either a center hit or a right hit. In this case, for example, by adjusting the arrangement of the nails, the machine may be configured so that the game ball is more likely to enter the variable winning device 27 than the special electric winning device 92.

In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has the second ball entry means as a special electric winning device 92 and the third ball entry means as a variable winning device 27.
In contrast to this, the pachinko machine 1 may have the second ball entry means as the variable entry device 27. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 may have the open/close switching means as the open/close door 272, and the specific ball entry area as the large entry opening 271. In other words, the gaming machine may have a entry device that serves as both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the variable winning device 27 is located downstream of the specific route ball entry port and is configured to be reachable when flowing down the specific route.

With this configuration, the variable winning device 27 is located downstream of the specific path entrance and can be reached by flowing down the specific path, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited playing area formed on the game board 2X.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the duration for which the variable winning device 27 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode (0.17 seconds or 30 seconds in this reference embodiment) is configured to be set to a time longer than the duration for which the specific opening/closing section is opened for a predetermined period of time (0.8 seconds in this reference embodiment).

With this configuration, the duration for which the variable winning device 27 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the specific opening/closing section is opened for a predetermined period of time, allowing the player to enjoy the special game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 pays out one prize ball based on a game ball entering the V prize opening 921, and pays out one prize ball based on a game ball entering the normal prize opening 922. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that when a specific number of game balls are fired toward a specific path in a non-compatible game state, the number of profit game balls that a player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that if a game ball is fired toward a specific path in a non-compatible game state, the number of game balls cannot be increased, preventing a situation where the player has a significant advantage and the gameplay is disrupted.

As mentioned above, if the pachinko machine 1 is configured to adjust the arrangement of the nails so that game balls are more likely to enter the variable winning device 27 than the special electric winning device 92, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to pay out two or more prize balls based on the game ball entering the V winning port 921, as long as it is configured so that game balls cannot be increased when they are fired toward a specific path in the "ceiling time-saving through" game mode.

As mentioned above, if the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the second ball entry means is the variable entry device 27, the pachinko machine 1 may award one prize ball for opening the variable entry device 27 as the second ball entry means, and 15 prize balls for opening the variable entry device 27 as the second ball entry means.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes processing in step S3001 in the winning processing for the special electric activation port in step S106X, and is equipped with means (main control device 4) for setting the specific opening/closing section so that it will not open for a specified period of time in response to a ball that has entered the specific route ball entry port while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed as a profitable game.

With this configuration, if a specific game ball enters a specific route ball entrance while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed as a profit game, a setting means is provided to prevent the specific opening and closing section from being opened for a specific period of time in response to this ball. This allows the player to enjoy the opening and closing execution mode without worrying about the specific opening and closing section being opened.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means (main control device 4) for opening the specific opening/closing section for a predetermined period of time when a gaming ball enters the specific route ball entry port while the variable display is being executed based on the establishment of a start condition during the winning process for the special electric activation port in step S106X.

With this configuration, if a gaming ball enters the specific route entrance while the variable display is being executed based on the establishment of the start condition, a means is provided for opening the specific opening/closing section for a predetermined period of time. This allows the player to open the specific opening/closing section for a predetermined period of time by having a gaming ball enter the specific route entrance without having to worry about the variable display being executed.

In addition, in this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 has a low probability mode (first probability) and a high probability mode (second probability) that is higher than the low probability mode as the probability of executing the opening and closing execution mode as a profitable game based on the results of the variable display. Furthermore, in the transition process at the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode in step S3211, the low probability mode and high probability mode are configured based on the execution of a specific ball entry game and are not changed before or after this specific ball entry game.

With this configuration, the low probability mode and high probability mode are configured based on the execution of the specific ball entry game and are not changed before or after the specific ball entry game. Therefore, the probability of executing the open/close execution mode as a profit game based on the results of the variable display does not change from the start to the end of the specific ball entry game, allowing players to enjoy the specific ball entry game with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means (display control device 6) for displaying on the symbol display device 36 the number of play times consumed after the end of a specific ball entry game as non-compatible information (predetermined game state information) regarding the non-compatible game state.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means for displaying non-compatible information regarding the non-compatible game state on the symbol display device 36, so the player can reliably confirm the non-compatible game state by visually checking the non-compatible information displayed on the symbol display device 36.

In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 does not have a means for withholding game balls from entering a specific path ball entry port while a specific ball entry game is being played, but it may have such a means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means for holding game balls from entering a specific path ball entry port while a specific ball entry game is being played, making it possible to hold game balls from entering a specific path ball entry port while a specific ball entry game is being played, allowing the player to enjoy the game comfortably.

Furthermore, in this reference form, the duration of the specific period in the specific ball entry game (2 seconds in this reference form) is configured to be set to a time longer than the duration (0.8 seconds in this reference form) required to open the specific opening/closing section for a predetermined period.

With this configuration, the duration of the specific period in a specific ball entry game can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the specific opening/closing section is opened for a predetermined period, so the pachinko machine 1 can increase the level of attention paid to the execution of the specific ball entry game.

In this embodiment, the duration of the specific period in the specific ball entry game is set to a fixed duration, but it may also be configured to be set based on the results of a predetermined duration lottery.

With this configuration, the duration of the specific period in a specific ball entry game is set based on the results of a predetermined duration lottery, so players will pay attention to the results of the predetermined duration lottery, and pachinko machine 1 can increase players' interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the execution of a specific ball entry game is started, a means (display control device 6) is provided for displaying on the symbol display device 36 a V winning effect, which is execution start information (start information) that displays the letter "V" across the entire display screen G as execution start information (start information) to notify the player that the execution of the specific ball entry game has begun.

With this configuration, when the execution of a specific ball entry game begins, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a means for displaying execution start information on the symbol display device 36 to notify the player that the execution of the specific ball entry game has begun. This allows the player to recognize the start of the execution of the specific ball entry game and ensures that the player can enjoy the specific ball entry game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) A player can cause the opening/closing door 923 to open for a predetermined period by inserting a game ball into the special electric operation port 91, and can cause the game ball to enter the V winning port 921 while the opening/closing door 923 is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a special electric opening/closing execution mode for a specific period by inserting a game ball into the V winning port 921. When the pachinko machine 1 completes the execution of a predetermined special electric opening/closing execution mode in a "ceiling time reduction through" gaming state, which is a first control state in which the control state of the electric device 261 does not correspond to the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state, the control state changes from the first control state to a second control state corresponding to the "ceiling time reduction" gaming state. Therefore, a player can change the control state of the electric device 261 from the first control state to the second control state by firing a game ball in a second direction with a predetermined firing force and inserting the game ball into the special electric operation port 91. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's interest by suitably moving between multiple game states.

(2) The external terminal 40X outputs a jackpot signal when the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a profitable game, and does not output a jackpot signal when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed as a profitable game. Therefore, an external device that monitors the signal output from the external terminal 40X can reliably count the number of times the opening/closing execution mode is executed, excluding the number of times the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, by monitoring the output of the jackpot signal.
(3) When the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode is completed, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a means for displaying on the pattern display device 36 the number of play times that have been completed after the end of the opening and closing execution mode or after the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, as information regarding the game status corresponding to the end of the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode.Therefore, by visually checking the number of play times that have been completed displayed on the pattern display device 36, the player can reliably confirm, for example, that the control state of the electric device 261 has been changed from the first control state to the second control state.
(4) The number of times that a game has been played is displayed on the pattern display device 36 until at least a predetermined number of times of play have been played. Therefore, the player can reliably confirm that, for example, the control state of the electric device 261 has been changed from the first control state to the second control state by visually checking the number of times that a game has been played displayed on the pattern display device 36 not only when the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode has ended but also after the game has been played.

(5) When the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed as a profit-making game, the external terminal 40X outputs a V winning signal that can be identified as being different from when the opening/closing execution mode is executed.Therefore, an external device that monitors the signal output from the external terminal 40X can reliably count the number of times the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, excluding the number of times the opening/closing execution mode is executed, by monitoring the output of the V winning signal.
(6) The variable winning device 27, which is in a specific open/close state in the opening/closing execution mode, is different from the opening/closing door 923 of the special electric winning device 92. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game comfortably while being aware of the opening/closing door 923 of the special electric winning device 92 during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and while being aware of the variable winning device 27 during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode.
(7) The variable winning device 27 is located downstream of the special electric operating port 91 and can be reached by flowing down a specific path, so that the limited playing area formed on the game board 2X can be effectively utilized.
(8) The duration for which the variable winning device 27 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the opening/closing door 923 of the special winning device 92 is opened for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can enjoy the special game state with peace of mind.

(9) The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that when a game ball is shot toward a specific path in the “ceiling time-shortening through” game state, the number of game balls cannot be increased, thereby preventing a situation in which the player has a significant advantage and the gameplay is destroyed.
(10) When a predetermined game ball enters the special electric operating port 91 while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed as a profit game, a means is provided for setting the opening/closing door 923 not to be opened for a predetermined period in response to the ball, so that the player can enjoy the opening/closing execution mode without worrying about the opening/closing door 923 being opened.
(11) Based on the establishment of the starting condition, if a game ball enters the special electric operating port 91 while the variable display is being executed, a means is provided for causing the opening and closing door 923 to open for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player can cause the opening and closing door 923 to open for a predetermined period of time by causing a game ball to enter the special electric operating port 91 without worrying about the execution of the variable display.

(12) The low probability mode and the high probability mode are configured based on the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode so as not to be changed before and after the special electric opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, the probability of executing the opening and closing execution mode as a profit game based on the result of the variable display does not change from the start to the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, and the player can enjoy the special electric opening and closing execution mode with peace of mind.
(13) The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a means for displaying on the pattern display device 36, as information regarding the gaming status of the “ceiling time-shortening through,” the number of game times that have been played after the end of the opening/closing execution mode or the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, so that the player can reliably confirm the gaming status of the “ceiling time-shortening through.” by visually checking the number of game times that have been played displayed on the pattern display device 36.

(14) The duration of the specific period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode can be set to a time longer than the duration for opening the opening/closing door 923 of the special electric winning device 92 for a predetermined period, so that the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention paid to the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode.
(15) When the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode is started, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a means for displaying on the pattern display device 36 a performance for winning a V prize, in which the letter "V" is displayed on the entire display screen G as information to notify the player that the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode has started. Therefore, the player can recognize that the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode has started and can enjoy the special electric opening and closing execution mode with certainty.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described and parts that have the same function but are different in shape or arrangement will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), a predetermined lottery such as a jackpot lottery is executed and a variable display of pictures is initiated. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static manner and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls by, for example, transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are provided with movable means (for example, movable devices for performance purposes provided around the liquid crystal display device) that are installed in the gaming area and capable of performing predetermined operations, and the movable means is configured to be able to control its operating state based on a predetermined signal. The gaming machine enhances the player's interest by switching the operating state of the movable means.

As a result, in such gaming machines, when smooth switching of the operating state of the movable means is desired, the gaming machine can cause players to feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, which comprises:
A starting ball entry means provided in the game area;
a lottery means for executing a lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display on a predetermined display means provided in the gaming area in accordance with the result of the lottery;
A movable means provided in the play area and capable of performing a predetermined action;
A gaming machine comprising: a second means for controlling the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from the first means connected thereto;
the movable means includes at least a drive unit and a movable unit that is movable by the drive unit, and is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on the movable unit while the variable display is being performed on the predetermined display means;
the series of operations includes at least a first operation in which the movable part, which is located at an initial position, moves from the initial position to a drive position, and a second operation in which the movable part, which is located at the drive position, moves to the initial position;
The second means is
a processing means for executing a setting process for setting predetermined information in a storage means based on the predetermined signal from the first means;
a determining means for determining whether a switching condition used to switch the operating state of the movable means has occurred based on the information stored in the storage means,
the determining means performs the determination each time control for ending the second operation in the series of operations is executed,
This gaming machine is
Based on the determination by the determination means,
A case where the operating state of the movable means is continued in a first state in which the series of operations is performed;
transitioning an operating state of the movable means from the first state in which the series of operations is performed to a second state in which the movable means is controlled in a manner different from the first state,
This gaming machine is
a light-emitting means that can emit light when at least the movable portion is located at the initial position;
The light emitting means is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the gaming machine even when the movable part is located at the initial position.

This type of gaming machine allows the operating state of the movable means to be smoothly switched.

Specifically, in conventional gaming machines, for example, an audio and light control device that is provided in the gaming area and controls the reels, various lamps, speakers, etc. that can perform predetermined operations controls the drive of the reels, various lamps, speakers, etc. based on commands from a display control device that controls the variable display of images, etc. In other words, in the audio and light control device, the operation content and operation timing of the reels, various lamps, speakers, etc. follow commands determined by the display control device.

This is because if the audio and light control device were configured to determine the presentation during the changing display and send the content of this presentation to the display control device, for example, to generate a preview display such as displaying a specific character as a moving image on the display screen during the changing display, the load on the audio and light control device would become excessive, along with the drive control of the props, various lamps, speakers, etc., so the decision on the presentation during the changing display is left to the display control device.

However, as a presentation during the variable display, for example, by controlling the operating state of the device, it moves from the initial position to the drive position, remains stationary at the drive position for different periods of time depending on the degree of expectation, and then repeats a series of actions of moving from the drive position to the initial position, and if the degree of expectation of this presentation is changed, there is a problem that the player may misunderstand the degree of expectation of the presentation.
This is because the display control device decides to change the expectation level without checking the operating status of the reels and sends a command corresponding to this decision to the audio and light emitting control device. If the audio and light emitting control device immediately changes the expectation level in accordance with this command, for example, if it executes a performance with a certain expectation level and starts executing a performance with a different expectation level while moving from the drive position to the initial position, the appearance of these performances will be disrupted, and the player may not be able to correctly recognize the expectation level of the performance, which could cause a sense of discomfort.

In contrast, with the gaming machine of the present invention, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the presentation each time control is executed to end a series of operations, and the presentation is changed based on this determination, allowing for smooth switching of the operation state of the reels.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the various configurations may be embodied in any manner and are not limited to the embodiments.
For example, the lottery means may be any means capable of executing a lottery when a gaming ball enters a start-entry means provided in the gaming area, as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention. For example, the lottery means may be a win/lose lottery that can be executed when a gaming ball enters an operating port, a crane lottery that can be executed when a gaming ball enters a crane, an electric accessory opening lottery that can be executed when a gaming ball enters a through gate, or a V winning lottery that can be executed when a gaming ball enters a accessory.

Furthermore, for example, the variation means may be any means that displays a variation on a predetermined display means provided in the gaming area in response to the lottery results, as long as it is possible to achieve the spirit of the present invention. For example, the variation means may be a display control process that displays a variation on a pattern display device, a dot display control process that displays a variation on a dot display device, an electric role support process that displays a variation on a normal pattern display unit, or a segment control process that displays a variation on a segment lamp.

Furthermore, the moving means may be any means provided in the game area that is capable of performing a predetermined action, as long as it is capable of realizing the spirit of the present invention. For example, the moving means may be a movable device capable of performing a predetermined action, an electric device capable of performing a predetermined action, a blade capable of performing a predetermined action, or a variable winning device capable of performing a predetermined action. In short, the moving means must include at least a drive unit and a movable part that is moved by the drive unit, and be configured so that the movable part can repeatedly perform a series of actions while a variable display is being displayed on the predetermined display means.

The second means may be any means capable of controlling the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from the connected first means, as long as it is capable of realizing the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be an audio and light control device capable of controlling the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from a display control device, an audio and light control device capable of controlling the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from a main control device, an audio and light control device capable of controlling the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from a gaming ball detection sensor, or a main control device capable of controlling the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from a gaming ball detection sensor. In other words, the first means and second means may be any combination of devices.

The series of movements may be any movement that achieves the spirit of the present invention, as long as it includes at least a first movement in which the movable part, located in the initial position, moves from the initial position to the drive position, and a second movement in which the movable part, located in the drive position, moves back and forth to the initial position. For example, the series of movements may be an up-and-down movement, a forward/backward/left-right forward/backward movement, an opening/closing movement, a pendulum movement, or a rotational movement.

The light-emitting means may be any means capable of emitting light at least when the movable part is in the initial position, as long as it is capable of realizing the spirit of the present invention. For example, the light-emitting means may be a light-emitting diode or lamp unit for various effects, a hold lamp unit, a liquid crystal display device, a dot display device, or a segmented lamp. The light-emitting means may be provided in the game area, on the center frame or special device, or on a front door frame other than the game board, or in any other position on the gaming machine.

An example for realizing the above invention will be described below based on a specific configuration.
In addition, this gaming machine is equipped with a starting ball entry port as the starting ball entry means of the present invention, a lottery process as the lottery means, a lottery result display unit as the display means, a variable unit as the variable means, a movable body as the movable means, a first control unit as the first means, a second control unit as the second means, a control signal as the predetermined signal, a movable body drive unit as the drive unit, a movable body main body unit as the movable part, a second control memory unit as the memory means, a second control processing unit as the processing means, a second control discrimination unit as the discrimination means, and a light-emitting body as the light-emitting means.

In this embodiment, which is an example of the present invention, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a game board that is different from the game board 2 in the main reference embodiment. The game board in this embodiment will be described below.

Figure 164 is a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in Figure 164, the game board 2Y has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned game area is formed on the game board 2Y so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. Almost the entire game area can be seen from the front through the window portion 122 (see Figure 1).
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 23 guides game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 (see Figure 168) when the player rotates the launch handle 16 (see Figure 1) to the top of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit is located on one side of the play area and faces the top center of the play area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the play area shifts from the side where the exit of the guide rail 23 is located to the opposite side as the player rotates the launch handle 16 more. In this embodiment, the exit of the guide rail 23 is located on the left side of the play area.

The game board 2Y has multiple large and small openings in the game area that are formed by routing to penetrate the game board in the front-to-back direction. Each opening on the game board 2Y is equipped with a general winning opening (not shown), an upper operating opening (first starting ball opening) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball opening) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an outlet 28. The game board 2Y also has through gates 31 on the left and right sides of the center, a main display device 32 on the upper right, and a variable display unit 33 in the center. The game board 2Y also has numerous nails NL planted in the game area to appropriately disperse or adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, as well as various other components (gimmicks) such as windmills.

The general winning opening, the upper actuation opening 25 (starting ball opening), the lower actuation opening 26 (starting ball opening), and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 27 each have detection sensors 301-304 (see Figure 168) that detect the entry of game balls. These detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the gaming board 2Y. Specifically, the general winning opening has detection sensor 301, the upper actuation opening 25 (starting ball opening) has detection sensor 302, the lower actuation opening 26 (starting ball opening) has detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 has detection sensor 304 (first control unit). The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. Note that the detection sensors 301-304 may be any type capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls; for example, electromagnetic induction proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls if a ball lands in the normal entry port. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls if a ball lands in the upper actuation port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, or if a ball lands in the lower actuation port 26, which is the starting ball entry port. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls if a ball lands in the variable entry device 27. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the number of prize balls in each actuation port 25, 26, which is the starting ball entry port, may be different.

The outlet 28 is located at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2Y. Game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area through this outlet 28. The outlet 28 also has a detection sensor 305 (see Figure 168) that detects game balls entering, and this detection sensor 305 is located on the back side of the game board 2Y. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.

Each through gate 31 is equipped with a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 168) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2Y. Note that when a ball enters a through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from a game ball entering the outlet 28, a game ball entering the various winning openings will also be referred to as "winning." Furthermore, a ball entering the through gate 31 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. A ball entering this through gate 31 will also be referred to as "winning," just like a ball entering the various winning openings.

The upper actuation port 25, which serves as the starting ball entry port, and the lower actuation port 26, which serves as the starting ball entry port, are unitized as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 2Y. The actuation ports 25, 26, which serve as starting ball entry ports, both open upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically, with the upper actuation port 25, which serves as the starting ball entry port, positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26, which serves as the starting ball entry port, positioned at the bottom. The lower actuation port 26, which serves as the starting ball entry port, has an electric device 261, which serves as a guide piece (support piece) made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric device 261 is connected to an electric device drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2Y. This electric device 261 is driven by the electric device drive unit 262 to be set in either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, is closed by rotating the electric device 261 and bringing the upper ends of the electric device 261 closer to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, is opened by rotating the electric device 261 and moving the upper ends of the electric device 261 apart in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the top of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, is narrower than the width of one game ball. Also, when the electric device 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the top of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, is wider than the width of one game ball. Therefore, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the electric device 261 may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state), and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port. Furthermore, the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, rather than by setting the electric device 261. In this configuration, the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, does not need to be equipped with the electric device 261.

Therefore, the player can guide the game ball to each of the actuation ports 25, 26, which are the starting ball entry ports, by rotating the launch handle 16 to the left at a moderate amount and shifting the ball's arrival position at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center. Although the nail NL is not shown in Figure 164, the player can also guide the game ball to each of the actuation ports 25, 26, which are the starting ball entry ports, by rotating the launch handle 16 to the right at the maximum amount and shifting the ball's arrival position at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side.

The variable prize winning device 27 includes a large prize winning opening 271 that opens to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large prize winning opening 271, and a variable prize winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.

Therefore, the player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 27 by rotating the launch handle 16 to the left with a medium rotation amount, thereby shifting the game ball's arrival position at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center. Although the nail NL is not shown in Figure 164, the player can also guide the game ball to the variable winning device 27 by rotating the launch handle 16 to the right with a maximum rotation amount, thereby shifting the game ball's arrival position at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side.

Here, the game board 2Y is provided with a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. This cover 29 is provided with a transparent panel 291 formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel 292 provided around this transparent panel 291 and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.

The big prize opening 271 is located in an opening formed in the gaming area by router processing, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of gaming balls. Based on the detection results, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls.

The door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2Y so as to be rotatable around one of its lower sides as a central axis. The door 272 has two states: an open state in which it opens the opening of the big prize opening 271 by rotating toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2Y, and a closed state in which it closes the opening of the big prize opening 271 by rotating toward the inside of the game board 2Y and sinking into the game board 2Y.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272, which is a rotating body, to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state, is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter.
The open/close execution mode refers to a mode in which the open/close door 272 is set to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 271. In the open/close execution mode, the period from when the open/close door 272 is set to an open state until when it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a variable winning device 27 that is provided in the game area and can perform a predetermined operation. The variable winning device 27 includes at least a variable winning drive unit 273 and an opening/closing door 272 that is movable by the variable winning drive unit 273.
Furthermore, the variable winning device 27 is configured so that almost the entire opening/closing door 272 can be seen even when the opening/closing door 272 is positioned in its initial position (closed state) in which it is not driven.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and a normal pattern display section 35, and is configured by arranging multiple display devices such as a segment display (not shown) in which multiple segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2Y so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. That is, the main display device 32 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. The distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the width of one game ball. This prevents the pachinko machine 1 from dropping game balls between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from dropping in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 includes a first result display unit 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on a win at the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, and a second result display unit 342 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on a win at the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port (see FIG. 168). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode when the open/close execution mode is activated (or when the open/close execution mode is activated).

The first result display unit 341 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning ball entering the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on a winning ball entering the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes a varying display of the pattern triggered by a winning ball entering the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on a winning ball entering the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

The normal symbol display unit 35 displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at each through gate 31, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning at each through gate 31 as the result of stopping the changing display. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the electric role open state, the normal symbol display unit 35 displays the predetermined stop result. The pachinko machine 1 then transitions to the electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric role device 261 installed in the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 are configured with a segment display, a dot display, or the like, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix. Furthermore, the images displayed on the main display unit 34 and the normal symbol display unit 35 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors that can be switched between.

The variable display unit 33 is equipped with a pattern display device 36, which is a lottery result display unit that variably displays (variably displays or switches between) patterns, which are a type of picture. The variable display unit 33 also has a center frame 37 that is arranged to surround the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit. The upper part of this center frame 37 is arranged to bulge out towards the window panel 123 provided on its front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as a decrease in visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

The pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. This pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, starts displaying a variable pattern based on a winning entry into the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, or the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port. In other words, when the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, executes a variable display in the first result display unit 341 of the main display unit 34 and when the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, executes a variable display in accordance with the execution of the variable display in the second result display unit 342 of the main display unit 34.
The symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or other display device.

The center frame 37 is equipped with a first reserve lamp unit 371, which is a light-emitting body provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit; a second reserve lamp unit 372, which is a light-emitting body provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit; and a third reserve lamp unit 373, which is a light-emitting body provided in the area to the right of the second reserve lamp unit 372, which is a light-emitting body.

The first reserve lamp unit 371, which is a light-emitting body, is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This first reserve lamp unit 371, which is a light-emitting body, can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the first result display unit 341 and the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit.
The second reserve lamp unit 372, which is a light-emitting body, is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This second reserve lamp unit 372, which is a light-emitting body, can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the second result display unit 342 and the pattern display unit 36, which is the lottery result display unit.
The third reserve lamp unit 373, which is a light-emitting body, is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved balls. This third reserve lamp unit 373, which is a light-emitting body, can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol display unit 35, which is the lottery result display unit.
In addition, each of the reservation lamp units 371 to 373, which are light-emitting bodies, may have other configurations, such as being displayed as an image on part of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit.

Here, each of the hold lamp sections 371 to 373, which are light-emitting bodies, is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 even when the opening/closing door 272 is in the initial position.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with each of the reservation lamp sections 371 to 373, which are light-emitting bodies that can emit light at least when the opening/closing door 272 is located in the initial position.

The center frame 37 also includes a movable gadget 10, which is a movable body located in the upper central area of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit.

Figure 165 is a front view and a cross-sectional view of a movable accessory. Specifically, the left figure in Figure 165 is a front view of the movable accessory 10, which is a movable body, and the right figure is an A-A cross-sectional view of the movable accessory 10, which is the movable body shown in the left figure.
The movable accessory 10, which is a movable body, is an accessory that imitates the shape of a flower, as shown in Fig. 165. This movable accessory 10 is provided with five petals 101 that are movable body main bodies, and a disk-shaped petal support 102 that is positioned in the center of each petal 101 that is a movable body main body, and supports each petal 101 that is a movable body main body.

The petal support 102 is equipped with five light-emitting diodes 1021 that are light-emitting bodies attached to the front. Each of these light-emitting diodes 1021 is attached at a predetermined interval along the inner periphery of the petal support 102 to correspond to one of the five petals 101 that form the movable body main body. Furthermore, each of these light-emitting diodes 1021 is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 even when each of the petals 101 that form the movable body main body is located in its initial position (see Figure 164).

In addition, the movable accessory 10, which is a movable body, is equipped with a petal lifting mechanism 103, which is a movable body drive unit that raises and lowers the petal support 102 in the vertical direction.
The petal lifting mechanism 103, which is the movable body drive unit, supports each petal 101 and petal support 102, which are the movable body main body units, and is equipped with a rectangular long plate 1031 with its long side in the vertical direction attached to the back side of the center frame 37 so that it can be freely raised and lowered in the vertical direction, and a long plate drive unit 1032 attached to the back side of the center frame 37 and which raises and lowers the long plate 1031 in the vertical direction.

The long plate 1031 is attached so as to slide freely in a guide groove (not shown) formed in the vertical direction on the back side of the center frame 37. This long plate 1031 has a gear 1033 formed in the vertical direction on the back side. The long plate 1031 also has a circular hole formed in the lower end, and the cylinder 104 is inserted into this circular hole and supported by fixing a flange portion of the cylinder 104 to the front surface of the long plate 1031. This cylinder 104 is fixed to the petals 101 and petal support 102, which are movable body main bodies, and thereby supports the petals 101 and petal support 102, which are movable body main bodies.
The long plate driving unit 1032 has a motor whose output shaft gear is engaged with the gear 1033 of the long plate 1031 and whose housing is fixed to the back side of the center frame 37. Therefore, by driving the motor, the long plate driving unit 1032 can raise and lower the long plate 1031 in the vertical direction (see the up and down arrows in the figure). In other words, the long plate driving unit 1032 executes drive control to raise and lower the petals 101 and petal supports 102, which are the movable body main body parts, in the vertical direction.

Figure 166 shows the movable device lowered to the drive position.
When the long board drive unit 1032 executes drive control to raise and lower the movable device 10, which is a movable body, in the vertical direction, it can lower the movable device 10, which is a movable body, to the drive position, which is the lowest point, as shown in Figure 166, and can move it back and forth between this drive position and the initial position (see Figure 164).
The center frame 37 is also provided with a position detection sensor 105 (see FIG. 178) that detects that the movable prop 10, which is a movable body, is in its initial position. The movable prop 10, which is a movable body, is configured to be located in its initial position that can be detected by the position detection sensor 105 when in a non-driven state.

167 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the role pattern of each expectation level. In FIG. 167, the timing chart shows time on the horizontal axis and the position of the movable role 10, which is a movable body, on the vertical axis.
The movable device 10, which is a movable body, has device patterns with low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation, as shown in Figure 167.
Note that Figure 167(A) shows a timing chart of a feature pattern with a low expectation level, Figure 167(B) shows a timing chart of a feature pattern with a medium expectation level, and Figure 167(C) shows a timing chart of a feature pattern with a high expectation level.

As shown in Figure 167 (A), a low-expectation device pattern is one in which the device descends from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the drive position for two seconds, and then rises from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating motion. This low-expectation device pattern is unlikely to occur if the internal lottery results in a successful transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state, and is more likely to occur if the internal lottery results in a successful transition.

As shown in Figure 167 (B), a medium-expectation role pattern is a pattern in which the robot descends from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the drive position for four seconds, and then rises from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating motion. This medium-expectation role pattern is more likely to occur than a low-expectation role pattern and less likely to occur than a high-expectation role pattern if the internal lottery results in a transition to the specific control state, open/close execution mode. If the internal lottery does not result in a win, the role pattern is less likely to occur than a low-expectation role pattern and more likely to occur than a high-expectation role pattern.

As shown in Figure 167 (C), a high-expectation device pattern is one in which the device descends from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the drive position for six seconds, and then rises from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating motion. This high-expectation device pattern is likely to occur if the internal lottery results in a successful transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state, and is unlikely to occur if the internal lottery result is not successful.

Here, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is controlled to one of two states: a device pattern (non-driven state) at the end of the reciprocating motion described below, and a device pattern (driven state) with low, medium, or high expectation levels.
Each state is configured to include an initial position where the movable prop 10, which is a movable body, can be detected by the position detection sensor 105.
This allows the movable device 10, which is the movable body of the gaming machine, to smoothly switch between operating states, and the operating states can be switched without appearing unnatural. This point will be explained in detail later.

As such, in this embodiment, the movable part 10, which is a movable body, includes at least a petal lifting mechanism 103, which is a movable body drive unit, and each petal 101, which is a movable body main body part that is moved by the petal lifting mechanism 103, which is a movable body drive unit.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
Figure 168 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in Fig. 168, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main control unit 4, a sound and light emission control unit 5 which is the second control unit, and a display control unit 6 which is the first control unit, and these units are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 also comprises a payout control unit 46 and a power supply and launch control unit 47, and these units are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control unit 46 executes payout control to cause the payout unit 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power supply and launch control unit 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launching mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that handles the main control of the game (main control) and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4, which is the second control unit, includes a board box that houses the main control board 41 and other components. This board box may have a trace portion that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace portion may be configured such that the board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies and that joining portions (crimped portions) require destruction of specific locations when the case bodies are separated, or a seal sticker is affixed across the boundaries between multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesive object when peeled off. Furthermore, the trace structure may be configured such that an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is a chip-integrated device that includes, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that serves as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile memory unit that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/loss table storage area 431, an allocation table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to multiple detection sensors 301-306 (e.g., detection sensor 302 for the upper operating port 25, which is the starting ball entry port; detection sensor 303 for the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port; and detection sensor 304, which is the first control unit for the variable winning device 27). The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control device 46, and the audio and light control device 5, which is the second control unit. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric device drive unit 262, which opens and closes the electric device 261 for the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port; the variable winning device drive unit 273, which is a movable body drive unit, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 272, which is the movable body main body of the variable winning device 27, which is a movable body; the main display unit 34; and the normal symbol display unit 35.

The main control board 41 also has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the operation of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the variable prize drive unit 273 to open and close the large prize opening 271. In each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at the operating openings 25 and 26, which are the starting ball entry openings. Furthermore, the MPU 42 controls the display of the normal symbol display unit 35 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at the through gates 31.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply and launch control device 47, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the general winning opening, the upper operating opening 25 which is the starting ball entry opening, the lower operating opening 26 which is the starting ball entry opening, the various winning openings of the variable winning device 27, the outlet opening 28, and each through gate 31 which is the starting ball entry opening. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, the MPU 42 makes winning determinations (ball entry determinations) for the various winning openings, the outlet opening 28, and each through gate 31. The MPU 42 also performs an internal lottery based on the determination of winning for the upper operating opening 25 which is the starting ball entry opening or the lower operating opening 26 which is the starting ball entry opening.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to have the payout device 48 pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players during play) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) at, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is also equipped with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4, even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply and launch control device 47 also executes launch control to cause the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feed device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 (see Figure 1) onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid, causing the game balls to be launched.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, as well as main processing that is started when the power is turned on. The normal processing will be described below.
In addition to normal processing, the MPU 42 also executes timer interrupt processing, main processing, and NMI interrupt processing which is activated by input of a power outage signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of this processing will be omitted.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing normal processing.
After executing the aforementioned main processing that starts when the power is turned on, the MPU 42 executes normal processing, which is the main processing for progressing the game. In this normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314, as shown in Figure 169. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at 4 msec intervals, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps depending on the determination result of step S308.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes timer interrupt processing, prize-winning processing for the operating port, or external output processing for sending commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a prize ball command has been set, and if it determines that a prize ball command has been set, sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Also, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a command for a presentation, such as a command corresponding to a presentation for a game round or a command corresponding to a presentation for the open/close execution mode, has been set, and if it determines that a command for a presentation has been set, sends the command for that presentation to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit.

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a specified area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, it clears the value of the fluctuation type counter CS by returning it to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes a game round control process for progressing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a lottery process, which includes a win/lose lottery and an allocation lottery, and also determines information related to the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, and determines information related to the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34.
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game state transition process in step S304 will be explained in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) for starting a demo has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started, and if it determines that the start waiting period has elapsed, it sets a demo command for starting a demo display. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the sound and light-emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit.
The audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, recognizes that a demo display is to be started based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval between repeated executions of the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when it reaches 7,500 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary; for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if a new game session is started while the MPU 42 is counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S306Y, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process to control the drive of the electric role device 261 provided in the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role device release lottery based on the value of the electric role device release counter C4 stored in the electric role device holding area 443 of the RAM 44, which is the second control memory unit, and executes opening and closing processing of the electric role device 261 if the electric role device release lottery is won. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 to display the result of the electric role device release lottery. The electric role support process of step S306Y will be described in detail later.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 causes the power supply and launch control device 47 to execute launch control to launch a game ball based on the player's rotation of the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply and launch control device 47 causes the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a launch intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16. Furthermore, when predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power outage flag has been set in the power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power outage flag is set in the RAM 44 when a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power outage monitoring board 45 outputs this power outage signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power outage. Note that this power outage flag is cleared the next time the main processing is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as RAM 44, and clears various flags by assigning 0 to the flag. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a power outage flag by assigning 1 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set, it executes power outage processing from step S312 onwards without executing processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits timer interrupt processing from occurring. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and saves a RAM judgment value (a checksum of RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set, it determines in step S309 whether the timing has come to execute the next normal processing, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the current normal processing started.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is not yet time to execute the next normal process, that is, if remaining time has occurred, it updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310 and updates the fluctuation type counter CS in step S311. Note that the MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal processing, i.e., if there is no remaining time, it executes step S301 again to start the next normal processing.

<Game status transition processing>
Figure 170 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode.
If it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it executes the processes in and after step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes from step S811 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S802 onward) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display has ended on the main display unit 34. If the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display unit 34 has not ended, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the winning/losing result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" or a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the pass/fail result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in RAM 44 and then executes the processing from step S804 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result"), it terminates the game state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S805 it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter that allows the MPU 42 to determine the total number of times the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not a "special miss result," i.e., that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it determines in step S806 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is a low-round, high-probability result, then in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "2." Also, if the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is not a low-round, high-probability result, i.e., if it determines that the allocation result is a "low-probability result" or a "most advantageous result," then in step S808 it sets the round counter RC to "15." This round counter RC is a counter that the MPU 42 uses to determine the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has multiple opening/closing execution modes with different termination conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," and a number-of-opening/closing-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "special loss result."

The round count mode ends when a predetermined number of rounds have been played, where the number of rounds corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number-defined mode ends when the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 271. Here, the total number of times the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number-defined mode does not end when the number of rounds of play has been reached.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening 271 once per round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by meeting one of the following two conditions:
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of game balls entering the large prize slot 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing any one of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 42 sets "1000" as the opening wait time (wait period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 in step S809. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the opening wait time is 2 seconds. Note that the opening wait time is not limited to this and can be any value.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. The MPU 42 then terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit.
The audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, recognizes the transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S811 onwards) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes the big prize opening/closing process, which is the second control processing section.

Figure 171 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening and closing process.
In the big prize opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether the big prize opening 271 is open or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open, it executes the processing from step S902 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open, it executes the processes from step S906 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S902 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not less than "0", it determines in step S903 whether the value of the timer counter T is less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of opening the big prize opening in step S904.
The process of opening the big prize slot in step S904 will be described in detail below.

Figure 172 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of opening the big prize opening.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "8" in step S1002, and sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003. As mentioned above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 seconds.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is not a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC to "8" in step S1004, and determines in step S1005 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is a high probability result in a small number of rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not a high probability result for a few rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution processing of the special prize opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution processing, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state by executing drive control of the variable prize opening drive unit 273. The MPU 42 then terminates the special prize opening opening processing.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 specifies the upper limit on the total number of game balls that can enter the large winning slot 271. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to the same value ("8" in this embodiment) when it determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result" and when it determines that the winning result is not a "special losing result," but different values may also be set in the winning counter PC.

The value set in timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 also specifies the maximum duration time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two different maximum duration times by setting timer counter T to "85" or "15,000." Specifically, the MPU 42 sets a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 30 seconds, and a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 0.17 seconds, which is shorter than the long-term mode.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds, thereby causing the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Also, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to "8", thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 271 to eight.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch period, it is easy to get the upper limit of eight game balls to enter the large prize opening 271.
In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch cycle (more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle), so it is difficult to get a game ball to enter the large prize opening 271. However, depending on the timing, it is possible to get about one game ball to enter the large prize opening 271.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between the opening/closing door 272 performing its first operation (opening) and its second operation (closing), the higher the chance that a gaming ball will enter the big prize opening 271, and the higher the player's expected profit.

Returning to the explanation of the large prize opening/closing process, the processing from step S905 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 171.
After executing the special prize opening process in step S904, the MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905. Also, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S905 to the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the special prize opening opening and closing process.
In addition, the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the open state based on the open command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S906 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than 0. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the special prize opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in step S907 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S918.

First, the process (the process from step S907 onwards) when it is determined in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize has been won at the special prize opening 271. The determination of whether or not a prize has been won at the special prize opening 271 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the special prize opening 271. As described above, this detection sensor 304 is connected to the input port of the MPU 42 in the main control device 4, and transmits a detection signal, which is a control signal, to the main control device 4, thereby transmitting the detection result to the main control device 4.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no win has occurred in the special prize opening 271, it ends the special prize opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a win has occurred in the big win slot 271, it updates the value of the win counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value in step S908.

In this way, the main control unit 4 is equipped with a large prize opening/closing process that executes step S908, which sets the winning ball count signal, which is predetermined information, in RAM 44 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 304.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the prize counter PC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the prize counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big prize opening opening process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0," it executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to set the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the close command set in step S911 to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit.
In addition, the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the closed state based on the close command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the result is not a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S913 onwards.
In step S913, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value.
In other words, the main control unit 4 updates the value of the prize counter PC based on the detection signal of the detection sensor 304, and when the value of the prize counter PC becomes "0" (maximum prize occurrence), it updates the value of the round counter RC, which determines the operating state of the opening and closing door 272.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0," then in step S915, the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 specifies the open waiting time after the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, and after it is set to the closed state, until the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state again. In this embodiment, the open waiting time is 1 second. This open waiting time is the same regardless of the type or progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and can be any value.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, as with the waiting time for the opening, i.e., the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening and closing processing.
The audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S918 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the result is not a "special miss result," that is, if it determines that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S921 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-mentioned processing from S916 onwards.
In other words, the main control unit 4 determines whether the conditions for switching between continuing the opening operation of the opening/closing door 272 or terminating it are met by comparing the value of the round counter RC with "0."

Next, the processing (processing from step S923 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-described processing from S916 onwards.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4 that can control the operating state of the variable winning device 27 based on the detection signal from the connected detection sensor 304.
The variable winning device 27 is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations including at least an opening operation in which the opening/closing door 272, located in an initial position (closed state), moves from the initial position to a drive position (open state), and a closing operation in which the opening/closing door 272, located in the drive position, moves back to the initial position. Here, the initial position is the position where the opening/closing door 272 is located when it is in a non-drive state.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process, the processing from step S812 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 170.
After executing the large prize opening/closing process in step S811, MPU 42 determines in step S812, which is the second control discrimination section, whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is less than or equal to "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0," then in step S814, it clears the open/close execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 44, and then executes transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition processing.

In this way, the main control device 4 is equipped with a step S812 process that determines, based on information stored in RAM 44, whether or not a switching condition (the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less) has occurred, which is used to switch the operating state of the variable winning device 27 between the round play state in which the round play continues and the ending state in which the opening/closing door 272 is set to the closed state and the game transitions to the ending has occurred.

The process of step S812 is configured to make a determination each time control for ending the closing operation in the series of operations is executed.
In other words, the process of step S812 is configured so that after the determination is made, no further determination is made until the opening/closing door 272 has completed the closing operation in the series of operations.
This is because the variable winning device 27 in the open state will not switch to the closed state unless the closing condition based on time or the number of winnings is met, so there is no situation in which the operating state must be switched during that time.By eliminating unnecessary judgments during that time, the load on the main control device 4 is reduced.

Furthermore, based on the determination made in step S812, the main control device 4 may either continue the operating state of the variable winning device 27 in a round game state, which is a first state in which a series of operations is performed, or may transition the operating state of the variable winning device 27 from the round game state in which a series of operations is performed to an ending state, which is a second state in which the operating state is controlled in a manner different from the round game state. This ending state has at least a movable end state in which the operation of the variable winning device 27 is terminated.

In addition, the ending state may have a short ending in which the waiting time for the ending is short when, for example, the support mode before transitioning to the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode and the support mode after the ending state has ended is also a high-frequency support mode, and a long ending in which the waiting time for the ending is long when the support mode before transitioning to the opening and closing execution mode is a low-frequency support mode and the support mode after the ending state has ended is a high-frequency support mode, and the player is allowed to select the presentation to be used when transitioning to the high-frequency support mode during this waiting time for the ending.
In this case, the control executed after the series of operations is completed can be a predetermined control (short-term ending) or a specific control (long-term ending) different from the predetermined control, and regardless of whether the control executed after the series of operations is a predetermined control or a specific control, it is executed with the opening/closing door 272 positioned in its initial position.

Here, the pachinko machine 1, like the main reference embodiment, is provided with an indicator lamp unit 124, which is a light-emitting body provided above the window unit 122 (see FIG. 1). This indicator lamp unit 124 is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 even when the opening/closing door 272 is in the initial position.
For example, based on the presentation command for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control to turn on the display lamp unit 124 when in the round play state, and executes drive control to turn on the display lamp unit 124 when in the ending state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an indicator lamp section 124 that can emit light at least when the opening/closing door 272 is in the initial position.

The transition process when opening and closing execution mode ends is explained in detail below.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode is ended.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result," it executes the processing from step S1102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result," it executes the processing from step S1105 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S1102 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicitly few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 42 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 44.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is obtained in the win/lose lottery, which is the lottery process.

In step S1104, the MPU 42 sets the high probability mode flag in RAM 44. If the high probability mode flag is already set in RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/lose lottery mode to high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery, which is the lottery process, results in a "jackpot win." After that, the MPU 42 ends the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed, the MPU 42 clears the flags set in RAM 44 according to the allocation results (low probability result flag, non-explicit few rounds high probability result flag, explicit few rounds high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) and the special loss flag. Also, in step S701 of the aforementioned fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in RAM 44.

Next, the processing (processing from step S1105 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1106 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1108 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S1106 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, it executes the processes from step S1103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44 in step S1107. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/loss lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is determined in the win/loss lottery, which is the lottery process. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the processing (processing from step S1108 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is a "low probability result."

If MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is not a "low probability result" (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "special loss result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it executes the processes from step S1109 onwards.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high-probability mode flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the win/loss lottery mode to low-probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery, which is the lottery process, results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result becomes anything other than a "low-probability result."

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 42 sets the value of the number of games counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "100".
In step S1112, the MPU 42 sets the number of times limit flag in the RAM 44. If the number of times limit flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number limit flag is set, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games have been played, which is the termination reference number set in the game number counter. When 100 games have been played, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 executes these processes as electric support processes in step S306 of the normal process. The electric support processes, which are the variable part, will be described in detail later.

In this way, if the winning/losing lottery, which is the lottery process, results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "most favorable result" or a "high probability result with an explicit few rounds," the game state will transition to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (i.e., the round count specified mode), regardless of the current game state. The high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue at least until the winning/losing lottery, which is the lottery process, results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, when the current support mode is high-frequency support mode and the lottery process results in a "jackpot win" in the win/lose lottery, and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is an "unspecified few-round high-probability result," the game state will transition to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round-number-specified mode). The high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue at least until the lottery process results in a "jackpot win."

In contrast, when the current support mode is low-frequency support mode and the lottery process results in a "jackpot win" in the win/lose lottery, and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," the game state will transition to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round number specified mode). The high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the lottery process results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the winning/losing lottery process results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "low probability result," the game state will transition to low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round count mode) regardless of the current game state. Low probability mode will continue at least until the winning/losing lottery process results in a "jackpot win," and high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode if 100 game rounds have been played without a "jackpot win" in the winning/losing lottery process.

In addition, if the winning/losing lottery process does not result in a "jackpot win," that is, if the winning/losing lottery process results in a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result," the game state will not change.

Here, as in the main reference mode, in the case of a "special miss result," the opening/closing execution mode shifts from the round count specified mode to the opening/closing count specified mode, and the large prize opening 271 is opened and closed twice in a short period of time (see Figure 28). Also, in the case of an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round count specified mode, in which rounds are played twice as many times as the upper limit, and the large prize opening 271 is opened and closed twice as many times in a short period of time (see Figure 28). And in the case of a "most advantageous result" and a "low probability result," the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round count specified mode, in which rounds are played twice as many times as the upper limit, and the large prize opening 271 is opened and closed 15 times as the upper limit (see Figure 28).

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can execute two round play periods during which the opening/closing door 272 performs a series of operations: a first period (small round play) during which the large prize opening 271 is opened and closed twice in a short period of time, and a second period (large round play) that is longer than the first period and during which the large prize opening 271 is opened and closed 15 times in a long period of time, and the round play period is determined randomly by lottery.

<Electrical support treatment>
Figure 174 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric support processing.
In the electric service support process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1201 to S1208 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the normal symbol display section 35 is displaying a variable symbol, that is, whether or not an electric game is in progress.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1201 that the normal symbol display unit 35 is not displaying a variable symbol, it executes the processing from step S1202 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1201 that the normal symbol display unit 35 is displaying a variable symbol, it executes the processing from step S1205 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S1202 onwards) when it is determined in step S1201 that the normal symbol display unit 35 is not displaying a variable symbol will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 42 determines whether the number of reserved electric games RcN is "0" or less.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1202 that the number of reserved electric roles RcN is "0" or less, it terminates the electric role support processing without executing the processing from step S1203 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1202 that the number of reserved electric symbols RcN is not "0" or less, in step S1203, it executes an electric symbol data setting process for setting the reserved electric symbol information stored in the electric symbol reservation area 443 for consumption of electric symbol game times. After that, in step S1204, the MPU 42 starts variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35, executes an electric symbol variable start process for consuming electric symbol game times, and ends the electric symbol support process.
The electric role data setting process in step S1203 and the electric role change start process in step S1204 will be described in detail below.

Figure 175 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric role data setting process.
In the electric device data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1301 to S1304 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 42 updates the value of the number of reserved electric roles RcN in the electric role reservation area 443 by subtracting 1 from the value.
In step S1302, the MPU 42 moves the electric role hold information stored in the memory area of the electric role hold area 443 to the electric role execution area.
In step S1303, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the electric role reserve information stored in the memory area of the electric role reserve area 443. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the electric role reserve information stored in each memory area of the electric role reserve area 443 to the electric role execution area side.

In step S1304, the MPU 42 sets an electric role shift command for recognizing that a shift of the electric role hold information has been executed, and transmits this set electric role shift command to the sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, and ends the electric role data setting process. This electric role shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of the electric role hold information has been executed for the electric role hold information stored in the memory area of the electric role hold area 443 based on the entry of the gaming ball into the through gate 31.
The sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, changes the lighting state of the third reserved lamp unit 373, which is a light emitting body, based on the electric role shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, reduces the number of lit third reserved lamp units 373, which are light emitting bodies, as the number of electric role reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31 decreases.

Figure 176 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric role change start processing.
In the electric utility fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S1401 to S1410 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 42 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1401 that the support mode is not high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode), it reads out the electric role hit/miss table (not shown) for low-frequency support mode from the electric role hit/miss table storage area (not shown) of ROM 43 in step S1402; if it determines in step S1401 that the support mode is high-frequency support mode, it reads out the electric role hit/miss table (not shown) for high-frequency support mode from the electric role hit/miss table storage area (not shown) of ROM 43 in step S1403.

The pachinko machine 1 has multiple support modes that differ in the frequency with which game balls can enter the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, by setting the electric device 261 to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

Specifically, the electric role win/loss table includes an electric role win/loss table for low frequency support mode (a group of electric role win/loss information for low frequency) and an electric role win/loss table for high frequency support mode (a group of electric role win/loss information for high frequency).
The MPU 42 compares these electric role win/loss tables with the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443 to execute the electric role opening lottery, which is a lottery process.

These electric role winning/losing tables contain the results of multiple electric role opening lotteries (electric role winning/losing results), including "electric role opening winning" and "electric role opening losing results."
Specifically, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the value of the random number that results in "winning the electric role release" is 1. Therefore, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the probability of "winning the electric role release" is 1/251.
In contrast, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the value of the random number that results in an "electric role win" is 250. Therefore, in a gaming state where the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced when drawing the lottery to open an electric role, the probability of an "electric role win" is 250/251. Here, the value of the random number that results in an "electric role win" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode is included in the value of the random number that results in an "electric role win" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode.

The values and numbers of random numbers stored in each electric role win/loss table are arbitrary, as long as the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of "winning the electric role release" compared to the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the random number value for "winning the electric role release" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the high-frequency support mode does not have to include the random number value for "winning the electric role release" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode, and may include a portion of the random number value for "winning the electric role release" stored in the electric role win/loss table for the low-frequency support mode.

After executing the processing of step S1402 or step S1403, the MPU 42 executes an electric role win/loss determination process in step S1404. In this electric role win/loss determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the electric role release lottery (electric role win/loss result) by comparing the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of RAM 44 with the electric role win/loss table read out in step S1402 or step S1403. The electric role win/loss result is either an "electric role release win" or an "electric role release miss result," and this is the same whether the support mode is low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode.

In step S1405, the MPU 42 determines whether the result of the electric role determined in step S1404 is an "electric role opening win" or not.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S1405 that the electric role win result is "electric role release win", in step S1406, it executes a stop result setting process for the electric role release win. In this stop result setting process for the electric role release win, the MPU 42 stores information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 by referring to a stop result table for the electric role release win stored in advance in the ROM 43.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1405 that the electric role win/loss result is not an "electric role release win" (if it determines that the electric role release miss result) then in step S1407 it executes a stop result setting process for the electric role release miss result. In this stop result setting process for the electric role release miss result, the MPU 42 stores information relating to the pattern that will ultimately be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information relating to the pattern that will ultimately be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 by referencing a stop result table for the electric role release miss result that is pre-stored in ROM 43.

After executing the process of step S1406 or step S1407, the MPU 42 executes a process of setting the electric role display duration (electric role display duration period) in step S1408.
In the process of setting the electric role display duration, the MPU 42 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 42 determines that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, it determines the electric role display duration by referring to the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode stored in the ROM 43, and sets the determined electric role display duration in an electric role display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when the MPU 42 determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), it determines the electric role display duration by referring to the electric role display duration table for the low-frequency support mode stored in the ROM 43, and sets the determined electric role display duration in the electric role display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.

Here, the high-frequency support mode electric role display duration table is set to shorten the electric role display duration compared to the low-frequency support mode electric role display duration table. In other words, the electric role display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
In addition, the electric role display duration determined by referring to the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode is different from the electric role display duration determined by referring to the electric role display duration table for the low frequency support mode.
The electric role display duration may be configured not to change depending on the support mode. Also, the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode and the electric role display duration table for the low frequency support mode may be the same.

In step S1409, the MPU 42 sets a command for changing the electric role. This command for changing the electric role includes information related to the electric role display duration. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the command for changing the electric role set in step S1409 to the sound and light-emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit.
In addition, the audio/light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes predetermined processing based on the electric role variation command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S1410, the MPU 42 causes the normal symbol display unit 35 to start variable display. The MPU 42 then terminates the electric role variable start process.

Returning to the explanation of the electric support processing, the processing from step S1205 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 174.
In step S1201, the MPU 42 determines whether the normal symbol display unit 35 is displaying a changing symbol, and if it determines that the normal symbol display unit 35 is displaying a changing symbol, it executes the processing from step S1205 onwards.

In step S1205, the MPU 42 determines whether the electric role display duration time set in step S1408 of the electric role variation start processing has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the value set in the electric role display duration counter in RAM 64 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this electric role display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1205 that the electric role display duration time has not elapsed, it executes electric role change display processing in step S1206. In this electric role change display processing, the MPU 42 updates the display of the normal symbol display unit 35 during the change display. The MPU 42 then terminates the electric role support processing.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1205 that the electric role display duration has elapsed, it executes electric role variation termination processing in step S1207. In this electric role variation termination processing, the MPU 42 identifies information (information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35) stored in RAM 44 in step S1406 or step S1407 of the electric role variation start processing executed when starting variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35. Then, at the end of the electric role game, the MPU 42 executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 so that the symbol corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 during variable display (electric role variation termination execution processing).

In step S1208, the MPU 42 sets an electric role fluctuation end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the electric role fluctuation end command set in step S1208 to the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. Then, the MPU 42 ends the electric role support processing.
The sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes processing to end the presentation of the electric role game round based on the electric role variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, may be configured to end the presentation of the electric role game round independently without needing to receive the electric role variation end command.

Figure 177 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric role change end processing.
In the electric utility fluctuation termination process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1501 to S1505 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the information stored in RAM 44 in step S1406 or step S1407 of the electric role variation start processing executed when starting variable display on the normal symbol display unit 35 (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35) is identified. Then, at the end of the electric role game, the MPU 42 executes display control of the normal symbol display unit 35 so that the pattern corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 35 during variable display (electric role variation end execution processing).

In step S1502, the MPU 42 determines whether the result of the electric role win is "electric role open win."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S1502 that the electric role win result is not "electric role open win", it ends the electric role variation end processing without executing the processing from step S1503 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1502 that the electric role win result is "electric role open win", it determines in step S1503 whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1503 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it executes a high-frequency electric role opening execution process in step S1504. In the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1503 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), it executes a low-frequency electric role release execution process in step S1505. In the low-frequency electric role release execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261.
After executing the high frequency electric role release execution process in step S1504 or the low frequency electric role release execution process in step S1505, the MPU 42 ends the electric role variation end process.

Here, compared to the low-frequency electric role release execution process, the high-frequency electric role release execution process sets the electric role 261 to the open state more often when the electric role release lottery is won, and the opening time for each electric role 261 to be set to the open state is also longer. Furthermore, in the high-frequency electric role release execution process, the closing time for setting the electric role 261 to the closed state between each opening in a single electric role open state is shorter than the opening time for each time.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, compared to the low frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the lower actuation port 26, which is the starting ball entry port. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the upper actuation port 25, which is the starting ball entry port, than the lower actuation port 26, which is the starting ball entry port. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the lower actuation port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, than the upper actuation port 25, which is the starting ball entry port.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game without losing too many game balls.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between when the electric device 261 performs its opening operation and when it performs its closing operation, the higher the chance that a game ball will enter the lower operating port 26, which is the starting ball entry port, and the higher the player's expected profit.

As mentioned above, the detection sensor 303 is connected to the input port of the MPU 42 in the main control device 4, and transmits the detection signal to the main control device 4, thereby transmitting the detection results to the main control device 4.
The main control device 4 is equipped with an electric role support process that sets a winning ball number signal, which is predetermined information, in the RAM 44 based on a detection signal from the detection sensor 303.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a main control device 4 that can control the operating state of the electric device 261 based on a detection signal from a connected detection sensor 303 .
The electric role 261 is configured to be capable of repeatedly performing a series of operations including at least an opening operation in which the electric role 261, located in an initial position (closed state), moves from the initial position to a driving position (open state), and a closing operation in which the electric role 261, located in the driving position, moves to the initial position. Here, the initial position is the position where the electric role 261 is located when it is in a non-driving state.

Furthermore, the main control device 4 is equipped with an electric role support process that determines, based on information stored in RAM 44, whether a switching condition has occurred that is used to switch the operating state of the electric role device 261 between an electric role opening winning state in which the electric role device 261 is set to an open state, and an electric role opening non-winning state in which the electric role device 261 is set to a closed state.

This electric support process is configured to make a determination each time control for ending the closing operation in a series of operations is executed.
In other words, this electric role support process is configured so that after making a determination, it will not make another determination until the electric role 261 has completed the closing operation in the series of operations.
This is because the electric device 261 in the open state will not switch to the closed state unless the closing condition based on time or the number of winnings is met, so there is no situation in which the operating state needs to be switched during that time. Also, by eliminating unnecessary judgments during that time, the load on the main control device 4 is reduced.

Furthermore, based on the determination of this electric role support processing, the main control device 4 may either continue the operating state of the electric role device 261 in an electric role release winning state in which a series of operations are performed, or may transition the operating state of the electric role device 261 from the electric role release winning state in which a series of operations are performed to an electric role release non-winning state in which the electric role release is controlled in a manner different from the electric role release winning state. This electric role release non-winning state has at least a movement end state in which the operation of the electric role device 261 is terminated.

As such, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with through gates 31 provided in the play area, an electric device opening lottery that can execute a lottery when a game ball enters each through gate 31, and an electric device support process that displays a variable display on a predetermined normal symbol display unit 35 provided in the play area in response to the lottery results.

Here, the electric role support process executes steps S1201 to S1208 regardless of whether the opening/closing execution mode is active. Furthermore, the large prize opening/closing process executes steps S901 to S924 regardless of whether the electric role support process is active. Therefore, the variable prize device 27 is configured to allow the variable prize drive unit 273 to repeatedly execute a series of operations while multiple variable displays are being performed on the specified normal symbol display unit 35.

In addition, the electric device 261 is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations in the variable winning drive unit 273 while multiple variable displays are being displayed on the specified main display unit 34.
The normal symbol display unit 35 is configured to perform a variable display multiple times while a variable display is being performed on the main display unit 34. The main display unit 34 is configured to perform a variable display multiple times while a variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display unit 35.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
Figure 178 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
As shown in Fig. 178, the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, comprises an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on this audio and light emission control board 51, a ROM 53 constituting this MPU 52, and a RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information.
The RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, has various areas such as a command list storage area 541 and various counter areas 542.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4 and also to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit. The input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the position detection sensor 105 and the push button 142. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the long board drive unit 1032, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6, which is the first control unit.
The MPU 52 controls the operation of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the movable device 10 which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main control unit 4, commands sent from the display control unit 6 which is the first control unit, information input from the position detection sensor 105, and information input from the push button 142 when operated by the player.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from analyzing these commands to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit. The sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, is electrically connected to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device>
FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device.
As shown in Fig. 179, the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, comprises a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video RAM 67. The MPU 62 is a chip-integrated device that includes not only the program ROM 63 and the work RAM 64, but also a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. The MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, and performs predetermined calculations based on these commands to control the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. This work RAM 64 has various areas such as a command list storage area 641, various counter areas 642, and a sub-side hold information storage area 643.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. As mentioned above, the input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. As mentioned above, the output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit.

VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 36, which displays the lottery results. Because VDP 65 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual function is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the commands generated by MPU 62, VDP 65 reads image data from character ROM 66 and stores this image data in video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit. The character ROM 66 stores bitmap format image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, and the display content of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, can be changed by rewriting the content of this video RAM 67.

The video RAM 67 includes a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has multiple frame areas 691 and 692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692.

Each frame area 691, 692 is set to a capacity sufficient to store one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each frame area 691, 692 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a memory capacity sufficient to store data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area uses a full-color system, allowing 256 colors to be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each RGB color, for a total memory capacity of at least 3 bytes.

While drawing data created in one frame area (e.g., first frame area 691) is being used to draw on the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, the VDP 65 creates drawing data to be used next for the other frame area (e.g., second frame area 692). In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double-buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691, 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts this drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution using a scaler (not shown) so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit. The VDP 65 then generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit.

As such, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a movable device 10, which is a movable body that is provided in the play area and can perform predetermined operations, and a sound and light control device 5, which is a second control unit that can control the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, based on commands, which are control signals, from a display control device 6, which is a first control unit connected to it.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 periodically executes steps S2001Y to S2006Y (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S2001Y, MPU 52 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when MPU 52 receives a command from MPU 42 or MPU 62, it stores the command in RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit. Specifically, RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit, has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands sent from MPU 42, and MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order they were sent from MPU 42. Also, RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit, has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands sent from MPU 62, and MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order they were sent from MPU 62. Note that MPU 52 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order they were stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2007, the MPU 52 executes a command analysis process based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the command analysis process, the MPU 52 analyzes the command sent from the MPU 42. Specifically, the MPU 52 analyzes commands such as a hold occurrence command (first hold occurrence command or second hold occurrence command), a hold shift command (first shift command or second shift command), a change command, a type command, a demo command, and an opening command.

In step S2008, the MPU 52 executes a transfer command generation process. In the transfer command generation process, the MPU 52 generates a transfer command to be sent to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, based on the results of analyzing the command in step S2007. Note that in this embodiment, the various transfer commands are the same as the various commands sent from the MPU 42, but they may also be different commands. For example, the information included in the various commands sent from the MPU 42 may be changed as necessary.

In step S2009, MPU 52 executes a rendering command analysis process, which is a second control processing unit, based on the rendering command transmitted from MPU 62. In the rendering command analysis process, which is a second control processing unit, MPU 52 analyzes the rendering command transmitted from MPU 62. The various rendering commands and the rendering command analysis process, which is a second control processing unit, will be described in detail later.

In step S2010, the MPU 52 executes the performance execution process, which is the second control discrimination section. In the performance execution process, which is the second control discrimination section, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp sections 124, 371-373, the movable role object 10, which is a movable body, and the speaker section 125 based on the results of analyzing the performance command in step S2009. The performance execution process, which is the second control discrimination section, will be explained in detail later.

In step S2006Y, a command transmission process is executed to transmit the transfer command generated in the transfer command generation process in step S2008 to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether the timing has arrived to transmit the various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit, to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit. If it is determined that the timing has arrived to transmit the various commands to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, the MPU 52 transmits the commands to the display control device 6, which is the first control unit. Thereafter, the MPU 52 terminates the timer interrupt process.

Figure 181 shows the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area.
As shown in FIG. 181, the sub-side reservation information storage area 643 has a first sub-side reservation area SRa, a second sub-side reservation area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side hold area SRa, which is provided as the first sub-side acquired information storage unit, has four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4. Each area SRa1 to SRa4 has a storage capacity large enough to store normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 62 stores normal hold information or advance hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRa1 to SRa4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the first hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 62 receives the first hold generation command sent from the MPU 52, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRa1 → second area SRa2 → third area SRa3 → fourth area SRa4.

As such, the first sub-side reserve area SRa has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the first reserve generation command can be reserved. The first sub-side reserve area SRa also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of areas SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side hold area SRb, which is provided as the second sub-side acquired information storage unit, has four storage areas: the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4. Each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 has a storage capacity large enough to store normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 62 stores normal hold information or advance hold information as sub-side hold information in each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the second hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 62 receives the second hold generation command sent from the MPU 52, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRb1 → second area SRb2 → third area SRb3 → fourth area SRb4.

As such, the second sub-side reserve area SRb has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the second reserve generation command can be reserved. The second sub-side reserve area SRb also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of areas SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is an area for moving the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb when starting the changing display of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the display control device>
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the display control device.
The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S4001 to S4006 (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S4001, the MPU 62 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 62 receives a transfer command from the MPU 52, it stores the transfer command in the work RAM 64. Specifically, the work RAM 64 has a ring buffer for storing and reading transfer commands sent from the MPU 52, and the MPU 62 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order in which they were sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they were stored in the ring buffer.

In step S4002, the MPU 62 executes a reservation determination process based on the transfer command sent from the MPU 52. In the reservation determination process, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of a reservation pattern, the shift of a reservation pattern, etc. This reservation determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S4003, the MPU 62 executes a process for determining effects based on the transfer command transmitted from the MPU 52. In the process for determining effects, the MPU 62 determines effects for the game round, effects for the open/close execution mode, etc. This process for determining effects will be described in detail later.
In step S4004, the MPU 62 executes a performance execution process, which is a variable part, based on the contents of the reservation determination process in step S4002 and the performance determination process in step S4003. Specifically, in the performance execution process, which is a variable part, the MPU 62 executes display control of the symbol display device 36, which is a lottery result display part.

In step S4005, the MPU 62 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command, which is a transfer command sent from the MPU 52. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 62 executes a demo display when a predetermined waiting period for starting a demo (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 62 executes display control of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit.

In step S4006, a command transmission process is executed to transmit the effect commands set in the effect determination process in step S4003 to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. In this command transmission process, the MPU 62 determines whether it is time to transmit the various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 641 of the work RAM 64 to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. If it determines that it is time to transmit the various commands to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, the MPU 62 transmits the commands to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. The MPU 62 then terminates the timer interrupt process.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the actuation ports 25, 26, which are start ball entry ports provided in the play area, a win/lose lottery, which is a lottery process that can execute a lottery when a game ball enters one of the actuation ports 25, 26, which are start ball entry ports, and the performance execution process of step S4004, which is a variation section that displays a variable display on the pattern display device 36, which is a predetermined lottery result display section provided in the play area, in response to the result of the lottery.

<Regarding the hold determination process executed by the display control device>
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the hold determination process.
The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, executes a reservation determination process to generate a reserved pattern, shift the reserved pattern, etc. In this reservation determination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S4101 to S4104 as shown in FIG.

In step S4101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a hold generation command (first hold generation command or second hold generation command) transmitted from the MPU 52 has been received.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4101 that it has not received a hold generation command, it executes the processes in and after step S4103.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4101 that it has received a hold generation command, it executes a hold generation process in step S4102. In this hold generation process, the MPU 62 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 643 based on the contents of the hold generation command. This hold generation process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S4102, or if it is determined in step S4101 that a hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S4103 and onward.
In step S4103, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a pending shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 52 has been received.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4103 that the hold shift command has not been received, it ends the hold determination process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4103 that it has received a hold shift command, it executes hold shift processing in step S4104. In this hold shift processing, the MPU 62 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 643 based on the contents of the hold shift command. This hold shift processing will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the hold determination processing.

<Holding process>
Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the hold generation processing.
In the hold generation processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S4201 to S4210 as shown in Figure 184. Specifically, the MPU 62 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 643 based on the contents of the hold generation command.

In step S4201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 has been received.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S4202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S4204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S4203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 62 then executes the processing from step S4204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S4202 or step S4203, the MPU 62 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S4204.

In step S4205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 643.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4205 that there is no advance notice hold information, it executes the processing from step S4206 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4205 that there is advance notice pending information, it executes the processes from step S4209 onwards.

In step S4206, the MPU 62 executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation. In this lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether or not advance notice reservation will occur.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 642 of the work RAM 64.

Here, the notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image to notify the player of the expected level of the hold, or a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect that notifies the player of the expected level of the hold by displaying the number of play times based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that in this embodiment, a notice hold that executes a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect will be described, and a description of notice holds that execute other notice displays will be omitted. When implementing a notice hold that executes multiple notice displays, the MPU 62, for example, prepares multiple flags for each type of notice display, and sets one or more of these flags to execute various notice displays.

The notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the work RAM 64.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the program ROM 63.

In step S4207, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S4206 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
When it is determined in step S4207 that a notice hold is to be generated, the MPU 62 executes a notice hold generation process in step S4208. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 62 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 62 executes display control of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the performance execution process of step S4004, which is the above-mentioned variable unit.

Specifically, the MPU 62 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S4204.
Here, the notice pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
Based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 62 includes in the notice hold information information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S4202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S4204. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S4202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S4204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S4203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S4204. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S4203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S4204.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4205 that there is advance notice hold information, or if it determines in step S4207 that an advance notice hold will not be generated, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S4209. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 62 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 62 executes display control of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the performance execution processing of step S4004, which is the aforementioned variable unit.

Specifically, the MPU 62 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S4204.
Here, the normal reserved information includes information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery). Therefore, the sub-side reserved information (notice reserved information and normal reserved information) includes information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In addition, based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 62 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the normal hold information.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S4202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S4204. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S4202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S4204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S4203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S4204. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S4203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S4204.

Then, in the performance execution process of step S4004, which is the aforementioned variable section, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control section, reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the occurrence of a notice hold or a normal hold on the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display section, based on the contents of the notice hold occurrence process of step S4208 and the contents of the normal hold occurrence process of step S4209. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, displays the advance reservation symbol or regular reservation symbol on the display screen G to notify the player that an advance reservation or regular reservation has occurred.

After executing the notice hold generation process in step S4208 or the normal hold generation process in step S4209, the MPU 62 sets a hold display generation effect command in step S4210. Then, the MPU 62 stores the hold display generation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 641 of the work RAM 64. This hold display generation effect command is transmitted to the audio and light-emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, in the command transmission process in step S4006 described above.
In addition, the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a predetermined process based on the hold display generation effect command sent from the MPU 62.

In this way, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 can generate only one advance notice hold in the sub-side hold information storage area 643 that executes an advance notice display that generates a pre-reading effect, and is not able to generate multiple advance notice holds in the sub-side hold information storage area 643.
In this embodiment, the MPU 62 is not configured to be able to generate multiple advance reservations in the sub-side reservation information storage area 643, but it may be possible to do so.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process.
As described above, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, executes the hold shift process in step S4104 of the hold determination process. In this hold shift process, the MPU 62 executes steps S4301 to S4308 as shown in FIG. 185. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold area based on the contents of the hold shift command.

In step S4301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 52 has been received.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4301 that it has received a first shift command, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S4302 to S4304, and if it determines in step S4301 that it has not received a first shift command (if it determines that it has received a second shift command), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S4305 to S4307.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S4302 to S4304 will be described.
In step S4302, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S4303, the MPU 62 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S4304, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 sequentially to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S4305 to S4307 will be described.
In step S4305, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S4306, the MPU 62 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S4307, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 sequentially to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

Then, in the effect execution process of step S4004, which is the aforementioned variable section, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control section, reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display section, based on the contents of steps S4304 and S4307. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display section, displays and executes the normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

After executing the process of step S4304 or the process of S4307, the MPU 62 sets a hold display shift effect command in step S4308. Then, the MPU 62 stores the hold display shift effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 641 of the work RAM 64. This hold display shift effect command is transmitted to the audio and light-emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, in the command transmission process of step S4006 described above.
In addition, the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a predetermined process based on the hold display shift performance command sent from the MPU 62.

<Regarding the rendering determination process executed by the display control device>
Figure 186 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game rounds, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S4401 to S4413 as shown in FIG.

In step S4401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 52 have been received.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4401 that it has not received any command, it executes the processes from step S4409 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4401 that it has received each command, it determines in step S4402 whether the game result is a "most advantageous result" or a "low probability result" based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S4402 that the gaming result is a "most advantageous result" or a "low probability result," it executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of gaming result in step S4403. In this symbol determination process, if the MPU 62 determines that the gaming result is a "most advantageous result," it determines information related to a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as the stop result to be ultimately displayed on the active line L; if the MPU 62 determines that the gaming result is a "low probability result," it determines information related to a combination of symbols having the same even numbers as the stop result to be ultimately displayed on the active line L. Note that the odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result," then in step S4404 it determines whether the game result is a "normal miss result" or not based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4404 that the game result is not a "normal loss result," i.e., if the game result is one of a "special loss result," a "non-indicated low-round high-probability result," and a "indicated low-round high-probability result," it executes a common symbol determination process in step S4405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 62 determines information regarding a special symbol combination as the stop result to be ultimately displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the lottery process, which is a win/lose lottery process, rather than a symbol combination having the same numbers. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4404 that the game result is a "normal miss result," it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S4406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 62 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information relating to the combination of symbols in the reach display as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 62 randomly determines, by lottery or the like, a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols in a reach display.

After executing any one of steps S4403, S4405, and S4406, the MPU 62 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern in step S4407. In this process, the MPU 62 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the program ROM 63. Specifically, the MPU 62 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S4407, the MPU 62 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display, such as displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the display screen G. This process for determining a presentation pattern will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes display control of the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the performance execution process of step S4004, which is the aforementioned variable unit, based on the selected performance pattern.
Specifically, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S4403, S4405, and S4406. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the rendering buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the rendering buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, starts the variable display and finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 62 on the pay line L.

In step S4408, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation start effect command and a stop result effect command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of the processes in steps S4403, S4405, and S4406. Then, the MPU 62 stores the fluctuation start effect command and the stop result effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 641 of the work RAM 64. These fluctuation start effect command and the stop result effect command are transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, in the command transmission process in step S4006 described above.
In addition, the audio/light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes predetermined processing based on the variation start presentation command and the stop result presentation command sent from the MPU 62.

After executing the process of step S4408, or if it is determined in step S4401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S4409 and subsequent steps.
In step S4409, the MPU 62 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S4409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S4413 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4409 that an opening command has been received, then in step S4410 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S4411, the MPU 62 executes a process for determining an effect for the open/close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S4410. In the process for determining an effect for the open/close execution mode, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4410 that the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-expressed few-round high-probability result," it selects effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines that the game result is a "expressed few-round high-probability result," it selects effect B as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines that the game result is a "most advantageous result," it selects effect C or effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result," it selects effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode.
The duration of effects A and B corresponds to the time required to open and close the large prize opening 271 twice in a short time in the opening and closing execution mode. The duration of effects C and D corresponds to the time required to open and close the large prize opening 271 15 times in a long time in the opening and closing execution mode.

Furthermore, based on the selection results of effects A to D, the MPU 62 executes display control of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the effect execution process of step S4004, which is the aforementioned variable unit.
Specifically, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on the selection results of effects A to D. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This allows the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, to execute the opening/closing execution mode effect selected by the MPU 62.

In step S4412, the MPU 62 sets a performance command for the open/close execution mode including information related to the performance for the open/close execution mode selected in step S4411. Then, the MPU 62 stores the performance command for the open/close execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 641 of the work RAM 64. This performance command for the open/close execution mode is transmitted to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, in the command transmission process in step S4006 described above.
The audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes predetermined processing based on the performance command for the opening and closing execution mode sent from the MPU 62.

After executing the process of step S4412, or if it is determined in step S4409 that an opening command has not been received, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S4413 and subsequent steps.
In step S4413, the MPU 62 executes other processing. In the other processing, the MPU 62 executes processing for progressing the effects for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, close command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 52. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination processing.

<Regarding the process of determining the effect pattern executed by the display control device>
FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, executes a process of determining a presentation pattern to select a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to a presentation table stored in advance in the program ROM 63. In this process of determining a presentation pattern, the MPU 62 executes steps S4501 to S4514 as shown in FIG.

In step S4501, the MPU 62 acquires the advance notice pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 643. Specifically, the MPU 62 acquires information contained in the advance notice pending information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).

In step S4502, the MPU 62 determines whether a look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the work RAM 64. This look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for identifying that a look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 62 sets the look-ahead effect occurring flag when a look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the look-ahead effect occurring flag when the look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S4502 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the work RAM 64, this indicates that the pre-reading effect is not occurring, and so executes the processing from step S4503 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4502 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the work RAM 64, this indicates that the pre-reading effect has already occurred, and so executes the processing from step S4509 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S4503 onwards) when it is determined in step S4502 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the work RAM 64 will be described.
In step S4503, the MPU 62 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4503 that there is no advance notice hold information, it executes the processes from step S4508 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4503 that there is pending advance notice information, it sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the work RAM 64 in step S4504.

In step S4505, the MPU 62 executes a lottery process for predictive effects to select one of the three types of role patterns, namely, low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation, at a predetermined probability.
In this way, in this embodiment, the predictive effect is an effect that notifies the player of the expected probability of the hold by causing the movable device 10, which is a movable body, to move back and forth as an effect of a game round based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold.

As mentioned above, a low expectation device pattern is unlikely to occur when the result is a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result," but is more likely to occur when the result is not a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result" (when the result is a "normal miss result").
Furthermore, when the result is a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result," a medium expectation device pattern is more likely to occur than a low expectation device pattern and less likely to occur than a high expectation device pattern; when the result is not a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result" (when the result is a "normal miss result"), a medium expectation device pattern is less likely to occur than a low expectation device pattern and more likely to occur than a high expectation device pattern.
Furthermore, a high expectation device pattern is likely to occur when the result is a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result," and is unlikely to occur when the result is not a "jackpot win" or a "special miss result" (when the result is a "normal miss result").
The predetermined probability in the expectation lottery process of step S4505 is determined by referring to a preset expectation table based on the occurrence specifications of the role patterns of each expectation level. Note that this expectation table is stored in the work RAM 64.

In step S4506, the MPU 62 executes a process for determining a prize pattern. In this process, the MPU 62 sets values corresponding to various prize patterns in prize pattern counters APC provided in the various counter area 642 of the work RAM 64 based on the lottery result of the expectation degree lottery process in step S4505.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 selects a low expectation role pattern in the expectation role lottery process of step S4505, it sets the role pattern counter APC to "1", if it selects a medium expectation role pattern, it sets the role pattern counter APC to "2", and if it selects a high expectation role pattern, it sets the role pattern counter APC to "3".

Here, there are four types of reel patterns, including the three types of reel patterns for low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation mentioned above, and the reel pattern for the end of reciprocating motion. This reciprocating motion end reel pattern differs from the three types of reel patterns for low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation, in that it stops the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, at its initial position. Note that when the MPU 62 selects the reciprocating motion end reel pattern, it sets the reel pattern counter APC to "0."

In step S4507, the MPU 62 sets a reel effect command, which is one type of effect command, based on the value of the reel pattern counter APC stored in the work RAM 64. In the command transmission process of step S4006, the MPU 62 transmits the reel effect command set in step S4507 to the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. This reel effect command includes information (the value of the reel pattern counter APC) for causing the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, to recognize the reel pattern.
The sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a predetermined process based on a role object performance command sent from the MPU 62. This predetermined process will be described in detail later.

In step S4508, the MPU 62 executes a process for determining other performance patterns. In the process for determining other performance patterns, the MPU 62 selects a performance pattern of other pre-reading performances different from the pre-reading performance in which the movable accessory 10, which is a movable body, moves back and forth, or a performance pattern such as other advance notice display.
Furthermore, the MPU 62 sets various effect commands based on the effect pattern selected in step S4508. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect pattern determination process. In the command transmission process of step S4006, the MPU 62 transmits the various effect commands set in step S4507 to the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit.
The audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes predetermined processing based on various performance commands sent from the MPU 62.

Next, the processing (processing from step S4509 onwards) when it is determined in step S4502 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the work RAM 64 will be described.
In step S4509, the MPU 62 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 643.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S4509 that there is advance notice pending information (if it determines that there is advance notice pending information in the memory area of the sub-side pending area or in the execution area SAE), it executes processing from step S4510 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4509 that there is no advance notice pending information (if it determines that there is no advance notice pending information in the memory area of the sub-side pending area and in the execution area SAE), it executes processing from step S4513 onwards.

First, the process when it is determined in step S4509 that there is advance notice hold information (the process from step S4510 onwards) will be described.
In step S4510, the MPU 62 executes a lottery process for increasing the expectation level of the pre-reading effect. In this lottery process, the MPU 62 executes an expectation level increase lottery with an approximately 80% probability of winning if the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win," an approximately 50% probability of winning if the winning/losing result is a "special loss result," and an approximately 20% probability of winning if the winning/losing result is a "normal loss result." The probability of the expectation level increase lottery may be set to any probability.

In step S4511, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the expectation level increase lottery was won in step S4510 (whether or not the expectation level of the winning device pattern is increased).
If it is determined in step S4511 that the player has won the lottery to upgrade the expected level, the MPU 62 sets a value corresponding to the upgraded role pattern in the role pattern counter APC provided in the various counter areas 642 of the work RAM 64 in the role pattern upgrade process of step S4512.
Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "2" when "1" is set, sets the reel pattern counter APC to "3" when "2" is set, and maintains the reel pattern counter APC to "3" when "3" is set. Therefore, a reel pattern with a low expectation level is promoted to a reel pattern with a medium expectation level, a reel pattern with a medium expectation level is promoted to a reel pattern with a high expectation level, and a reel pattern with a high expectation level is maintained as it is. Note that a reel pattern with a low expectation level may be promoted to a reel pattern with a high expectation level, and promotion may be possible in two or more stages.

In addition, in the process of upgrading the prize pattern in step S4512, the MPU 62 selects a performance pattern for upgrading to indicate to the player that the prize pattern has been upgraded.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 is promoted to a role pattern with a medium expectation, it selects a performance pattern for promotion with a medium expectation, and when the MPU 62 is promoted to a role pattern with a high expectation, it selects a performance pattern for promotion with a high expectation.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes display control of the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the performance execution process of step S4004, which is the aforementioned variable unit, based on the selected promotion performance pattern.
Specifically, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the promotion effect on the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on the promotion effect pattern selected in the role pattern promotion process of step S4512. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the rendering buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the rendering buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, to execute the promotion effect.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing from step S4507 onwards.
Here, in step S4507, the MPU 62 sets a role object performance command, which is a type of performance command, based on the performance pattern for promotion with medium or high expectation selected in step S4512. In the command transmission process of step S4006, the MPU 62 transmits the role object performance command set in step S4507 to the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit. This role object performance command includes information for causing the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, to recognize the performance for promotion.
The sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a predetermined process based on a role object performance command sent from the MPU 62. This predetermined process will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process from step S4513 onward) when it is determined in step S4509 that there is no advance notice hold information will be described.
In step S4513, the MPU 62 clears the pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the work RAM 64.
In step S4514, the MPU 62 executes a termination process for the bonus feature pattern. In this termination process for the bonus feature pattern, the MPU 62 sets the bonus feature pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 642 of the work RAM 64 to "0".
Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing from step S4507 onwards.

In this way, the MPU 62 causes the sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, to start the reciprocating movement of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, based on the occurrence of a notice hold, and when the number of play times related to this notice hold has been exhausted, in step S4507, sets a device performance command, which is a type of performance command, based on the value of the device pattern counter APC stored in the work RAM 64, in order to cause the sound and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, to end the reciprocating movement of the movable device 10, which is a movable body.

<Regarding the performance command analysis process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
Figure 188 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance command analysis process.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a rendering command analysis process, which is the second control processing unit, to analyze the rendering command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this rendering command analysis process, which is the second control processing unit, the MPU 52 executes steps S4601 to S4606 as shown in FIG.

In step 4601, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a special effect command has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S4601 that it has not received a role object performance command, it executes the processing from step S4606 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S4601 that it has received a role object performance command, it acquires the current role object pattern in step S4602.

Here, the MPU 52 stores the reel patterns by setting values corresponding to the various reel patterns in the reel pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit.
Specifically, the reel pattern at the end of the reciprocating movement corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "0", a reel pattern with low expectation corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "1", a reel pattern with medium expectation corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "2", and a reel pattern with high expectation corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "3".

In step S4603, the MPU 52 compares the content of the bonus effect command with the current bonus effect pattern acquired in step S4602 to determine whether or not there is a change in the bonus effect pattern.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S4603 that there is no change in the reel pattern, it executes the processing from step S4606 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S4603 that there is a change in the reel pattern, it sets a pattern change flag in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, in step S4604.

In step S4605, the MPU 52 executes a process for setting a reel pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 sets values corresponding to various reel patterns in the reel pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, based on the content of the reel performance command.
Specifically, when setting a reel pattern at the end of a reciprocating movement, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "0", when setting a reel pattern with low expectation, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "1", when setting a reel pattern with medium expectation, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "2", and when setting a reel pattern with high expectation, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "3".

After executing the processing of step S4605, if it is determined in step S4601 that a reel effect command has not been received, or if it is determined in step S4603 that there has been no change in the reel pattern, the MPU 52 executes other effect command analysis processing in step S4606. In the other effect command analysis processing, the MPU 52 analyzes various effect commands sent from the MPU 62, such as a hold display generation effect command, a hold display shift effect command, a change start effect command, a stop result effect command, and an effect command for the open/close execution mode. The MPU 52 then terminates the effect command analysis processing.

<Regarding the performance execution process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
Figure 189 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance execution process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the movable role object 10, which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125, based on the result of analyzing the performance command in the performance command analysis process of step S2009, which is the second control processing unit. In the performance execution process, which is the second control determination unit, the MPU 52 executes steps S4701 to S4705, as shown in FIG.

In step S4701, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected. Note that the determination of whether or not the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected is made based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 105 described above.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable prop 10, which is a movable body, has not been detected, it executes the processing from step S4705 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S4701 that it has detected the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag is set in the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag is not set in the RAM 54 serving as the second control storage unit, it executes the processes from step S4705 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag is set in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, then in step S4703, it executes a role pattern execution process. In this role pattern execution process, the MPU 52 executes various role patterns based on the value of the role pattern counter APC stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.
Specifically, when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "0", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern for the end of reciprocating motion; when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "1", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern with a low expectation; when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "2", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern with a medium expectation; and when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "3", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern with a high expectation.

In step S4704, the MPU 52 clears the pattern change flag stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit.

After executing the processing of step S4704, if it is determined in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has not been detected, or if it is determined in step S4702 that the pattern change flag has not been set in RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit, other performance execution processing is executed in step S4705.
In other effect execution processes, the MPU 52 executes drive control to turn off each of the light-emitting diodes 1021, which are light-emitting bodies, when the value of the role pattern counter APC is "0," and executes drive control to turn on each of the light-emitting diodes 1021, which are light-emitting bodies, when the value of the role pattern counter APC is other than "0." In other words, even when the opening/closing door 272 is in the initial position, the MPU 52 is able to cause each of the light-emitting diodes 1021, which are light-emitting bodies, to emit light as long as a role pattern of each expectation level is being executed.

In addition, in other effect execution processes, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371-373, the movable role piece 10, which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125 based on the results of analyzing various effect commands sent from the MPU 62, such as the hold display generation effect command, the hold display shift effect command, the change start effect command, the stop result effect command, and the effect command for the open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 52 terminates the effect execution process, which is the second control discrimination unit.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, is equipped with at least a performance command analysis process, which is a second control processing unit that executes a reel pattern setting process, which is a setting process that sets the value of the reel pattern counter APC as predetermined information in the second control memory unit, RAM 54, based on a command that is a control signal from the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, and a performance execution process in step S2010, which is a second control determination unit that determines whether a switching condition used to switch the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, has occurred (whether a pattern change flag is set in RAM 54), based on information stored in the second control memory unit, RAM 54.

Here, a conventional gaming machine has a configuration similar to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and in this pachinko machine 1, the audio and light control device 5, which is the second control unit, controls the operation of the various lamp units 124, 371-373, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125 based on commands, which are control signals, from the display control device 6, which is the first control unit. In other words, in the audio and light control device 5, which is the second control unit, the operation content and operation timing of the various lamp units 124, 371-373, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125 follow commands, which are control signals determined by the display control device 6, which is the first control unit.

This is because, if the second control unit (audio and light control device 5) were configured to determine the presentation pattern during the changing display of the pattern display device 36 (lottery result display unit) based on the change command and type command sent from the main control device 4, and then send the content of this presentation pattern to the display control device 6 (first control unit), thereby generating a preview display such as displaying a specified character or the like as a moving image on the display screen G during the changing display of the pattern display device 36 (lottery result display unit), the load on the second control unit (audio and light control device 5) would be excessive, combined with the drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371-373, the movable device 10 (movable body), and the speaker unit 125. Therefore, the determination of the presentation pattern during the changing display of the pattern display device 36 (lottery result display unit) is left to the display control device 6 (first control unit).

However, when executing a performance in which the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is controlled to descend from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remain stationary at the drive position for different periods of time depending on the degree of expectation, and then rise from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating movement, changing the device pattern to low, medium, and high expectation levels, as in the predictive performance in this embodiment, there is a problem that the player may be misled about the degree of expectation of the performance.
This is because the display control device 6, which is the first control unit, decides to change the reel pattern without checking the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, and sends a command, which is a control signal corresponding to this decision, to the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit.If the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the second control unit, immediately changes the reel pattern in accordance with this command, which is a control signal, for example, if it executes a reel pattern with low expectation and starts executing a reel pattern with medium expectation while the reel is rising from the drive position to the initial position, the appearance of the effects of the low expectation reel pattern and the medium expectation reel pattern will collapse, and the player will not be able to correctly recognize the expectation of the pre-reading effect, which may cause a sense of discomfort.

To solve this problem, the gaming machine of the present invention determines whether to change the reel pattern each time it executes control to end the ascent, which is the second operation in a series of operations. Based on this determination, it changes the reel pattern, smoothly switching the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, and aims to allow the player to play comfortably without feeling any discomfort.

Furthermore, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, switches its operating state at the timing when it is placed in the initial position, even when switching to any of the device patterns (driving states) with low, medium, or high expectation levels, so that it can complete the operation before switching and the operation does not become unstable.
Furthermore, when the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is related to the expectation level of the performance, unstable operation may cause the player to misunderstand the expectation level, so in such cases the gaming machine of the present invention is particularly useful.
Furthermore, if the pattern of the operating state includes a reel pattern (non-driven state) that ends the reciprocating movement, the reel will end in the same initial position as when switching to another pattern, so unlike conventional gaming machines, the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, is not driven to end the performance and moved to a standby position described later, and the driving to end the performance does not lead to misunderstandings by the player or make the performance look bad.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. Specifically, FIG. 190(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 190(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 190(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been consumed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 190(D) is a diagram showing the state in which the third pre-reading effect related to this advance notice hold information has been consumed after advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 190(E) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice hold information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area after the game play related to this advance notice hold information has been consumed.

As shown in Figure 190(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 190(A), the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4207 that a notice hold should be generated, the MPU 62 executes a notice hold generation process in step S4208 and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S4204. In the example of Fig. 190(A), the MPU 62 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S4207 that a normal hold should be generated, in step S4209, it executes a normal hold generation process and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area of the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S4204. In the example of Figure 190(A), the MPU 62 stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.

Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display section, to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from MPU 52, if advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, MPU 62 places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on base B13.

In addition, based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, to notify the player that a normal hold has occurred.
Specifically, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from MPU 52, if normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, MPU 62 places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on base B14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 190, the MPU 62 displays on the display screen G pedestals B11 to B14 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa, pedestals B21 to B24 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and an execution pedestal AB located between pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE.

The first storage lamp unit 371, which is a light-emitting body, is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side storage area SRa (see FIG. 164). On the other hand, the bases B11 to B14 are provided from right to left to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side storage area SRa.
The second storage lamp unit 372, which is a light-emitting body, is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side storage area SRb (see FIG. 164). Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side storage area SRb.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the lottery by displaying the shifts of the regular hold and the notice hold on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display section, based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the fluctuation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, thereby transitioning to a high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 190 (B), MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, the MPU 62 executes the shift between normal hold and notice hold, and when starting the variable display, executes the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S4407.
190(B), advance notice reserve information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and normal reserve information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa and the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa. Also, since the pre-reading effect has not yet occurred, the MPU 62 determines in step S4502 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the work RAM 64. In this case, in step S4503, the MPU 62 determines that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information, so in step S4504, it sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the work RAM 64, and then in the reel pattern determination process of step S4506, it sets values corresponding to various reel patterns in the reel pattern counter APC provided in the various counter areas 642 of the work RAM 64 based on the lottery results of the expectation lottery process of step S4505.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 selects a low expectation role pattern in the expectation role lottery process of step S4505, it sets the role pattern counter APC to "1", if it selects a medium expectation role pattern, it sets the role pattern counter APC to "2", and if it selects a high expectation role pattern, it sets the role pattern counter APC to "3".

In addition, when the MPU 62 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the work RAM 64 in step S4504, the pre-reading effect will be generated continuously until the number of play times related to the advance notice pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 643 has been consumed.
The following description will be given assuming that the MPU 62 selects a low expectation prize pattern in the expectation prize lottery process in step S4505 and sets the prize pattern counter APC to "1".

When a reel pattern of each expectation level is selected in the reel pattern determination process of step S4506, the MPU 52 determines in step S4601 that it has received a reel performance command, and therefore obtains the current reel pattern in step S4602.
Here, in the example of Figure 190 (A), the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, is stopped at the initial position, so the MPU 52 obtains "0" as the value of the reel pattern counter APC, which indicates that the reel pattern at the end of the reciprocating movement has been selected.

After obtaining the current reel pattern in step S4602, the MPU 52 determines in step S4603 whether or not there is a change in the reel pattern by comparing the contents of the reel performance command with the current reel pattern.
Here, the reel performance command contains information (value of the reel pattern counter APC) for allowing the audio light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, to recognize the reel pattern, so the MPU 52 determines whether there has been a change in the reel pattern by comparing the value of the reel pattern counter APC contained in the reel performance command with the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602.
In the example of Figure 190 (B), the value of the reel pattern counter APC included in the reel performance command is "1", and the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602 is "0", so MPU 52 determines that there has been a change in the reel pattern.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag is set in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, and therefore executes a role pattern execution process in step S4703. In this role pattern execution process, the MPU 52 executes various role patterns based on the value of the role pattern counter APC stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.
In the example of Figure 190 (B), the MPU 52 executes a low expectation bonus pattern because the value of the bonus bonus pattern counter APC is "1".
The low expectation reel pattern is a pattern in which the reel descends from the initial position to the drive position over a period of 2 seconds, remains stationary at the drive position for 2 seconds, and then repeats a reciprocating motion of ascending from the drive position to the initial position over a period of 2 seconds (see Figure 167 (A)).

Furthermore, in the example of Figure 190 (B), since the value of the accessory pattern counter APC is "1", the MPU 52 executes drive control to light up each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, in the other effect execution processing of step S4705.

In this way, in this embodiment, the petal lifting mechanism 103, which is the movable body drive unit, is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations while a variable display is being performed on the pattern display device 36, which is the predetermined lottery result display unit. This series of operations includes at least a first operation, a descent, in which each petal 101, which is the movable body main body located in the initial position, moves from the initial position to the drive position, and a second operation, a lift, in which each petal 101, which is the movable body main body located in the drive position, moves back to the initial position.

Here, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between when each petal 101, which is the movable body main body part, performs the first action of descending and when it performs the second action of rising, the higher the player's expected profit.
If such a configuration is adopted, for example, if the next action is performed during the descent, which is the first action of a device pattern with a short round trip time, the round trip time will change, and the action of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, will not be stable, and the player may not be able to correctly recognize the expectation level of the predictive performance, which may cause a sense of discomfort.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not to change the reel pattern each time it executes the control to end the ascent, which is the second operation in the series of operations, and changes the reel pattern based on this determination, so even when such a configuration is adopted, the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, can be smoothly switched.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between when each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, performs the first action (descent) and when it performs the second action (rising), the higher the player's expected profit. However, the expected profit does not have to differ depending on the length of time, and the expected profit may differ based on criteria other than time. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may differ the expected profit based on the operating mode, such as the operating speed or direction of the movable device 10, which is the movable body.

Here, each time the MPU 52 executes the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control determination unit, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit. In other words, each time the MPU 52 executes the timer interrupt process periodically (for example, every 2 msec), it determines in step S4701 whether the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, and if it determines in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes it by displaying the shifts of the regular hold and the notice hold on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 190 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the fluctuation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, thereby transitioning to a high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 190 (C), MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, the MPU 62 executes the shift between normal hold and notice hold, and when starting the variable display, executes the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S4407.
In the example of FIG. 190(C), advance notice pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. Since the pre-reading effect has already occurred, the MPU 62 determines in step S4502 that the pre-reading effect occurring flag is set in the work RAM 64. In this case, the MPU 62 determines in step S4509 that the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 643 contains advance notice pending information. Therefore, in step S4511, the MPU 62 determines whether the expectation level promotion lottery was won in step S4510. If it is determined that the expectation level promotion lottery was won, the MPU 62 sets a value corresponding to the promoted role pattern in the role pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 642 of the work RAM 64 in the role pattern promotion process of step S4512.
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reel pattern counter APC, the MPU 62 sets "2", when "2" is set in the reel pattern counter APC, the MPU 62 sets "3", and when "3" is set in the reel pattern counter APC, the MPU 62 maintains "3".

In addition, in the process of upgrading the prize pattern in step S4512, the MPU 62 selects a performance pattern for upgrading to indicate to the player that the prize pattern has been upgraded.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 is promoted to a role pattern with a medium expectation, it selects a performance pattern for promotion with a medium expectation, and when the MPU 62 is promoted to a role pattern with a high expectation, it selects a performance pattern for promotion with a high expectation.

In the following explanation, it will be assumed that the MPU 62 has determined that the player has won the expectation level promotion lottery and set the accessory pattern counter APC to "2."

When the promotion process of the role pattern in step S4512 results in promotion to a role pattern with a medium expectation, the MPU 62 selects a performance pattern for promotion with a medium expectation.
Then, based on the selected performance pattern for promotion with a medium expectation level, the MPU 62 executes display control of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the performance execution process of step S4004, which is the variable unit, and executes a performance for promotion with a medium expectation level in which a single fish is displayed on the display screen G by thrusting the movable device 10, which is a movable body, as shown in Figure 190 (C).

When a reel pattern of each expectation level is selected in the reel pattern promotion process of step S4512, the MPU 52 determines in step S4601 that it has received a reel performance command, and therefore obtains the current reel pattern in step S4602.
Here, in the example of Figure 190 (B), a low expectation reel pattern is being executed, so the MPU 52 obtains "1" as the value of the reel pattern counter APC, which indicates that a low expectation reel pattern has been selected.

After obtaining the current reel pattern in step S4602, the MPU 52 determines in step S4603 whether or not there is a change in the reel pattern by comparing the contents of the reel performance command with the current reel pattern.
Here, the reel performance command contains information (value of the reel pattern counter APC) for allowing the audio light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, to recognize the reel pattern, so the MPU 52 determines whether there has been a change in the reel pattern by comparing the value of the reel pattern counter APC contained in the reel performance command with the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602.
In the example of Figure 190 (C), the value of the reel pattern counter APC included in the reel performance command is "2", and the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602 is "1", so MPU 52 determines that there has been a change in the reel pattern.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag is set in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, and therefore executes a role pattern execution process in step S4703. In this role pattern execution process, the MPU 52 executes various role patterns based on the value of the role pattern counter APC stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.
In the example of Figure 190 (C), the MPU 52 executes a bonus pattern with a medium expectation level because the value of the bonus pattern counter APC is "2".
The medium expectation device pattern is a pattern in which the device descends from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the drive position for four seconds, and then repeats the reciprocating motion of ascending from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds (see Figure 167 (B)).

Furthermore, in the example of Figure 190 (C), since the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "2", the MPU 52 executes drive control to light up each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, in the other effect execution processing of step S4705.

Here, each time the MPU 52 executes the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control determination unit, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit. In other words, each time the MPU 52 executes the timer interrupt process periodically (for example, every 2 msec), it determines in step S4701 whether the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, and if it determines in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag has not been set in the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit, the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "1", so the reel pattern with a low expectation level will continue to be executed.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes it by displaying the shifts of the regular hold and the notice hold on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 190 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the fluctuation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, thereby transitioning to a high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 190 (D), MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, the MPU 62 executes the shift between normal hold and notice hold, and when starting the variable display, executes the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S4407.
190(D), the look-ahead effect has already occurred, so the MPU 62 determines in step S4502 that the look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the work RAM 64. In this case, the MPU 62 determines in step S4509 that the sub-side reserved information stored in the sub-side reserved information storage area 643 contains advance notice reserved information, so in step S4511, it determines whether or not the expectation level promotion lottery was won in step S4510, and if it is determined that the expectation level promotion lottery was won, in the role pattern promotion process of step S4512, a value corresponding to the role pattern after promotion is set in the role pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 642 of the work RAM 64.
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reel pattern counter APC, the MPU 62 sets "2", when "2" is set in the reel pattern counter APC, the MPU 62 sets "3", and when "3" is set in the reel pattern counter APC, the MPU 62 maintains "3".

In addition, in the process of upgrading the prize pattern in step S4512, the MPU 62 selects a performance pattern for upgrading to indicate to the player that the prize pattern has been upgraded.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 is promoted to a role pattern with a medium expectation, it selects a performance pattern for promotion with a medium expectation, and when the MPU 62 is promoted to a role pattern with a high expectation, it selects a performance pattern for promotion with a high expectation.

In the following explanation, it will be assumed that the MPU 62 has determined that the player has won the expectation level promotion lottery and set the accessory pattern counter APC to "3."

When the promotion process of the role pattern in step S4512 results in promotion to a role pattern with a high expectation, the MPU 62 selects a performance pattern for promotion with a high expectation.
Then, based on the selected high-expectation promotion presentation pattern, the MPU 62 executes display control of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, in the presentation execution process of step S4004, which is the variable unit, and executes a high-expectation promotion presentation in which two fish are displayed on the display screen G by thrusting the movable device 10, which is a movable body, as shown in Figure 190 (D).

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 suggests to the player that the feature pattern will be upgraded by causing the movable feature 10, which is a movable body, to strike and display one or two fish on the display screen G. However, any method of suggesting this to the player may be used. For example, when various symbol combinations are displayed as stopped symbols on the pay line L as the stop results of the previous game, a symbol combination indicating a chance (a chance eye) may be displayed as stopped symbols on the pay line L. The expected probability of this chance eye may be selected and displayed as stopped symbols on the pay line L, such as a combination of even numbers, a combination of odd numbers, or a combination of symbols including "7." Furthermore, for example, when various symbol combinations are displayed as stopped symbols on the pay line L as the stop results of the previous game, the symbol may slide to display a chance eye on the pay line L to indicate a chance. When a reach-in display symbol combination is displayed as stopped symbols on the pay line L, the symbol may be displayed as stopped symbols at a timing different from the normal stop timing (e.g., immediately after the reach-in display occurs). Additionally, for example, in various effects, to indicate a chance, the sound may start at a different timing than the normal sound start timing (for example, delayed by a predetermined period).

In addition, in this embodiment, the promotion effect is executed when the variable display begins, but the timing for executing the promotion effect can be any timing, and the promotion effect can be executed when a suggestion to the player, such as the aforementioned chance eye, is executed.

When a reel pattern of each expectation level is selected in the reel pattern promotion process of step S4512, the MPU 52 determines in step S4601 that it has received a reel performance command, and therefore obtains the current reel pattern in step S4602.
Here, in the example of Figure 190 (C), a reel pattern with a medium expectation level is being executed, so the MPU 52 obtains "2" as the value of the reel pattern counter APC, which indicates that a reel pattern with a medium expectation level has been selected.

After obtaining the current reel pattern in step S4602, the MPU 52 determines in step S4603 whether or not there is a change in the reel pattern by comparing the contents of the reel performance command with the current reel pattern.
Here, the reel performance command contains information (value of the reel pattern counter APC) for allowing the audio light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, to recognize the reel pattern, so the MPU 52 determines whether there has been a change in the reel pattern by comparing the value of the reel pattern counter APC contained in the reel performance command with the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602.
In the example of Figure 190 (D), the value of the reel pattern counter APC included in the reel performance command is "3", and the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602 is "2", so MPU 52 determines that there has been a change in the reel pattern.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag is set in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, and therefore executes a role pattern execution process in step S4703. In this role pattern execution process, the MPU 52 executes various role patterns based on the value of the role pattern counter APC stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.
In the example of Figure 190 (D), the MPU 52 executes a high expectation bonus pattern because the value of the bonus pattern counter APC is "3".
The high-expectation reel pattern is one in which the reel descends from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the drive position for six seconds, and then repeats the reciprocating motion of ascending from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds (see Figure 167 (C)).

Furthermore, in the example of Figure 190 (D), since the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "3", the MPU 52 executes drive control to light up each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, in the other effect execution processing of step S4705.

Here, each time the MPU 52 executes the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control determination unit, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit. In other words, each time the MPU 52 executes the timer interrupt process periodically (for example, every 2 msec), it determines in step S4701 whether the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, and if it determines in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag has not been set in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "2", so the reel pattern with a medium expectation level will continue to be executed.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the advance notice hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes it by displaying the shifts of the normal hold and advance notice hold on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 190 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white spherical image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, and places it on execution base AB.

Then, based on the fluctuation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, which is the lottery result display unit, thereby transitioning to a high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 190 (E), MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, the MPU 62 executes the shift between normal hold and notice hold, and when starting the variable display, executes the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S4407.
190(E), the look-ahead effect has already occurred, so the MPU 62 determines in step S4502 that the look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the work RAM 64. In this case, the MPU 62 determines in step S4509 that there is no advance notice pending information in the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 643, so in step S4513, the look-ahead effect occurring flag stored in the work RAM 64 is cleared, and then in step S4514, the MPU 62 executes the termination process of the role pattern. In this termination process of the role pattern, the MPU 62 sets "0" to the role pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 642 of the work RAM 64.

If a reciprocating motion end feature pattern is selected in the reciprocating motion end processing of step S4514, the MPU 52 determines in step S4601 that it has received a reciprocating motion performance command, and therefore obtains the current reciprocal motion pattern in step S4602.
Here, in the example of Figure 190 (D), a high expectation reel pattern is being executed, so the MPU 52 obtains "3" as the value of the reel pattern counter APC, which indicates that a high expectation reel pattern has been selected.

After obtaining the current reel pattern in step S4602, the MPU 52 determines in step S4603 whether or not there is a change in the reel pattern by comparing the contents of the reel performance command with the current reel pattern.
Here, the reel performance command contains information (value of the reel pattern counter APC) for allowing the audio light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, to recognize the reel pattern, so the MPU 52 determines whether there has been a change in the reel pattern by comparing the value of the reel pattern counter APC contained in the reel performance command with the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602.
In the example of Figure 190 (E), the value of the reel pattern counter APC included in the reel performance command is "0", and the value of the reel pattern counter APC obtained in step S4602 is "3", so the MPU 52 determines that there has been a change in the reel pattern.

Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S4702 that the pattern change flag is set in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, and therefore executes a role pattern execution process in step S4703. In this role pattern execution process, the MPU 52 executes various role patterns based on the value of the role pattern counter APC stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.
In the example of Figure 190 (E), the MPU 52 executes the reciprocating motion end reciprocating motion reciprocating motion end reciprocating motion pattern because the value of the reciprocating motion pattern counter APC is "0".
The accessory pattern at the end of the reciprocating motion is different from the three accessory patterns of low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation, and is an accessory pattern that stops the movable accessory 10, which is a movable body, at its initial position.

Furthermore, in the example of Figure 190 (E), since the value of the accessory pattern counter APC is "0", the MPU 52 executes drive control to turn off each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, in the other effect execution processing of step S4705.

Here, each time the MPU 52 executes the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control determination unit, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit. In other words, each time the MPU 52 executes the timer interrupt process periodically (for example, every 2 msec), it determines in step S4701 whether the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, and if it determines in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has been detected, it determines in step S4702 whether a pattern change flag has been set in RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.

In this way, in this embodiment, the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, is configured to make a discrimination each time the control to end the ascent, which is the second operation in the series of operations, is executed.
In other words, in this embodiment, the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, is configured so that after making a discrimination, it does not make another discrimination until each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, has completed rising, which is the second operation in the series of operations.

In this embodiment, the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, is configured so that after discrimination is made, no discrimination is made until each petal 101, which is the movable body main body unit, has completed the second operation in the series of operations, which is rising. However, as long as discrimination is made each time control is executed to complete the second operation in the series of operations, which is rising, discrimination may also be made in the middle of the series of operations.

Here, if the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, is configured to make a discrimination each time it is executed, discrimination will be made multiple times even though it is not the right time to smoothly switch the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, and there is a problem that the load on the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, will become excessive.
In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, does not make a discrimination until each petal 101, which is the movable body main body unit, finishes rising, which is the second operation in the series of operations, after making a discrimination, so it is possible to change the reel pattern when it returns to the initial position, and it is possible to keep the state before changing the reel pattern constant. Also, by eliminating unnecessary discrimination, the pachinko machine 1 can reduce the load on the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the determination of the performance execution process by step S2010, which is the second control determination section, the pachinko machine 1 may either continue the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, in a first state in which a series of operations is executed (a state in which the device pattern is continuously executed), or may transition the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, from the first state in which a series of operations is executed to a second state (a state in which the device pattern is changed and executed) in which the movable device is controlled in a manner different from the first state.

In this embodiment, the second state includes at least a movement end state (reciprocating movement end reciprocating ...

In this embodiment, the second state has a movement end state (a requisite pattern at the end of reciprocating movement) that ends the movement of the movable prop 10, which is a movable body, but it does not have to have a movement end state, and may only have a requisite pattern for each expected level. Also, in this embodiment, the initial position is the position where each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is located when it is in a non-driven state, but it may be a position different from this position. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable prop 10, which is a movable body, is configured so that almost the entirety of each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is visible even when each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is located in the initial position where it is in a non-driven state, but it may also be configured so that it is not visible.

In conventional gaming machines, when executing a performance in which the operational state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is controlled to descend from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remain at the drive position for a time that varies depending on the level of expectation, and then rise from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating movement to change device patterns for low, medium, and high expectation levels, as in the predictive performance of this embodiment, each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, generally moves to an initial position visible to the player when the petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, is changed from a non-drive state to a drive state based on the occurrence of the predictive performance, and moves back and forth between this initial position and the drive position. Thereafter, each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, moves to a standby position invisible to the player when the petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, is changed from a drive state to a non-drive state based on the end of the predictive performance.

Here, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the second state has at least a movable end state (a reciprocating motion end reel pattern) that ends the operation of the movable device 10, which is a movable body. Therefore, if there is a standby position in a non-driven state as in conventional gaming machines, after the operation of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, has ended, each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, must be moved to the standby position, which results in the problem of requiring unnecessary processing.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, as described above, the initial position is the position where each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, is located when it is in a non-driven state, so even if the second state has a movement end state (a rendezvous movement end rendezvous pattern), the operation of the movable rendezvous device 10, which is the movable body, can be neatly ended without the need for unnecessary processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is configured so that each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, can be seen almost entirely even when each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is positioned in its initial position in a non-driven state. Therefore, when executing a pre-reading effect, there is no need to move each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, to a position where it can be seen by the player, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in the effect. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in terms of its decorativeness.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the initial position is the position where each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is located when it is in a non-driven state. Therefore, each time the second operation in a series of operations is completed and the movable body main body moves to the initial position, the player may mistakenly believe that the operation of the movable device 10, which is the movable body, has ended, which can make it difficult to play comfortably. This problem remains even if almost the entire petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is configured to be visible.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with light-emitting diodes 1021 that are light-emitting bodies that can emit light at least when each petal 101, which is a movable body main body, is located in its initial position, and each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 even when each petal 101, which is a movable body main body, is located in its initial position. In this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 can, for example, control each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, to emit light when each petal 101, which is a movable body main body, is changed from a non-driven state to a driven state based on the occurrence of a look-ahead performance, and can control each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, not to emit light when each petal 101, which is a movable body main body, is changed from a driven state to a non-driven state based on the end of the look-ahead performance. This allows the player to confirm that the movement of the movable body has not ended by visually checking the light emitted by the light-emitting body, even when the second movement in the series of movements has ended and the movable body main body has moved to its initial position.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with light-emitting diodes 1021, which are light-emitting bodies that can emit light when each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, is located in its initial position, but this does not necessarily have to be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the control executed after the series of movements is completed can be either a predetermined control (a reel pattern at the end of a reciprocating movement) or a specific control different from the predetermined control (a reel pattern with a medium expectation level or a reel pattern with a high expectation level), and whether the control executed after the series of movements is completed is a predetermined control or a specific control, it is executed with each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, positioned in its initial position.

In this embodiment, there are two types of controls that are executed after a series of operations are completed: a reciprocating operation end device pattern, and a medium expectation device pattern or a high expectation device pattern. Therefore, for example, if the next operation is started during the first operation of a device pattern with a short reciprocating time, which is a descent, the reciprocating time will change, the operation of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, will not be stable, and the player may not be able to correctly recognize the expectation level of the predictive performance, which may cause a sense of discomfort.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, regardless of the control executed after the series of operations is completed, the pachinko machine 1 executes the control with each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, positioned in its initial position, so that the operating state of the movable device 10, which is the movable body, can be smoothly switched.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, while multiple variable displays are performed on the pattern display device 36, which is a predetermined lottery result display unit.
In this embodiment, the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on each petal 101, which is the movable body main body part, while multiple variable displays are performed on the pattern display device 36, which is a predetermined lottery result display part, but it may also be configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on each petal 101, which is the movable body main body part, while one variable display is performed.

Here, as in the predictive performance in this embodiment, by controlling the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, it takes 2 seconds to descend from the initial position to the drive position, remains stationary at the drive position for different periods of time depending on the degree of expectation, and then rises from the drive position to the initial position over 2 seconds, repeating this reciprocating movement to change the device pattern for low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation. In this case, if the device pattern is changed during one variable display, the pachinko machine 1 can smoothly switch the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, by predetermining the change pattern.
However, when changing the reel pattern while multiple variable displays are being performed, the content of each variable display is different, so there is a problem in that the pattern of the change cannot be determined in advance.
In this embodiment, the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, is configured to make a judgment each time the control to end the ascent, which is the second operation in the series of operations, is executed, and the reel pattern is changed based on the judgment of the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit.Therefore, even if the reel pattern is changed between multiple variable displays, the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, can be smoothly switched.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing a first period (a period in which the reel pattern is changed and executed after one play round has ended) and a second period (a period in which the reel pattern is continuously executed across two or more play rounds) that is longer than the first period as the period of the first state in which each petal 101, which is the movable body main body part, executes a series of operations, and the period of the first state is determined randomly by lottery (expectation level promotion lottery).
In this embodiment, the period of the first state is determined randomly by lottery (expectation level promotion lottery), but it may also be determined, for example, according to the number of game balls entering various winning slots, or it may be a fixed period.

When such a configuration is adopted, the period of time required for the first state to become the second state is not uniformly determined, so for example, if the next action is made during the descent, which is the first action of a device pattern with a short round trip time, the round trip time will change, the action of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, will not be stable, and the player may not be able to correctly recognize the expectation level of the predictive performance, which may cause a sense of discomfort.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not to change the reel pattern each time it executes control to end the rise, which is the second operation in the series of operations, and based on this determination, the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, may be continued in a first state in which a series of operations is executed (a state in which the reel pattern is continuously executed), or the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, may be transitioned from the first state in which a series of operations is executed to a second state (a state in which the reel pattern is changed and executed) in which the movable reel is controlled in a manner different from the first state.Therefore, even when such a configuration is adopted, the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, can be smoothly switched.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 (gaming machine) is equipped with a starting ball entry port (starting ball entry means) provided in the gaming area, a lottery process (lottery means) that can execute a lottery when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry port, a variable unit (variation means) that displays a variable result on a predetermined lottery result display unit (display means) provided in the gaming area in response to the lottery result, a movable body (movable means) provided in the gaming area that can execute a predetermined operation, and a second control unit (second means) that can control the operating state of the movable body based on a control signal (predetermined signal) from a connected first control unit (first means).

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body at least comprises a movable body drive unit (drive unit) and a movable body main body unit (movable unit) that is moved by the movable body drive unit, and is configured to allow the movable body drive unit to repeatedly perform a series of operations while a variable display is being performed on a predetermined lottery result display unit. This series of operations includes at least a first operation in which the movable body main body unit, which is located in the initial position, moves from the initial position to the drive position, and a second operation in which the movable body main body unit, which is located in the drive position, moves back to the initial position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second control unit includes at least a second control processing unit (processing means) that executes a setting process to set predetermined information in a second control memory unit (storage means) based on a control signal from the first control unit, and a second control determination unit (determination means) that determines whether a switching condition used to switch the operating state of the movable body has occurred based on the information stored in the second control memory unit. This second control determination unit is configured to make a determination each time control is executed to end a second operation in a series of operations.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may, based on the determination of the second control determination unit, either continue the operating state of the movable body in a first state in which a series of operations is performed, or transition the operating state of the movable body from the first state in which a series of operations is performed to a second state in which the movable body is controlled in a manner different from the first state.

With this configuration, the second control discrimination unit makes a discrimination each time it executes control to end the second action in a series of actions, and based on the discrimination of the second control discrimination unit, the pachinko machine 1 either continues the operating state of the movable body in a first state in which a series of actions are executed, or transitions the operating state of the movable body from the first state in which a series of actions are executed to a second state in which the movable body is controlled in a manner different from the first state, thereby enabling smooth switching between the operating states of the movable body.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a light-emitting body (light-emitting means) that can emit light at least when the movable body main body is located in the initial position. This light-emitting body is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even when the movable body main body is located in the initial position.

With this configuration, the light-emitting body is visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 even when the movable body main body is in the initial position, and can emit light when the movable body main body is in the initial position. Therefore, even when the second action in a series of actions has been completed and the movable body main body has moved to the initial position, the player can confirm by visually checking the light emitted by the light-emitting body that the action of the movable body has not ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body is configured to repeatedly perform a series of operations on the movable body main body while multiple variable displays are displayed on the specified lottery result display section.

With this configuration, the movable body is configured to repeatedly perform a series of operations on the movable body main body while multiple variable displays are being displayed on the specified lottery result display unit, so the movable body main body can be made to repeatedly perform a series of operations independently regardless of the number of variable displays.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period as the first state period during which the movable body main body performs a series of operations, and the first state period is determined randomly by lottery.

With this configuration, the duration of the first state is determined randomly by lottery, so the player will pay attention to the length of the first state, which can increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second state includes at least a movement end state in which the movement of the movable body is ended, and the initial position is the position in which the movable body main body is disposed when it is in a non-driven state.

With this configuration, the initial position is the position where the movable body main body is located when it is in a non-driven state, so when the movement ends, the movement of the movable body can be completed cleanly without any unnecessary movement.

In addition, in this embodiment, the control executed after the series of operations is completed can be either a predetermined control or a specific control different from the predetermined control, and whether the control executed after the series of operations is completed is a predetermined control or a specific control, it is executed with the movable body main body positioned in the initial position.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 executes the control with the movable body main body positioned in its initial position, regardless of whether the control executed after completing a series of operations is predetermined control or specific control, allowing for a smooth transition between predetermined control and specific control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second control discrimination unit is configured so that after making a discrimination, it will not make another discrimination until the movable body main body has completed the second operation in the series of operations.

With this configuration, after making a determination, the second control determination unit does not make another determination until the movable body main body completes the second operation in the series of operations, thereby eliminating unnecessary determinations and reducing the processing burden on the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between when the movable body main unit performs the first action and when it performs the second action, the higher the player's expected profit.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between when the movable body main unit performs the first action and when it performs the second action, the higher the player's expected profit. This means that the player will pay attention to the time between when the movable body main unit performs the first action and when it performs the second action, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initial position is the position where the movable body main body is located when it is in a non-driven state, and the movable body is configured so that almost the entire movable body main body is visible even when it is located in the initial position where the movable body main body is in a non-driven state.

With this configuration, the movable body is configured so that almost the entire movable body main body is visible even when it is positioned in the initial position where the movable body main body is in a non-driven state. This means that the entire movable body can be seen as it moves back and forth between the initial position and the driven position, improving the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1.

According to this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.
(1) The performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, makes a judgment each time it executes control to end the rise in a series of operations, and based on the judgment of the performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, the pachinko machine 1 has two cases in which the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, continues in a first state in which a series of operations are executed, and in which the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, is transitioned from the first state in which a series of operations is executed to a second state in which it is controlled in a manner different from the first state, so that the operating state of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, can be smoothly switched.

(2) Each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body, is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 even when each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, is located in its initial position, and can emit light when each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, is located in its initial position. Therefore, even when the upward movement in the series of movements has ended and each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, has moved to its initial position, the player can confirm that the operation of the movable device 10, which is the movable body, has not ended by visually checking the emission of each light-emitting diode 1021, which is a light-emitting body.

(3) The movable device 10, which is a movable body, is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, while multiple variable displays are being performed on the pattern display device 36, which is a predetermined lottery result display unit.Therefore, it is possible to repeatedly perform a series of operations on each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, independently of the number of variable displays.
(4) Since the duration of the first state is determined randomly by lottery, the player will pay attention to the length of the duration of the first state, which can increase the player's interest.
(5) The initial position is the position where each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, is located when it is in a non-driven state. Therefore, when the movement is terminated, the operation of the movable prop 10, which is the movable body, can be neatly terminated without any unnecessary movement.

(6) Regardless of whether the control executed after completing a series of operations is a predetermined control or a specific control, the pachinko machine 1 executes the control with each petal 101, which is the movable body main body, positioned in its initial position, so that whether the control is a predetermined control or a specific control, the transition can be made smoothly.
(7) The performance execution process of step S2010, which is the second control discrimination unit, does not make any further discrimination after making a discrimination until each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, has finished rising in a series of operations, so that unnecessary discrimination is not made and the processing burden on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

(8) The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the longer the time between when each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, descends and when it rises, the higher the player's expected profit. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the time between when each petal 101, which is the main body of the movable body, descends and when it rises, thereby increasing the player's interest.
(9) The movable device 10, which is a movable body, is configured so that almost the entirety of each petal 101, which is the main body part of the movable body, can be seen even when each petal 101 is positioned in an initial position in a non-driven state. Therefore, the entire movable part can be seen when moving back and forth between the initial position and the driven position, thereby improving the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the reel pattern for each expectation level involved a pattern in which the reel descended from the initial position to the drive position over two seconds, remained stationary at the drive position for a different amount of time depending on the expectation level, and then rose from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating motion. In other words, in the first embodiment, the distance from the initial position to the drive position was set to the same distance regardless of the expectation level of the reel pattern.

In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the reel pattern for each expectation level repeats a reciprocating motion of descending from an initial position over two seconds to a drive position located at a different distance depending on the expectation level, remaining stationary at the drive position for a predetermined period of time, and then ascending from the drive position to the initial position over two seconds.

Fig. 191 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the role pattern of each expectation level according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In Fig. 191, the timing chart shows the horizontal axis as time and the vertical axis as the position of the movable role 10, which is a movable body.
The movable device 10, which is a movable body, has device patterns with low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation, as shown in Figure 191.
Note that Figure 191(A) shows a timing chart of a reel pattern with a low expectation level, Figure 191(B) shows a timing chart of a reel pattern with a medium expectation level, and Figure 191(C) shows a timing chart of a reel pattern with a high expectation level.

As shown in Figure 191 (A), the low-expectation device pattern is a pattern in which the device descends from the initial position to the low-expectation drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the low-expectation drive position for two seconds, and then repeats a reciprocating motion of ascending from the low-expectation drive position to the initial position over two seconds. In this embodiment, the low-expectation drive position is located 2 cm below the initial position. This low-expectation device pattern is unlikely to occur if the internal lottery results in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state, and is likely to occur if the internal lottery does not result in a win.

As shown in Figure 191 (B), the medium expectation device pattern is a pattern in which the device descends from the initial position to the medium expectation device drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the medium expectation device drive position for two seconds, and then ascends from the medium expectation device drive position to the initial position over two seconds, repeating this reciprocating motion. In this embodiment, the medium expectation device drive position is located 4 cm below the initial position. This medium expectation device pattern is more likely to occur than a low expectation device pattern and less likely to occur than a high expectation device pattern if the internal lottery results in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state. If the internal lottery results in a win, the device is less likely to occur than a low expectation device pattern and more likely to occur than a high expectation device pattern.

As shown in Figure 191 (C), the high-expectation device pattern is a pattern in which the device descends from the initial position to the high-expectation drive position over two seconds, remains stationary at the high-expectation drive position for two seconds, and then repeats a reciprocating motion of ascending from the high-expectation drive position to the initial position over two seconds. In this embodiment, the high-expectation drive position is located 6 cm below the initial position. This high-expectation device pattern is likely to occur if the internal lottery results in a win to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, which is a specific control state, and is unlikely to occur if the win is not won.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, performs processing different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the performance command analysis processing, which is the second control processing unit, and the performance execution processing, which is the second control discrimination unit, are different from those of the first embodiment. Below, we will explain the details of the performance command analysis processing, which is the second control processing unit, and the performance execution processing, which is the second control discrimination unit in this embodiment.

<Regarding the performance command analysis process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
Figure 192 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance command analysis process.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes a rendering command analysis process, which is the second control processing unit, to analyze the rendering command transmitted from the MPU 62. In this rendering command analysis process, which is the second control processing unit, the MPU 52 executes step S4606, as shown in Fig. 192. Note that this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes only the process of step S4606.

<Regarding the performance execution process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
Figure 193 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance execution process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the movable role object 10, which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125, based on the result of analyzing the performance command in the performance command analysis process of step S2009, which is the second control processing unit. In the performance execution process, which is the second control determination unit, the MPU 52 executes steps S4706Z to S4705, as shown in FIG.

In step S4706Z, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a bonus object performance command has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S4706Z that it has not received a role object performance command, it executes the processing from step S4705 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S4706Z that it has received a role production command, it determines in step S4701 whether or not it has detected the initial position of the movable role 10, which is a movable body. The determination of whether or not it has detected the initial position of the movable role 10, which is a movable body, is made based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 105 described above.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable prop 10, which is a movable body, has not been detected, it executes the processing from step S4705 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S4701 that it has detected the initial position of the movable device 10, which is a movable body, then in step S4707Z it acquires the current device pattern.

Here, the MPU 52 stores the reel patterns by setting values corresponding to the various reel patterns in the reel pattern counter APC provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54, which is the second control memory unit.
Specifically, the reel pattern at the end of the reciprocating movement corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "0", a reel pattern with low expectation corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "1", a reel pattern with medium expectation corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "2", and a reel pattern with high expectation corresponds to a reel pattern counter APC value of "3".

In step S4708Z, the MPU 52 compares the content of the bonus effect command with the current bonus effect pattern acquired in step S4707Z, thereby determining whether or not there is a change in the bonus effect pattern.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S4708Z that there is no change in the reel pattern, it executes the processing from step S4705 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S4708Z that there is a change in the reel pattern, it executes a reel pattern setting process in step S4709Z. In this reel pattern setting process, the MPU 52 sets values corresponding to various reel patterns in reel pattern counters APC provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit, based on the contents of the reel performance command.
Specifically, when setting a reel pattern at the end of a reciprocating movement, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "0", when setting a reel pattern with low expectation, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "1", when setting a reel pattern with medium expectation, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "2", and when setting a reel pattern with high expectation, the MPU 52 sets the reel pattern counter APC to "3".

In step S4703, the MPU 52 executes a role pattern execution process. In this role pattern execution process, the MPU 52 executes various role patterns based on the value of the role pattern counter APC stored in the RAM 54, which is the second control storage unit.
Specifically, when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "0", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern for the end of reciprocating motion; when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "1", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern with a low expectation; when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "2", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern with a medium expectation; and when the value of the reel pattern counter APC is "3", the MPU 52 executes a reel pattern with a high expectation.

After executing step S4703, if it is determined in step S4706Z that a reel performance command has not been received, if it is determined in step S4701 that the initial position of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, has not been detected, or if it is determined in step S4708Z that there has been no change in the reel pattern, then in step S4705, other performance execution processing is executed.
In other performance execution processing, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the movable role object 10 which is a movable body, and the speaker unit 125 based on the results of analyzing various performance commands such as a hold display occurrence performance command, a hold display shift time performance command, a variation start performance command, a stop result performance command, and a performance command for the opening and closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 52 ends the performance execution processing which is the second control determination unit.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the second control unit, is equipped with at least a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 180), which is the second control processing unit that executes a command storage process (see FIG. 180), which is a setting process that sets a reel performance command as predetermined information in the second control memory unit, RAM 54, based on a command that is a control signal from the first control unit, the display control device 6, and a performance execution process in step S2010, which is the second control determination unit that determines whether a switching condition used to switch the operating state of the movable reel 10, which is a movable body, has occurred (whether there has been a change in the reel pattern), based on the information stored in the second control memory unit, RAM 54.

This embodiment achieves the same effects as (1) to (6) and (8) in the first embodiment.

[Inventions extracted from each embodiment and each reference form]
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments and the above-described reference modes. Note that, among the features of the inventions, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments and the above-described reference modes are shown in parentheses, but the features of the inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments and the above-described reference modes, and modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the scope that can achieve the purpose of the features of the inventions are also included in the features of the inventions.

<Characteristic Group Y>
Feature Y1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A period effect generating means (step S5102 of the pre-reading effect consumption determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a period effect (pre-reading effect) for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means;
and a special effect generating means (a process for determining an effect pattern in step S2407M) for causing the variable display means to execute a special effect (a second reserved effect) different from the period effect based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering means,
The special effect generating means executes the period effect instead of the special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified period.

According to feature Y1 of the present invention, the special effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a special effect different from the period effect based on a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means, and causes the variable display means to execute a period effect in place of the special effect based on a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined period. According to this, when the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a period effect for a predetermined period based on a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means, it can execute a period effect in place of a special effect based on a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature Y2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature Y2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the gaming machine is causing the variable display means to execute a period effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, it can cause the variable display means to execute a period effect instead of a special effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature Y3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the period effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature Y3 of the present invention, the periodic effect is a predictive effect, so if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a periodic effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a special effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the continuity of the periodic effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the special effect generation means can execute a periodic effect instead of a special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means during a specified period, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the periodic effect.

Feature Y4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the periodic effect notifies the player of the expectation level of the periodic effect based on the length of the predetermined period.

According to Feature Y4 of the present invention, the period effect notifies the player of the expected probability of this period effect based on the length of the specified period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the specified period.

Feature Y5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect synthesis means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that, when priority hold information to be consumed preferentially in the second hold area is stored in the second hold storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified period, combines an effect based on the priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, and makes it appear to the player as one game round.

According to feature Y5 of this invention group, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information to be consumed preferentially in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a specified period, the effect synthesis means combines an effect based on this priority reserve information with an effect based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game session.Therefore, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute a period effect instead of a special effect based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

Feature Y6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y5 of the present invention,
The effect synthesis means stops the progress of the period effect based on the priority reservation information when synthesizing the special effect (pseudo consecutive effect) based on the priority reservation information and the special effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The special effect is a different effect from the period effect and the special effect, and is an effect that can be executed in overlap with the period effect.

According to feature Y6 of the present invention, the effect synthesis means stops the progress of the period effect based on the priority hold information when synthesizing a special effect based on priority hold information with a special effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the period effect instead of the special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means during the specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

Feature Y7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect synthesis means synthesizes the period effect based on the priority hold information with the period effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information.

According to feature Y7 of the present invention, the effect synthesis means synthesizes a period effect based on priority hold information with a period effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, so that the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute a period effect instead of a special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

These feature groups of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature Z group>
Feature Z1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S5102) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the establishment of the first trigger;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a development effect count reduction means (a process for determining whether to consume a predictive effect in step S5102) that reduces the number of times the development effect is played when the number of times the development effect is played is increased by the development effect count increase means.

According to Feature Z1 of the present invention group, the effect execution means is equipped with an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and an advanced effect count decrease means for decreasing the number of times the advanced effect is played when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played.Therefore, even when the predetermined number of times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the advanced effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played.This allows the gaming machine to allow players to play comfortably.

Feature Z2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z1 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means as the first trigger being established;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) as the development performance count increasing means for storing reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means as the establishment of the second trigger;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature Z2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the gaming machine is causing the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, the development effect count increase means can increase the number of times the development effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature Z3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature Z3 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with development effect count reduction means that reduces the number of play times of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the development effect can maintain the predetermined number of play times.

Feature Z4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature Z4 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected outcome of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature Z5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features Z2 to Z4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second hold storage means stores priority hold information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second hold area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified number of play rounds, the means for reducing the number of times the advanced effect is played combines a presentation based on the priority hold information with a presentation based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, and presents the result to the player as one play round, thereby reducing the number of play rounds of the advanced effect.

According to Feature Z5 of the present invention, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game plays, the advanced effect count reduction means combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game play.Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game plays of advanced effects using the advanced effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game plays without changing the number of game plays.

Feature Z6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z5 of the present invention,
The development effect count reduction means stops the progress of the development effect based on the priority reservation information when a special effect (pseudo consecutive effect) based on the priority reservation information is combined with the special effect based on reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The special effect is a different effect from the development effect and can be executed in overlap with the development effect.

According to Feature Z6 of the present invention, the advanced effect count reduction means stops the progress of the advanced effect based on the priority hold information when combining a special effect based on priority hold information with a special effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of times an advanced effect is played by the advanced effect count increase means based on the entry of game balls into the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

Feature Z7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the means for reducing the number of development effects combines the development effect based on the priority hold information with the development effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information.

According to feature Z7 of the present invention, the development effect count reduction means combines development effects based on priority hold information with development effects based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of development effect play times using the development effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

These feature groups Z of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristics AA group>
Feature AA1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A first development effect generating means (pre-reading effect generating process) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A second development effect generating means (hold synthesis effect start processing) that causes the variable display means to execute the development effect based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a development effect synthesis means (hold synthesis effect consumption processing and hold synthesis effect termination processing) that synthesizes the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects.

According to Feature AA1 of the present invention, the first development effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a development effect that develops gradually over a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second development effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means. The development effect synthesis means can then synthesize the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature AA2.
In the gaming machine described in feature AA1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature AA2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the first development effect generation means is causing the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, the gaming machine can cause the second development effect generation means to cause the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.The development effect synthesis means can then synthesize the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects.

Feature AA3.
In the gaming machine described in feature AA2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature AA3 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect, so if the gaming machine were to cause the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area while the variable display means was executing a development effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area, the continuity of the development effect would be lost. According to the present invention, the development effect synthesis means synthesizes the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the development effects.

Feature AA4.
In the gaming machine described in feature AA3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expected degree of the development effect based on the length of the predetermined period.

According to feature AA4 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected level of the development effect based on the length of the specified period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the specified period.

These features of the present invention, group AA, allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature BB group>
Feature BB1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A first game turn effect generating means (step S5102) for causing the variable display means to execute a game turn effect (pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs over one game turn based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second game play effect generating means (step S5102) for causing the variable display means to execute the game play effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game round effect synthesis means (a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that synthesizes the game round effect of the first game round effect generation means and the game round effect of the second game round effect generation means, and makes it appear to the player as a single game round effect.

According to Feature BB1 of the present invention, the first game round effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a game round effect based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means, and the second game round effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a game round effect based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means. The game round effect synthesis means then synthesizes the game round effect of the first game round effect generation means and the game round effect of the second game round effect generation means, and presents the result to the player as a single game round effect. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature BB2.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means;
When the number of times of play of the development performance is increased by the development performance number increasing means, the number of times of play of the development performance is decreased by the development performance number decreasing means (pre-reading performance consumption determination process of step S5102),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect count reduction means is a game round effect synthesis means that combines the game round effect of the first game round effect generation means and the game round effect of the second game round effect generation means, and makes it appear to the player as a single game round effect, thereby reducing the number of game rounds of the development effect.

According to feature BB2 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, and an advanced effect count decrease means for decreasing the number of times the advanced effect is played when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of times is increased based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, the advanced effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature BB3.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB2 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature BB3 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area. Therefore, even when the hold information stored in the first hold area is being used by the hold information generating means to cause the variable display means to execute a hold information display, the gaming machine can increase the number of times the hold information display is played by the hold information increasing means based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature BB4.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature BB4 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with a development effect count reduction means that reduces the number of play times of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means, the development effect can maintain the predetermined number of play times.

Feature BB5.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature BB5 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected outcome of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature BB6.
In a gaming machine described in any one of features BB3 to BB5 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second reserve area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified number of game rounds, the means for reducing the number of times the advanced performance is played reduces the number of game rounds of the advanced performance by combining the game round presentation based on the priority reserve information with the game round presentation based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or the second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and making it appear to the player as one game round.

According to feature BB6 of the present invention, when the second reserve storage means stores reserve information for preferential consumption in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds, the advanced effect count reduction means combines the game round presentation based on this priority reserve information with the game round presentation based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game round.Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game rounds of advanced effects using the advanced effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds, without changing the number of game rounds.

Feature BB7.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB6 of the present invention,
The development performance number reduction means stops the progress of the development performance based on the priority reservation information when combining the game round performance (pseudo consecutive performance) based on the priority reservation information with the game round performance based on reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The game machine is characterized in that the game round presentation is a presentation different from the development presentation and can be executed in overlap with the development presentation.

According to feature BB7 of the present invention, the development effect count reduction means stops the progress of the development effect based on the priority hold information when combining a game turn effect based on priority hold information with a game turn effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game turns of the development effect using the development effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of game turns, without changing the number of game turns.

These feature BB groups of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic CC group>
Feature CC1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A continuous effect generating means (a process for determining an effect pattern in step S2407M) is provided to cause the variable display means to execute a series of continuous effects (pseudo-continuous effects) that consecutively perform a plurality of effects based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger,
The continuous performance is as follows:
A composite continuous performance (hold composite notice) that executes the series of continuous performances by combining multiple game times;
The gaming machine is characterized by being provided with a normal consecutive performance (normal pseudo consecutive performance) that executes the series of consecutive performances during one game.

According to feature CC1 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes continuous effect generation means that causes the variable display means to execute a series of continuous effects that connect multiple effects based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. The continuous effects include a composite continuous effect that executes a series of continuous effects by combining multiple game turns, and a normal continuous effect that executes a series of continuous effects during a single game turn. Therefore, the gaming machine can make multiple types of continuous effects appear to the player as the same series of continuous effects, thereby diversifying the types of effects and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature CC2.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC1 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means;
When the number of times of play of the development performance is increased by the development performance number increasing means, the number of times of play of the development performance is decreased by the development performance number decreasing means (pre-reading performance consumption determination process of step S5102),
The development performance count reduction means is the continuous performance generation means that reduces the number of times the development performance is played by having the variable display means execute the composite continuous performance.

According to feature CC2 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, and an advanced effect count decrease means for decreasing the number of times the advanced effect is played when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of times is increased based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, the advanced effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature CC3.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC2 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature CC3 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area. Therefore, even when the hold information stored in the first hold area is being used by the hold information generating means to cause the variable display means to execute a hold information, the gaming machine can increase the number of times the hold information is played by the hold information increasing means based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature CC4.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature CC4 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the specific hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with a development effect count reduction means that reduces the number of play times of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means, the development effect can maintain the predetermined number of play times.

Feature CC5.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature CC5 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected outcome of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature CC6.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features CC3 to CC5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second hold storage means stores priority hold information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second hold area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified number of play times, the means for reducing the number of play times of the advanced effect reduces the number of play times of the advanced effect by having the variable display means execute the composite continuous effect that combines an effect based on the priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, thereby making it appear to the player as one play time.

According to Feature CC6 of the present invention, when the second reserve storage means stores reserve information for preferential consumption in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds, the advanced effect count reduction means causes the variable display means to execute a composite continuous presentation that combines a game round presentation based on this priority reserve information with a game round presentation based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game round.Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game rounds of advanced effects using the advanced effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds without changing the number of game rounds.

Feature CC7.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC6 of the present invention,
The development performance count reduction means stops the progress of the development performance based on the priority reservation information when combining a performance based on the priority reservation information (pseudo consecutive performance) with a performance based on reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The composite continuous performance is a performance different from the development performance and can be executed in overlap with the development performance.

According to feature CC7 of the present invention, the development effect count reduction means stops the progress of the development effect based on the priority hold information when combining an effect based on priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of times the development effect is played by the development effect count increase means based on the entry of game balls into the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

These feature CCs of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature DD group>
Feature DD1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S5102O) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the establishment of the first trigger;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a development effect stopping means (a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102O) that causes the variable display means to stop the execution of the development effect when the number of times the development effect is played is increased by the development effect count increasing means.

According to feature DD1 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and an advanced effect stop means for causing the variable display means to stop the execution of the advanced effect when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the advanced effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the advanced effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature DD2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature DD1 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means as the first trigger being established;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) as the development performance count increasing means for storing reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means as the establishment of the second trigger;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature DD2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the gaming machine is causing the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, the development effect count increase means can increase the number of times the development effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature DD3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature DD2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature DD3 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with development effect cancellation means that causes the variable display means to cancel the execution of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times of the development effect. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the development effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of play times.

Feature DD4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature DD3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature DD4 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected outcome of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

These feature DDs of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic EE group>
Feature EE1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game area and for executing a predetermined lottery based on the game balls entering the game area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the game balls entering the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) are provided for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A hold shift means (hold shift processing) is provided for shifting the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas for each game,
The performance execution means
A continuation effect occurrence determination means (a notice hold generation process of step S2207P and a notice hold generation process of step S2207R) that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information to generate a continuation effect (a pre-reading effect and a pre-reading effect at the start) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game times;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a continuation performance execution means (a pre-reading performance occurrence determination process in step S2309P, a start-time pre-reading performance occurrence determination process in step S2309R, a pre-reading performance consumption determination process in step S6103, and a start-time pre-reading performance consumption determination process in step S6103R) that causes the variable display means to execute the continuation performance based on the continuation performance hold information after the hold information including the pre-performance is consumed, if the pre-performance based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation performance hold information includes a pre-performance different from the continuation performance.

According to Feature EE1 of the present invention, the continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information after consuming the pending information including the pre-effect. This prevents the pre-effect from occurring while a continuation effect is being executed, and when the continuation effect generation determination means determines that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. This allows the player to play the game comfortably with the gaming machine.

Feature EE2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature EE1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation effect execution means determines whether or not a pre-effect is included in a pre-effect based on the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas for each game.

According to feature EE2 of the present invention, the continuation effect execution means determines whether or not a pre-effect is included in the pre-effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas for each game. Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the hold information is continuation effect hold information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a pre-effect during the execution of the continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

Feature EE3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature EE1 or EE2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the pre-effect is a reach display.

According to feature EE3 of the present invention, the pre-show is a reach display, so it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation show, and if the continuation show occurrence determination means determines that the continuation show is pending information, the continuation show can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation show.

Feature EE4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature EE1 or EE2 of the present invention,
The pre-effect continues over a predetermined number of game plays, and is a different type of continuation effect from the continuation effect.

According to feature EE4 of the present invention, the pre-effect is a different type of continuation effect from the continuation effect, so the simultaneous occurrence of a continuation effect and a different type of continuation effect can be avoided, and when the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling its execution.

Feature EE5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature EE4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the different type of continuation effect is included, the continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game round as the effect of the game round related to the pending information including the effect of the final round of the different type of continuation effect.

According to feature EE5 of the present invention, the continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of a game turn related to pending information including the final effect of a different type of continuation effect, thereby increasing the number of game turns in which a continuation effect is executed compared to when the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game turn that is consumed next after the game turn related to pending information including the different type of continuation effect.

Feature EE6.
In a gaming machine according to any one of Features EE1 to EE5 of the present invention,
The continuation effect notifies the player of the likelihood of the continuation effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature EE6 of the present invention, the continuation effect notifies the player of the expected probability of this continuation effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

These features EE of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature FF group>
Features FF1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game area and for executing a predetermined lottery based on the game balls entering the game area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the game balls entering the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) are provided for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A hold shift means (hold shift processing) is provided for shifting the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas for each game,
The performance execution means
A continuation effect occurrence determination means (a notice hold generation process of step S2207P and a notice hold generation process of step S2207R) that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information to generate a continuation effect (a look-ahead effect and an end look-ahead effect) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game times;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an end-time continuation performance execution means (a pre-reading performance occurrence determination process in step S6301, an end-time pre-reading performance occurrence determination process in step S6301R, a pre-reading performance consumption determination process in step S6303, and an end-time pre-reading performance consumption determination process in step S6303R) that causes the variable display means to execute the continuation performance based on the continuation performance hold information at the end of a game round as the performance of the game round related to the hold information including the pre-performance, when the pre-performance based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation performance hold information includes a pre-performance different from the continuation performance.

According to feature FF1 of the present invention, the end-of-game continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect hold information at the end of a game round as the effect for the game round related to the hold information including the advance effect. Therefore, when the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect is hold information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. This makes it possible to increase the number of game rounds in which a continuation effect is executed compared to when the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect hold information as the effect for the game round to be played next to the game round related to the hold information including the advance effect. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Features FF2.
In the gaming machine described in feature FF1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the end-time continuation performance execution means determines whether or not a pre-performance based on the pending information stored in the multiple pending areas that is consumed before the continuation performance pending information includes a pre-performance each time the pending information stored in the multiple pending areas is shifted by the pending shift means for each game.

According to feature FF2 of the present invention, the end-time continuation effect execution means determines whether or not a pre-effect is included in the pre-effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas for each game. Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the continuation effect hold information increases after the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect is hold information, the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

Features FF3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature FF1 or Feature FF2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the pre-effect is a reach display.

According to feature FF3 of the present invention, the pre-show is a reach display, so if the continuation show occurrence determination means determines that the continuation show is pending information, the continuation show can be executed reliably without being canceled.

Features FF4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature FF1 or Feature FF2 of the present invention,
The pre-effect continues over a predetermined number of game plays, and is a different type of continuation effect from the continuation effect.

According to feature FF4 of the present invention, the pre-effect is a different type of continuation effect from the continuation effect, so when the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

Features FF5.
In the gaming machine described in FF4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the different type of continuation effect is included, the continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game round as the effect for the game round related to the pending information including the effect for the final round of the different type of continuation effect.

According to feature FF5 of the present invention, the end-of-game continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of a game round related to pending information including the final effect of a different type of continuation effect, as the effect for the game round related to this pending information. Therefore, the number of game rounds in which a continuation effect is executed can be increased compared to when the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game round that is consumed next after the game round related to pending information including the different type of continuation effect.

Features FF6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features FF1 to FF5 of the present invention,
The continuation effect notifies the player of the likelihood of the continuation effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature FF6 of the present invention, the continuation effect notifies the player of the likelihood of this continuation effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

These characteristic FF groups of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic GG group>
Feature GG1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game area and for executing a predetermined lottery based on the game balls entering the game area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the game balls entering the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) are provided for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A hold shift means (hold shift processing) is provided for shifting the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas for each game,
The performance execution means
A continuation effect occurrence determination means (a notice hold generation process of step S2207P and a notice hold generation process of step S2207R) that can determine whether or not to set the continuation effect hold information to generate a continuation effect (a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect at the start, and a look-ahead effect at the end) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game times;
and a pre-effect determination means (steps S2309P, S6301 pre-reading effect occurrence determination process, step S2309R pre-reading effect occurrence determination process, and step S6301R end-of-game pre-reading effect occurrence determination process) that can determine whether or not a pre-effect based on the pre-effect stored in the plurality of pre-effect areas that is consumed before the continuation effect pre-effect information is included, each time the pre-effect shift means shifts the pre-effect information stored in the plurality of pre-effect areas for each game, is included.
The number of times that the variable display means executes the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the judgment result of the advance effect judgment means (the pre-reading effect completion determination process of steps S6103 and S6303, the pre-reading effect completion determination process at the start of step S6103R, and the pre-reading effect completion determination process at the end of step S6303R).

According to feature GG1 of the present invention, the number of game turns in which the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information changes based on the judgment result of the pre-effect judgment means. This prevents the occurrence of a pre-effect during the execution of a continuation effect, and when the continuation effect occurrence judgment means determines that continuation effect pending information is to be set, the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. Furthermore, when the continuation effect occurrence judgment means determines that continuation effect pending information is to be set, the pre-effect judgment means can determine whether the pre-effect based on the pending information stored in the multiple pending areas that is consumed before the continuation effect pending information includes a pre-effect different from the continuation effect each time the hold shift means shifts the held information stored in the multiple pending areas for each game turn. Therefore, even if the number of held information stored in the multiple pending areas that is consumed before the continuation effect pending information increases after the continuation effect occurrence judgment means determines that continuation effect pending information is to be set, the occurrence of a pre-effect during the execution of the continuation effect can be avoided. When the continuation effect occurrence judgment means determines that continuation effect pending information is to be set, the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature GG2.
In the gaming machine described in feature GG1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game round in which the variable display means executes the continuation performance based on the continuation performance pending information, if the pre-performance judgment means judges that the pre-performance includes a pre-performance, after the pending information including the pre-performance has been consumed, the game round in which the variable display means executes the continuation performance based on the continuation performance pending information is changed so that the variable display means executes the continuation performance based on the continuation performance pending information.

According to feature GG2 of the present invention, in a game in which the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information, if the pre-effect determination means determines that the pre-effect is included, the pending information including the pre-effect is consumed, and then the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information. This reliably prevents a pre-effect from occurring during the execution of a continuation effect, and if the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the continuation effect.

Feature GG3.
In the gaming machine described in feature GG1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a game turn in which the variable display means executes the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information is determined to include a pre-effect by the pre-effect judgment means, the game turn is changed so that the variable display means executes the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game turn as the effect of the game turn related to the pending information including the pre-effect.

According to feature GG3 of the present invention, if the pre-effect determination means determines that a game turn in which the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information includes a pre-effect, the game turn is changed so that the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game turn as the effect for the game turn related to the pending information including the pre-effect. Therefore, if the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation effect, and the number of game turns in which a continuation effect is executed can be increased compared to when the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game turn to be consumed next after the game turn related to the pending information including a pre-effect.

Feature GG4.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features GG1 to GG3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the pre-effect is a reach display.

According to feature GG4 of the present invention, the pre-show is a reach display, so it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reach display during the execution of a continuation show, and if the continuation show occurrence determination means determines that the continuation show is pending information, the continuation show can be executed reliably without canceling the execution of the continuation show.

Feature GG5.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features GG1 to GG3 of the present invention group,
The pre-effect continues over a predetermined number of game plays, and is a different type of continuation effect from the continuation effect.

According to feature GG5 of the present invention, the pre-effect is a different type of continuation effect from the continuation effect, so the simultaneous occurrence of a continuation effect and a different type of continuation effect can be avoided, and if the continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the continuation effect is pending information, the continuation effect can be executed reliably without canceling its execution.

Feature GG6.
In the gaming machine described in feature GG5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the pre-effect judgment means judges that a game turn in which the variable display means executes the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information includes a different type of continuation effect, the game turn is changed so that the variable display means executes the continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game turn as the effect of the game turn related to the pending information including the effect of the final episode of the different type of continuation effect.

According to feature GG6 of the present invention group, if the preliminary effect determination means determines that a game turn in which the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information includes a different type of continuation effect, the game turn is changed so that the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information at the end of the game turn as the effect for the game turn related to the pending information including the effect for the final turn of this different type of continuation effect.This means that the number of game turns in which continuation effects are executed can be increased compared to when the variable display means executes a continuation effect based on the continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game turn that is consumed next after the game turn related to the pending information including the different type of continuation effect.

Feature GG7.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features GG1 to GG6 of the present invention group,
The continuation effect notifies the player of the likelihood of the continuation effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature GG7 of the present invention, the continuation effect notifies the player of the expected probability of this continuation effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

These feature GG groups of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic HH group>
Feature HH1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game area and for executing a predetermined lottery based on the game balls entering the game area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the game balls entering the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) are provided for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A hold shift means (hold shift processing) is provided for shifting the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas for each game,
The performance execution means
a first continuation effect occurrence determination means (pre-notification hold generation process of step S2207R) capable of determining whether to generate first continuation effect hold information (pre-notification hold information relating to the pre-reading effect at the start or the pre-notification hold information relating to the pre-reading effect at the end) that generates a first continuation effect (pre-notification look-ahead effect at the start or the pre-notification look-ahead effect at the end) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game times;
and second continuation performance occurrence determination means (notice hold generation process of step S2207R) capable of determining whether or not to generate second continuation performance pending information (notice hold information relating to end-time pre-reading performance or notice hold information relating to start-time pre-reading performance) that continues the performance over a predetermined number of game times and generates a second continuation performance (end-time pre-reading performance or start-time pre-reading performance) of a type different from the first continuation performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the first continuation effect is pending information when the second continuation effect is included in a prior effect based on pending information stored in the multiple pending areas that is consumed before the pending information stored in the information storage means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

According to feature HH1 of the present invention, the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the first continuation effect pending information is to be generated when a second continuation effect is included in a previous effect based on pending information stored in multiple pending areas that is consumed before the pending information stored in the information storage means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.This allows the gaming machine to generate different types of continuation effects in parallel, preventing confusion between continuation effects compared to when the same type of continuation effects are generated in parallel.This allows the gaming machine to allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature HH2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature HH1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a first continuation performance execution means for, when the first continuation performance occurrence determination means determines that the second continuation performance is included, causing the variable display means to execute the first continuation performance based on the first continuation performance pending information after consuming the pending information including the second continuation performance.

According to Feature HH2 of the present invention, when the first continuation performance determination means determines that the second continuation performance is included, the first continuation performance execution means consumes the pending information including the second continuation performance and then causes the variable display means to execute the first continuation performance based on the first continuation performance pending information. This makes it possible to avoid the second continuation performance occurring during the execution of the first continuation performance, and when the first continuation performance determination means determines that the first continuation performance is pending information, it is possible to reliably execute the first continuation performance without canceling the execution of the first continuation performance.

Feature HH3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature HH1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized by having a first continuation effect execution means that, when the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the second continuation effect is included, causes the variable display means to execute the first continuation effect based on the first continuation effect pending information at the end of the game round as the effect of the game round related to the pending information including the effect of the final round of the second continuation effect.

According to Feature HH3 of the present invention, when the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the second continuation effect is included, the first continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute the first continuation effect based on the first continuation effect pending information at the end of the game round related to the pending information including the final round of the second continuation effect. Therefore, the number of game rounds in which the first continuation effect is executed can be increased compared to when the variable display means executes the first continuation effect based on the first continuation effect pending information as the performance for the game round to be completed next to the game round related to the pending information including the second continuation effect.

Feature HH4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature HH2 or Feature HH3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines whether or not a second continuation effect is included in a previous effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas for each game.

According to feature HH4 of the present invention, the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines whether a second continuation effect is included in a previous effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas for each game.Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information increases after the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the first continuation effect hold information is to be generated, it is possible to avoid the generation of a second continuation effect during the execution of the first continuation effect, and the first continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the first continuation effect.

Feature HH5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features HH1 to HH4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect notify the player of the expectation level of the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature HH5 of the present invention, the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect notify the player of the expected probability of these continuation effects based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

These feature groups HH of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristics Group II>
Feature II1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game area and for executing a predetermined lottery based on the game balls entering the game area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the game balls entering the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) are provided for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A hold shift means (hold shift processing) is provided for shifting the hold information stored in the plurality of hold areas for each game,
The performance execution means
a first continuation effect occurrence determination means (pre-notification hold generation process of step S2207R) capable of determining whether to generate first continuation effect hold information (pre-notification hold information relating to the pre-reading effect at the start or the pre-notification hold information relating to the pre-reading effect at the end) that generates a first continuation effect (pre-notification look-ahead effect at the start or the pre-notification look-ahead effect at the end) that continues the effect over a predetermined number of game times;
and second continuation performance occurrence determination means (notice hold generation process of step S2207R) capable of determining whether or not to generate second continuation performance pending information (notice hold information relating to end-time pre-reading performance or notice hold information relating to start-time pre-reading performance) that continues the performance over a predetermined number of game times and generates a second continuation performance (end-time pre-reading performance or start-time pre-reading performance) of a type different from the first continuation performance,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect are executed at different times in a game round.

According to Feature II1 of the present invention, the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect are executed at different times during a game, so the gaming machine can generate different types of continuation effects in parallel, preventing confusion between continuation effects compared to when the same type of continuation effects are generated in parallel. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature II2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature II1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a first continuation performance execution means for causing the variable display means to execute the first continuation performance based on the first continuation performance hold information after the hold information including the second continuation performance is consumed, when the second continuation performance is included in a prior performance based on hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation performance hold information.

According to Feature II2 of the present invention, the first continuation performance execution means causes the variable display means to execute the first continuation performance based on the first continuation performance pending information after consuming the pending information including the second continuation performance. This makes it possible to avoid the second continuation performance occurring during the execution of the first continuation performance, and when the first continuation performance occurrence determination means determines that the first continuation performance is pending information, it is possible to reliably execute the first continuation performance without canceling the execution of the first continuation performance.

Feature II3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature II1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a first continuation effect execution means which, when the second continuation effect is included in a prior effect based on hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information, causes the variable display means to execute the first continuation effect based on the first continuation effect hold information at the end of the game round as the effect for the game round related to the hold information that includes the effect for the final round of the second continuation effect.

According to Feature II3 of the present invention, the first continuation effect execution means causes the variable display means to execute the first continuation effect based on the first continuation effect pending information at the end of a game turn related to pending information including the final effect of the second continuation effect, thereby increasing the number of game turns in which the first continuation effect is executed compared to when the variable display means executes the first continuation effect based on the first continuation effect pending information as the effect for the game turn to be consumed next after the game turn related to pending information including the second continuation effect.

Feature II4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature II2 or Feature II3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second continuation effect judgment means judges whether or not a second continuation effect is included in a previous effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas for each game.

According to Feature II4 of the present invention, the second continuation effect determination means determines whether or not a second continuation effect is included in a previous effect based on the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information each time the hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the multiple hold areas for each game. Therefore, even if the number of hold information stored in the multiple hold areas that is consumed before the first continuation effect hold information increases after the first continuation effect occurrence determination means determines that the hold information is to be continuation effect hold information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a second continuation effect during the execution of the first continuation effect, and the continuation effect can be reliably executed without canceling the execution of the first continuation effect.

Feature II5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features II1 to II4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect notify the player of the expectation level of the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature II5 of the present invention, the first continuation effect and the second continuation effect notify the player of the expected probability of these continuation effects based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature Group II of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic JJ group>
Feature JJ1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and which executes a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for displaying a variable display of the number of times a game has been played based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; an operation means (push button 142) for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of a player; and an effect execution means (audio and light emitting control device 5 and display control device 6) for executing an effect including the predetermined operation effect,
The performance execution means
an operation performance suggestion means (operation notice part) for suggesting to a player the operation mode of the operation means;
an operation performance execution means (result notification part) for executing the predetermined operation performance when the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined operation presentation is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was operated.

According to Feature JJ1 of the present invention, the predetermined operation effect is executed when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the operation means was operated. This allows the gaming machine to diversify the timing at which the predetermined operation effect is executed after the player operates the operation means, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature JJ2.
In the gaming machine described in feature JJ1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined elapsed time is set randomly.

According to Feature JJ2 of the present invention, the predetermined elapsed time is set randomly. Therefore, even if a player does not immediately recognize the execution of a predetermined operation effect after operating the operating means, the player can continue playing in anticipation of the execution of the predetermined operation effect after the predetermined elapsed time has passed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature JJ3.
In the gaming machine described in feature JJ1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined elapsed time is set to be longer when the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is high, and shorter when the probability of winning is low.

According to Feature JJ3 of the present invention, the predetermined elapsed time is set to be longer when the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery is high and shorter when the probability of winning is low. Therefore, the probability of winning increases the longer the time between when the operating means is operated and when the operation effect is executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature JJ4.
In the gaming machine described in feature JJ1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified elapsed time is set to align a specific timing in the specified operation presentation with a specified timing in another presentation different from the specified operation presentation.

According to Feature JJ4 of the present invention, the predetermined elapsed time is set so as to align the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation with the specific timing in another presentation different from the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature JJ5.
In the gaming machine described in feature JJ1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified elapsed time is set to coincide with a specific timing in the specified operation presentation and the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.

According to Feature JJ5 of the present invention, the predetermined elapsed time is set to coincide with the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation and the timing at which the variable display of the number of games is switched. This allows the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature JJ6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features JJ1 to JJ5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation can be changed when the operation means is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), and the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is not changed when the operation means is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) different from the first period.

According to Feature JJ6 of the present invention, the gaming machine can change the specific timing in a predetermined operation presentation when the operating means is operated during a first period, and does not change the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation when the operating means is operated during a second period different from the first period.This makes it possible to vary the specific timing in the operation presentation based on the transition between the first period and the second period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature JJ7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features JJ1 to JJ6 of the present invention,
a performance determination period (normal period PD31) in which, when the operation means is operated, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined operation performance, and if it is determined that the performance should be executed, the performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a non-effect judgment period (specific period PD32) in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute the effect.

According to Feature JJ7 of the present inventions, the gaming machine is equipped with an effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a predetermined operation effect, and if so, the effect is executed, and a non-effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute.This makes it possible to differentiate whether or not to execute an operation effect based on the transition between the effect determination period and the non-effect determination period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature JJ8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features JJ1 to JJ7 of the present invention,
the operation performance execution means executes the predetermined operation performance a plurality of times each time the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to Feature JJ8 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature JJ9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features JJ1 to JJ8 of the present invention,
an operation setting storage means (RAM 54) capable of storing setting information (number of presses PUN) for realizing the value of the predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period (normal period PD31);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means.

According to Feature JJ9 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature JJ10.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features JJ1 to JJ9 of the present invention,
The operating means is
a first operating means;
a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The operation performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the predetermined operation presentation can be executed by changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and when the second operating means is operated, the predetermined operation presentation is executed without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature JJ10 of the present invention, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, executes the predetermined operation effect without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect. This allows the player to select and operate the first operation means and the second operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

These features of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are equipped with operating means such as push buttons that can execute predetermined operational effects based on the player's operation. For example, the operating means can execute operational effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state after starting to display varying patterns.

However, the operational effects that can be performed using the operating means tend to be monotonous, which creates the problem of not being able to attract the player's attention to the game.

<Characteristic KK group>
Feature KK1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and which executes a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for displaying a variable display of the number of times a game has been played based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; an operation means (push button 142) for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of a player; and an effect execution means (audio and light emitting control device 5 and display control device 6) for executing an effect including the predetermined operation effect,
The performance execution means
An operation performance suggestion means (operation notice part) for suggesting to a player the operation mode of the operation means;
an operation performance execution means (result notification part) for executing the predetermined operation performance when the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation different from the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature KK1 of the present invention, the specific timing in a predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game. Furthermore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature KK2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature KK1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation means is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), the specific timing in the specified operation presentation can be changed to align with the specific timing in the other presentation, and when the operation means is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) different from the first period, the specific timing in the specified operation presentation is not changed to align with the specific timing in the other presentation.

According to Feature KK2 of the present invention, the gaming machine can change the specific timing of a predetermined operation presentation to align with the specific timing of another presentation when the operating means is operated during a first period, but does not change the specific timing of a predetermined operation presentation to align with the specific timing of another presentation when the operating means is operated during a second period different from the first period.This makes it possible to vary the timing of executing an operation presentation based on the transition between the first period and the second period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature KK3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature KK1 or Feature KK2 of the present invention,
a performance determination period (normal period PD31) in which, when the operation means is operated, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined operation performance, and if it is determined that the performance should be executed, the performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a non-effect judgment period (specific period PD32) in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute it.

According to Feature KK3 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with an effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a predetermined operation effect, and if so, the effect is executed, and a non-effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute.This makes it possible to differentiate between whether or not to execute an operation effect based on the transition between the effect determination period and the non-effect determination period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature KK4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features KK1 to KK3 of the present invention,
the operation performance execution means executes the predetermined operation performance a plurality of times each time the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to Feature KK4 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature KK5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features KK1 to KK4 of the present invention,
an operation setting storage means (RAM 54) capable of storing setting information (number of presses PUN) for realizing the value of the predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period (normal period PD31);
A gaming machine characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means.

According to Feature KK5 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature KK6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features KK1 to KK5 of the present invention,
The operating means is
a first operating means;
a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The operation performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the predetermined operation presentation can be executed by changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and when the second operating means is operated, the predetermined operation presentation is executed without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature KK6 of the present invention, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, executes the predetermined operation effect without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect, thereby enabling the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

These feature sets of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are equipped with operating means such as push buttons that can execute predetermined operational effects based on the player's operation. For example, the operating means can execute operational effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state after starting to display varying patterns.

However, the operational effects that can be performed using the operating means tend to be monotonous, which creates the problem of not being able to attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature LL group>
Feature LL1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and which executes a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for displaying a variable display of the number of times a game has been played based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; an operation means (push button 142) for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of a player; and an effect execution means (audio and light emitting control device 5 and display control device 6) for executing an effect including the predetermined operation effect,
The performance execution means
An operation performance suggestion means (operation notice part) for suggesting to a player the operation mode of the operation means;
an operation performance execution means (result notification part) for executing the predetermined operation performance when the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.

According to Feature LL1 of the present invention, the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the number of games played, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game. Furthermore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature LL2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature LL1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation means is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), the specific timing in the specified operation presentation can be changed to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game round, and when the operation means is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) different from the first period, the specific timing in the specified operation presentation is not changed to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.

According to Feature LL2 of the present invention, the gaming machine can change the specific timing of a predetermined operation presentation to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the number of times played when the operating means is operated during a first period, but does not change the specific timing of a predetermined operation presentation to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the number of times played when the operating means is operated during a second period different from the first period.This makes it possible to vary the timing of executing the operation presentation based on the transition between the first period and the second period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature LL3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature LL1 or Feature LL2 of the present invention group,
a performance determination period (normal period PD31) in which, when the operation means is operated, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined operation performance, and if it is determined that the performance should be executed, the performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a non-effect judgment period (specific period PD32) in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute it.

According to Feature LL3 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with an effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a predetermined operation effect, and if so, the effect is executed, and a non-effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute.This makes it possible to differentiate whether or not to execute an operation effect based on the transition between the effect determination period and the non-effect determination period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature LL4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features LL1 to LL3 of the present invention,
the operation performance execution means executes the predetermined operation performance a plurality of times each time the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to Feature LL4 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature LL5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features LL1 to LL4 of the present invention,
an operation setting storage means (RAM 54) capable of storing setting information (number of presses PUN) for realizing the value of the predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period (normal period PD31);
A gaming machine characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means.

According to Feature LL5 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature LL6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features LL1 to LL5 of the present invention,
The operating means is
a first operating means;
a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The operation performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the predetermined operation presentation can be executed by changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and when the second operating means is operated, the predetermined operation presentation is executed without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature LL6 of the present invention, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, executes the predetermined operation effect without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect, thereby enabling the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

These feature LL groups of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are equipped with operating means such as push buttons that can execute predetermined operational effects based on the player's operation. For example, the operating means can execute operational effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state after starting to display varying patterns.

However, the operational effects that can be performed using the operating means tend to be monotonous, which creates the problem of not being able to attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature MM group>
Feature MM1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and which executes a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for displaying a variable display of the number of times a game has been played based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; an operation means (push button 142) for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of a player; and an effect execution means (audio and light emitting control device 5 and display control device 6) for executing an effect including the predetermined operation effect,
The performance execution means
An operation performance suggestion means (operation notice part) for suggesting to a player the operation mode of the operation means;
an operation performance execution means (result notification part) for executing the predetermined operation performance when the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation can be changed when the operation means is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), and the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is not changed when the operation means is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) different from the first period.

According to feature MM1 of the present invention, the gaming machine can change the specific timing in a predetermined operation presentation when the operating means is operated during a first period, and does not change the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation when the operating means is operated during a second period different from the first period.This makes it possible to vary the specific timing in the operation presentation based on the transition between the first period and the second period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature MM2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature MM1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation different from the predetermined operation presentation.

According to feature MM2 of the present invention, the specific timing in a predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature MM3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature MM1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.

According to feature MM3 of the present invention, the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game number, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature MM4.
In a gaming machine described in any one of features MM1 to MM3 of the present invention,
a performance determination period (normal period PD31) in which, when the operation means is operated, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined operation performance, and if it is determined that the performance should be executed, the performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a non-effect judgment period (specific period PD32) in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute it.

According to feature MM4 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a performance decision period in which, when the operating means is operated, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a predetermined operation effect, and if so, the effect is executed, and a non-performance decision period in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without making a decision as to whether or not to execute. This makes it possible to differentiate between whether or not to execute an operation effect based on the transition between the performance decision period and the non-performance decision period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Features MM5.
In a gaming machine described in any one of features MM1 to MM4 of the present invention group,
the operation performance execution means executes the predetermined operation performance a plurality of times each time the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to feature MM5 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature MM6.
In a gaming machine described in any one of features MM1 to MM5 of the present invention group,
an operation setting storage means (RAM 54) capable of storing setting information (number of presses PUN) for realizing the value of the predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period (normal period PD31);
A gaming machine characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means.

According to feature MM6 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature MM7.
In a gaming machine described in any one of features MM1 to MM6 of the present invention group,
The operating means is
a first operating means;
a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The operation performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the predetermined operation presentation can be executed by changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and when the second operating means is operated, the predetermined operation presentation is executed without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation.

According to feature MM7 of the present invention, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operating means is operated, executes the predetermined operation effect without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect, thereby enabling the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

These feature MMs of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are equipped with operating means such as push buttons that can execute predetermined operational effects based on the player's operation. For example, the operating means can execute operational effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state after starting to display varying patterns.

However, the operational effects that can be performed using the operating means tend to be monotonous, which creates the problem of not being able to attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature NN group>
Feature NN1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and which executes a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for displaying a variable display of the number of times a game has been played based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; an operation means (push button 142) for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of a player; and an effect execution means (audio and light emitting control device 5 and display control device 6) for executing an effect including the predetermined operation effect,
The performance execution means
An operation performance suggestion means (operation notice part) for suggesting to a player the operation mode of the operation means;
an operation performance execution means (result notification part) for executing the predetermined operation performance when the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine includes:
an operation setting storage means (RAM 54) capable of storing setting information (number of presses PUN) for realizing the value of the predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period (normal period PD31);
A gaming machine characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means.

According to Feature NN1 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with an operation setting storage means capable of storing setting information for manifesting the value of a predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period. The value of the predetermined operation effect changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means. This allows the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature NN2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature NN1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation different from the predetermined operation presentation.

According to feature NN2 of the present invention, the specific timing in a predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature NN3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature NN1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.

According to feature NN3 of the present invention, the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game number, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature NN4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features NN1 to NN3 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation can be changed when the operation means is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), and the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is not changed when the operation means is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) different from the first period.

According to Feature NN4 of the present invention, the gaming machine can change the specific timing of a predetermined operation presentation when the operating means is operated during a first period, and does not change the specific timing of the predetermined operation presentation when the operating means is operated during a second period different from the first period.This makes it possible to vary the timing of executing the operation presentation based on the transition between the first period and the second period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature NN5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features NN1 to NN4 of the present invention,
a performance determination period (normal period PD31) in which, when the operation means is operated, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined operation performance, and if it is determined that the performance should be executed, the performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a non-effect judgment period (specific period PD32) in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute it.

According to feature NN5 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with an effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a predetermined operation effect, and if it is determined that an effect should be executed, the effect is executed, and a non-effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute.This makes it possible to differentiate between whether or not to execute an operation effect based on the transition between the effect determination period and the non-effect determination period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature NN6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features NN1 to NN5 of the present invention,
the operation performance execution means executes the predetermined operation performance a plurality of times each time the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the number of times the operation means is operated.

According to Feature NN6 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature NN7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features NN1 to NN6 of the present invention,
The operating means is
a first operating means;
a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The operation performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the predetermined operation presentation can be executed by changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and when the second operating means is operated, the predetermined operation presentation is executed without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature NN7 of the present invention, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, executes the predetermined operation effect without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect, thereby enabling the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

These feature NNs of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are equipped with operating means such as push buttons that can execute predetermined operational effects based on the player's operation. For example, the operating means can execute operational effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state after starting to display varying patterns.

However, the operational effects that can be performed using the operating means tend to be monotonous, which creates the problem of not being able to attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature OO group>
Feature OO1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and which executes a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for displaying a variable display of the number of times a game has been played based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; an operation means (push button 142) for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of a player; and an effect execution means (audio and light emitting control device 5 and display control device 6) for executing an effect including the predetermined operation effect,
The performance execution means
An operation performance suggestion means (operation notice part) for suggesting to a player the operation mode of the operation means;
an operation performance execution means (result notification part) for executing the predetermined operation performance when the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The operating means is
a first operating means;
a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The operation performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first operating means is operated under predetermined conditions, the predetermined operation presentation can be executed by changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, and when the second operating means is operated, the predetermined operation presentation is executed without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature OO1 of the present invention, when the first operation means is operated under predetermined conditions, the operation effect execution means can change the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect to execute the predetermined operation effect, and when the second operation means is operated, executes the predetermined operation effect without changing the specific timing in the predetermined operation effect. This allows the player to select and operate the first operation means and the second operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature OO2.
In the gaming machine described in feature OO1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation different from the predetermined operation presentation.

According to Feature OO2 of the present invention, the specific timing in a predetermined operation presentation is set to align with the specific timing in another presentation that is different from the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation, allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature OO3.
In the gaming machine described in feature OO1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game round.

According to Feature OO3 of the present invention, the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is set to coincide with the timing of switching the variable display of the game number, allowing the player to grasp the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature OO4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature LL1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation can be changed when the first operation means is operated during a first period (specific period PD32), and the specific timing in the predetermined operation presentation is not changed when the first operation means is operated during a second period (normal period PD31) different from the first period.

According to Feature OO4 of the present invention, the gaming machine can change the specific timing of a predetermined operation presentation when the first operating means is operated during a first period, and does not change the specific timing of the predetermined operation presentation when the first operating means is operated during a second period different from the first period.This makes it possible to vary the timing of executing the operation presentation based on the transition between the first period and the second period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature OO5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features OO1 to OO4 of the present invention,
a performance determination period (normal period PD31) in which, when the operation means is operated, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined operation performance, and if it is determined that the performance should be executed, the performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a non-effect judgment period (specific period PD32) in which, when the operating means is operated, the predetermined operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute it.

According to Feature 005 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with an effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a specified operation effect, and if so, the effect is executed, and a non-effect determination period in which, when the operating means is operated, the specified operation effect is executed without determining whether or not to execute.This makes it possible to differentiate whether or not to execute an operation effect based on the transition between the effect determination period and the non-effect determination period, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature OO6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features OO1 to OO5 of the present invention,
the operation performance execution means executes the predetermined operation performance a plurality of times each time the operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode of the operation means suggested by the operation performance suggestion means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to Feature 006 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the number of times the operating means is operated, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature OO7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features OO1 to OO6 of the present invention group,
an operation setting storage means (RAM 54) capable of storing setting information (number of presses PUN) for realizing the value of the predetermined operation effect based on the operation mode of the operation means during a predetermined operation setting period (normal period PD31);
A gaming machine characterized in that the value of the predetermined operation presentation changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means.

According to Feature 007 of the present invention, the value of a predetermined operation effect changes based on the setting information stored in the operation setting storage means, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the value of the operation effects and increase the player's interest in the game.

These feature groups of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are equipped with operating means such as push buttons that can execute predetermined operational effects based on the player's operation. For example, the operating means can execute operational effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state after starting to display varying patterns.

However, the operational effects that can be performed using the operating means tend to be monotonous, which creates the problem of not being able to attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature PP group>
Feature PP1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, by moving the second rotation means to the second position, the second rotation means blocks the light from the light-emitting means at the specific position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion which is in the predetermined rotation state.

According to Feature PP1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has, in a predetermined game state, a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a predetermined rotation state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the predetermined rotation state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate of the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature PP1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.

Feature PP2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature PP1 of the present invention,
The rotating plate portion is
a first region having a first light transmittance;
a second region having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region.

According to feature PP2 of the present invention, the rotating plate portion has a first region having a first light transmittance and a second region having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region, so that the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the second rotating means in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, since the first rotating means, the back side of which is visible, is provided with regions of different light transmittance, the appearance of light on the back side of the first rotating means can be varied, and even when used alone, the first rotating means, the back side of which is visible, can provide high decorativeness that is no different from conventional rotating bodies for performances.

Feature PP3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature PP1 or Feature PP2 of the present invention,
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that, based on the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means, it is possible to generate an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state.

According to feature PP3 of the present invention, the second state can generate advantageous states that are advantageous to the player and disadvantageous states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous states, based on the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means.

Feature PP4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features PP1 to PP3 of the present invention group,
the second rotating means has a plurality of movement paths;
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player can vary depending on the movement path of the second rotation means.

According to feature PP4 of the present invention, the probability that the second state will generate an advantageous state that is favorable to the player may vary depending on the movement path of the second rotation means, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the movement path of the second rotation means.
Furthermore, since the back side of the first rotating means is visible, the player can see the multiple movement paths of the second rotating means, and if each movement path is given meaning, the attention to the game can be further increased.

Features PP5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features PP1 to PP4 of the present invention,
a plurality of said second rotating means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of second rotating means are capable of simultaneously moving to the rear side of the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means.

According to feature PP5 of this invention, multiple second rotation means can be simultaneously moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion of the first rotation means, which makes it possible to diversify the light of the light-emitting means in a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the second rotation means in the second state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Features PP6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features PP1 to PP5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined rotation axis of the first rotation means in the predetermined rotation state remains without moving for at least a predetermined period of time.

According to Feature PP6 of the present invention, the predetermined rotation axis of the first rotation means in the predetermined rotation state remains stationary without moving for at least a predetermined period of time, allowing the player to stably view the rotating plate portion of the first rotation means in the predetermined rotation state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Features PP7.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features PP1 to PP6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first rotation means includes a regulating portion that abuts against the second rotation means to regulate rotation of the second rotation means.

According to Feature PP7 of this invention group, the first rotation means is equipped with a restricting portion that restricts the rotation of the second rotation means by abutting against the second rotation means. Therefore, by restricting the rotation of the second rotation means with the restricting portion of the first rotation means, the rotation of the second rotation means can be changed, and the behavior of the second rotation means at a predetermined position can be stabilized.

Features PP8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features PP1 to PP7 of the present invention,
the second rotation means has a plurality of rotation directions;
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player can vary depending on the rotation direction of the second rotation means.

According to feature PP8 of the present invention, the probability that the second state will result in an advantageous state for the player can vary depending on the direction of rotation of the second rotation means, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the direction of rotation of the second rotation means.

Features PP9.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features PP1 to PP8 of the present invention,
The first state is
A gaming machine characterized in that it can notify a player of advantageous states that are advantageous to the player and disadvantageous states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous states, based on the light emission state of the light emitting means.

According to feature PP9 of the present invention, the first state can notify the player of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state, based on the light-emitting status of the light-emitting means, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the light-emitting status of the light-emitting means.

These feature PPs of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature QQ group>
Feature QQ1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
The rotating plate portion is
a first region having a first light transmittance;
a second region having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region.

According to Feature QQ1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state in a specific game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature QQ1 of the present invention, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, since the rotating plate portion has a first region having a first light transmittance and a second region having a second light transmittance higher than the first light transmittance and different from the first region, it is possible to diversify the appearance of the light from the light-emitting means at a specific position in the first state and the second rotating means in the second state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, since the first rotating means, the back side of which is visible, is provided with regions of different light transmittance, the appearance of light on the back side of the first rotating means can be varied, and even when used alone, the first rotating means, the back side of which is visible, can provide high decorativeness that is no different from conventional rotating bodies for performances.

Feature QQ2.
In the gaming machine described in feature QQ1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first area and the second area have different thicknesses when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and therefore have different light transmittances.

According to Feature QQ2 of the present invention, the first and second regions have different thicknesses when viewed from the front of the game board, and therefore different light transmittances, which simplifies the configuration of the rotating plate portion.

Feature QQ3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature QQ1 or Feature QQ2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first area and the second area are arranged adjacent to each other when viewed from the front of the gaming board.

According to Feature QQ3 of the present invention, the first and second areas are arranged adjacent to each other when viewed from the front of the game board, which simplifies the configuration of the rotating plate portion compared to when they are arranged a predetermined distance apart when viewed from the front of the game board.

These features of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Characteristic RR group>
Feature RR1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that, based on the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means, it is possible to generate an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state.

According to Feature RR1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature RR1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, the second state can generate an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state based on the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means.

Feature RR2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature RR1 of the present invention,
The first rotating means includes:
a first rotation state in which the rotary plate portion is rotated in a predetermined rotation direction;
a second rotation state in which the rotary plate portion is rotated in a direction opposite to the predetermined rotation direction,
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state becomes more likely to occur based on the first rotation state and the movement of the second rotation means to the second position, and the unfavorable state becomes more likely to occur based on the second rotation state and the movement of the second rotation means to the second position.

According to feature RR2 of this invention, the second state is more likely to create an advantageous state based on the first rotation state and the movement of the second rotation means to the second position, and is more likely to create an unfavorable state based on the second rotation state and the movement of the second rotation means to the second position, so the player will pay attention to the rotation direction of the first rotation means.

The Feature RR group of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature SS group>
Feature SS1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
the second rotating means has a plurality of movement paths;
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player can vary depending on the movement path of the second rotation means.

According to feature SS1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotation state in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotation state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature SS1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, since the probability that the second state will result in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may differ depending on the movement path of the second rotation means, the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the movement path of the second rotation means.
Furthermore, since the back side of the first rotating means is visible, the player can see the multiple movement paths of the second rotating means, and if each movement path is given meaning, the attention to the game can be further increased.

Feature SS2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature SS1 of the present invention,
The second rotating means includes:
a first movement path having a high probability of generating the advantageous state;
a second movement path that has a lower probability of generating the advantageous state than the first movement path;
A gaming machine characterized in that the first movement path and the second movement path include paths that overlap each other.

According to feature SS2 of the present invention, the first movement path and the second movement path include paths that overlap with each other, making it difficult for the player to distinguish the movement path of the second rotation means, and the player will focus on the movement path of the second rotation means.

These feature sets of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Characteristic TT group>
Feature TT1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
The gaming machine includes:
a plurality of said second rotating means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of second rotating means are capable of simultaneously moving to the rear side of the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means.

According to Feature TT1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has, in a predetermined game state, a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a predetermined rotation state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the predetermined rotation state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature TT1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, since the multiple second rotating means can be moved simultaneously to the back side of the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means, the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position in the first state and the appearance of the second rotating means in the second state can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature TT2.
In the gaming machine described in feature TT1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of second rotation means move so that one of the second rotation means does not obstruct the other second rotation means when the gaming board is viewed from the front.

According to Feature TT2 of this invention, when the game board is viewed from the front, the multiple second rotation means move so that one second rotation means does not obstruct the other second rotation means, allowing the player to see all of the multiple second rotation means.

These feature TTs of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature UU group>
Feature UU1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined rotation axis of the first rotation means in the predetermined rotation state remains without moving for at least a predetermined period of time.

According to Feature UU1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the front lens part, the back side of the rotating object cannot be seen. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature UU1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, since the specified rotation axis of the first rotation means in a specified rotation state remains without moving for at least a specified period of time, the player can stably view the rotating plate portion of the first rotation means in a specified rotation state, thereby increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature UU2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature UU1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second rotation means is movable to the second position while the predetermined rotation axis of the first rotation means remains stationary without moving.

According to feature UU2 of this invention, the second rotation means can move to the second position while the predetermined rotation axis of the first rotation means remains stationary and not moving, so the player will pay attention to the movement status of the second rotation means while the predetermined rotation axis of the first rotation means remains stationary and not moving.

These feature sets of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature VV group>
Feature VV1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the first rotation means includes a regulating portion that abuts against the second rotation means to regulate rotation of the second rotation means.

According to Feature VV1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature VV1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
In addition, the first rotation means is provided with a regulating portion that regulates the rotation of the second rotation means by abutting against the second rotation means. Therefore, by regulating the rotation of the second rotation means with the regulating portion of the first rotation means, the rotation of the second rotation means can be changed, and the behavior of the second rotation means at a predetermined position can be stabilized.

Feature VV2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature VV1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the rotation state of the first rotation means changes when the second rotation means abuts against the regulating portion.

According to Feature VV2 of the present invention, the rotation state of the first rotation means changes when the second rotation means abuts against the restricting portion, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the rotation state of the first rotation means.

These feature sets of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Characteristic WW group>
Features WW1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
the second rotation means has a plurality of rotation directions;
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of generating an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player can vary depending on the rotation direction of the second rotation means.

According to feature WW1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to the feature WW1 of the present invention, it is possible to provide decorativeness on the front side of the first rotating means and to enhance decorativeness on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, since the probability that the second state will generate an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may differ depending on the direction of rotation of the second rotation means, the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the direction of rotation of the second rotation means.

Features WW2.
In the gaming machine described in feature WW1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the rotation state of the second rotation means changes when the second rotation means abuts against a regulating portion that regulates the rotation of the second rotation means.

According to Feature WW2 of the present invention, the rotation state of the second rotation means changes when the second rotation means abuts against a restricting portion that restricts the rotation of the second rotation means, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the rotation state of the second rotation means.

These feature sets of the present invention can increase players' attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature XX group>
Feature XX1.
A special information acquisition means (a prize winning process for an operating port) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A special information determination means (variation start processing) is provided to determine whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
When the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition, the gaming machine transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means (light emitter) visible from the front of the game board;
A first rotating means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board;
A second rotation means (rotating body) configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board and different from the first rotation means,
The first rotating means includes:
The device includes a rotating plate portion that is rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The rotating plate portion is
The light from the light emitting means located on the rear surface side is visible,
The second rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be movable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front, and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion when viewed from the front by moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The gaming machine includes:
a first state in which, in a predetermined game state, light from the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which the second rotation means blocks light from the light emitting means at the specific position by moving the second rotation means to the second position, and the second rotation means is visible through the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
The first state is
A gaming machine characterized in that it can notify a player of advantageous states that are advantageous to the player and disadvantageous states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous states, based on the light emission state of the light emitting means.

According to Feature XX1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first state in which the light of the light-emitting means at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate in a specific rotational state in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to a second position, blocking the light of the light-emitting means at the specific position, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate in the specific rotational state, thereby diversifying the objects visible through the rotating plate in the first rotating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Here, conventional rotating objects for performances only provide decorativeness on the front side of the rotating object when viewed from the front, and because light sources and substrates are installed behind the lens part at the forefront, the back side of the rotating object is not visible. Therefore, naturally, other rotating objects cannot be moved to the back side of the rotating object.
However, according to Feature XX1 of the present invention group, decorativeness can be provided on the front side of the first rotating means, and decorativeness can be enhanced on the back side of the first rotating means.
Furthermore, the first state can notify the player of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state based on the light-emitting status of the light-emitting means, so the gaming machine can draw the player's attention to the light-emitting status of the light-emitting means.

Feature XX2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature XX1 of the present invention,
The light emitting means is
a first light emission state that indicates to the player an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player;
a second light emitting state indicating to the player an unfavorable state that is more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous state;
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that the first light-emitting state and the second light-emitting state are generated by switching between them.

According to Feature XX2 of the present invention, the gaming machine alternates between a first light-emitting state that indicates to the player an advantageous state and a second light-emitting state that indicates to the player an unfavorable state, allowing the player to easily distinguish between advantageous and unfavorable states.

Feature XX3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature XX2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it switches between the first light-emitting state and the second light-emitting state based on the determination result of the special information determination means.

According to Feature XX3 of the present invention, the gaming machine alternates between generating the first light-emitting status and the second light-emitting status based on the determination result of the special information determination means, allowing the player to infer the determination result of the special information determination means based on the light-emitting status of the light-emitting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can further draw the player's attention to the light-emitting status of the light-emitting means.

These feature groups of the present invention can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines are equipped with, for example, a transparent or translucent plate portion and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) provided on the back side of the plate portion, making the LED visible through the plate portion, and by changing the light emission state or color of the LED, etc., it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, simply changing the LED's lighting state or color can be monotonous, and there is a problem in that it does not attract the player's attention to the game.

<Feature YY group>
Feature YY1.
a launching means (launching handle 16) that can adjust the launching force for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and that can execute a first game (left-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a first direction (left-hand direction), and a second game (right-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a second direction (right-hand direction) different from the first direction;
A variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing variable display of patterns;
A starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and which can generate a starting condition for the variable display based on the ball entry;
An auxiliary means (electric device 261) that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for the variable display;
A special game execution means (main control device 4) for executing a special game state (open/close execution mode) as a profit game based on the result of the variable display;
When the number of times that the predetermined variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without generating the special game state, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to execute a specific game state (a game state of "ceiling time reduction"),
A first ball entry means (special electric operating port 91) provided in the game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path;
A second ball entry means (special telephone winning device 92) having an opening/closing switching means (opening/closing door 923) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (V winning opening 921);
An opening execution means (winning process for the special electric operation port) that causes the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
and a specific game execution means (processing for a special electric winning device) for executing a specific period game (special electric opening/closing execution mode) for a specific period different from the special game state as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for the predetermined period.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control state of the auxiliary means is in a predetermined gaming state (a "ceiling time-reduction through" gaming state) in which the control state is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, and the execution of the specified specific period of gaming is completed, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

According to Feature YY1 of the present invention, a player can cause the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period by causing a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and can cause the gaming ball to enter a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a specific period of play by causing a gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area. When the gaming machine completes the execution of the specific period of play in a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, the control state changes from the first control state to the second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state. Therefore, a player can change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state by firing a gaming ball in the second direction with a predetermined firing force and causing the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can enhance the player's interest by optimally transitioning between multiple gaming states.

Feature YY2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature YY1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is
A signal output means (external terminal 40X) capable of outputting a signal according to a game state to the outside of the gaming machine is provided,
The signal output means
A gaming machine characterized in that a special signal (jackpot signal) is output when the special game state is executed as the profit game, and the special signal is not output when the specific period game is executed as the profit game.

According to Feature YY2 of the present invention, the signal output means outputs a special signal when a special game state is executed as a profit game, and does not output a special signal when a specific period game is executed as a profit game. Therefore, an external device that monitors the signal output by the signal output means can reliably count the number of times the special game state is executed, excluding the number of times the specific period game is executed, by monitoring the output of the special signal.

Feature YY3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature YY1 or Feature YY2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for displaying, when the execution of the specific period of play is completed, game status information (number of game plays completed) regarding the game status corresponding to the completion of the execution of the specific period of play on the variable display means.

According to Feature YY3 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for displaying, when the execution of a specific period of play has ended, game status information relating to the game status corresponding to the end of the execution of the specific period of play on the variable display means. Therefore, by visually checking the game status information displayed on the variable display means, the player can reliably confirm, for example, that the control status of the auxiliary means has been changed from the first control status to the second control status.

Feature YY4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is
A signal output means (external terminal 40X) capable of outputting a signal according to a game state to the outside of the gaming machine is provided,
The signal output means
A gaming machine characterized in that when the specific period game is executed as the profit game, an identification signal (V winning signal) is output that can be identified as being different from when the special game state is executed.

According to Feature YY4 of the present invention, the signal output means outputs an identification signal that distinguishes between when a specific-period game is executed as a profit game and when a special game state is executed. Therefore, an external device that monitors the signal output by the signal output means can reliably count the number of times the specific-period game is executed, excluding the number of times the special game state is executed, by monitoring the output of the identification signal.

Feature YY5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY4 of the present invention,
a third ball entry means (variable entry device 27) that is in a specific opening/closing state in the special game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the third ball entry means is different from the second ball entry means.

According to feature YY5 of the present invention, the third ball entry means, which enters a specific open/close state in the special game state, is different from the second ball entry means, so the player can enjoy the game comfortably by being aware of the second ball entry means while playing for a specific period of time, and the third ball entry means while playing in the special game state.

Feature YY6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY5 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is configured so that when a specific number of gaming balls are shot toward the specific path in the predetermined gaming state, the number of profit gaming balls that the player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls.

According to Feature YY6 of the present invention, when a specific number of game balls are launched toward a specific path in a specified game state, the number of profit game balls that a player can obtain is configured to be less than the specific number of balls. Therefore, the gaming machine is configured so that when game balls are launched toward a specific path in a specified game state, the number of game balls cannot be increased, preventing a situation where the player has a significant advantage and the game's playability is destroyed.

Feature YY7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for setting the opening/closing switching means so that, when a specified gaming ball enters the first ball entry means while the special gaming state is being executed as the profit game, the opening/closing switching means will not be opened for a specified period of time in response to the ball entry.

According to feature YY7 of this invention group, if a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entry means while a special game state is being played as a profit game, a setting means is provided to prevent the opening/closing switching means from opening for a predetermined period in response to this ball entry, allowing the player to enjoy the special game state without worrying about the opening/closing switching means.

Feature YY8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY7 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for causing the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period of time when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means while the variable display is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition.

According to Feature YY8 of this invention group, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means while the variable display is being executed, a means is provided for causing the open/close switching means to open for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a starting condition. Therefore, the player can cause the open/close switching means to open for a predetermined period of time by having a gaming ball enter the first ball entry means without having to worry about the variable display being executed.

Feature YY9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is
The probability of executing the special game state as the profit game based on the result of the variable display includes a first probability (low probability mode) and a second probability (high probability mode) higher than the first probability,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first probability and the second probability are configured based on the execution of the specific period of play so as not to be changed before or after the specific period of play.

According to feature YY9 of the present invention, the first probability and the second probability are configured to remain unchanged before and after the specific period of play, based on the execution of the specific period of play. Therefore, the probability of entering a special play state as a profitable play based on the results of the variable display remains unchanged from the start to the end of the specific period of play, allowing the player to enjoy the specific period of play with peace of mind.

Feature YY10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY9 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying predetermined gaming state information (number of times a game has been played) relating to the predetermined gaming state on the variable display means.

According to Feature YY10 of this invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for displaying predetermined game status information relating to the predetermined game status on the variable display means, so that the player can reliably confirm the predetermined game status by visually checking the predetermined game status information displayed on the variable display means.

Feature YY11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY10 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for withholding the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means during execution of a game for the specific period.

According to Feature YY11 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for suspending the entry of gaming balls into the first ball entry means while a game is being played for a specific period of time, thereby making it possible to suspend the entry of gaming balls into the first ball entry means while a game is being played for a specific period of time, allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature YY12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY11 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the duration of the specific period in the specific period game can be set to a time longer than the duration for causing the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period.

According to Feature YY12 of the present invention, the duration of the specific period in the specific period game can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the opening/closing switching means is caused to open for a predetermined period, thereby enabling the gaming machine to increase attention to the execution of the specific period game.

Feature YY13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features YY1 to YY12 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for displaying start information (a presentation for winning a V prize) on the variable display means to notify the player of the start of the execution of the specific period game when the execution of the specific period game is started.

According to Feature YY13 of the present invention, when the execution of a specific period game starts, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for displaying start information on the variable display means to notify the player that the execution of the specific period game has begun, so the player can recognize the start of the execution of the specific period game and can reliably enjoy the specific period game.

These feature groups YY of the present invention allow players to move between multiple game states in an optimal manner, enhancing their interest, and thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static manner, and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such a gaming machine is configured to transition between a plurality of gaming states in addition to the special gaming state described above, based on predetermined conditions.

However, if the transition between multiple game states cannot be properly performed, the gaming machine will be unable to increase the player's interest.

<Characteristic ZZ group>
Feature ZZ1.
a launching means (launching handle 16) that can adjust the launching force for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and that can execute a first game (left-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a first direction (left-hand direction), and a second game (right-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a second direction (right-hand direction) different from the first direction;
A variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing variable display of patterns;
A starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and which can generate a starting condition for the variable display based on the ball entry;
An auxiliary means (electric device 261) that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for the variable display;
A special game execution means (main control device 4) for executing a special game state (open/close execution mode) as a profit game based on the result of the variable display;
When the number of times that the predetermined variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without generating the special game state, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to execute a specific game state (a game state of "ceiling time reduction"),
A first ball entry means (special electric operating port 91) provided in the game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path;
A second ball entry means (special telephone winning device 92) having an opening/closing switching means (opening/closing door 923) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (V winning opening 921);
An opening execution means (winning process for the special electric operation port) that causes the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A specific game execution means (processing for a special electric winning device) that executes a specific period game (special electric opening/closing execution mode) for a specific period different from the special game state as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for the predetermined period;
and a means for displaying, when the execution of the specific period game is completed, game status information (the number of times the game has been played) relating to the game status corresponding to the completion of the execution of the specific period game on the variable display means;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control state of the auxiliary means is in a predetermined gaming state (a "ceiling time-reduction through" gaming state) in which the control state is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, and the execution of the specified specific period of gaming is completed, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

According to Feature ZZ1 of the present invention, a player can cause the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period by causing a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and can cause the gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a specific period of play by causing a gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area. When the gaming machine completes the execution of the specific period of play in a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the control state changes from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. Therefore, a player can change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state by firing a gaming ball in a second direction with a predetermined firing force and causing the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can enhance the player's interest by conveniently transitioning between multiple game states.
In addition, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for displaying game status information relating to the game status corresponding to the end of the execution of the specific period of game on the variable display means when the execution of the specific period of game is completed, so that the player can reliably confirm, for example, that the control status of the auxiliary means has been changed from the first control status to the second control status by visually checking the game status information displayed on the variable display means.

Feature ZZ2.
In the gaming machine described in feature ZZ1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game status information is displayed on the variable display means until at least a predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature ZZ2 of the present invention, the game status information is displayed on the variable display means until at least a predetermined number of game plays have been played. Therefore, the player can visually check the game status information displayed on the variable display means not only when the execution of the specific period of play has ended, but also after the number of game plays has been played, thereby reliably confirming, for example, that the control status of the auxiliary means has been changed from the first control status to the second control status.

These feature groups ZZ of the present invention allow players to move between multiple game states in an optimal manner, increasing their interest, and thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static manner, and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such a gaming machine is configured to transition between a plurality of gaming states in addition to the special gaming state described above, based on predetermined conditions.

However, if the transition between multiple game states cannot be properly performed, the gaming machine will be unable to increase the player's interest.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1.
a launching means (launching handle 16) that can adjust the launching force for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and that can execute a first game (left-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a first direction (left-hand direction), and a second game (right-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a second direction (right-hand direction) different from the first direction;
A variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing variable display of patterns;
A starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and which can generate a starting condition for the variable display based on the ball entry;
An auxiliary means (electric device 261) that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for the variable display;
A special game execution means (main control device 4) for executing a special game state (open/close execution mode) as a profit game based on the result of the variable display;
When the number of times that the predetermined variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without generating the special game state, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to execute a specific game state (a game state of "ceiling time reduction"),
A first ball entry means (special electric operating port 91) provided in the game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path;
A second ball entry means (special telephone winning device 92) having an opening/closing switching means (opening/closing door 923) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (V winning opening 921);
a third ball entry means (variable winning device 27) that is in a specific opening/closing state in the special game state and is different from the second ball entry means;
An opening execution means (winning process for the special electric operation port) that causes the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
and a specific game execution means (processing for a special electric winning device) for executing a specific period game (special electric opening/closing execution mode) for a specific period different from the special game state as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for the predetermined period.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control state of the auxiliary means is in a predetermined gaming state (a "ceiling time-reduction through" gaming state) in which the control state is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, and the execution of the specified specific period of gaming is completed, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

According to Feature A1 of the present invention, a player can cause the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period by causing a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and can cause the gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a specific period of play by causing a gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area. When the gaming machine completes the execution of the specific period of play in a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. Therefore, a player can change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state by firing a gaming ball in a second direction with a predetermined firing force and causing the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can enhance the player's interest by conveniently transitioning between multiple game states.
In addition, the third ball entry means, which is in a specific opening/closing state in the special game state, is different from the second ball entry means, so the player can enjoy the game comfortably by being aware of the second ball entry means while playing for a specific period and the third ball entry means while playing in the special game state.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the third ball entry means is located downstream of the first ball entry means and can be reached by flowing down the specific path.

According to Feature A2 of the present invention, the third ball entry means is located downstream of the first ball entry means and can be reached by flowing down a specific path, thereby making effective use of the limited playing area formed on the game board.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the duration for which the third ball entry means is opened in the special game state can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the opening/closing switching means is opened for a predetermined period of time.

According to Feature A3 of the present invention, the duration for which the third ball entry means is opened in the special game state can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the opening/closing switching means is opened for a predetermined period of time, allowing the player to enjoy the special game state with peace of mind.

Feature A of the present invention allows players to move between multiple game states in an optimal manner, enhancing their interest, and thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static manner, and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such a gaming machine is configured to transition between a plurality of gaming states in addition to the special gaming state described above, based on predetermined conditions.

However, if the transition between multiple game states cannot be properly performed, the gaming machine will be unable to increase the player's interest.

<Features Group B>
Feature B1.
a launching means (launching handle 16) that can adjust the launching force for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and that can execute a first game (left-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a first direction (left-hand direction), and a second game (right-hand game) in which the game ball is launched in a second direction (right-hand direction) different from the first direction;
A variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing variable display of patterns;
A starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and which can generate a starting condition for the variable display based on the ball entry;
An auxiliary means (electric device 261) that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for the variable display;
A special game execution means (main control device 4) for executing a special game state (open/close execution mode) as a profit game based on the result of the variable display;
When the number of times that the predetermined variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without generating the special game state, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to execute a specific game state (a game state of "ceiling time reduction"),
A first ball entry means (special electric operating port 91) provided in the game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific path;
A second ball entry means (special telephone winning device 92) having an opening/closing switching means (opening/closing door 923) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (V winning opening 921);
An opening execution means (winning process for the special electric operation port) that causes the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
and a specific game execution means (processing for a special electric winning device) for executing a specific period game (special electric opening/closing execution mode) for a specific period different from the special game state as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for the predetermined period.
In a predetermined gaming state (a gaming state of "ceiling time reduction through") in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the execution of the game for the predetermined specific period is completed, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the duration of the specific period in the specific period game can be set to a time longer than the duration for causing the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period.

According to Feature B1 of the present invention, a player can cause the opening/closing switching means to open for a predetermined period by causing a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and can cause the gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing switching means is open for this predetermined period. Furthermore, a player can execute a specific period of play by causing a gaming ball to enter the specific ball entry area. When the gaming machine completes the execution of the specific period of play in a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. Therefore, a player can change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state by firing a gaming ball in a second direction with a predetermined firing force and causing the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can enhance the player's interest by conveniently transitioning between multiple game states.
Furthermore, since the duration of the specific period in the specific period game can be set to a time longer than the duration for which the opening/closing switching means is caused to open for a predetermined period, the gaming machine can increase the attention paid to the execution of the specific period game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the duration of the specific period in the specific period game is set based on the result of a predetermined duration lottery.

According to Feature B2 of the present invention, the duration of the specific period in the specific period game is set based on the result of a predetermined duration lottery, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the predetermined duration lottery, and the gaming machine can increase the player's interest.

Feature B of the present invention allows players to move between multiple game states in an optimal manner, increasing their interest, and thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static manner, and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such a gaming machine is configured to transition between a plurality of gaming states in addition to the special gaming state described above, based on predetermined conditions.

However, if the transition between multiple game states cannot be properly performed, the gaming machine will be unable to increase the player's interest.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1.
A starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26) provided in the game area;
A lottery means (main control device 4) capable of executing a lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
A variable display means (a symbol display device 36) that displays a variable display on a predetermined display means provided in the game area in response to the result of the lottery;
A movable means provided in the play area and capable of performing a predetermined action;
A gaming machine comprising: a second means (a sound and light emission control device 5) that can control the operating state of the movable means based on a predetermined signal from a first means (a display control device 6) connected thereto;
the movable means includes at least a drive unit and a movable unit that is movable by the drive unit, and is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on the movable unit while the variable display is being performed on the predetermined display means;
the series of operations includes at least a first operation in which the movable part, which is located at an initial position, moves from the initial position to a drive position, and a second operation in which the movable part, which is located at the drive position, moves to the initial position;
The second means is
a processing means for executing a setting process for setting predetermined information in a storage means based on the predetermined signal from the first means;
a determining means for determining whether a switching condition used to switch the operating state of the movable means has occurred based on the information stored in the storage means,
the determining means performs the determination each time control for ending the second operation in the series of operations is executed,
This gaming machine is
Based on the determination by the determination means,
A case where the operating state of the movable means is continued in a first state in which the series of operations is performed;
transitioning an operating state of the movable means from the first state in which the series of operations is performed to a second state in which the movable means is controlled in a manner different from the first state,
This gaming machine is
a light-emitting means that can emit light when at least the movable portion is located at the initial position;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the light emitting means is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the gaming machine even when the movable part is located in the initial position.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the discrimination means makes a discrimination each time control is executed to end the second operation in a series of operations, and the gaming machine, based on the discrimination of the discrimination means, may either continue the operating state of the movable means in a first state in which a series of operations is executed, or may transition the operating state of the movable means from the first state in which a series of operations is executed to a second state in which the movable means is controlled in a manner different from the first state, thereby enabling smooth switching of the operating state of the movable means.
Furthermore, the light-emitting means is configured to be visible from a predetermined position on the front side of the gaming machine even when the movable part is in the initial position, and can emit light when the movable part is in the initial position.Therefore, even when the second action in the series of actions has been completed and the movable part has moved to the initial position, the player can confirm that the operation of the movable means has not been completed by visually checking the emission of light from the light-emitting means.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the present invention,
The moving means is configured to be able to repeatedly perform a series of operations on the moving part while the variable display is performed multiple times on the predetermined display means.

According to feature C2 of the present invention, the movable means is configured to repeatedly execute a series of operations on the movable part while multiple variable display cycles are performed on the specified display means, so that the movable part can be caused to repeatedly execute a series of operations independently regardless of the number of variable display cycles.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature C1 or Feature C2 of the present invention,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized in that the period of the first state in which the movable part performs the series of operations can be a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period, and the period of the first state is determined randomly by lottery.

According to Feature C3 of the present invention, the duration of the first state is determined randomly by lottery, so the player will pay attention to the length of the first state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3 of the present invention,
the second state includes at least a movement end state in which the movement of the moving means is ended,
The initial position is a position where the movable part is located when the movable part is in a non-driven state.

According to feature C4 of the present invention, the initial position is the position where the movable part is located when it is in a non-driven state, so when the movement ends, the movement of the movable means can be neatly terminated without any unnecessary movement.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined control and a specific control different from the predetermined control as the control to be executed after the series of operations is completed, and characterized in that, regardless of whether the control to be executed after the series of operations is the predetermined control or the specific control, the control is executed with the movable part positioned at the initial position.

According to Feature C5 of the present invention, regardless of whether the control executed after completing a series of operations is predetermined control or specific control, the gaming machine executes the control with the movable part positioned in the initial position, thereby ensuring a smooth transition between predetermined control and specific control.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, after making the determination, the determination means does not make the determination again until the movable part completes the second operation in the series of operations.

According to Feature C6 of the present invention, after making a determination, the determination means does not make another determination until the movable part completes the second operation in the series of operations, thereby eliminating unnecessary determinations and reducing the processing burden on the gaming machine.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C6 of the present invention,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized in that the longer the time between when the movable part performs the first action and when it performs the second action, the higher the player's expectation of profit.

According to Feature C7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is configured so that the longer the time between when the moving part performs the first action and when it performs the second action, the higher the player's expected profit. This means that the player will pay attention to the time between when the moving part performs the first action and when it performs the second action, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C7 of the present invention,
the initial position is a position where the movable part is disposed when the movable part is in a non-driven state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable means is configured so that almost the entire movable part can be seen even when the movable part is positioned at the initial position in a non-driven state.

According to Feature C8 of this invention, the movable means is configured so that almost the entire movable part is visible even when the movable part is positioned in the initial position in a non-driven state. Therefore, the entire movable part can be seen as it moves back and forth between the initial position and the driven position, improving the decorativeness of the gaming machine.

By virtue of Feature C of the present invention, the gaming machine can smoothly switch the operating state of the movable means, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes a predetermined lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static manner, and transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this special gaming state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such gaming machines are provided with movable means in the gaming area that can perform predetermined operations, and the movable means is configured to be able to control its operating state based on a predetermined signal. The gaming machines increase the interest of players by switching the operating state of the movable means.

As a result, in such gaming machines, when smooth switching of the operating state of the movable means is desired, the gaming machine can cause players to feel uncomfortable.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used in gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

1... Pachinko machine, 24... General winning opening, 25... Upper operating opening, 26... Lower operating opening, 27... Variable winning device, 271... Large winning opening, 272... Opening and closing door, 273... Variable winning drive unit, 28... Outlet opening, 35... Pattern display device, 4... Main control device, 42... MPU, 5... Audio and light emission control device, 52... MPU, 6... Display control device, 62... MPU.

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on the front side;
special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a special information determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means satisfies a predetermined winning condition;
In a gaming machine that transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to a player when the special information determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined winning condition,
A predetermined decorative means visible when viewed from the front of the game board;
A first rotation means configured to be rotatable when viewed from the front of the game board,
The first rotating means includes:
The game board is configured to be rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis having an axial direction intersecting the surface of the game board, and is provided with a rotating plate portion that can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
The rotating plate portion is
A gaming machine is provided with a visual confirmation section that allows at least a part of a predetermined area of the predetermined decorative means that is arranged on the back side of the rotating plate section and corresponds to the gaming board to be visible when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and is configured to be able to switch from the predetermined stopped state to the predetermined rotating state when predetermined conditions are satisfied based on a predetermined game by a player,
This gaming machine is
When the game board is viewed from the front, a second rotation means is movable along the surface of the game board and rotatable in a predetermined manner, and is configured to be movable between a first position that is visible without passing through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion and a second position that is visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion;
a first state in which, in the predetermined game execution state, at least a part of the predetermined decorative means is visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion in the predetermined rotation state;
a second state in which, by moving the second rotating means to the second position, a predetermined area of the second rotating means becomes visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion, and an area of at least a portion of the predetermined decorative means that is blocked by the second rotating means becomes invisible;
the first rotating means includes an abutment portion that can abut against the second rotating means,
the first rotating means in the predetermined stopped state is configured to be pushed by the abutting portion of the first rotating means abutting against the second rotating means,
The second state is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to generate a specific state that a player can recognize as advantageous and a predetermined state that the player can recognize as less advantageous than the specific state, based on the rotation status of the first rotation means and the movement status of the second rotation means.